JP2020138077A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A performance mode is varied by performance mode variable means on the basis of a determination result of operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed to operation means operable by a player, and the performance according to the varied performance mode is executed by performance execution means. When the variable timing in which the performance mode is varied by the performance mode variable means satisfies a specific condition, a special performance is executed by special performance execution means, so that the player can operate the operation means eagerly, thereby increasing an interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. There are some that perform advantageous privilege games.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217766

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an operation determination means thereof. By the effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means, the effect execution means for executing the effect according to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, and the effect mode variable means. It has a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed satisfies a specific condition.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operation means that can be operated by the player, the operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the operation determination means. The effect mode is variable by the effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode based on the result, the effect execution means for executing the effect according to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means, and the effect mode variable means. It has a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the variable timing to be performed satisfies a specific condition.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the direction view of arrow VIII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the direction view of arrow IX of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is a side view of the tilting device of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting device in line XIVc. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the lid of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the drive device, and (b) is a side view of the drive device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. (A) and (b) are front views of the release member and the rotary claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operating device in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. (A) is a side view of the slide claw member according to the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member and a vibrating device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is a partial sectional view of the lower frame member. It is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction view of the arrow LIXc. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the vibrating apparatus in line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft rod. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a). c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of FIG. 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. Is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. Is. It is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the disk member, the ring member and the second transmission member of the left disk cam. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disk cam. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam in the line LXXVa-LXXVa of FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a partial side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disk cam, and (f). Is a side view of the right disk cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which opened (deployed) the inner frame with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack with respect to the inner frame with the inner frame opened with respect to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame are disassembled and shown. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame which is shown by disassembling the constituent members arranged below the window part of the front frame. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are shown side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically showing a movable binding member and a harness, (b) is a schematic upper view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a movable binding member and a harness. It is a schematic back view schematically shown, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic view of the upper surface of FIG. 96 (c). (A) and (b) are top side schematic views of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member and a harness which schematically show a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of the passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending region. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the front frame. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of the support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly in the CXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a sectional view of the speaker assembly of FIG. 124 (a). It is a top view of the speaker assembly in the direction view of arrow CXXXIVc, and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the direction of arrow CXXIVd of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXVa-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the main body frame and the upper side plate member in the CXXXVb-CXXXVb line. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame in the line CXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa of FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device and the game board schematically showing the board surface support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. (A) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a board surface support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (A) and (b) are side views of the board surface support device. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (A) to (c) are the front view of the ball launching unit which shows the feeding state of the ball by the ball feeding device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit in the direction of arrow CXLVIb of FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting showing the relationship between the thread and the metal member for cutting in the state of FIG. 147 (a). It is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, the inner rail and the outer rail after launching the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an effect operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is sectional drawing of the petal operation device in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of the slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central shaft rotating device and a free fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of the back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide plate and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of the petal operation device, the advance / retreat operation unit, and the back plate. It is a rear view of the petal operation device and the advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device, (b) is a front view of the petal operation device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device through the omission of the central axis rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit in tenth embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of the passage formation unit. It is a front view of the inner frame and the dish passage forming member in 11th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail. (A) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlargement view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device in 12th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member and the slide member. It is a front view of the petal operation device. (A) and (b) are front views of the petal operation device. It is a front view of the petal operation device. It is a partially enlarged front view of the slit member and the slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) and (b) are front perspective views of the operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow CCIIIb of FIG. 203 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operating device. (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIId-CCIIId line of FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the 16th embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). (D) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member which schematically represents the upward concave part which is recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of a sorting device. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing four reserved balls set during the fluctuation of the third symbol. It is a figure which showed the display mode in which the character J0 appeared from the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the fluctuation of the third symbol and the recommended value without vacancy does not increase, and (b) is from the state of FIG. 6 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when the number of reserved balls further increased and exceeded the recommended value. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) is a diagram in which character J0 in the display area C indicates the optimum number of reserved balls according to the state. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the case. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing a change to a holding ball during the change of the third symbol. Is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J2 is displayed in the display area C. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C is changed when an over prize is won. It is a figure which showed. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which a player is allowed to store up to 6 reserved balls during reach, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the number of reserved balls is stored up to 6 and the symbol arrangement is changed. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the case of. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a lucky display of a jackpot hold last time, and (b) shows a display mode when a player presses a button after the number of reserved balls has been accumulated up to six. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect during long opening, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of a variable effect of a long opening prize. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters in 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is one of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the part schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal hit random number table in the first control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table for time saving which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the 1st control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the winning command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hold effect mode selection table in the first control example. .. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the notice A mode holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (d) is the notice B mode holding lid range in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid range selection table at the time of short-term winning in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic view of the holding lid range selection table during reach effect in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram shown in. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. Is. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the lucky hold command table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reserved character selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the reserved character change table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the blowout selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal blowout selection table in the first control example. , (C) are schematic views schematically showing the notice A blowout selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the notice B blowout selection table in the first control example. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a balloon table during reach effect in the first control example. is there. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the lucky hold balloon selection table in the 1st control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect lottery table during reach in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach start time calculation table in the first control example. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the lucky hold lottery table in the first control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the drawing list in the 1st control example schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation execution determination processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky display determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding hold effect setting process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the holding lid setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold character setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon lid setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term prize determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lucky hold storage process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the short-term prize management process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold-hold effect management process during reach executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the V interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode switching process. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pending character display processing. It is a flowchart which showed the balloon display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the 1st control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the flow of the special symbol variation and continuous production in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram which showed the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the 2nd control example. (A) is a display mode showing the display screen during the continuous effect in the second control example, and (b) is the display mode showing the display screen during the special effect in the second control example. This is a display mode showing a background change during continuous production in the second control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the prize information-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving medium processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect return processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect return processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process 3 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 3rd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display screen at the time of power-on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen at the time of power-on in the fourth control example. (A) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen of the first rotation after the power is turned on in the fourth control example. .. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the volume table in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the initial volume setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the volume-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen at the time of turning on the power in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen at the time of a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a timing chart when a retry operation is performed in a tilting device. It is a timing chart when the touch sensor is detected in the tilting device. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the pachinko machine in the 5th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of the contents of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of the contents of ROM of the voice lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting operation scenario table in the fifth control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the tilting operation scenario B table in the fifth control example. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection operation A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the origin detection B table in the fifth control example. , (C) are schematic views schematically showing the tilt initial operation table in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry process during touch input executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting device control process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the operation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the tilting initial operation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the process during operation effect executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the effect backtracking operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the retry operation process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 5th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the jackpot A on the holding ball and showing a display mode during the change of the third symbol, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the holding ball is further changed from the state of FIG. 346 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one was digested and became a jackpot A. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode in which one more reserved ball is digested from the state of FIG. 346 (b) and during super time, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the reserved ball is shown in FIG. 347 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode when one more was digested from the state of) and became a big hit by this fluctuation. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during probabilistic change. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot is started, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect of the first jackpot. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when notifying that there is a button effect during a big hit, and (b) is a diagram showing that the button is pressed from the state of FIG. 350 (a). It is a figure which showed the display mode at the time of notifying a player that a probability change was given. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ends and the probability variation mode is entered. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows the promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol switching process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop symbol change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the opening process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize winning ball processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the round processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ending process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the game state setting process to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot-related display processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 6th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 6th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 7th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when the long opening in the seventh control example is won, and (b) is a display mode in the case of the long open effect in the seventh control example. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed the display mode in the long opening effect regulation in 7th control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 7th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the long opening-related processing executed by MPU in the display control device in 7th control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the display screen and the flow of BGM at the time of power-off in the 8th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the power is turned on, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of return fluctuation after the initial setting is completed. This is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change according to the background change operation timing during the change of the special figure. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during low-speed fluctuation of the special figure, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed by the next fluctuation. is there. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the eight hold effects are executed, and (b) shows an example of the display mode of the first variation after the eight hold effects are executed. It is a figure. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode when there is a new prize after the 8 hold effect is executed, (b) is the display of the 1st variation from the 8 hold effect is executed and a new prize is made. It is a figure which showed an example of an aspect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the end of 8 hold effect. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special effect selection table in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the vibe pattern data in the eighth control example. , (C) are schematic views schematically showing an eight-piece hold lottery table in the eighth control example. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the display control device in 8th control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the 8 production scenario selection table in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern reception process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold number control process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold quantity display update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the sensor input process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the mode identification process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing 8 executed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the 8 display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display process executed by MPU in the display control device in 8th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the display control device in 8th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the background notice selection table in 9th control example. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode when the silhouette effect in the sea mode is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the silhouette effect in the mountain mode is executed. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 9th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the background change process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 9th control example. It is a flowchart which showed the customer waiting effect processing 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the cracking effect selection table in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the cracking effect end processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the SW effect processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the tenth control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIGS. 1 to 4
With reference to 4, as the first embodiment, the present invention is referred to as a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply "pachinko machine").
An embodiment when applied to 10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the hinges 18 are attached.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface with the side provided with the above as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Front view to support the front frame 14 and lower plate unit 15
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening and closing axis. ing. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed in (see) or changing the effect content of the super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 3 with built-in light emitting means such as LEDs on the periphery of the window 14c
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, a front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1).
(See) In the upper left part, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball lending is performed according to the operation. Will be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period.
It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is formed on a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view.
In addition to a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, general winning openings 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through Gate 67,
It is configured by assembling a variable display device unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is an inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable display device unit 8
0 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
Is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62, similarly to the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged, which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61, 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails.
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. The tip of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2)
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the game board 13 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guidance passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured so that it can be used properly according to whether or not the winning opening 640 is won. In particular,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. In addition, a plurality of L
The ED is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only is it shown whether the lottery result is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also
If it is a big hit, the design according to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds.
It is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state and shortens the time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game that is neither probable change nor time saving (
The jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol have not increased).

During probabilistic change and time saving, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the second winning opening 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set as compared with the normal time. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the time when the electric accessory 640a accompanying the above is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by winning the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (starting winning).
The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variable display of the second symbol is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

The pachinko machine 10 has an electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 when the variation display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment).
Is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal period.
Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37A,
It may be performed using a part of 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second
The symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, the first symbol display device 37A
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 3, 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. (See FIG. 4), a big hit lottery is made, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery was made in (see Fig. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first.
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls are paid out when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a prize paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is the second winning opening 6
It will be easy to win a prize in 40.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probability change and during the time reduction than during the normal period.
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, "○" is displayed in the variable display of the second symbol.
The symbol of is more easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed").
), It is advantageous for the player to get many chances of big hit lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 and aim to become a big hit.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
Since the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640, the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640. It is better to shoot a ball (so-called "right-handed"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640. , It is advantageous for the player.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Board box 100-10
Reference numeral 4 denotes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each substrate.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and an attempt is made to remove the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
No. 2 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 are used by the MPU 201.
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, such as setting the display on the 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display result on the second symbol display device.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Work area where values are stored (
It has a work area). Note that the RAM 203 holds data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (backup).
All the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 205
Payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, opening / closing drive to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving a solenoid and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 and a power supply device 1 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R.
The RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in 15 is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processes are executed based on the AM erase signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is M, similarly to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I / O, etc. are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
The backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) the data even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also has a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1.
Although it is connected to 11, it is not connected to the main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 is a ball launch unit 112 so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 on the condition that it is not operated), and the ball is launched with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51. ..

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). Display control device 114 such as display) and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in 1. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. I / O port 22
A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input.
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226 according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, and is made to correspond to the display content. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
The display of 1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
It has a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with (see). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
Various switches such as various switches 208 and solenoid 20 that take in a voltage of 4 volts
Generates 12 volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9 and motors, 5 volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage and backup voltage are generated. The required voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 uses the MPU of the main controller 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
This is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the 201 and the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, a power failure (power failure (
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 on the determination that the power is cut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are NMI.
The interrupt process (not shown) can be executed normally and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 3
00 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 that is configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and is located in an area composed of a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Arranged. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by arranging the fingertips on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is the VI of FIG. 6 (a).
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the b-VIb line, and FIG. 7A is a pachinko machine 1
It is a partial front view of 0, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 on the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the vertical direction, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state facing upward and rearward by rising around the shaft portion 314 is shown. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (for example, a display of "press a button").
Is what the player does when appears.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a method of dropping the hand vigorously downward, for example, when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the front side depending on the degree of tilting. The palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed against each other. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pushing operation by dropping his / her hand downward vigorously.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, so that the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in and operated.

Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow VIII of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow IX of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible from the player's point of view in the first state, while the area is reduced to the extent that it is invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). As a result, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, the protective lens member 31 is in the process of changing from the first state to the second state.
Since the area of 1i is configured to gradually increase, and the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is gradually increased, the amount of light is gradually increased.
The difference in the amount of light that the player can see (the degree of lightness and darkness) between the first state and the second state becomes large, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. ..

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side surface of the little finger near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist as an axis), The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed in while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10
Is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft portion 314 in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that gives an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L, 32 that detect a pushing operation from the first state.
4R and 4R are arranged on the outside of the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from the lower side.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that gives the driving force, and the like outside the lower frame member 320, the region inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used and the tilting device 320 is tilted. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. This will
A large amount of movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a front view of the operation device 30.
It is a rear view exploded perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having ring members BR1 arranged at the left and right ends at the rear side end portion (the back end portion on the paper surface of FIG. 12) and tilting thereof. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and determining the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member having a recessed portion arranged opposite to the lower frame member 320 and having a large opening in the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. With tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the ten in the second state, and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and that constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. Protective cover device 3 that protects the drive device 340 to be transmitted and the drive device 340 that is fastened and fixed to the drive device 340 and that covers the drive device 340 from three sides in the left-right direction and the rear direction.
Mainly equipped with 50.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member that is configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 that is inclined downward toward the front side and the bottom plate portion 321 thereof. Horizontal portion 3 composed of plate-shaped members arranged horizontally at the upper end portion on the back side of the
22 and the lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from the lower side, and the bottom plate portion 321. Left side detection sensor 324L and right side detection sensor 324R arranged in pairs on the left and right sides
And an opening 325 which is an opening which is opened by scraping a portion arranged under the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321.

The bottom plate portion 321 defines the moving end of the tilting device 310 by contacting with the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings, and the portion of the tilting device 310 passes through the openings to form the bottom plate portion 3.
It is configured to be able to pass through 21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 321c which is formed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the above.

The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed in a size that allows the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state where the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 projects below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection holes 321b are detection pieces 311 gL, 311 projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
A through hole through which gR can be inserted. Detection piece 31 overhanging from detection hole 321b
By arranging 1 gL and 311 gR in the detection groove of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c is sized so that the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted, and the arm member is formed when the drive device 340 is operated. Through holes are formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 constitutes a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is formed of a U-shape having an open portion on the front side and extending upward from the upper surface thereof. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324L and 324R are the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
The distance from 1 (the position of the detection groove) is arranged at the same position on the left and right.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a detection portion can be inserted. Means a sensor that is arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotary claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width thereof is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, regarding the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the LED device 341f has an opening 325.
By pushing the drive device 340 upward after passing through the LED device 341
f can be arranged above the opening 325 and from the LED device 341f to the rotary claw member 34.
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened as compared with the vertical width including up to 7.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged so as to face the opening 331, which is an opening having a size for the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. It is mainly provided with an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed of a semicircular shape whose lower side is open and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is composed of a main body cover 351 that is vertically divisible and covers three directions except the front side, and is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, and the main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and is arranged on the front side and whose vibration surface is directed diagonally forward and upward, a left side detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and a right side. It mainly includes a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right side detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface of the lower frame member 3.
It is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of 20. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 projects the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phase of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disk cam 344L, 3 of the drive device 340
The 44R is arranged in such a manner that it is arranged inside the detection groove of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams are arranged in the detection groove of 53R, and detect that the disc cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 include the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 35
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by the 3Rs.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. 14 (a
) Is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the direction of arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a side view of the tilting device 310. ) XIVc
It is sectional drawing of the tilting device 310 in -XIVc line. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 has a case body 311 formed of a box-shaped body having side fan-shaped openings at the top and bottom, and a lid on the upper opening of the case body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 to be fastened and fixed to the case body 311, the spherical lens member 313 to be fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and the rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 are sandwiched between them. The case body 3 at the rear ends of the shaft portion 314 arranged in the above, the torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft portion 314, and the case body 311 and the lid 312.
Mainly includes a ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the 11 and the lid 312 indivisiblely.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a that is tilted downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending downward from a flange extending downward along the edge of the shaft, and a recessed portion 311d which is a semicircular concave portion supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end portion. The insertion groove 311e, which is a groove in which both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and the hook-shaped portion 311f, which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A pair of left and right detection pieces 311 gL extending below the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311 gR (see FIG. 15), and a extension extending from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. A protective lens member 311i, which is arranged above the front end of the bottom plate 311h, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate. It mainly includes an overhanging convex portion 311j which is projected downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311a is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
It is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of 20 on a surface.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is a guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the drive device 340.
It is a cylindrical member inserted through 45b and has a role as a portion for transmitting a driving force to and from the driving device 340.

The left side detection piece 311 gL and the right side detection piece 311 gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively, and the left side detection piece 311 gL The overhang length is longer than that of the right side detection piece 311 gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right side detection piece 311 gR to the tip of the left side detection piece 311 gL with respect to the shaft portion 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the end of pushing (see FIG. The left side detection piece 311 gL is projected as compared with the right side detection piece 311 gR so that the tilting device 310 rotates up to (see 23).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and extends to a position where it is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Consists of aspects.

The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
(See) and a curved shape in the left-right direction view (see FIG. 14C), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is projected at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than that of the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, so that the player can tilt the device 310.
Is inserted into the transmission hole 321a in a state of being pushed in (see FIG. 29), and the tip is projected below the lower frame member 320.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 31 thereof.
The LED device 34 is fixed to the top plate member 312a and in the first state (see FIG. 6).
It mainly includes a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by the rigidity in the axial direction, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the light emitted from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is cylindrical due to its positional relationship. While it is fastened to the inside of the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), it is arranged in such a manner that such limitation is released and the light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide range.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the upper and lower end portions are extended forward in a flange shape, and the extended end portion is formed in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. A spherical shell portion 313a formed from a spherical shell shape is provided in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portion and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , Equipped with.

Next, the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 (a)
Is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the drive device 340. Is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 forming a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member and a drive motor that generates a driving force. A pair of disc cams 344 (non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft rod 343 and the transmission shaft rod 343 that transmit the driving force of the 342 and its drive motor 342 (
Left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344
A release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the arm member 345 that is pivotally supported by the main body member 341 and that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and that comes into contact with the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the second overhanging portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. And a rotary claw member 347 that is pivotally supported by the release member 346 and moves relative to each other as the release member 346 rotates, and a coil spring shape that generates an urging force in a direction that causes the rotary claw member 347 to fall down. The first spring SP1 which is a spring member of the above and the release member 34
A second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction that causes the rotary claw member 347 to separate from each other, is mainly provided.

The main body member 341 is a motor accommodating portion 3 that is bent rearward on the left and right to form a U-shape when viewed from above.
A shaft support hole 341b that is bored at the same position of the plate portion of 41a and the plate portion of the motor accommodating portion 341a that is arranged to face each other and supports the disk cam 344, and a shaft parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c that is projected in the left-right direction at a position deviated from the shaft support hole 341b to the front side, an extension portion 341d that extends below the shaft portion 341c from the motor accommodating portion 341a, and a motor. Lighting support 341 extending forward and upward from the accommodating portion 341a
Mainly includes e and an LED device 341f arranged at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source arranged inside.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof, and is a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light).
A part that refracts light) is provided. As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 has a motor accommodating portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor accommodating portion 341a.
A fixing member 342a to be fastened and fixed to 1a is provided.

The fixing member 342a pivotally supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is bored at one end in a perfect circular shape, and at the shaft support hole 345a pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. Along with this, a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted is mainly provided.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a comes into contact with the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the disc cam 344 makes one or more rotations on the opposite end. It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 is a cylindrical member 343a to which a disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a drive motor 342 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
A movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotary gear and the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction, and the movable clutch 343c. Is mainly provided with a coil spring 343d for pressing the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a is a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2 are provided, and the right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is specifically a movable clutch 3
The length of 43c is such that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 into which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
The movable clutch 343c is provided with a clutch portion 343b2 in which irregularities along the axial direction are formed at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
It includes 43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 which is formed with irregularities along the axial direction at a circumferential position of the axis center from a surface arranged to face the transmission gear 343b and is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2. ..

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It consists of a chevron-shaped convex and concave part.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a. Therefore, the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b
By engaging 2 with the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
It is transmitted to 3a. As a result, the disk cam 3 is rotated by rotating the drive motor 342.
It is possible to rotate 44 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is usually a transmission gear 3 by the urging force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arranged at a position close to 43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
It is configured to be movable along 43a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disc cam 344 has a shape in which the left disc cam 344L and the right disc cam 344R are substantially mirror images, and the difference is the detection hole 3.
Since only the positions of 44eL and 344eR are shown, only the left disk cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disk cam 344L in the direction of arrow XXb of FIG. is there. In addition, in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B, the state in which the drive device 340 is set to the first initial state is shown as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of the perfect circular disk, and is at the center position of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a projecting inward in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. As a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b, it is projected inward and 2
Engagement ribs 344c and circular ribs 344b that have a portion that projects radially outward at the location.
The arm member 3 is provided in a cylindrical shape in the outward direction between the arm member 3 and the engaging rib 344c.
It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d connected to 45 (see FIG. 18) and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer circumference.

The right disk cam 344R differs only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other components are a mirror image of the shape of the left disk cam 344L. ..

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D in which the inner circumference engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It is composed of a character shape, and the outer circumference is fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor accommodating portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disc cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position deviated by 80 ° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. From the overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 and the first overhanging portion 344c1 that retract inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (angle θ1 = 50 ° in this embodiment). At a position deviated by an angle θ2 (angle θ2 = 150 ° in this embodiment), a second overhanging portion 344c3 that overhangs outward again in the radial direction and a second overhanging portion 344c thereof.
It mainly includes a second retractable portion 344c4 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from 3 by an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, an angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at a position having the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one of them will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347. Note that FIG. 21A shows a large angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 rotates to the terminal position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (the convex pin 346b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). (See FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member and is pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) with a shaft support hole 346a. From the convex pin 346b which is formed in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a in the plate thickness direction, the insertion hole 346c into which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes an engaging portion 346d formed as a portion overhanging with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is the engaging rib 34 of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
It is a part configured to be in contact with 4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
Since the outer circumference of d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be smoothly performed.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A guide slot 347b, which is pierced so as to guide the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 (a size including the movement locus of the convex pin 346b inside), and a second spring SP2.
The insertion hole 347c through which the end of the spring is inserted, the hook-shaped portion 347d which is projected downward in a hook shape at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). It mainly includes a pull-down hole 347e that is pierced so as to be inserted.

In the present embodiment, the release member 346 is arranged at the terminal position in the backflip direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotary claw member 347 in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A. Therefore, when a load in the pushing-down direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are integrally rotated in the backward rotation direction, while the engaging portion is in the large angle state. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle is small as shown in FIG. 21B.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in which the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 show the operation device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a).
It is a cross-sectional view of. Note that FIG. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 24 Then, the state after the tilting device 310 returns from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is shown. Further, in FIGS. 22 to 24, an example of a player's hand that repeatedly strikes the tilting device 310 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backflip direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a has a hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347.
Hooked on. As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the posture in the first state. That is, in the first state, an urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left side detection piece 311 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right side detection piece 311 gR is the right side detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the detection groove of 4R (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left side detection piece 3
11 gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311 gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player repeatedly hits, the torsion spring 31
The tilting device 310 cannot be returned in time by 5, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, which may cause the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

Conventionally, it was possible to deal with this by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 resists the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 that pushes down (see FIG. 18), and it is necessary to increase the size of the driving motor 342. Therefore, there are problems that the product cost rises and space saving cannot be performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibration operation is arranged at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310. To.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in FIG. 23 in the extension direction, the tilting device 31 does not increase the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
The return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player presses and holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the player is informed. Since it gives an unnecessary load, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state is calculated in a predetermined period, and when the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is used. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player repeatedly strikes. This will
The player can comfortably operate the tilting device 310.

Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (fanning operation) up and down from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A.

It should be noted that FIG. 25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 26 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state.
From the state shown in FIG. 25, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is changed. In FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 is a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the rotary claw member 347 is rotated in the forward rotation direction and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is returned is illustrated.
A state in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and rotates is shown. FIG. 29 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 shows a circle from the state shown in FIG. 29. The engagement rib 34 is formed by rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount.
The state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 of 4c has reached the second initial state in which it abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346 is shown. Further, in FIG. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG. 27
The position of 10 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be largely secured. As a result, the cylindrical member 312c can have the effect of improving the intensity as a rib of the lid 312 and the effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 26). When rotated in the direction), the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, so that the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotary claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where the tilting device 310 is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a.

The posture change of the release member 346 is caused by the first retracting portion 344c2 and the engaging portion 34 of the engaging rib 344c.
The disc cam 344 is maintained until it is rotated until it faces 6d, during which the tilting device 310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the states of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the side far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 becomes an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27).
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disk cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated forward by the urging force of the first spring SP1 (FIG. 27 counterclockwise). It rotates in the clockwise direction) and returns to a state in which the rotary claw member 347 can engage with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, since the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), the release member 346 and the rotary claw member The 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the tilting device 31 when the lid 312 retracts above the LED device 341f and the area where the protective lens member 311i can be seen from the player's viewpoint is set to the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed toward the front (direction toward the player).
Can also be irradiated. Therefore, when the posture of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 28 counterclockwise). Figure 2
By repeating the operation of rotating (8 clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is the LED device 3.
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 28). Can be done.

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range thereof is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 ascends from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 28, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the rising direction, the shaft portion 311c Only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347 to push the rotary claw. The member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 29), and subsequently, the tilting device 310 is pushed in to cause the bottom plate portion 311a to become a hook-shaped portion 347d.
After passing through, the rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the player tilts the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
The tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases the hand after pushing down 0.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibrating operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after pushing the tilting device 310 to the end.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force that assists the tilting device 310 to rise (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the push-in end position to produce a vibration effect. Can be used for.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 changes to the lower frame member 320.
It is buried in the lower surface of the body, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 toward the end.

Therefore, as compared with the game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the pushing end when the tilting device 310 is pushed in is determined.
Only the player who has pushed the tilting device 310 into operation can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 is not operated at all, and in that case, the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when the jackpot is confirmed, it is possible to improve the expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and operates the tilting device 310. It is possible to improve the value as a look-ahead means.
As a result, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is moved to the second overhanging portion 344c1.
The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until the disk cam 344 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. ..

The second initial state is a state in which the engaging rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhanging portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhanging portion 344c3 and the engaging rib 344c come into contact with each other.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, it rotates in the reverse direction. The drive device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. 25. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG. 29) while maintaining the posture of the rotary claw member 347.
It can be rotated counterclockwise).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (fanning operation) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( The second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a motion of reciprocating up and down (fanning motion) through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operation device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a).
It is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 30 (FIG. 31).
A state in which the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) by rotating them counterclockwise) is shown. In FIG. 32, the disk cam 344 is displayed from the state shown in FIG.
Is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state. In FIG. 33, FIG.
The state in which the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates from the state shown in 2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 34, FIG. 3
The state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in 3 is shown.
Further, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by an imaginary line.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the disc cam 344 is tilted. The device 310 operates in the ascending direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 passes through the arm member 345 to the disk cam 344. The tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disc cam 344 is tilted by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged). Posture in which 310 can be placed in the second state (disk cam 344 is 180 ° from the first initial state)
It can be in a rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state from the state of FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the disk cam 344 interferes with the state change (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is in the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction by the same amount (FIG. 32 counterclockwise). Figure 3
By repeating the operation of rotating (2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

Further, the area of the portion protruding above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, among the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operating device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is the LED device 3.
Since it is arranged on the front side of 41f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (the vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 33). Can be done.

That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the light irradiation direction can be changed but also the light irradiation range can be changed at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 is changed. As a result, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. 28. That is, in the present embodiment, the vertical movement of the tilting device 310 includes the vertical movement shown in FIG.
Two types of vertical movements (fanning movements), which are the vertical movements shown in FIG. 33, can be performed immediately after the restriction on the movement of the tilting device 310 in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347 is lifted. Therefore, it is possible to create two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, the operating member 310 can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of the jackpot) in the operation mode as compared with the case where the operating member 310 performs the same operation each time.
It is possible to improve the player's attention to.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is operating up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push the tilting device 310 into operation. In the state of FIG. 33, the load given from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling down the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to a load due to the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, the player is given only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. As a result, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, a large load is suppressed on the player, so that the player can comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 into operation, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotary claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, the player can move the tilting device 310 up and down from the tilting device 31 shown in FIG. 33.
When the player releases the hand after pushing down 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player pushes in, the rotary claw member 3
The operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical movements (fanning movements) of the tilting device 310, or to continuously perform one of them.

35 to 37 show the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a).
It is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is moved backward from the state shown in FIG. 34 (FIG. 35).
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) is shown by rotating it clockwise), and in FIG. 36, the rotary cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. 35. A state in which the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 after being rotated in the clockwise direction is shown. The disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in the above, and the protective cover device 3
The state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is turned on is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retractable portion 344c4 of the engaging rib 344c becomes the engaging portion of the releasing member 346. It comes into contact with 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 is changed by the engaging rib 344c pushing up the release member 346, but the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide slot 347b of the rotary claw member 347. The staying and rotating claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
It is maintained in the posture shown in 5.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to disengage the engaging rib 344c and the disengaging member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the rise of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in, the drive device 340 can be in the second initial state.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but the disk cam 344 passes through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, as described above, it is possible to perform the vertical movement (fanning operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player who pushes in the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation even if a special display such as "long press" is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by pushing the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the effect and forgetting to release the operated hand. In this case, the tilting device 310 rises even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for causing the tilting device 310 to move up and down (fanning operation) within the range of the angle D2.
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L (FIG. 1) of the lower frame member 320 is in a state where the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
While the ON state (see 5) is maintained (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. 37, the protective cover device 350 The left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is controlled in a mode in which the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the drive device 340 is turned on.

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the tilting device 310 does not ascend when the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 is changed to FIG.
The change up to the state shown in 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the player's hand is continuously placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state when the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is a circle as it is. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate the plate cam 344 to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and an unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, so that the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing the destruction of the drive device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. 38. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in the second state of the tilting device 310.
The player's hand that grips and fixes the body cover 351 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of 5 is restricted, the disk cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. 38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
A high load is generated between the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idle with respect to the transmission shaft rod 343a fixing the disk cam 344, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from failing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b
Power is transmitted via 2,343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
It is possible to prevent the 42 from breaking down.

If the player does not grasp the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state if the disk cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operating device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °).
When the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, for example, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation and notify the player to stop the erroneous operation only at that time, and stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c, deviate from each other. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
By detecting that the state has been reached, it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, so that the control of the drive motor 352 is restarted with that state as the initial position (of the drive motor 342). By resetting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are controlled in a realigned state. It can be performed.

As a result, when the effect is produced by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
It is possible to prevent a gap between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of. Therefore, even after the phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to produce an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 40, the disk cam 3 is shown in FIG. 38.
A state in which 44 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) is shown, and FIG. 41 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state shown in FIG. 40. Further, in FIG. 42, the disk cam 344 is in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38.
In FIG. 43, a state in which the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the direction of arrow CW is shown from the state shown in FIG. 42.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 31
0 moves upright toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, Fig. 4
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG. 42.

This is not only due to the fact that the engaging rib 344c operates in a manner of separating from the release member 346 as the state shown in FIG. 42 shifts to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344.
When is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW, the cause is that the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released even if the engaging rib 344c abuts on the release member 346. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts on the releasing member 346 from below, but in this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw Member 3
No load is generated in the direction of pushing up 47. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's point of view, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42.
Up to the first state shown in (1), both seem to be the same operation, and after the first state, the subsequent movements are different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state, the drive motor 342
It may be generated by the control of (see FIG. 39), but the player notices the mode of control being performed due to the difference in the change in the drive sound due to the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342, and the effect to be executed from now on is There is a risk that it will be grasped by the player and the player's interest will be diminished. In addition, the tilting device 3
When the operation of suddenly stopping 10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load applied to the drive motor 342 becomes large, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the drive motor 342
Since the rotation of the above is only different in its direction, it can be difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction depending on the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 rises from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is operating toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the expectation of the effect, the player is informed of the tilting device 310 in the second state (see FIG. 38) and when the drive motor 342 moves toward the first state. It can be made to watch the movement of the tilting device 310.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

Further, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the drive motor 3 is used when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped.
The burden given to the 42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 44, the disk cam 3 is taken from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340.
A state in which 44 is rotated in a predetermined amount forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) is shown, and the first
Disk cam 344 at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating the tilting device 310 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhanging portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not passing through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotary claw member 347 changes in the backward rotation direction (as the posture of the release member 346 changes.
Since it is maintained in a state of being rotated clockwise in FIG. 44), the tilting device 31 is in the manner shown in FIG.
When 0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is released by the player.
Can move upward from the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and can carry out an operation mode in which the vertical movement is continued. ..

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the operation is performed by providing a difference in production between the above-mentioned first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the device was operating up or down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode and the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). Assuming that the difference is that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since the opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348. The slide claw member 23 is provided when the release member 2346 is pushed up.
The 48 is configured to slide. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, and FIG.
5 (b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. ..

In FIG. 46A, the rotating plate member 2347 is the second spring S with respect to the release member 2346.
A large angle state of rotation to the end position in the biasing direction of P2 is shown. In FIG. 46 (b), the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346. The small angle state is shown. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is a state between a large angle state and a small angle state (convex pin 3).
46b is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 47).
As functional members axially supported by FIG. 47), a release member 2346, a rotary plate member 2347, and a tilting device 2310 (FIG. 47) are arranged on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the rotary plate member 2347 interposed therebetween. The slide claw member 2348, which is configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory centered on the rotation axis of (see), is mainly provided. The release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 have the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in which the slide claw member 2348 is slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end portion of the curved portion 2348a. The hook-shaped portion 2348b is projected in a hook shape toward the left side of FIG. 45, and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to be overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (FIG. 47 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a convex pin 2348d projecting in a columnar shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Be prepared.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is replaced with the rail portion 2.
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted in the 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is arranged on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is used for the bottom plate portion 2311 of the tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface opposite to the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion that reinforces the slide claw member 2348.

The convex pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted and fixed in the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
As the 6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the convex pin 2348d becomes the functional elongated hole 23.
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides and moves.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c, and the like.
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, the rail portion 2347f for guiding the sliding operation of the slide claw member 2348, and the support elongated hole 2347g through which the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is forward-rotating on the side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions arranged to face each other (FIG. Shaft 314 (see FIG. 47) in the state of being arranged at the end position (46 counterclockwise).
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on.

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). Convex pin 2348 in support slot 2347g
When the slide claw member 2348 is slid and moved with d inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be suppressed from wobbling. it can.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engaging portion 346d, and a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction. ..

The functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed of a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. The hole portion 2346e1 and the second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a.
Mainly prepared.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 moves to the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole slightly wider than the diameter of the convex pin 2348d, the movement speed of the release member 2346 remains unchanged from the movement of the convex pin 2348d without a time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346. It is reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also decreases.

As shown in FIG. 46A, in a large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the slide direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the convex pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding and moving.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is rotated by the release member 2346.
Although the 347 may slide, the slide claw member 2347 does not slide due to the pull of the slide claw member 2347 when the angle is large. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are drawings showing changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A. In FIG. 47, the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is the release member 234.
The state of being arranged below the engaging portion 346d of No. 6 is shown, and in FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the disengaging member 2346. The state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is shown. In FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48, and the release member 2346 is the second spring SP.
The state of being restored by the urging force of 2 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and includes a magnet portion 2311a1 made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 23
Since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are disengaged from each other due to the change in posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not give a large load to the slide claw member 2348.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the ascending direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, if the release member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is moved backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved ascending at a speed different from the ascending movement when the restriction on the ascending movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 are disengaged, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. .. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the operation mode with the expected degree of jackpot, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a pre-reading means. Therefore, the operation device 2300 for the player The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is raised.
Tilt device 2310 by magnetic attraction between 8b and magnet portion 2311a1 of tilt device 2310
Therefore, by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player puts his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from being lifted by the weight of the hand. (Even if the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG. 48.
In the state shown in (1), the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner of lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, the load in the ascending direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load) can be different. Therefore, the player who plays the game by placing his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the expected degree of jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be determined. Can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment has been described. Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or the state of being pushed by the player. Ru. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right side detection piece 311 gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilt device 3310). It is provided with a left side detection piece 3311gL extending at a surface perpendicular to the axis and located at a position opposite to the right side detection piece 311gR with respect to a surface arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left side detection piece 3311 gL has a longer extension length than the right side detection piece 311 gR.
Compared with the left side detection piece 311 gL in the first embodiment, the extension length thereof is shortened.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. In addition, FIG.
In 1 (a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51 (b), the tilting device 331 is set.
The state in which 0 is being pushed in is illustrated. In addition, FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b)
In the above, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines. In addition to being shown, the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left side detection piece 3
The 311 gL is not inserted through the left side detection sensor 324L, and the right side detection piece 311 gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is the left side detection sensor 324 L.
The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF).
..

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, it is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the process of returning or not.

That is, if the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing. Left side detection sensor 324L is OFF and right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operating device 3300. In addition, FIG.
In 2 (a), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing is illustrated, and FIG.
In 2 (b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of moving from the pushing end to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the portion where the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR overlap is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 3
11 gR is inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52B, when the tilting device 3310 is between the first state and the state arranged at the push-in end, the left side detection piece 3311 gL is inserted through the left side detection sensor 324 L. The right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed to the end of pushing, which is the left side detection. The sensor 324L is ON and the right side detection sensor 324R is ON.
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the tilting device 3
When an auxiliary load for raising 310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted during the tilting device 3310 rather than colliding with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending. By colliding with the device 3310, a load for raising the tilting device 3310 can be effectively applied.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52B, the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed in from the first state.
The ascending speed of 310 becomes slower. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 moves up as compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 operates only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the tilting device 3310
It is possible to comfortably perform the continuous striking operation of.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in the state of being pushed by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has been described. Is an embodiment in which the tilting device 4310 detects the operating speed during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is projected in a plate shape from the front side of the overhanging convex portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) arranged in the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and each detection. This is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300 showing the pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54A, the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54 (b), the tilting device 4310 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a).
Is pushed in and the front detection piece 4311k has passed the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. Further, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while each of them. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e in a portion on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are arranged in a posture in which the detection groove is oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on an arc orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k is the upper detection sensor 4
It passes through 321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the interval of the passing timing, it is possible to determine the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310, and it is selected whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 by the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which acceleration can be applied is long), so that the tilting device is compared with the operation button having a short pushing length. The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means for deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

Further, it is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that applies an urging force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is arranged near the end of pushing, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the urging force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who has decided to perform the pushing operation gently, the constant increase in the reaction force near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it becomes easy to feel tired. Therefore, there is a risk that the tilting device 4310 cannot be pushed in comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the timing interval between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force is applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are switched between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated even with a weak force. It can be pushed in.

Further, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against the force, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of pushing. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the overhanging convex portion 3 of the tilting device 4310
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before the 11j projects below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. To.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is being pushed out during the extrusion of the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300. In addition, FIG.
5 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end.

Further, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the lower frame member 4
While the outer shapes of 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 is in the process of reaching the pushing end from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the overhanging convex portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The force of the push operation can be consumed to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, since the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disc brake, but a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force, damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so that the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 from the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other, the tilting device 4310 decelerates on the way from the first state to the pushing end. The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged at the push-in end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). This will
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps his / her hand on the tilting device 4310.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of producing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is vibrated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
Although the case where the vibration is transmitted to the player who pushes 0 to operate is described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is a weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric to the lower frame member 5320.
The drive motor 5411 for rotating the 412 is provided, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320 as compared with the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, and the drive device 340.
Is the drive device 5340, and the voice coil motor 35 is used from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. First, the vibrating device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibrating device 5400 is a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
The 410, the transmission device 5410, the flexible member 5420 that accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5412 that are formed in a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface. The member 5420 and the lower frame member 53 are housed separately.
Mainly includes a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of 20.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor, and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and whose rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 is pivotally supported by a portion corresponding to the core of the fan. And mainly prepare.

The drive motor 5411 includes a fixed portion 5411a which is arranged in pairs on the left and right and is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on the side where the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together with the drive motor 5411.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body 5421 formed of a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the opposite side to the insertion side, and the main body 5421 in the assembled state. In addition to connecting between a pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are convexly provided on the left and right and downward sides in the radial direction, and rib-shaped leg portions 5422 that are projected left and right on the open portion side of the main body portion 5421. Posture maintenance part 5423 in which the fixing part 5411a is embedded
And a convex leg portion 5424 which is convexly provided in a pair of columns upward from the upper surface of the main body portion 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has a container-shaped depth formed at the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, in a state where the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body portion 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body portion 5421 are formed on the same surface. Further, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are larger because the posture maintenance portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower ribbed leg portion 5422.

Since the convex leg portion 5424 is projected in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310
The resolution of the degree of deformation of 20 can be made finer.

In the assembled state, the accommodating member 5430 is provided adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated and the first accommodating portion 5431, and the weight member 5
The second accommodating portion 5432 in which 412 is accommodated, and the first accommodating portion 5431 and the second accommodating portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a recessed groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connecting surface of the 432.

The depth of the first accommodating portion 5431 is the flexible member 54 until the lower ribbed leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom.
When 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the depth is set so that the convex leg portion 5424 projects from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodating portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg portion 5424 to provide a flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth is set to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

The concave groove 5433 has a width dimension that is slightly wider than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension that extends slightly downward from the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 under the assembled load state. To.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is
It is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 in the direction view of the arrow LIXc of FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59 (a), the portion corresponding to the vibrating device 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. Also,
In FIG. 59A, the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the player are pushed in from the first state by three degrees to push in. The terminal area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when arranged at the terminal position, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg portion 5424 is convexly provided in the direction along the circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
The amount of deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 with respect to the angle change (see FIG. 56) can be secured to the maximum.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load release state in which the convex leg portion 5424 is not loaded.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the convex leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extension direction view. Therefore, since the convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed evenly to the left and right on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (tilting to the left or right on the paper surface in FIG. 59 (b)). The convex leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a convex leg portion 5424.
A pair of through holes 5321d are provided so as to be inserted. Since the width dimension of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the convex leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and the lower side surface of the tilting device 310 is convex. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the convex leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 together with the convex leg portion 5424 is suppressed.
Can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibrating device 5400 in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). In addition, in FIG. 60A, the assembly load release state is illustrated, and FIG.
At 0 (b), the assembly load state after the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodating portion 5431 in a state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). Illustrated. The outer shapes of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), the vibrating device 540 is released from the assembled load release state.
When a load is applied to 0 and the assembly load state is reached, the convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5
As the 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the terminal position, the tilting device 310 is operated. The impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated.
Further, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38). The ascending speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is raised only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous striking operation of the tilting device 310 can be comfortably performed.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second accommodating portion 5432 regardless of its posture in the assembled load release state. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is started to be driven in the assembled load release state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and the accommodating member 543.
Transmission to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420 under the assembled load state.
Reference numeral 1 denotes a mode in which vertical displacement is allowed by deforming the upper convex leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged under the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg portion 54 is formed.
Since 22 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and is arranged in pairs on the left and right at uniform intervals from the central axis to the left and right, the rib-shaped legs are formed by moving the flexible member 5420 downward. The radial outer end of the 5422 is deformed so as to move outward to the left and right (the one having the smaller resistance at the connection position between the main body portion 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portion 5422) (see FIG. 60 (b)).
In this case, since the convex direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right direction component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. .. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodating portion 5432 collide is applied to the rib-shaped leg portion 54 on the lower side of the main body portion 5421.
It can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. As a result, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis. In b), the state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. In addition, FIG.
In 1 (a) and 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and the terminal region S52.
The state of the vibrating device 5400 in the state of occupying the above is illustrated.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged on the upper side in the assembled load state, the drive motor 5411 rotates at a position where the distance from the lower bottom portion of the second accommodating portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is placed. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof becomes the second accommodating portion 543.
Contact (rub) with 2. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared with the assembled load release state, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, the weight member 5412 is used as a repulsive force.
Is generated (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 are separated from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is set to the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ) Can be easily directed. Due to this repulsive force, the flexible member 5 together with the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412.
The 420 moves upward, and the flexible member 5420 can reinforce the force that pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310).

In this way, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by configuring it with a combination of a force that is generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and a force that is generated separately by the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts abutting on the convex leg portion 5424, the terminal region S52 (FIG. 59).
(See (a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the weight member 5412
And the repulsive force of the second accommodating portion 5432 are applied to the force of pushing back the tilting device 310. As a result, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the terminal region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be lightened and the impact during the pushing operation can be mitigated satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left side detection piece 311 gL and the length of the right side detection piece 311 gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is different due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined whether or not the operating speed is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desired to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance so as to be in a downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

As a result, the rotation axis of the drive motor 5411 ends the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411, and the second accommodating portion 543
It can be raised to a position raised by a radius Ra upward from the lower end of the inner wall of 2. As a result, the weight member 5432 is located above the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, when the convex leg portion 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side surface of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing is used. The vibration can be transmitted to the player through. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the player tilts device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Only when the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembly load state by pushing in the weight member 5
The 412 and the accommodating member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in the rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, so that the pushing operation of the player can be detected. It is possible to make it easier to transmit the vibration to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and immediately releases the hand (pulse pushing), the tilting device 310 is detected to be pushed and then vibration is generated. Therefore, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (the vibration starts not in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and the preparation for vibration generation is completed, the vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. As a result, the player can experience the effect of vibration.

Further, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411 is previously used.
Even if the tilting device 310 is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in and operated.

Therefore, the state in which the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343. Others are the same as the drive device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, the elongated hole recess C1 is formed in the central portion of the pair of disc cams 5344 composed of the left disc cam 5344L and the right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disk cam 5344R. The right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 534
Since 4L is composed of a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arm portions A1 for sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. Is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R has a circular rib 344 from the disk portion at the center position thereof.
A support cylinder portion P1 extending in a tubular shape to the side where b is arranged, and an axially symmetric elongated hole shape up to a position about half of the extension distance along the axial direction of the support cylinder portion P1. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion and an axial end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the elongated hole recess C1 extend toward the disk portion side along the axial direction. It mainly includes a pair of holding arm portions A1 to be formed.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter of the support cylinder portion P1 equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed in the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged so as to sandwich the elongated hole recess C1, and elastically deforms when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to do.

The elongated hole recess C1 is formed so that the shape of the recessed cross section is slightly longer than the width dimension of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the elongated hole recess C1 (
It is configured to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction).

Further, the facing surfaces of the elongated hole recess C1 are formed to engage with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
It is possible to prevent the 343a from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The pinching arm portion A1 is formed from the surface of the pair of arm portions facing the other side of the arm.
The engaging convex portion A1a is provided so as to be convex toward the arm portion on the other side. Engagement convex part A1a
Engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engaging convex portion A1a is the engaging groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is composed of a shape that matches the arc shape of 4. As a result, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engaging convex portion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 is compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. 65). (B) The length in the left-right direction) can be secured long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is recessed along the axis in the vicinity of the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is a surface position with the side surface on the opening side of C1).

As a result, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engaging convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63 (b)) than the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is set as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a.
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65 (b)).

Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recessed width (diametrically wide) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343.
It is a front view exploded perspective view of. The difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is the cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fitting groove 5343a3 from a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cams 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side when viewed from the front.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 and the groove for fitting the e-ring, and the disk cam 534 by the e-ring.
When the fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of 4 and the disc cam 5344 are fitted until the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3 is reached, the engagement convex of the holding arm portion A1. Mainly includes an engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a is engaged. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged on the outer side in the left-right direction of the pair of plates into which the shaft support holes 341b are bored in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

Since the mechanism is adopted in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased by the e-ring, the cylinder is formed before the e-ring is fitted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, so that the e-ring is formed in the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b. In addition to preventing misalignment along the above, the e-ring can further prevent misalignment of the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction.

Due to the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is located on the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side where the engaging convex portion A1a is arranged. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
Insert it to the position where the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the 343a4. At this time, the engaging groove 5343a4
Before the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted into the position where the engaging convex portion A1a is fitted, the tip portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a are pushed apart from each other. In the embodiment, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging convex portion A1a, the engaging convex portion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging convex portion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 elastically recovers, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing destruction in the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a right disk cam 53 in the LXVb-LXVb line of FIG. 65 (a).
It is a cross-sectional view of 44R, and FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R in the LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction of arrow LXVa of FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is L of FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the right disk cam 5344R in the XVIb-LXVIb line.

Note that FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the right disk cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG. 65.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and is a disk. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging convex portion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of holding arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. On the other hand
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R come into contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a increases.

Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 by the player (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). The direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted when a load for regulating the above is applied).

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction in which the resistance is small, FIG. 66
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded,
On a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion, the disk portion is deformed by tilting around the support shaft r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is aligned with the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG. 65 (a).
Displace.

67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 67 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 67B, the protective cover device 350 is not shown, and only the disc cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67A, in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state of being vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and an overload is applied to cause the shaft to collapse. The outline of the state is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 67A, the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is enlarged and shown. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 67A, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player is restricted from the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 that tries to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L that tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disk cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67A, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is shown by an imaginary line. The change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67A, when the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd due to the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), only this dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d will be misaligned.
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed by tilting the shaft.

Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 67A due to the shaft tilt deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the convex tip side are right circles. The position shifts along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment is the right disk cam 534.
Since the misalignment between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (while the tilting device 310 is being gripped,
When the drive motor (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be relaxed.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (direction of arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring is in the direction of repulsion. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotary claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate portion 5321, and thus stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 repels it. Is a disc cam 5344 via a release member 346 and a rotary claw member 347.
Acts on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotary claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first release member 346 is not affected by the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344.
Of the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disk cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation.
As a result, the load applied to the disc cam 5344 by the release member 346 can be increased.
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to 5 can be reduced regardless of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is line-symmetric with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). (Because the elongated hole recess C1 is extended), the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed regardless of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the misalignment direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). The shaft can be tilted and deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 68 (a). It is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In addition, in FIG. 68B, the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68A, in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where the shaft is tilted due to an overload is shown by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68A, a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and tilted down by the angle D2 is shown, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player grips the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344 regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R due to the shaft tilt of R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The matter described as the right disc cam 5344R also applies to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the player holds the tilting device 310, and an overload occurs. When,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of overload at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
If 2 is driven for a period during which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R
Although 44eR passes through the right side detection sensor 353R, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, by the time the occurrence of overload is detected, the right disk cam 3 is in a state where no overload has occurred.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate the 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that the detection of overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66B), the overload is applied. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected at an early stage. As a detection method, for example, between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engaging rib 344c, the engaging rib 34
An example is a method using the notification device E1 fixed to 4c (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A).
..

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input unit, and is arranged in pairs at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of holding arm portions A1 and an engaging rib 344c intersect. At the same time, the input portion is arranged so as to project toward the support cylinder portion P1 side. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65B), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are in contact with each other (FIG. FIG. 66 (b)). As a result, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344 and the engaging rib. The 344c is composed of a separate member, and is configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70.

FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. Is. The right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, but since the right disk cam 6344R is configured as a mirror image of the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, in this embodiment, the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a are different from those of the first embodiment, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
And the disk member 6344L1 in which the detection hole 344eL is arranged and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
And a ring member 6344L2 coaxially supported with the disk member 6344L1 and rotating relative to the disk member 6344L1.

In the disk member 6344L1, the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is arranged at the center position of the disk portion, and is radially outwardly separated from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in an annular shape in the axial direction. It is provided with an annular rib 6344f that is convexly provided along the line.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring body 6344g having the same outer peripheral diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and a ring shape having an inner peripheral diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, and a circle thereof. A lid plate portion 6344h that is arranged at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the lid plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. 6344i is provided with a receiving gear tooth 6344i, which is formed in the thickened portion thereof and is arranged on the outer side in the radial direction.

Since the inner peripheral diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b, the central shaft portion 344a is formed by fitting the annular main body 6344g to the circular rib 344b in the assembled state. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around the center.

The end face of the ring body 6344g on the axial disk member 6344L1 side is the ring rib 63.
It abuts on 44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disk member 634 is formed on the surface.
Compared with the case of contacting with 4L1, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i is meshed with the deceleration transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the rotation speed of the ring member 6344L2 is the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations, the disk member 63 is composed of three times the rotation speed of
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear tooth 6344i is set in a mode in which the 44L1 makes one rotation).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary pillar member 6348 arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
A second that is fixed to a and its auxiliary pillar member 6348a and is meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348.
It mainly includes a deceleration transmission gear 6348c that is meshed with the receiving gear tooth 6344i of the 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 after the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310 is composed of a plurality of types.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). Note that FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 makes one rotation in the backflip direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (correctly). (1) A state in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) by 1/3 in a posture in which the disk member 6344R1 is rotated in the reverse rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 73, FIG. 72
From the state shown in (1), the ring member 6344L2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle, and the tilting device 310 is raised.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 to release the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is subjected to the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the arrival position when the tilting device 310 is lifted in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is in the second state. It was limited to the position where it was placed (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is the supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c The relative relationship of the tilting device 31 can be changed.
The types of arrival positions of 0 can be increased.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 3
10 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state of being tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this way, the tilting device 310 momentarily (disk cam) in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 72. Without waiting for the rotation of 344)
It can rise to and change the position to reach.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 configures the game machine in a manner in which the expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in the height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state and reaches, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise higher or the expectation of the tilting device 310 to rise lower is higher.

However, by keeping the ascending arrival position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expected degree is maximized, the expected degree is reached. The magnitude of the above can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement that the player pushes in and operates the tilting device 310, so that the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, since the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilting device 310 is raised, the player watches the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can make it happen. Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the effect mode of 10, the method of the game in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner can be suppressed.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disk cam 7344 is a disk member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and the separate members can form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals.
The description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

FIG. 74A is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 74A is a front view.
(B) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is an LX of FIG. 74 (a).
FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R in the XVa-LXXVa line.
It is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction view of arrow LXXVb of FIG. 74 (a). Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and the ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
An engaging member 7 having 44R2 and an engaging portion 7630 that is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
Mainly equipped with 344R3.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed from a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center.
Detection hole 344eR in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
The engaging ribs 344c are partially omitted (first overhanging portions 344c1 and first).
It is a member having a shape (the space between it and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 on a surface in the assembled state, and the first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
The 410, the second circular recessed portion 7420, which is a circular recessed portion having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recessed portion 7410 and deep in the axial direction, and the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled in the radial direction between them, and a side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430 to the outside in the radial direction. It mainly includes a fixing protrusion 7440 that is convexly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from an intermediate position between the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
From the first elongated hole 7431, which is an elongated rectangular elongated hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at the displaced position, and the bottom end of the disk member 7344R1 of the first elongated hole 7431. The second elongated hole 74, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second elongated hole 74 with the first elongated hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
It mainly includes a return portion 7433 that is formed so as to project to the 32 side.

The width direction (short direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the width direction (short direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. direction(
It is made smaller than the dimension in the lateral direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 has a second elongated hole 743.
It is formed so as to be movable outward of 2.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and is configured with a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 (a)
Is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (b) is a ring member 7344R2.
76 (c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a connecting pin 3
A ring plate-shaped ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which 44d is projected and a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 thereof.
A thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the above and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the central portion is mainly provided.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recessed depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410. To. As a result, it is possible to prevent the relative rotation resistance from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to approach (do not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and have an outer peripheral diameter. However, it is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. As a result, in the assembled state, the engaging member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A), and the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 is prevented from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 is recessed in the deformed through hole 7521 formed along the axial direction and the deformed through hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (divided into five equal parts in the present embodiment) in the radial direction outward. It mainly includes an equally divided recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. It is composed.

77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is FIG. 77 (a).
) Is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the engaging member 7344R3 is outside the radial direction of the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)). The arcuate plate portion 7610 arranged in the direction and the rear end portion of the arcuate plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (Fig. 77).
b) Engagement extending from the extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end) and extending in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77B) from the extension tip of the extension portion 7620. A portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring arranged on a side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arcuate plate portion 7610 are mainly provided.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 is provided with a spring fixing protrusion 7611 which is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the tip end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion to be inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state.
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force, the extension tip thereof is composed of an extension length that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The width direction of the engaging portion 7630 is slightly shorter than the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and the engaging portion 7630 is extended so as to pass through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the releasing member 346 and is displaced, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 (a)
Is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX of FIG. 78 (a).
It is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction view of VIIIb, FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is an arrow LXXVIII of FIG. 78 (c).
It is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the d direction view, and FIG. 78 (e) is a right disk cam 7
It is a front view of 344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf of FIG. 78 (e).

In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 78 (c) and FIG. 78 (d), the disk member 7
A state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the 344R1 is shown. In FIGS. 78 (e) and 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
The state in which R3 is inserted is shown. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78 (b),
In FIGS. 78 (d) and 78 (f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As an assembly method of the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging member 734 is formed in the first elongated hole 7431.
The engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 is inserted (see FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an assembly error.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78 (d), the engaging portion 7
The engaging member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the positions of the 630 and the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide with each other.

At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 is suppressed from being displaced in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 and is engaged. The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

Further, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven to the outside of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the engagement member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 are released from the vertical contact, and the return portion 7433 is seconded by the elastic recovery force. It enters the inside of the elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

The tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extended portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in a state where it has entered the inside of the second elongated hole 7432, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. As a result, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of the 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

After holding the engaging member 7344R3 on the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734 is then held.
With 4R3 pushed inward in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1, the disc member 734
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the engaging portion 7630 moves along the radial outward direction D7 due to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. Due to this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. In addition, it should be noted
The right disk cam 7344L is formed of a symmetrical shape that is a mirror image of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347.
And the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and other unnecessary parts are omitted.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in the present embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIG. 80A, the convex pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the ascending position when the engaging rib 344c abuts and passes from below.

The release member 7346 is different from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80 (a)) of the main body portion of the release member 7346 is obliquely scraped in order to minimize the interference with the engaging rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79 (a), the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R is attached to the release member 7346.
The state in which the release member 7346 has started to rotate is shown, and FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a).
In (a), a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end is shown, and in M6-2 (b), the disk member 73 is shown in the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
The state in which 44R1 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction is shown. In FIG. 81, the right disk cam 7344R is rotated in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b), and the engaging member 7344R3 is released from the release member 7.
The state after being separated from 346 is shown. In addition, FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80
In (a) and 80 (b), a state (small angle state) in which the release member 7346 reaches the end of the range in which the release member 7346 can rotate relative to the rotary claw member 7347 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2 in the state immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact with each other. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the release member 734 is formed on the outermost outer diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3.
In the state where the engaging portion 346d of No. 6 is in contact with each other, the angle between the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 is set to be small.

In the present embodiment, the arcuate plate portion 7610 is formed in a small angle state in which the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320. First overhanging portion 344c1 and first retracting portion 3 of the inner peripheral surface and the engaging rib 344c
The disk cam 7344 is arranged so that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 is in contact with the 44c2 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344 and becomes unable to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member A load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 by pushing the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disc cam 7344 from the 7346.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 projects outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backflip direction cannot be continued, and therefore, based on the rotation of the disk cam 7344. , The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 734 from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
Even if 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is provided with the one equally divided recessed portion 75 that was originally arranged.
Since it moves from 22 to another equally divided recess 7522, the phase of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotates relative to each other by the amount of one recess (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the engaging member 73
Since the contact between the 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 is projected outward in the radial direction, and the engaging portion 7630 is once again housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is housed is displaced by one.

That is, by passing through the process shown in FIGS. 79 (a) to 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into the recessed portion 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portion.

With reference to FIG. 82, the engaging member 73 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction.
The operation of 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 8
3 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the other unnecessary parts are not shown.

In FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 82 (a), the release member 734
The state immediately before the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts with 6 is illustrated. In FIG. 82B, the engagement member 7344R3 abuts on the release member 7346 from above to start descending. In FIG. 83 (a), a state in which the disk cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 83 (b), the release member 7346 is shown. The state after being separated from the engaging member 7344R is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347 move in the backward rotation direction (clock 82 (a)). When rotating in the clockwise direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotary claw member 734 are generated by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only loaded in the forward rotation direction.

Therefore, a load that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction is not generated, and the engaging member 7344 is from the time when the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the releasing member 7346 until it is separated from each other.
R3 maintains a state of projecting outward in the radial direction. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

From these configurations, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, the disk member 7
It is possible to switch whether or not the 344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly tilt the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment. In the rotation direction that causes relative rotation (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81), the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed, unlike the first embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while being maintained in (see) (see).

As a result, the state in which the player does not pay attention (the state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is changed.
It can be used as a state for changing the relative postures of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to form a plurality of types of modes in which the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixing by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7 (b) (disk cam 7344).
The state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced (without rotating the disk member 7344R1) is illustrated, and in FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG. 84,
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally divided recessed portions 7522 through the process described with reference to FIG. 79 is shown.
In both cases, the state in which the second overhanging portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotary claw member 347 from the first state.
By releasing the fixing by, the moving range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2) can be changed.

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotary claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced to the rear lower side than the position shown in FIG. 2 Move to a state where it sinks below the state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 is released from the first state.
The position at which 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the ascending motion can be changed. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operating device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (rear) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) are pachinko machines 8010.
The vertical direction, horizontal direction, and front-back direction of are shown respectively. The definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the drawings prior to 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 88 shows a back pack 92 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. Inner frame 1
2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing an open state (deployment) with respect to FIG.
Is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine in a state where the front frame 14 is removed. It is a front view of the machine 8010. In FIG. 90, for convenience, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed, with the wooden plate material as the upper side and the lower side and the aluminum plate material as the left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement park by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and has an inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 or the like) and a locking structure of the outer frame 11. The members may be provided in the amusement park.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side in front view. It can be rotated forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is rotated when viewed from the front. It can rotate backward as the moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 so that they cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11. And, it has a function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that it cannot be opened. In each of these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK provided so as to be exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform an unlocking operation. By doing so, each is released.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a columnar portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft). By engaging the inner frame 12 with the metal plate having holes), the front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12.

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that is recessed in a fitable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape protruding upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns having different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column is larger). Is pivotally supported by being fitted onto the support pin 19a (which has a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed by a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a.
And the unit (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.) are fastened and fixed to form the front frame 14.

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in the front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
Since the 4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the game board 1
The front central portion of No. 3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 is a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than that of the window portion 14c and having transparency, and these transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And have. The fixed frame is made of transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b is formed in an annular shape, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame to form the glass unit 16 as an integrated double glazing.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and the glass unit 16 is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed to be colored transparent instead of colorless and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated portions 8029 to 8033 having built-in light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. These illumination parts 8029-8
In 033, lighting and blinking are performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, the illuminated portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c has a built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of payout balls is insufficient, and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (thin plate member formed of punching metal) is provided to cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state. .. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are arranged so as to bulge toward the front side and are arranged vertically.

The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a side while arranging them in a row. In addition, the lower plate 50
Has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that is opened in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back surface side surface of the lower plate 50.

It is not necessary to separately provide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 to store the game balls at a plurality of places, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is provided. Is also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper plate 17 (storage area for the game ball). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen or the like of the third symbol display device 81. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as around the lower plate 50 in addition to the upper plate 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, or may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured so that information can be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 leading to the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 leading to the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( (See FIG. 92) and.

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a payout ball receiving port 143 projecting rearward and opening upward is formed, and the payout ball receiving port portion 143 is formed. By partitioning the 143 to the left and right by the partition wall 144, the passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and the passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed, respectively.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion of the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that forms a passage for discharging the game balls that have not reached the game area to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that is open upward. The foul ball received by the foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and then is discharged to the lower plate 50. The foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

The foul ball passage portion 145 joins the ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unlaunched ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. Is formed as follows.

On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the upper left and right corners and bulge toward the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, there is a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and one end of the internal board of the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14. An electronic substrate to which the other end of the connector to which the portions are connected is arranged is disposed, and the electronic substrate and the connector are covered with the multifunction cover members 171 and 172.

In the portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring through groove 14h communicating with the left and right illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 and an illuminated portion 8031 through the wiring through groove 14h, An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. Is done.

Therefore, assuming that the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the lighting unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in FIG. 89). A connector for conducting wiring and a connector for connecting one end to the internal boards of the illuminated parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i.

The multifunctional cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in pairs above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
It has a positional relationship that faces the device on the upper side of 0 (see FIG. 126) in the front-rear direction, and can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

The back side of the front frame 14 is a container-shaped member formed of a resin material with the front side open, and is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 for accommodating wiring in the space is attached from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a structure in which the cross section decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation tip side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a forming the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring The upper wall portion 173b, which is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is arranged opposite to the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 on the surface. It is composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14 like the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and is the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. An upward extension wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion on the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. , A space that can be curved in a semicircle in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upward extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 rotates from the upper end position of the upward extending wall portion 173c. It overhangs to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the position change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the wiring will be broken.

On the back side of the front frame 14, the upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14)
A part of the main body frame 14a that is closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a vertically long plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 formed of a resin material. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 is arranged which is a portion to be opened downward.

The reverse cup portion 178 is a portion for taking measures against fraudulent acts performed by, for example, illegally expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area. Is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat causes the reverse cup portion 178.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and passed through the reverse cup portion 178.
Will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that by detecting that the wiring is broken. , Can make it easier to detect fraudulent activity.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and is in contact (close) with each other on the surface. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is shaped to face downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the property can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip thereof is the wall portion. It is pressed against 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is further inserted, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
Since it travels in the left-right direction), it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

Further, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who commits cheating through the piano wire from becoming large. Therefore, for example, the lower wall portion. By arranging a detection device that detects the intrusion of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the cheating before the cheating person escapes and to secure the cheating person. ..

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot determine it, so that the piano wire is assumed to be on the way to the game area. .. Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window portion 14c).
(Until you can see the tip of the piano wire from the front side through) You can let the cheating person perform the action of inserting the piano wire deeper naturally (without making you suspect that the piano wire is not inserted properly). .. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the time until the person who commits the fraud notices that the fraud has been discovered and attempts to escape.

The detection device may be a device composed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be arranged on the back side portion of the operation handle 51. When it is arranged on the operation handle 51, for example, the detection device conventionally arranged on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the approach of the piano wire.

As shown in FIG. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a has an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball launched by the launching solenoid 701 of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. Launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so that it is emitted toward the area between
And a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 launches the game ball stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) on the launch rail 730.
Supply one by one on top. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the protruding path of the plunger 702 provided as the launching portion in the launching solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electric signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is moved to the launch rail 7.
It moves toward the game ball on 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a substrate 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. It is installed. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates the portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 are
An internal passage so that one end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. Form a curved passage whose direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration
The ball discharged from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame 1 is placed on the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160.
The payout ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in No. 4 enters. The front door side upper plate passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 is the upper dish passage portion 161 on the main body side.
A shutter 163 that regulates the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage portion 162 on the main body side is provided. The shutter 163 has a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of the game ball.
It is provided so that it can be switched to both a permissible position that allows the outflow of the game ball.

Further, an urging member (coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the urging member is attached when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is opposed to the urging force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other, and the game ball flows down. Permissible.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is composed of separate substrates for the locations where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the locations where the connectors CN3 are arranged. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are the main controller 1.
While it is used for transmission with 10, the connector CN3 has a different transmission target so that it is used for transmission with the voice lamp control device 113, so it is intended to prevent malfunction by separating the board. by.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members arranged below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and shown, and FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the constituent members arranged below 14c are disassembled and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the main body frame 14 is below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14.
On the front side of c, the operation device 300 is arranged on the front side of the upper plate 17, diagonally upward to the right of the lower plate 50, and at the center position in the left-right direction of the front frame 14, and the operation device 300 is arranged.
A covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the cover.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width that is about the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 has a main body bending portion 371 formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project to the front side while being fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right end portions, and the main body bending thereof. It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at the intermediate position between the left and right central portion and the left and right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side close to each other in the width direction, and merges at the lower end of the extension to be viewed from the front. A hanging 372 formed in a shape, a main body curved portion 371 and a hanging 3
A light-transmitting portion 373 that is a plate-shaped member that closes the opening surrounded by 72 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. The left plane support portion 374 formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the above, the right plane support portion 375 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right plane support portion 375 formed from the back side. A support groove 376, which is a groove to be recessed and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The front side edge of the main body curved portion 371 has a rounded curved shape, and the back side edge portion has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate is in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). 1
The back left edge portion 371a that abuts on the front side edge of 7 in the front-rear direction and the back left edge portion 371a that are connected to the back left edge portion 371a and have a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 and are above in the assembled state. A back middle edge portion 371b that comes into contact with the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge portion 37 thereof.
The back right edge portion 371c, which is connected to 1b on the opposite side of the back left edge portion 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40 and is in contact with the ball rental operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state, Mainly prepared.

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the curved portion 371 of the main body and supports the operation handle 51, and is a right corner cover 38 arranged at the right corner portion of the front frame 14.
It is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by having a shape that does not create a gap between 0 and the shape (shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is located on the front side of the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later, in the recessed portion 1
By screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting the light emitted from the operating device 300 to the front side and producing an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an arbitrarily determined matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED device 341f is arranged to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (located on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
6 LEDs that irradiate light downward (located on the underside of the illumination support 341e)
Are placed in each of the two.

Among the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. To do. On the other hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward passes through the translucent portion 373 after passing through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310. ..

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it becomes stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), it is adjusted to the state change of the tilting device 310. It is possible to perform an effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373.

Further, as another effect control method, it is also possible to control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that irradiates the light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is changed strongly (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 is the first. By controlling the amount of light to be weakly (stepwise) changed according to the change from the first state to the second state, the light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310. The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illuminated portion 8031 can be suppressed.

The right flat surface support portion 375 comes into contact with the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right plane support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. .. As a result, the downward displacement of the illumination unit 8032 can be suppressed.

Although the details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When it comes into contact with the lower surface of 0 and the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portion 8031, the illuminated portion 8032, and the covering cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the illuminations can be widely dispersed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end portion of the illuminated portion 8032 from entering from the back surface side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the illuminated portion 8032 is in a state of entering the deepest part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end of the illuminated portion 8032 and the front end of the right flat support portion 375. The position with and matches.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the illumination portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing portion for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination portion 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-shaped plate member 14d is arranged on the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is arranged on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is sandwiched and fixed to another member (members constituting the upper plate 17 or the like), and the metal plate-shaped sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or the main body frame 14a is sandwiched between another member (a member or the like constituting the upper plate 17) arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

The sheet metal member 150 has a front frame even if a passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, a wire or a piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of the 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire having a heated tip is pressed against it, and it is possible to prevent the exemplified wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. ..

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side of the front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to the 140, and a flat plate-shaped plate-shaped portion 152 that covers the back surface of the lower portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion Not only when the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of the 145,
The illustrated wire is the passage forming unit 1 even when it is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.
It is possible to prevent the entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified for the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to make a through hole. Even so, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member from entering the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140. When such a situation occurs, for example, an exemplary wire is pressed against a portion where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness of the front and rear is reduced (a portion diagonally above the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a through hole is opened, and a case where the illustrated wire enters is exemplified.

Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation unit back member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the back side, and the cylinder lock 20 is arranged on the operation unit back member 155 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the vertical position of the position where it is to be.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction mainly by ribs formed in the front-rear direction from the outer edge portion of the long left and right plate members. Therefore, a through hole 156 through which the cylinder lock 20 is pierced in the plate member and a through hole 1 thereof.
A pair of insertion holes 157, which are bored above and below the 56 and into which screws for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 to the main body frame 14a are inserted, and a portion (left end portion) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140. Mainly includes a pair of connecting insertion holes 158 that are bored side by side, and an opening / closing restricting portion 159 that protrudes to the back side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is a connecting portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
It is arranged so as to match 48 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has a connecting insertion hole 1 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
It is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position where the protruding portion 148a, which has a columnar inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and is projected on the back side, and the lower connecting insertion hole 158 coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a screw-in portion 148b, which is formed as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation unit back member 155 is stacked on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the back surface of the operation unit are formed by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158. By aligning with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operating portion back member 1 can be easily inserted.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

The L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155 into which the connecting insertion hole 158 is bored and the lower edge at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area, and the extending wall portion thereof. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the wall portion 158a is formed in an L-shape that can be surface-contacted vertically and horizontally.

Therefore, as an alignment when assembling the operation unit back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is moved up and down with respect to the extended wall portion 148c. By contacting the surfaces on the left and right sides, the position and posture of the operation unit back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening / closing restricting unit 159 is a portion that is arranged in front of and behind the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) arranged on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and details will be described later.
The front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.
It has the effect of regulating 4 from being closed.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the back surface side of the operation portion back member 155 and is formed of synthetic resin, and is a cross section in the extension direction view in order to secure rigidity. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required while ensuring rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of other parts of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, since the strength may depend on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion formed as thin as possible. Since it can be formed by the thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, as compared with the flat cross section, it may be a curved (wave) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular corrugated cross section, or a cylindrical cross section.

Further, the opening / closing regulation unit 159 is not used as a part of the operation unit back member 155, but the main body frame 14
It may be composed of a metal portion that is bent and extended from a to the back surface side, or extends from another member fixed to the back surface side of the main body frame 14a to the back surface side. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the opening / closing restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin prevents the board surface support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk that the operator who attaches / detaches the game board 13 by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 may be injured by touching the chip or dent formed in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is arranged on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock is arranged further on the rotation tip side. It is possible to secure a long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are accidentally locked when the opening / closing restricting unit 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

As a path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter, for example, a path passing through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be completely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap of the operation device 300 is traced.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies electric power to the operation device 300 has a wiring through hole 14 formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
The harness HN3 is inserted through a1 (see FIG. 103), and the harness HN3 is a protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 103).
It is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the outer peripheral wall on the right side (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign substance such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 which is configured in a substantially case shape. Since this is difficult, it is possible to easily prevent foreign matter such as a wire from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign substance that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels uncomfortable with the result of a game may sprinkle drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operating device 300 in an affordable position is likely to be a prey to be sprinkled with drinking water, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (FIG. 1).
3) may break down.

Further, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it has a separably independent configuration, it is possible to prevent liquids such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back surface side of the main body frame 14a.

A recessed portion 15a is recessed on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300) in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep-bottomed recessed portion.
It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed in places (see, for example, FIG. 13).
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to a gap), passing through the inside of the operation device 300.
The recessed portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid falling below the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 acts as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17 (b)), and is further connected to the wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), a liquid such as drinking water is driven by the drive motor 3.
It can be hung directly on the 42 to prevent it from breaking down.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk of being exposed to a liquid such as drinking water, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate portion 321, the drinking water or the like may be exposed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhering liquid flows down to the front side and downward due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from failing.

With the above configuration, even if the player on the way back is splashed with a liquid such as drinking water, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the upper surface of the operation device 300 is wiped off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from overwhelming the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. It should be noted that FIGS. 93 to 9
FIG. 6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

FIG. 93A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93B, the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and are extended to the left from the upper end of the upward extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
The harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board, and is bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each illumination unit 8029-8033, operation device 300 or frame button 22 (FIG. 86).
Each harness connected to (see) is once connected (aggregated) to a relay board arranged in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN from the relay board.
3 is directed to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 that is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw that is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotation direction along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side that faces the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 and movable arms 182 extending from the opposite side)
It is a U-shaped portion in the top view arranged on the other side surface in the rotation direction (the side surface facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93A) and can lock the binding arm portion 183. Pair of locking parts 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 that extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 and has an opening at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183.

The binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm portion 183, while the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (with high rigidity) than that of the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section having a substantially horseshoe-shaped upper side and a fixed portion 181a having a through hole for passing a screw in the center, and the fixed portion 181a projecting from the left and right lower corners to the plate member 14d side, respectively. A pair of anti-rotation convex portions 181b to be provided, and an intermediate stopper portion that extends downward from the lower edge of the front end portion of the fixed portion 181a and whose extending tip is curved close to the plate member 14d side. A plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending to the left along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181c and the fixed portion 181c.
(See FIG. 96 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion formed from a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened, which is a portion arranged above the support plate portion 181d. 181e and
Mainly prepared.

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of detent portions 181b at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of detent convex portions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
The attitude toward d can be determined.

The intermediate stop portion 181c maintains each harness HN1 to HN3 between the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from sliding downward by narrowing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. The region (plate member 14d and intermediate stop 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape curved along the arranged circle.
It is possible to secure a large cross section (region sandwiched between 1c and 1c).

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer peripheral surface of e is fitted inside the portion on the base end side of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is pivotally supported (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly connected to the plane OS1 offset from the shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the portion that is externally fitted and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the base end. 182a and a thin plate portion 182b having a long thin plate shape connected to the opposite side of the axial support position of the base end portion 182a are mainly provided.

The base end portion 182a is the left and right end portions (the portion where the straight line connecting to the shaft is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end portion (the most with the plane OS1) in the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape portion outerly fitted to the cylinder fastening portion 181e. Side walls in the direction of rotation are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of radii of curvature are arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls gradually becomes shorter as the distance from each other approaches the plane OS1, and when the plane OS1 is reached, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a is maintained to have higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that is not intended for elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) intended for elastic deformation depending on the situation. ..

Since each pair of the binding arm portion 183 has the same shape, one of them will be described and the other will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, the narrow portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion having a width equal to the width of the root and the wide portion 183b formed wider than the narrow portion 183a are alternately spaced at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93 (b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to have a slightly larger thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), so that a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183.

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1 thereof.
It is mainly provided with a small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with 84a in between and having a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, while the small opening 184b allows the small width 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. The large width portion 183b is set to a size that cannot be passed (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is desired to operate relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When you want to lock the binding arm part 183 to the locking part 184, you can easily adjust the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm part 183 by arranging it on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided with a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted into the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , Harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner portion of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is an XCIV b of FIG. 94 (a).
-XCIVb is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14, FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is FIG. 95 (b). a) XCV
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 in line b-XCVb.

Note that FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state in which the movable arm portion 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b). b) Then
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts on a vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is shown. ..

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
It is configured to be rotatable about 160 degrees around the axis that faces up and down. This angle is normally used in view of the installation situation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the game store (the situation where the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side and rotated 90 degrees or more may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010). It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 at the time of opening and closing.

Therefore, in normal use, the movable arm portion 182 may exceed the range in which the movable arm portion 182 can rotate with respect to the main body portion 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 deteriorates due to elastic deformation and breaks.

Next, support modes of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Harness HN1-HN
Since the arrangement of the 3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent, for example, accidentally being sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and breaking the wire.

FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

Note that, in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is shown. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. To. That is, since the horizontal line between the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end portion of the upper extension wall portion 173c is the same, it was extended from the upper extension wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the axial support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the binding movable member 180 is changed to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180.
It can be made to follow the shape of 2. As a result, FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d)
), The shape of the bent portion of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 becomes a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent extreme bending deformation from occurring.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by 3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature, particularly in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B). This makes it possible to prevent disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

97 (a) and 97 (b) show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
It is a schematic top view of 3. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

Further, in FIGS. 97A and 97B, a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is shown, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematic. As an imaginary line, a member fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically illustrated by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also centered on the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12 as in the front frame 14. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b).
The base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, so that the inner frame 12
Since it corresponds to the opening and closing of the front frame 14 and the thin plate portion 182b, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 9).
6 (b), also see FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the front frame 14 regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
In the vertically long metal portion (in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left portion of the main body frame 14a of the above.
It is routed through the vicinity of the base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182). That is, by arranging the harnesses HN1 to HN3 so as to forcibly bypass them, the harness HN
It is possible to prevent the curved portions of 1 to HN3 from moving toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the operator during the work of opening and closing the front frame 14, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (fit that is curved only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Depending on the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of the wire or piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the reverse cup portion 178. , It is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, in the case where the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted and penetrated through the wire, and the wire advances toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out, and continuity is disabled.

Fraud can be quickly detected by controlling the harnesses HN1 to HN3 to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraud from gaining the profit of fraud.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burnt out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the fraudulent activity is committed until the fraudulent activity is discovered (early detection of the fraudulent activity can be achieved).

In this case, after the wire is inserted into the game area and the game area is tampered with (for example, after bending the nail to facilitate illegal winning), the ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to prevent the ball from being fired against a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, so that it is possible to prevent the illegal benefit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burnt out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is performed. The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) becomes impossible. Therefore, those who cheat
Since there is a risk that the banknotes and the remaining amount of the cards inserted in the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) cannot be collected due to one's own fraud, the deterrent against fraud is exerted. be able to.

Furthermore, if you want to commit fraud by eliminating the risk of not being able to collect the bills and the balance of the cards inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending) Even though the balance of the unit) is 0 yen, the fraudulent activity is performed without leaving the seat, so that the game machine store side can easily notice the fraudulent activity.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
At a game machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) (not shown) is output, the disconnection error (C)
By confirming the R error), the possibility of fraudulent activity can be easily grasped.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outer shape of 0 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage portion 1
The lower end of the 42 occupies a region of about two-thirds of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53 on the left side of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 remains on the right side of the ball guide opening 53. Partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy a region (a region of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53).
It is partitioned by.

The lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 on the front door side are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. S-shaped paths SL1, S in which the extension direction faces (switches) at least once on both the left and right sides.
Each includes L2.

Since the S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, it stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
Since the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large vertical dimension of the lower plate 50, a large vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area can be secured, and the lower plate 50 (and its) Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress of replenishing the balls given to the player (stress due to being required to replenish the balls from the Senryo box when the 50-minute lower plate runs out. ) Can be suppressed, and a pachinko machine 8010 can be configured.

The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 each include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension directions are bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. It has features. That is, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and the second bending on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1 are arranged with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted. The region NEa2 is provided.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 has a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE arranged on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 with the left and right sides of the characteristic portion inverted.
b2 and. In the description of the feature portion, the feature of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, among the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side in the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right. , The ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na so as to intersect the extending direction of the side wall Na, and the side wall Na extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and closer to the extending end portion. Mainly provided with a proximity wall Nc, and each wall Na,
Nb and Nc extend from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The approach wall Nc is formed by forming the surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb so as to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) opposite to the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire, small-diameter metal represented by piano wire, etc.). It functions as a surface, but the details will be described later. In the proximity wall Nc, the gap Nin between the side wall Na and the side wall Na at the lower end of the extension is the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM illegally inserted due to the shape of the first bending region NEa1.
Can be prevented from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an approach route for the wire HM to be illegally inserted, the lower plate passage portion 14 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as the entrance.
A route to the upstream side of 2 is conceivable, but in this case, the person who commits the cheating is the wire H.
M is pressed against the side wall of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side while advancing.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a cheating person, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower plate passage portion 142 on the front door side, it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can be completely entered into the gap Nin.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters the tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from further progressing, and it is possible to prevent the wire HM from being held, and it is possible to quickly detect fraudulent activity. it can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM does not get caught and further progresses, when the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM projects downward, so that the wire HM further extends.
Even if the above is advanced, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, wire HM
Is a payout device 133 arranged on the upstream side of the payout ball receiving part 143, and a foul ball receiving part 146.
It is possible to prevent the game area from being reached on the upstream side of the game area.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and the payout device 133 malfunctions to obtain an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM reaches the game area to reach the game area and the electric accessory 64.
By forcibly opening the movable device such as 0a (see Fig. 2) to make it easier to win a prize illegally, it is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act from gaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball. ..

It will be described back to FIG. 98. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed so that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE that joins the ball removal passage 147 is about twice the diameter of the sphere (more than twice in the present embodiment). As a result, when the ball flowing down the ball removing passage 147 is arranged in the confluence area CE, the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enters the confluence flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the confluence area CE). Even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility that the balls are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in the portion downstream from the confluence region CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a that connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 in the vertical direction. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The back side bottom plate portion of 40 is formed so as to project downward toward the front side.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back surface side bottom plate portion of the passage portion 145a is positioned with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of the aisle portion 145a is positioned with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is the passage portion 14
The front-rear width is set larger than that of the area on the downstream side of 5a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to have a front-rear width slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 145
When spheres stay in the aisle, the number of spheres that can be retained can be increased because a plurality of spheres can be arranged in different positions in the front-rear direction upstream of the passage portion 145, and the center of the spheres stays in the front-rear direction. Since they are prevented from lining up (they are slightly displaced from side to side and up and down), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, it is possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the confluence region CE at the same time, so that the balls can reach the confluence region CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and engaging.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow bottom surface of the ball faces to the right. An inclined plate portion 146a that inclines downward and a foul ball receiving portion 1 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
The closing portion 146b that closes the 46 and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
It mainly includes a curved guide plate portion 146c that extends from the back side bottom plate portion of the 40 to the back surface side in a plate shape and curves in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

While the ball is guided to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1 to act.
The passing position of the ball passing through the 46 to the front side can be moved to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. That is, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a and flows down can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be done.

Thereby, the period until the ball passing through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be completed by the time the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While setting the width of the 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a).
), Since the passage width is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), it is possible to prevent an illegal tool having a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure on the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIGS. 100 and 101, a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination unit 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is shown.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long on the left and right, and the left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illumination portion 8031 and the illumination portion 8032. In this lower support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370. (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 do not need to be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a, respectively. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500 and then fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are provided with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. Heavy plate unit 500R, 5 due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted.
It is possible to prevent 00L from being separated from the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 102 and 103, the main body frame 14a is on the front side of the main body frame 14a.
The state in which the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the upper panel unit 400 and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is shown.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is a recessed portion 462,482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122) are provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side thereof, and the upper frame is formed by fastening the screw through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In addition, in FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The state in which the right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole bored in the main body frame 14a, is disassembled from the main body frame 14a is shown, and the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown. And the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As an actual assembly procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Further, in the right panel unit 500, the right wall portion forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view with the right side facing the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view with the left side facing the front side is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate unit 50.
Mainly provided are vertically long plate-shaped support plate portions 510 which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) as well as 0L and 500R.

Heavy plate unit 500 with screws inserted through the support plate 510 from the back side to the front side
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and in that state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 1.
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw inserted through the 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extending portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the back side in a plate shape, and is in an assembled state. (Fig. 86
(See), a fixing plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts on the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and the same A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 bored in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens-side through holes 514 thereof. A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514 is mainly provided.

The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b having a shape that overlaps with the substrate member 512 in a front view and the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side, and the substrate member is in a state of being in contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The base portion 511b has heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Since it is possible to abut in the width direction (see FIG. 115 (b)), the heavy plate units 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress the tilt of 0R in the left-right direction. That is, it is possible to easily maintain the postures of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extension portion 51 rather than the base portion 511b
1a is displaced to the right by the plate thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511
On the front side of a, the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the fixing plate 5
On the left side surface of 11, the back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 is formed as a surface substantially facing the side surface of the base portion 511b, so that the back side end portion of the inner cover member 520 is the back side end portion of the support plate portion 510. The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 comes into contact with the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed circuit board) in which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved according to the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. .. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes of the light guide members 540 are parallel to each other from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (the left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see FIG. 107 imaginary line), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak to the light guide member. It enters the 540 and exits from any surface of the light guide member 540, and the inflow and outflow of light and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 527 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 527, the inner cover member 520 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 arranged on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw to be fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 from the back surface side. By fastening the screw to the back fastening portion 556, the outer lens member 550 becomes the support plate portion 51.
It is fixed at 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protruding portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The left-right width of the pin support hole 515 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be about twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while strictly defining the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560.

That is, when the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are in contact with the support plate portion 510 from the front side in the fastening preparation state, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically and vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protruding portion 566). The protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even if the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of the above. As a result, the protrusion 566
Is inserted into the pin support hole 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L, with respect to the support plate portion 510,
By moving the 500R up and down by the amount of the misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and the fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L has a window portion 14c (FIG. 86).
Inner cover member 520, which constitutes the right edge of (see) and is formed of a resin material that is opaque to light.
And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left heavy plate unit 500L.
The outer lens member 550, which is formed from a light-transmitting white resin material and has front end portions facing each other in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction, and the outer lens member thereof. Arranged on the right side of the 550, it is made of a light-impermeable resin material and has a light guide member 54.
Mainly includes 0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L, 500R. In addition, FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side, respectively, and the five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are shown. Is disassembled and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end of the main body plate portion 521, and is fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5.
A plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through the 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are formed longer than the short fastening portion 525 and are formed inside. A cylindrical portion that is inserted through the lens member 530 and has an outer cover member 560 and an inner cover member 520.
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws to be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 are screwed in, and a plurality of rear fastening portions into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed from the back surface side while projecting to the right side of the main body plate portion 521. 527
And mainly prepare.

In the main body plate portion 521, the front side end portion 521a has a wavy shape, and the connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in the short width portion (the portion closer to the back side) of the wavy shape. To be equipped.

The back side base portion 521b is the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b Provided is an inner side surface 521b1 that comes into contact with the left side surface (the shape matches).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion arranged in a posture of inclining to the left toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface with a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. It includes a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is screwed through at two places at the upper end portion and at one place at the lower end portion, and is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four locations above and below, and the inner lens member 530 is in the assembled state.
Functions as a window for viewing. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed from a curved shape that projects to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back surface side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is the design shape in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52.
The surface of 0 (left side) corresponds to the portion protruding to the left (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is designed to be recessed to the right and curved between the above-mentioned boundary portions.
That is, the surface of the back surface side base portion 521b is formed from a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the front surface side of the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a recess that tends to be a dead space is formed on the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 can be effectively utilized. Efficiency can be improved.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is a main body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front end portion 531a of 31 has a wavy shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending to the right from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is bored in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction. A support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c is provided.

The support hole 531b is formed in a wavy front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the back side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a corrugated rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where it can come into contact with the light guide member 540 is arranged on the back side thereof. .. That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied in the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531d formed in the left-right direction at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction so as to allow the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned with each other.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending to the right from the upper and lower edge portions of the connecting plate portion 521c.
A plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect 2a and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b and are mainly provided.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended so as to fill the gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a and the light guide member 540. That is,
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that projects to the left toward the back side, so the left-right width becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is at the tip in top view). (Triangular shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 formed so as to project to the left from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the overhanging side, which is convex in a wavy shape and has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a grid pattern on both the left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate that is formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is directed to the left and right via the light guide member 540 and is applied to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. To. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is from the end surface on the back surface side (LED 512a side) to the front surface side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, LED 512a).
) Is a processed part for changing the light from) into uniform surface emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to guide the light guide member 5.
It is emitted from the surface of the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a template having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of the bottom circle of about 1 mm are dispersed in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against a resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but a transparent resin is preferable, and an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, and an amorphous olefin resin are preferable. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
Acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Of these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.
Can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the light guide member 540 is set to have a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed from a wave shape in which the shape of the front end portion is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530, and is formed to the left and right. Is also formed from a wavy wavy shape.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. About the degree of wavy
There is no particular limitation, but the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm on the curved surface.
It is preferably as follows. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design in which distortion after thermal bending is small, practical mechanical characteristics are maintained well, and three-dimensional degrees of freedom can be imparted. ..

The details of the wavy shape that undulates to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
It is located to the left at the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, and is located to the right at the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520). It has a wavy shape.

As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material on which the concave portion is formed. As the method of thermal bending of the present invention, a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (female type) curved in a state of being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + 10 to 40 ° C.
The base material is pressed against a mold having a male mold). More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is set to be equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not deformed, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process. It is possible to suppress fluctuations in the reflection angle of. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in brightness and uneven brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such a heating temperature condition, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate and the main body plate portion 5 thereof.
It mainly includes a fastening portion 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the 41 and into which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
At positions other than the above, there is no portion that penetrates in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate having no holes at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is arranged at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553, projecting to the right and passing through the outer cover member. A visible overhanging portion 554, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion protruding from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and supporting plate portion from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of back fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 is formed so as to follow the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540. That is, in the outer lens member 550, the front side end portion 551a extending to the left from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forming a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a wavy shape and is arranged so as to be slightly displaced from the front side end portion of the light guide member 540 to the front side. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. To.

The front end portion 551a is located at a position where the curve forming the wave shape is switched in the front-rear direction.
It is provided with a plurality of convex portions 551b which are convex to the front side and are internally fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

On the surface of the front end portion 551a opposite to the light guide member 540, to the front side,
Innumerable bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115A) that bulge in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front end surface can be in a strip-shaped light emission mode in which the light is continuously connected vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a deep recessed portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554. As a result, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the back surface fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing the support plate portion 510 is screwed is arranged on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the arrangement of the screws). it can). As a result, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) that is arranged to face the player can be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved according to the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and the light guide member is in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). 5
The 40 and the main body plate portion 551 come into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 114 (b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction of being arranged so as to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 and
It is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced from the position, and it is possible to accurately inject light from the LED 512a into the light guide member 540.

The outer cover member 560 is a receiving surface that can accept the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. There are a plurality of elongated holes formed in an oval shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and the screw is inserted from the opposite side. The upper fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 are receiving surfaces capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520.
The lower side to be fastened has a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in a long hole shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a screw is inserted from the opposite side. The long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front end portion of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561.
It is a receiving surface that can accept 26, and is formed by a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and from the opposite side. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a convex portion from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of protrusions 566 to be formed.

The upper fastening portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is a covering cover 3
The left and right claws forming the support groove 376 of 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as a groove to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the covering cover 370 causes the right panel unit 500 to project to the front side. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stablely supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted inside (
It is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554). Therefore, since the path to access the gap between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 in the left-right direction can be narrowed, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

With reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500
The method of assembling R will be described. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in the CXIIb-CXIIb line of FIG. 112 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 in line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113 (a).

In addition, in FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 112 (b), the state in which the convex portion 551b is arranged on the back surface side of the support hole 531 b is illustrated, and in FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b), the convex portion is provided. Part 55
The state in which 1b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front side end portion 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact with each other in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2 (b)), the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the convex portions 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540) and fasten and fix the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, whereby the light is blocked by the screws. Since the region can be reduced, the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously guided at the time of fastening. When a load is applied to the optical member 540, the light guide member 540
Can be reduced in the area where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end (near the tapered tip) of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought closer from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the left heavy plate unit 500L has an inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530. , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R
Surfaces that are parallel to each other are formed along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that allows contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Since it functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right heavy plate unit 500R in the front-rear direction, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 has the left heavy plate unit 5 on the support plate portion 510.
When the 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures can be considered for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, after that, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.
This is a method of fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. Then, these two procedures can be similarly adopted when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, the right panel unit 50 can be assembled and disassembled in two steps, so that the operator performing maintenance or the like can use either procedure depending on the location of the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble and assemble 0, and it is possible to shorten the working time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are required to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R.
Need to slide each other in the plane direction. Convex portions 551b, 551c and support holes 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the mating with. When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid with each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this way, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b are fitted, the right panel unit 500 is pried open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit is disassembled. It helps prevent fraudulent activity that travels inside the 500 and enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and if the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), the left By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that travel inside the right panel unit 500 and enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. .. In addition, in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the back surface side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is left and right due to the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the plane of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114 (b)), light is condensed on the side that forms the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side that forms the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape having a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 toward the opening 524 can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at a position corresponding to the opening 524 arranged at the uppermost position among the plurality of openings 524. It can be used for directing by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode (condensed or diffused) of the light effect executed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as the boundary. It can be provided, and the effect of production can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, the mode of light production on both the left and right sides can be different. ..

The light guide member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, with respect to the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 also becomes the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width as the opening 524 moves upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1).
> R2) Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light is different for each opening 524, so that the LED 512a can be visually recognized through the opening 524. The amount of light to be produced can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light as compared with the lower opening 524.

Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, that is, the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed in the same manner as the radius of curvature R1 (R4≈R1) and is the center of the concave surface. The shape is such that the normal line coming out of is slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower opening 524 can be strengthened, the light effect can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be seen by the player. It can be emitted upward.

As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as lengths connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, and the width of the opening 524 that faces the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2. The width of the opening 524 arranged to face each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 arranged to face the portion having the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced by about 524 of the lower openings among the 524 openings (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the radius of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the radius of curvature R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a place where the degree of light focusing is weak (for example, radius of curvature R)
In the portion 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while in a location where the degree of light focusing is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3). The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid excessive light incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the light emitting mode for each opening 524 uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114B are points corresponding to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. It is placed in the middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the boundary region KE of the opening 524. Here, the region KE is defined as a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the region K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in the area KE, LED 512
The light emitted from a in the front-rear direction is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c)).
(See), the process proceeds in a state of being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is the inner cover member 520.
Since it is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the above, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small even if the light condensing action is reduced.

On the other hand, in the region KE, the light guide member 54 is formed to have a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming the convex shape to the left side in the region KE, the concave shape can be formed on the right side, and the portion where the light is diffused and the portion where the light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. ..

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning on 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without a gap. At this time, the shape of the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from the vertical position of the region KE intersects at the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being darkly visually recognized in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, the light emitted from the region KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhanging portion 554 (FIG. 106)
(See) can be sharpened in the light emission mode.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary portion of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at the position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding part (the part corresponding to the area KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) is emitted in a band shape. Can be made to.

In the area KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The effect may be performed by using the light that reaches the front end portion.

That is, although it is not visible through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
By preparing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 105) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting a high degree of jackpot expectation for that effect, the position of the player's eyes can be set. , The right panel unit 500 can be moved to a side away from the game board 13 from the front end. As a result, the degree of eye fatigue of the player can be reduced, and the player can play for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the region KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when visually recognized from the left side surface, while is visually recognized by the player from the right side surface through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, and the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by a visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the player who is cheating is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the player who is cheating can escape. Can be prevented.

By inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the clerk.

FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is FIG. 115.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line of (a).

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end surface (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end portion (LED 512) on the front side of the light guide member 540.
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the lateral width dimension is reduced with the same gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 that faces the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion that faces the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes long, the taper is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the light emitting mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portion near the support hole 531b and arranged at a position recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portion, the portion near the support hole 531c is darker and easier to see than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 at a portion facing the support hole 531b.
Since the width dimension (thickness) of the end face of the light guide member 540, which is located opposite to the support hole 531c, is formed larger than that of the end face of 0, the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to secure a large area of the surface that emits light.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is determined by the support hole 53.
The amount of light that can be visually recognized in the portion near 1b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be alleviated. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be easily made uniform (small difference in strength) over the top and bottom.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of forming the light guide member 540 to be curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It is diffused and progresses to the outside.

On the contrary, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of curving the light guide member 540. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, the light emitting mode (roughness, lightness and darkness) can be different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, the player can visually recognize the light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
Since 0 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b), it is refracted toward the player side instead of right beside it (see the arrow of the imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). The imagination in FIG. 115 (b). The line arrow is
An example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540 is shown). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

It will be described back to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101. The upper panel unit 400 is a top plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and are arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
It is a unit fitted to and supported from the lower side, and is arranged at the upper end portion of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 100) and the front surface of the upper frame member 410. An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and a speaker assembly 450 arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly prepared. Note that in FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is not shown (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit on the front side surface of which is decorated to indicate a model name or the like, and is L.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the contained LED
Produce with light.

The illumination unit 401 is a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-shaped portion 404 extending horizontally from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion above the plate-shaped portion 404 that protrudes from the wavy wall portion 403 toward the back side in a tubular shape and is inside the tubular shape. A tubular portion 405 whose shape is formed so as to penetrate the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 which are arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open sides, and a space is formed inside. The included LED is arranged on the electronic board, and is
The electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
This is a part that improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical misalignment of the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. A horizontally long groove shape that vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a recess on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410.

The tubular portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic substrate on which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed with the upper side plate member 14e, and access to the inside is possible. Formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is a view of the upper frame member 41.
It is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A lower edge plate member formed from a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. The 420, the right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L, which is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, is fitted into the main body member 411 from the back side to the position where it projects from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed by the right corner support member 430R from the back side. It mainly includes a lens member 440 that is restricted from falling off to the back side and constitutes an illumination unit 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long left and right member in which openings for passing vibration waves (voice) generated from the speaker assembly 450 are formed on both left and right sides, and a speaker cover 27 is arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and the portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that is arranged to face the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 are larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. A support through hole 413 that is formed through a slightly larger inner shape,
It mainly includes an opening 414 formed through the upper part of the right corner in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in a wavy shape substantially the same as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. Thereby, when the illumination unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410, the alignment in the left-right direction can be easily performed.

The support through hole 413 is inserted with the tubular portion 405 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
As a result, the wiring extending through the tubular portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back surface side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring to which one end is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being attached and detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
As a result, the support through hole 413 can be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that makes the lens member 440 visible in front view. On the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), the LED 14 is located at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The e2 is arranged so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side on the lower right corner surface, and recessed from the back side on the lower left corner surface. The supported groove 418 to be supported, the fastening portion 419 which is arranged symmetrically in the vicinity of the upper end portion and is formed so that the screw can be screwed in, and the second screw which is formed so as to be screwable in the upper and lower positions. Mainly includes a fastening portion 419b.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the lower edge plate member 420 at the opposite position (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state thereof (FIG. 86).
(See), the load (weight, etc.) given by the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 through the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the illuminated portion 8031, and the fitted state (the fitting state (
(See FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 40 passes through the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
The load (weight, etc.) given from 0 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is arranged at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is projected in a rib shape from the base portion to a position where the tip portion is not reached. The expansion rib 419a to be formed is provided.

As will be described later, the expansion rib 419a has the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e attached to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. It is a part sandwiched between and (see FIG. 125 (a)), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are provided with ribs having the same shape at three positions at 120 ° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
It is formed at a position corresponding to 2,482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portion 462,482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the main body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and the wavy wall portion 422 thereof. After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end portion, and has a cross section L.
A plurality of L-shaped extending portions 423 formed in a character shape and a plurality of portions arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left and right center positions (upper end positions of the curved shape) of the main body plate portion 421 and penetrating in the vertical direction. It mainly includes an opening 424 composed of a through hole having a small diameter.

In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface. A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the position where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, and it is possible to improve the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
It is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 is passed (exhausted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 which are circular openings for passing vibrations generated toward the front side in the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed through in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light radiated to the lens member 440 through the lens member 440 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together with the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connecting holes 469, and the left and right ends. At the lower end, it is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. The speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R, 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
Since it is composed of 0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the speaker assembly 4 will be described.
The description of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R has a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an audio device that converts an electric signal into an audible audio wave so that it can be heard, and the speaker 451 is inserted through a through hole 466 to form a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. It is formed with an outer shape that almost matches the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side and the outer shape of the front side assembly 460 in front view.
Rear assembly 48 that forms a space with the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)
Mainly includes 0 and.

The speaker 451 closes the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460 so that the front assembly 460
It is attached to the speaker and emits a directing sound in connection with the game.
A through hole in which a speaker connecting wire 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire composed of a covering portion covering the copper wire) is bored in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102). The terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
By (see), it is configured to be connected to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front surface of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 coated with 54 is mounted on the front assembly 460 with the front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front portion of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is received. It is possible to play back and output with high sound quality without making it. Further, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front surface portion of the speaker 451 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front side assembly 460 is a main body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open back side.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 from the vertical width outward, and the main body 461.
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461. A through hole 466 that is passed through in a circular shape, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 that are ribbed from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side, and are inserted into the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 for fastening and fixing the screwed screws, a connecting hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a main body on the tip side. A front side recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back surface side to the front side at the lower end portion of the portion 461T is mainly provided.

The main body 461 is a region divided in the left-right direction, which is a base end side main body 461B arranged on the side where the through hole 466 is formed and a center side in the left-right direction of the base end side main body 461B (FIG. 12).
1 Mainly includes an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side) and a tip side main body 461T connected to the center side of the intermediate main body 461M in the left-right direction (left side of FIG. 121). The base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the tip end side main body portion 461T are continuously formed with a space formed between them and the rear assembly 480.

The main body portion 461 includes a back side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in the front view thereof. The back side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion (an edge portion on which a flange or the like is not formed on the inside) without a barb on the inside.

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Will be done.

The extension plate 463 includes a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 463
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
Through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480, which is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e.
And through the through hole 463a, it is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the back side of the main body frame 14a, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened as the screw is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between them (the resin material is sandwiched and fastened and fixed to the hard material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed to be smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 that passes through the wiring passage recess 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the illustration of the back side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage recess 464 is visually illustrated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. Therefore, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed. The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. As a result, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through hole 465 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed.

The passage forming rib 467 is in contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without a gap in the front and rear, and is bent a plurality of times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480.
It is a rib forming (see FIG. 123). This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protrudes outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a main body 48 formed in a cup shape that is long on the left and right and has an open front side.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular tip from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 481 from the vertical width outward, and the main body 481.
From the wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting to the front side of the main body, the light passing through hole 485 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape toward the front side and a fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460.
A plurality of through holes 488 formed through as through holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front side to back side at positions corresponding to the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Mainly includes a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The main body 481 is extended in a plate shape to the front side so as to surround the outer circumference of the main body 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the back side plate, and the front assembly 460. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that is internally fitted to the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H of
It has 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes a double wall portion fitted with the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire circumference of the outer circumference thereof, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions that are projected toward the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position that sandwiches the wiring pressing convex portion 484 on the left and right at intervals that allow the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. It is equipped with 481Ha.

The auxiliary convex portion 481Ha is a pair of convex portions that prevent the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being displaced when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surface of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha has a tapered shape that expands to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 45
Even if 3 is displaced from the wiring passage recess 464 and is about to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is configured to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side. Through hole 483
The screws inserted through a are the co-tightening holes 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1 from the back side of the main body frame 14a.
It is inserted through the co-tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e, and the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46.
It passes through the through hole 463a of 0 and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended to the extent that the screws are tightened by screwing the screws inserted into the through holes 483a through the upper side plate member 14e from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing convex portion 484 is projected along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 and is formed with a width of being fitted in the wiring passage recess 464, and is larger than the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464. The speaker connecting wire 453 is convexly provided with a convex length slightly shorter than the outer peripheral diameter of the covering portion.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464.
By passing the 53, the covering portion of the speaker connecting wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is created between the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing recess 464 and the speaker connecting wire 453. Can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing through.

The light passing through hole 485 is an LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
It is a through hole through which the light emitted from 2 toward the lens member 440 is passed. The light passage through hole 485 is formed from a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed from a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming ribs 487 are formed at the same positions as the passage forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear, and a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 are formed in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. It is a rib forming a bending passage (see FIG. 123) that bends by rotation. This bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (voice) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and the front side wall portion 481H.
It is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back surface side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed so that the front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction at that time. That is, a compressive force toward the back side is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is subjected to the compressive force.
67 and 487 are elastically deformed in the front-rear direction and close the gap between them (FIG. 124 (b)).
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and the rib 487 may be bent to the left or right, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, the back surface is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). It can be reinforced with the strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be done.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front concave portion 471, and forms an opening jointly with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly protruding outward from the outer shape), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the opening of the opening 424 It is placed at a position that surrounds the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a rear assembly 48.
It is a front view of 0. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), for ease of understanding,
The speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the front-side assembly 460 and the rear-side assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are developed so that the surfaces facing each other face the front side of the paper is shown. That is, by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically at the left and right centers of the paper surface, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be determined. Can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base end side main body 46 of the front assembly 460 is inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the front end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed inside (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and are alternately vertically arranged toward the left side. Ribs 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (5 locations in the present embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 is formed at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between the 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the back side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d are connected.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bending passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
Where the vibration wave generated from the above travels linearly, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is left (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) arranged on the L side) and closest in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U directions).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 after being arranged on the lower side, and is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) closest to the left and right direction. , Rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the oscillating wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the oscillating wave Ws is secured longer than the left and right width of the space. can do.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the oscillating wave Ws passes through the opening formed from the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and the generation of the standing wave by the oscillating wave Ws is suppressed. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 462, 463b has the same action as the passage forming rib 467.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front side recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b located above the recessed portion 472 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the (arrow L, U direction).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b also have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of the assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wiring pressing convex portion 4 that presses the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 which are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction from 84 and are arranged at a plurality of places (5 places in this embodiment) alternately up and down toward the left side.
It includes 87d and 487e.

Since the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 481.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is assembled on the front side 4
Each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of 60 is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and is arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

Since the actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the recessed portions 482, 483b have the same action as the passage forming rib 487.
Can also be caused by. That is, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the upper left between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b located above the recessed portion 482 and located on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in a direction (arrows L, U). Therefore, the recess 48
In addition to the effect produced at the time of assembly, 2,483b also has an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the vertical width of the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and the space is once narrowed down at a position where the recessed portions 462 and 482 and the recessed portions 463b and 483b are arranged vertically. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position further away from the speaker 451 and then communicates with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the base end side main body 461B side to which the speaker is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (voice) output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be obtained.
In search of an exit, the process proceeds to the tip side main body 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) in order, and the speaker assembly. Sound is emitted to the outside of the three-dimensional 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is an internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and a recessed portion 47.
Since it is in direct contact with the outside atmosphere of the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed by 1,491, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be heard. It is possible to play back and output with high sound quality without having to worry about it.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound having the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 is recessed 471,491. It becomes possible to emit sound from the opening formed by. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 does not cancel each other out in the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase with each other. That is, it becomes possible to amplify the deep bass. This will
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can produce a realistic effect.
It is possible to raise the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

In the present embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the back side of the speaker 451 is the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 to produce the game by the bass sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

For tuning the sound of vibration waves Ws (voice), set the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rear assembly 48 of the front assembly 460
The path of the oscillating wave Ws is defined as a path for avoiding each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of 0. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the 7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the extension length in the vertical direction.

In this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front assembly 460
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of 67d, 467e and rear assembly 480
In addition to the above purposes, d and 487e are arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by arranging the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced, and the fastening portion 468 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the expansion rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125 (a)), and each rib portion 46 is pressed.
The 7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plate 436 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 433 and 48
When a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a of No. 3 and the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c and 4
By bringing the 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
Deformation of 0 can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
With 7d, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced.

Further, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions in which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is attached to the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing with 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of 0 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482, an upward load is applied to the upper end portion from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. However, in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, so that the recessed portions 14e1 are recessed. The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from the plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is performed. It can be easily suppressed.

In such a fraudulent act, a wire, a piano wire, or the like is illegally invaded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 has a front recessed portion 471. In addition to being formed in a closed box shape except for the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passing recess 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through an opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly is passed through an opening different from the inserted portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e with the tip protruding from the 450.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connecting wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speaker 451 so that the wire or piano wire can be used. It is possible to increase the distance between the front recessed portion 471 and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, which are the locations where the above and the like are allowed to enter the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even when such fraudulent activity is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent activity can be lowered, and it is easy to prevent the profit of the fraudulent activity.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R in the CXXXIVb-CXXXIVb line of FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (c). Is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 124 (a).
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the Vd direction view. In addition, FIG. 124 (a)
) And FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is omitted. ..

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the back side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side. , Outer surface 481Ho of front side wall 481H of rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b))
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side, and the inner side surface 461H.
The shape is such that it fits with i in the assembled state. As a result, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the back side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front side end portion of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed so that the rib portions that abut against each other have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the proximal end side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body 46
Compared with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the oscillating wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M. As a result, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the front end side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body 461M. It is largely secured in a mode that bulges in the front-rear direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the tip-side main body 461T can be temporarily retained in the tip-side main body 461T and emitted at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, such as making it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) shows the front assembly 46 in the CXXXV-CXXXV line of FIG. 124 (a).
0, rear side assembly 480, upper frame member 410, main body frame 14a and upper side plate member 14e, FIG. 125 (b) is a front side assembly 460 in the CXXVb-CXXXVb line of FIG. 124 (a), rear It is a partial sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, A portion that sandwiches the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the expansion rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front side assembly 460, the rear side assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , Front side assembly 460, rear side assembly 480, upper side plate member 14e and metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is fastened at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460
It is configured as a portion for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e without going through the rear assembly 480.

The main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are co-tightened to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the back surface side is arranged inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is a recessed portion 462.
It is arranged inside the 482 (the portion extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, so that the speaker assembly 450R on the other side
The conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in the 450L is avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being distorted.

In the present embodiment, at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are brought into contact with each other on a surface (see FIG. 125 (a)), while the speaker assembly 450 At the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected toward the front side at a portion facing the lower end portion of the rear side assembly 480. The protruding portion and the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 abut in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e on the entire surface, and is in a contact mode in which line contact is made particularly at the lower end portion.

In this case, since the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and in contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and comes into contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed by synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be arranged, or a glass member may be arranged. A member made of ebony may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or another commercially available member may be arranged.

In particular, when a metal member is arranged, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel and the like. By using these metals, the sound can be thickened.

Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) and the like are applicable. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, regarding the shape, it may be projected in the shape of a long plate, may be projected in the shape of spikes, or may be projected in a manner of being scattered in a rounded tip. Further, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to the case where they are fixed, and may be connected in a floating shape.

The arrangement of the portion that functions as the insulator described above is the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, it may be the back surface of the upper end portion of the speaker assembly 450, the back surface of the left and right end portions of the speaker assembly 450, or the speaker assembly 4
It may be on the side or front of 50.

For example, when arranging it on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator is formed into a tubular shape, is arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member that functions as an insulator, and it functions as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e, and an insulator depending on how tight the screws are inserted into the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the degree of contact with the members (loads applied to each other) and adjust the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 still has the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) and the connecting hole 469 thereof.
A screw that has the same shape as the above and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, and a screw inserted into the through hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right positions where the through hole is arranged. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e, it is possible to prevent the speaker assembly 450 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41
In addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a, 0 is the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1).
A screw inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) to fasten and fix the screw. As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 is not loaded. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened and fixed. It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Further, the same thing as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be obtained.
This also applies to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the main body frame 14a which is connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the relationship of contact can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. .. Note that FIG. 127
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b are separated from each other in the front-rear direction for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. Arranged.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines rearward toward the left from the right end portion of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13 and the central portion is formed in an open cup shape. .. The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end arranged inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting to the front side toward the left in a state of natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 is jointly with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a.
A tapered shape is formed that expands to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is arranged in the left-right direction. As a result, the workability when the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXXV of FIG. 127 (b).
FIG. 129 (a) and FIG. 129 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in line IIIa, which is a side view of the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13. Is. Note that FIGS. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128 (a) shows the game board 13 whose left end portion has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12. 128 (b) and 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly is completed on the inner frame 12, and FIG. 129 (b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly on the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configurations of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 are omitted and shown.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 is first temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent, and then the game board 13 is assembled.
The left end portion of the above is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture of being rotated around an axis facing in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is supported. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, but in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support portion 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other.
Can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a).
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 about the contact position between the back side edge of 1 and the front surface of the game board 13. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. As a result, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
Regulated by 2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-shaped portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
In the guide rib 1 which supports the game board 13 from below and the front upper end portion is scraped as an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1s are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the trailing edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in the top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be smoothly advanced by riding the game board 13 on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side portion. .. Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
It is possible to improve workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rearward inclination of 013.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the rear inclination at the time of installation of the game store. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board surface support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state, which will be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the rotating front claw member 620 and the regulated front claw member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are the game board 13.
Since it is configured to evacuate from the approach path of the game board 13, the workability of the assembling work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotating claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to the fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 change their states almost at the same time.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is restricted. FIG. 129 (a
) And FIG. 129 (b), the board surface support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 (the game board 13 is on the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d can be stably attached and detached by changing the state of the board surface support device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the back side, the game board 13 rotates with the vicinity of the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, according to the principle of leverage, the rear claw member 64 is rotated via the game board 13.
The force required to apply a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has a left end portion and a left end front support portion 12a.
And since it is supported at two points above and below by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in the fixed state). Even if there is, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be lowered.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) to close the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 against the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted to the vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13
It is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board, is connected to wirings connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be able to change its position in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the lower board support device 600 and to which the wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like are connected on the back surface. It is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection of the game board 13 in the rotation direction. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface support device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower frames are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 having the same configuration are arranged facing each other, one board support device 600 will be described and the other board support 600 will be omitted.

130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front view of the board surface support device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. In addition, FIG. 130
(A) and FIG. 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board surface support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b) show the game board 1 by the board surface support device 600.
The release state in which the fixing of 3 is released is shown in the figure. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the U-shaped open side formed by the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board surface support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a rotary front claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, and rotation thereof. A regulated front claw member 630 that is rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 that is arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the rotating front claw member 620. Rotating rear claw member 6 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is inserted and fixed to the rotating front claw member 620.
40 and are mainly provided.

The frame member 610 consists of a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are part of the main body plate portion 611 and are arranged facing each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , The plate portion 6 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
A circular arc recess 614 recessed in 11a from below and a plate portion 61 located vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is provided by a rod-shaped regulation rod 615 that is inserted and fixed in 1a, and a screw that extends from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and is inserted into the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, which are fastened and fixed to the above, are mainly provided.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. 1st shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form the support hole 612.
Is fixed to. The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the rotary front claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotary front claw member 620 is a part of a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged to face each other on the left and right sides and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and the plate portions 621a that penetrate the plate portions 621a in a straight line. A pair of support holes 623 that are formed and the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621.
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 that are formed through the back side portion of a in a straight line and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the regulation front claw member 63 is simultaneously inserted.
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of 0, and the third shaft member P63 is the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is arranged to face each other on the left and right sides, and is a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by the extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1 and the upper edge of the plate portion 621a are connected. The connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, and the back side extending plate 621c extending from the back side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b. Part 621a
The hanging back plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the back side end portion of 2 toward the opposite plate portion 621a, and the hanging back plate portion 621d from the lower end portion of the hanging back plate portion 621d. It mainly includes a front side extension plate 621e that is inclined toward the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be at right angles to each other.

The rear extending plate 621c is arranged so as to be in contact with the torsion spring NBb on the lower surface thereof. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134 (a)), while the torsion spring is in the process of changing the state to the fixed state. By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb becomes the main body plate 611.
Begins to contact.

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the completion, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated on the operator side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board surface support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in the direction in which the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d are brought close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction in which the lower end portion of the claw member 640 after rotation is separated from the back side wall of the main body plate portion 611.

The regulation front claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate portion 631 formed in a side view shape by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 that are formed through the plate portion 631a to be formed in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the second shaft member P62, and the front connecting plate 631b that connects the plate portions 631a are inclined from the lower end to the front side. 633, and a curved surface 634 formed to be curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a are mainly provided.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion arranged to face the front frame 14, and is a plate surface support device 600.
Is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the is released.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby restricting the free posture change of the regulation front claw member 630.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending the sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and is arranged so as to face each other on the left and right sides. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b that connects the pair of supported holes 642 that are formed through the plate portion 641a in a straight line and are pivotally supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a to the back side. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in the released state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the tilt angle is such that the back surface of the game board 13 is in contact with the surface. It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. In addition, in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process of changing the board surface support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135.
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunction cover member 171 arranged close to the board surface support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board surface support device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the released state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135 (b).
The fixed state of the board surface support device 600 is shown in the figure. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 just by performing a simple operation of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 to the back side via the game board 13 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving upward from the first shaft member P61). Therefore, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after rotation.

Here, as described above, the regulation front claw member 630 is subjected to an urging force in a direction close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the regulation front claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand
The posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the regulated front claw member 630 and the regulating rod 615.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotating front claw member 6
In No. 20, the front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is arranged is tilted, while the front side of the regulation front claw member 630 rises in a manner of separating from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulation rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and is a second shaft member P.
While in contact with the resistance portion 634a that intersects the circle centered on 62 (FIGS. 134 (a) to 13).
(Up to 5 (a)), the front end of the regulated front claw member 630 rises as the rotating front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the regulated front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the rotating front claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistive portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back surface side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulation rod 615.
When the regulation rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the regulation front claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the regulation front claw member 630 is released. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (FIGS. 135 (a) to 135.
See (b)).

The angle range in which the regulated front claw member 630 rises and operates (FIGS. 134 (a) to 135 (a).
), Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end of the regulated front claw member 630, is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, the operation is performed by the downward load. Since the posture change of the regulated front claw member 630 at the time becomes a posture change (posture change in the rising direction) in the direction facing the downward load, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the regulated front claw member against the downward load becomes excessive. The posture change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back extension plate 621c, the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 without the game board 13 being pushed into the back.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, so that the rotating front claw member 620 is applied.
Can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to prevent the rotating front claw member 620 from tilting. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship with the inclined extension plate 633 of the regulation front claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connecting plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 comes into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
Rubbing friction occurs between the and the game board 13. As a result, the game board 1 in the state of FIG. 134 (b)
It is possible to prevent 3 from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, when a load is applied to the game board 13.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side due to the reaction.

Here, in the case where the front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the rotation front claw member 620 is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the mode of contact between the multifunctional cover member 171 provided and the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stable at a halfway angle. There is a possibility that it may occur.

The board surface support device 600 stabilizes at a halfway angle, and in that state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).
If the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 becomes short, which may hinder the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 by the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunctional functions arranged on the front frame 14 are arranged. When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 come into contact with each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 notice that the board surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

When the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is fixed, and the back surface of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunction cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulated front claw Depending on the mode of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 reaches the fixed state or the board surface support device 600 does not reach the fixed state and stabilizes at a halfway angle (exclusively). The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunction cover member 171 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the regulated front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), The regulation front claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135A, the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 in the state immediately before the rotating front claw member 620 is fixed, the front end portion of the rotating front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the clerk to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
The situation in which the front frame 14 does not close is solved until the front frame 14 is installed in a stable manner. In this case, the multifunction cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600
When a load is applied to the board surface support device 600, the board surface support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

Therefore, the workability of the work of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 are in contact with the board surface support device 600 in the released state (FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 toward the back side. That is, the game board 13 displaces the rear claw member 640 after rotation, and the front claw member 620 is rotated accordingly to change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end portion of the regulated front claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with less resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135A, the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. Game board 13 in this state
When moving (tilting) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the torsion spring NBb given to the rotating front claw member 620 via the rotating rear claw member 640 Is given as resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13 reacts to the load.
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end portion of the above from moving (tilting) to the front side.

Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the regulation front claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the regulation rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the rotating front claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is used as the center. The non-resisting portion 634b comes into contact with the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the non-resistive portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), and the regulation rod 615 is provided.
A curved surface is formed in which the radius centered on the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 toward the portion in contact with the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the back side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135A, and the rotating front claw member 620 rotates, so that the second shaft member P62
Is displaced, the non-resistive portion 634b and the regulation rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance given to the regulation front claw member 630 from the regulation rod 615 is reduced for a moment, so that the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and FIG. 135 The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multifunctional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship separated from the regulation front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Even so, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position in the state immediately before the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be set to the regulation front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. After that, the board surface support device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board surface support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not come into contact with the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotating front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 is a multifunctional cover member 171. It is possible to operate while avoiding the interference of (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed when the board surface is replaced). , The work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

When the board surface support device 600 is released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633 is used.
To rotate the regulated front claw member 630 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulation rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulation rod 6 in the rotation direction).
Since it is not in contact with 15), the regulated front claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force.
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board surface support device 600 can be released.

When the board surface support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the displaced rear claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board surface support device 600 is released.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), the game board 1 is in the released state.
The upper end surface of No. 3 comes into contact with the lower surface of the back surface extending plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in a configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes as in the present embodiment, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are different from each other in the vertical direction. , There is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the regulated front claw member 630 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released, and the rotation front claw member 620 and the rotation rear claw member 64.
The operation of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the rotating front claw member 6 that supports the game board 13 is compared with the amount of displacement of the regulated front claw member 630.
The amount of displacement of 20 and the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the regulated front claw member 630 is displaced to the extent that the regulated front claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the return to the regulated rod 615 is restricted), the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, the displacement of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the rear claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the rotation front claw member 620. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13).
During the transition to 4 (a)), the rear claw member 640 can be displaced in a direction to widen the angle between the front claw member 620 and the rear claw member 640 against the urging force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that.

Therefore, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out to the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the displacement amount of the front claw member 620, so that the game board is supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600. The displacement of the front-rear position of 13 can be suppressed. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. 136 to 139 are CXXXVI- of FIG. 86.
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. In addition, in FIGS. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is shown in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 136, the release state of the board surface support device 600, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, and in FIG. 138, the board surface support device 600 is at a predetermined angle (about 25 °) from the released state to the fixed state side. ) In FIG. 139, the state immediately before the board surface support device 600 is fixed is shown, and the plate thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board surface support device 600 is shown by an imaginary line. Will be done.

From FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 and the opening / closing restricting unit 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. For ease of understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
The opening / closing restricting unit 159 cross-sectionally viewed in FIG. 37 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 138 and 139.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board surface support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board surface support device 600, the game board 13
It is permissible to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is removed, but it is restricted to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the board surface support device 600 is avoided. .. In addition, since the game board 13 is arranged on the back side as compared with the arrangement when the board surface support device 600 is released, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600, it is permissible to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the rotation front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (FIG. 1).
38), the opening / closing restricting unit 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotating front claw member 620 by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the rotating front claw member 620 is due to the action of the regulating rod 615. (Fig. 138 clockwise direction) and the direction of rotation of the regulated front claw member 630 (Fig. 138)
As described above, it is difficult to carry out with a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive when the direction is opposite to the counterclockwise direction (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, it is restricted to close the front frame 14 regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, the lower end portion on the front side of the game board 13 and the extension plate 621c on the back side may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of restricting the closure of the frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the rotary front claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the opening / closing restricting unit 159 , Interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

Further, in this state, when the rotating front claw member 620 is to be rotated by applying a load toward the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation front claw member 620 is rotated by the action of the regulating rod 615. Direction (FIG. 138 clockwise) and direction of rotation of regulated front claw member 630 (FIG. 13)
8 Counterclockwise direction) is not the opposite direction, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the regulation front claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing restricting portion 159, and the board surface support device 600
Is allowed to be closed, so that the front frame 14 can be closed.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIGS. 140 and 141, a state in which the cover member for closing the back surface of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12 is shown.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 142 (b).
Is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then flipped back and forth. .. That is, in FIG. 143 (b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is a base member centered on a base member 710 formed of metal or die casting and a right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state that partially covers the front surface of the 710 (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state that opens the front surface of the base member 710 (FIG. 23 (Fig. 23)).
A ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported with and from a)).
And mainly prepare.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721 and is locked to the base member 710 by a hook or the like that elastically deforms, is arranged on the front side of the base member 710, and is a base member 711 formed of a synthetic resin or the like. To regulate the postures of the launching solenoid 701 arranged on the front side, the launching rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launching solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731. A plurality of fastening portions 716, which are cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 to the front side, and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed. 718, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 are mainly provided.

The foundation member 711 is a locking portion 7 in which a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner portion and a hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction can be locked.
13 and the convex portion 714 projecting to the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and the suction force generating solenoid 741 are arranged to face each other in the closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) of the cover member 721. A defect determination convex portion 715 that is convexly provided is mainly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the metal member for cutting 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), and is inside the left side of the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. A facing plane 714a that is arranged to face the side surface 724c and is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a plane that is opposite to the facing plane 714a on the left and right sides, and is inclined to the right toward the back side. It mainly includes a surface 714b.

When the suction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the suction force generation solenoid 741, but the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened ( (Floating from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is formed at a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosely fastened, and by forming a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, the suction force is applied to the clerk. It is possible to notice that the generation solenoid 741 is loosely fastened. Therefore, the ball launching unit 112a can be repaired (the suction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 without loosening) before the failure occurs.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711 and a cover member 721.
Switching between a regulated state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permissible state that allows the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to flow down to the launch rail 730. The device 740 is mainly provided.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) is open from the light-transmitting resin material, and the cover member 721 is loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. The rod-shaped portion 722 of the above, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped portion 722, and the sphere P at a position displaced from the hook portion 723 to the rod-shaped portion 722 side.
8 (see FIG. 144) is arranged in a positional relationship between a ball passing opening 724, which is pierced in the front-rear direction and having a size that allows passage, and a slightly upward protrusion from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passing opening 724. A shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports the metal member 725 for cutting and the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 and are mainly provided.

The switching device 740 is a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726 and the suction force generation solenoid 741 which is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and the suction force generation solenoid 7
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the suction force generating solenoid 741. A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the metal plate 743 and the ball guide arm member 742 and is arranged below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as the distance from the ball passing opening 724 increases, and above the base of the guide inclined portion 744. The arm ball P8 is extended by an interval that can accommodate it, and the extended end is the shaft rod portion 72.
It mainly includes a regulated overhanging portion 745 that projects toward the sphere passage opening 724 side along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and is a flow plate portion 724 that inclines downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotational radial direction.
a and a rib portion 724b which is arranged so as to face above the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib shape, and the extending tip surface is inclined downward as the extending tip surface toward the back side.
Left inner side surface 724 that is connected to the left end of the flow plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
Mainly includes c and. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the back and to the right.

When the sphere P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), the sphere P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along. Therefore, the ball P8
Flows down from the cutting metal member 725 in a laterally separated manner, so that the cutting metal member 7
While the 25 is arranged so as to project inside the ball passage opening 724, it is possible to prevent the ball P8 from colliding with the cutting metal member 725.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends so as to incline upward from the intermediate position of the base member 710 toward the left side. A ball P8 (FIG. 14) near the lower end of the rail member.
731 ball receiving members are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of (see 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the long direction are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. Through hole 731a, which is formed as a long hole along the direction and allows the fastening screw to pass through.
And, like the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the elongated hole direction of the through hole 731a), and the width is slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and the bulging portion 716a bulges. A regulation groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height is provided.

When fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the ball receiving member 731 is bulged out portion 71.
6a can be slid along the bulging straight line, which allows the sphere P8 (FIG. 14).
The standby position (distance from the plunger 702) of (see 4) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (operation handle 51)
(See FIG. 86), the firing intensity when rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted.
Since the regulation groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape and rolls with a rolling plate portion 730a extending diagonally upward to the left. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a, and has mounting plate portions 73.
It is attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted into a plurality of attachment holes 732 formed in 0b and 730c (two in this embodiment).

Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c in the longitudinal direction, and sounds and vibrations generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball are generated. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is a sphere P8 (FIG. 146 (b).
)), It is configured to guide the ball P8 upward by contacting each of the two front and rear positions on the peripheral surface.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the feeding status of the balls by the ball feeding device 720 in chronological order. It should be noted that FIGS. 144 (a) to 144
In (c), the cover member 721 is not shown in the cover member 721 for easy understanding.

In the ball feed device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a regulated state (a state in which the supply of electric power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). In the case of, the regulation overhanging portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passing opening 724, abuts on the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which power is supplied to the suction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulation overhanging portion 745 Retreats above the ball, and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is lifted, so that the ball P8 flows into the upper part of the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the sphere P8 is in contact with the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent further flow, and stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, so that the ball P8 on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. Will be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclination portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Flow is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the launch rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member that is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and has a through hole 725a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A plate with an acute-angled tip is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b and the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extended from
Mainly equipped with 5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back surface side of the lower blade portion 725b and the lower side projects upward from the flow plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to a ball. Then, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
The treatment of the thread Y8 when the thread Y8 is fixed to the 8 and allowed to enter will be described.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is FIG.
46 (a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a in the direction of arrow CXLVIb, FIG. 147 (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is FIG. 147 (a). It is a front perspective view of the metal member 725 for cutting which shows the relationship between the thread Y8 and the metal member 725 for cutting in the state of FIG. 148, and FIG. 148 is a ball launching unit 1 after launching the ball P8.
12a, a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. It should be noted that FIGS. 146 and 14
In No. 7, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of some constituent members of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730.
Reference numeral 8 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)), and a current is passed through the launch solenoid 701 from this state, causing the plunger 702 to vigorously project. , The ball P8 is given a firing force, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and with the ball P8 in the game area, the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8. It is known that the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening by loosening it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the firing force of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a posture in which it is moved toward the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow plate portion 724a and the launch rail 730.
When the thread Y8 moves by being pulled by the rolling ball P8, the intermediate portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 projects above the flow-down plate portion 724a. It will enter the lower side of the portion 725c, and will enter the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

When the player holds the front end (other end) of the thread Y8, the thread Y8 is subjected to a load due to the firing of the ball P8 by applying a load to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subject to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the thread Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force being applied to the thread Y8, but in that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and is inside. It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much the load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the effect operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are an exploded front perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and that of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 can be visually recognized from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The composition of is almost the same.

The effect operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is arranged on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advance / retreat operation unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance / retreat operation unit 900 moves the petal operation device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance / retreat operation, that is, an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and a third. It is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in (an operation including at least one of an operation of retracting the display area of the symbol display device 81 toward the outside), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other. The end of the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921 via 24, and a drive motor 92 that generates a drive force that drives the drive side arm member 910.
1 and a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and a sliding operation in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. It mainly includes a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the 800s.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal operation device 80.
It is a front view of 0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operation device 800 in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. In FIG. 154, the support base material 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operation device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It includes a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

The central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the central body portion of the support base material 801 to the right of the upper end portion, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is moved to the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base material 801. A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

An opening 8 is located at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, arranged to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes.
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a circular arc plate 88 for detection of a free fitting device 880 described later
Donut-shaped recessed portion 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed.
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below the above (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long substantially oval region in the central portion and cover the peripheral region thereof from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion that constitutes an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion that constitutes an region below the upper portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 has a shape that extends slightly vertically as a whole, but since the petal operation device 800 is arranged so as to be movable up and down as described later.
The operating space can be reduced when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than being formed into a horizontally long shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are concentrically arranged so as to overlap the positions of the openings 801P as described later, respectively, and the second gear 830G and the third gear 810 are arranged.
Since it is interlocked with (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. They are arranged to the right via the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operation device 800 supported in a posture of slightly tilting toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the support base material 801 from being separated from the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 through the drive side arm member 910. The driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In addition, in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin formed by imitating the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole. The plate-shaped flat plate member 803 is provided on the back surface side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape extending in the radial direction in the arranged state, and is curved so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer circumference (FIG. 15).
See 4).

Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge also has an irregular shape in front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as each other, and are molded into substantially the same shape, although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, so that the specific color (red) becomes darker on the outer peripheral edge without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S having a screw hole inside, extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at two locations, a vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and a radial center portion. There is.

The petal 802 is located on the rear side 80 than the rear side 802a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, right side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where it is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b arranged from 2a to the tip sharp-shaped side (clockwise side in front view, left side of the paper surface in FIG. 157 (a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802b is arranged closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802a.

The anterior portion 802b of each petal 802 is stacked on the front side of the posterior portion 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the posterior portion 802a is stacked on the rear side of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other, thus five sheets. The petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center at the tip on the inner peripheral side.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced from each other in the front-rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are located at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since b can be overlapped in the front-rear position, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathering position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) becomes remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole in the arranged state have a disc-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 has the above five petals 8
It is a long plate-shaped resin member that is fixed to 02 and separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge portion extends forward.

Further, the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (near the inner circumference).
A pair of screw-in portions 803S extending rearwardly in a cylindrical shape and having screw holes inside are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the lateral direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portion 803S is formed in an arrangement that is substantially located on both side walls of each flat plate member 803 in the circumferential direction (short direction), and further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. The slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screwed portion 803S. As described above, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwed portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has internal screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screwing portions 802S of the petals 802, and the petals 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S of the above is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803.
The 02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slit member 810 is arranged on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-shaped member having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the central portion. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

It will be described back to FIG. 156. The posterior peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, with two adjacent locations out of five equidistant locations in the circumferential direction and one in the middle of the three locations excluding those two locations. The positioning boss 81 is formed integrally with the screwing portion 813S having a screw hole inside the extension, and from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations.
3a is extended. The posterior peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portions 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. Each of the central slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, the central slit 81 is directed outward from the center of the circular opening 811, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811.
Reference numeral 4 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed so as to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

As described above, a set consisting of three slits, the central slit 814 and the slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) from each other. Each end of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost side slits 815 in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, the two corners on the small diameter side of the four corners of the three slits are both side slits. It has a shape that is approximately rectangular in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extending portion (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end portion of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side end portions of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Includes an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose centers coincide with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and both side slits 81
It is possible to prevent the flat plate on which 5 is formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the central slit 814 and the side slits 815
Since each of the pairs extends along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five pairs of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are brought closer to each other inward. , More densely arranged and formed, which also causes the slit member 81.
The outer shape of 0 is made compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are circular openings 811
When arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than when arranged and formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11. In this case, the five sets of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, the thickness of both ends of the slide member 820 is small, and the tip portion is formed into a semicircular shape in front view. The central portion where the thickness is larger than that of the directing portion at the position between the extending portion and the extending portion, the screw insertion hole 821 bored in the extending portion, and the front surface from the center of the slide member 820. It is provided with a guide pin 822 that is convexly provided on the side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 that is fixed so as to penetrate back and forth from the center of the slide member 820 to the back surface side. ..

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is in a posture in which the extending direction and the elongated direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersect at right angles with the central slit 814. And are arranged so as to span the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 have
The screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 to be fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 has the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
It is fixed to the rear side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are almost along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide and move in a position facing a constant outward direction without turning around 22.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, FIG. 161.
(A) and FIG. 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. In addition, FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 are referred to as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 of the rotating plate 830, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side of the rotating plate 830 so that the peripheral wall extends forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and is formed around the peripheral wall.

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends forward.
It is integrally formed with the rotating plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to be closed in a loop shape elongated in the front view along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830.

The extending height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extending height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of play. The ridge angle portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to drop.

From the position where the guide rail 832 is in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831,
It extends in the front-view clockwise direction along a direction approximately intermediate between the tangent line and the normal of the pivot opening 831, and then arcs further toward the front-view clockwise direction than this intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 at the end of the pivot opening 831, that is, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end thereof projects toward the front side of the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831 from the front end portion.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are arranged at equal intervals in the pivot opening 831. It extends in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G extending rearward in a peripheral wall shape from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and having teeth on the outer peripheral surface is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

As shown in FIG. 154, the rotary plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted onto the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174 (c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points as described above, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830. The pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted onto the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

Further behind the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the second gear 830G
The third gear 810G, which has a slightly smaller diameter and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831, is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G, and the pivot opening 81 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are located at positions corresponding to three screwing portions 813S on the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) at positions corresponding to two positioning bosses 813a. Each of the positioning holes 810c is bored.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted to the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is arranged so as to overlap the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
On the other hand, positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b to the screwing portion 813S (FIG. 1).
It is fixed by screwing into (see 56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off to prevent the rotating plate 830. Is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to separate.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the central axis rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 is a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852 thereof. A flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand the diameter at the front end is provided, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

The central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, whereby a cavity portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth is formed. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, there are two screw holes on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and an anterior screwed portion 857 having screw holes inside, and the front screwed portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a displaced position and is bored toward the back side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend slightly forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. .. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing positions, and extends further rearward from the posterior end of the shaft portion 852 to the inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screwing portions 853, the rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is located on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED substrate 861 is formed with a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is inserted through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 to the central shaft member 8.
By screwing into the front screwing portion 857 of 51, the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, the LED substrate 861 is provided with an insertion hole 864 having a size capable of fitting the screwing portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location in the center and a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles that spread multiple times (double) around this one location. LE
Each of the D865s is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Lateral LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to do. The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a resin material that has a specific color (yellow) but is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a columnar shape, and has a screw hole in the center where screws can be screwed. A pair of screwing portions 869 are provided.

The screw-in portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
An insertion hole 864 for the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 in between.
The screwed portion 869 that has passed through the above is abutted from the front side, and the screw is screwed into the screwed portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855, whereby the central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. As a result, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The free fitting device 880 is coaxial with a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an inner peripheral surface having an inner peripheral surface slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed from a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter. It mainly includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large-diameter cylindrical member 882, which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a main body cylindrical member 883 that is rotatably fitted to each other.

The main body cylindrical member 883 has a screw-in portion 883S integrally extending in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and having a screw hole inside, in each of two places where one is skipped out of four places at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical part. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the above-mentioned four locations where the screwing portion 883S is not formed.

The main body cylindrical member 8 at four locations corresponding to the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
The 83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in the outer diameter direction in a rib shape with the same protrusion length as the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at the intermediate position in the circumferential direction of the corresponding four locations, and in the axial direction. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and the decorative member 884 that covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) and the decorative member 884 are outside. With the back cover 886, which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, the outer peripheral side of the fastened portion rises to the front side, and the back cover 886 is fastened and fixed by contacting the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the back side. , Are arranged.

The front and back surfaces of the back cover 886 are entirely plated (yellow in the pachinko machine 8010), so that the side surfaces are mirror-shaped. Therefore, for example, the light emission effect can be performed by reflecting the light of the lateral LED 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery.

The decorative member 884 is a member that produces light emission by irradiating light from LEDs 856 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861, constitutes the shape of a hibiscus flower, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property and a back side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. An opening 885 is formed in the central portion having a size capable of inserting the central decorative member 868.

The main body cylindrical member 883 configured in this way is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The free fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G arranged on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161A, a fourth gear 880G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically on the rear side of the third gear 810G.
It is rotatably pivotally supported by the support base material 801 and meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the third gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8.
It rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via 08.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 88 is formed.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are provided at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850 so as to be overlapped with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880. Positioning is performed by inserting the 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screwing portion 883S (FIG. 16).
It is fixed by screwing into (see 3).

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and is slit. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a screw insertion hole 880b and a detection arc plate 880d extending to the back side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plate 880d, plates having the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d has a donut-shaped recess 80 in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C which is housed in 1D (see FIG. 152) and is arranged so as to be able to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, the detection arc plate 88 does not matter from which posture the fourth gear 880G starts rotating.
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7).
2 ° detection can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 on which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, their rear ends slightly project rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

Supporting base material 801 supports a rear positioning boss 854 that projects further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852.
The rear screw-in portion 853, which is inserted into the positioning notch (not shown) in (see FIG. 152) for positioning and also projects rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base material 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and fixing it with a screw.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to project forward with respect to the support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 154, the main body cylindrical member 883 of the free fitting device 880 is fixed.
The posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8 is fitted to the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
12 is attached so as to fit outward.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed at eight points along the circumferential direction, and the screwed portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it comes into linear contact with the inner peripheral surface of the posterior peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, thereby linearly contacting the slit member 810. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 with low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly and rotatably pivotally supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal operation device 800, the drive side arm member 910, and the driven side arm member 95.
It is a rear perspective view of 0, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advance and retreat operation) by applying a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIGS. 150 to 15
Refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the innermost deepest part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13, and is a member in the lower left corner of the front view. A support column 1110 projecting in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear accommodating portion 1120 recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a straight line in the vertical direction at the left and right center positions. Rail fixing part 1130 arranged in and the rail fixing part 1130
It is mainly provided with a support elongated hole 1140 which is bored as an elongated hole which is inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the support column 1110.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive side arm member 910.
Near the outer circumference of the front end, a pair of holes arranged on the left and right, which are formed so that screws can be screwed in, and a pair of upper and lower front sides on the same surface as the tip edge of the screwed portion 1111. It is provided with a positioning boss 1112 extending to.

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a dogleg shape in the rear view, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at one end and a support column. A rotating shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110, and a connecting convex portion 912 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape with a step on the front side at a position near one end of a long main body member. The petal operating device 800 is supported at the transmission elongated hole 913 formed in a linear elongated hole shape from the bending point of the elongated main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and at the other end of the elongated main body member. It mainly includes a support portion 914.

The drive-side arm member 910 rotates the arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913 and a flange portion 926 extending outward to the position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction with this, it rotates around the support column 1110.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected while slightly intersecting with each other, and is arranged on the left end side to accommodate the motor gear 922. A first accommodating portion 1121 and a second accommodating portion 11 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
A third accommodating portion 112 in which the arm gear 924, which is arranged opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween and is fitted with the drive side arm member 910, is accommodated.
3 and are mainly provided.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and supported so as to be slidable up and down. It is provided with an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line.
Due to the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operating device 800 is kept constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole that slidably supports the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° when viewed from the front. It is provided with an extension wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and is formed in a columnar shape toward the back side at one end and has a back. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 that is slidably supported by a supporting elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a supporting portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951, and a screw is fastened to a screw-in portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. As a result, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S, and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of supported elongated holes 931 (three locations in the present embodiment) that are formed in an elongated hole extending to the left and right so as to be slidably movable to the left and right by the lateral base material 1000S. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by the base end side elongated hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction in the shape of an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction arranged on the left end side, and is arranged on the right end side. It is connected to the second effect member 940 at the tip side insertion hole 933 which is formed in the front-rear direction.

The base end side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the stop portion 932a formed at the upper end portion along a locus in which the connecting convex portion 912 rotates around the support column 1110 and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. It mainly includes a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in the front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in the front view, and has a screw-in portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed into the tip. A plate-shaped member to be fastened and fixed to the supporting pillar portion 1150, the fastening plate portion 1001S which is arranged at a position corresponding to the supporting pillar portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. The support convex portion 1002S is projected in a columnar shape toward the back side in the positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the long holes 931 to be supported, and is bored in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the right corner of the front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Convex portion 1005S projected on the front side along the arc shape at the same center as
And mainly prepare.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S.
It is arranged in the gap between the long hole 931 to be supported and the slide plate 930 is slidably supported by screwing a screw for preventing the slide plate 930 from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S in that state. To.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. This is the part. The ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is in the normal position, but is formed at a convex height that allows a contact when the second effect member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position. Will be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which the lower end portion is formed in a bifurcated manner and the upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the shafted support column portion 941, and is on the back side in the right corner portion in the front view. Axial support column 941 that is convexly provided in a columnar shape and is axially supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary convex that is arranged close to the shafted support column 941 and is projected in a columnar shape toward the back surface. Part 942 and
Mainly prepared.

The shafted support column 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed into the tip. It is provided with an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). Axle support column 941 sandwiches the collar and shaft support hole 1003
A disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is arranged at the tip of the lid member 945 while being inserted into the S, and a screw is screwed into the screwing portion 941a to cause the lid member 94.
5 serves as a retainer. As a result, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the tip-side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip to prevent the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. .. That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by connecting the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 comes into contact with the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that the bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. 165. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 that are configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921.
The collar that guides the detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 protruding outward from the arm gear 924 in a predetermined angle range and the coil spring SP8 that generates an urging force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is a rotatable shaft. The shaft support 1163 to be supported, the cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
It mainly includes a wiring stopper 1165 hidden in 00C from the front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the board cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screwing portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight distance from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of the movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use.
Even if the part that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 is missing,
The screwing portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second effect member 940.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is laminated and fixed to the side base material 1000S and the back plate 1100, which are laminated and fixed to each other in the front-rear direction. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 and 00 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the heavy device called the petal operation device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the drive side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIG. 168, FIGS. 170 and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900 and the back plate. It is a front view of 1100, FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

Note that FIGS. 168 and 169 show a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. 170 and 171 show a connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). ) Is arranged at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is shown.
Is arranged on the lower end side of the moving range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission slot 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inwardly fitted convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (FIG. (Refer to 151), it extends in the tangential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, at the time of starting the drive motor 921, the inner fitting convex portion 9
Since only 25 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (idle rotation range), the resistance at the time of starting the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171 the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIGS. 170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are interlocked, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as interlocking. Can be made to.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 in a manner of projecting toward the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, the second effect member 940 moves as if the petal operation device 8 were placed.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection / dispersion rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotation device 850. It is a front view which shows through the petal operation device 800, and FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of a slit member 810 and a rotating plate 830.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 175 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 176 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotating plate 830.

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
It is a rear view of 00, FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b).
Is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 through the petal operating device 800 by omitting the central axis rotating device 850, and FIG. 178 (d) is a slit member. It is a front view of 810 and a rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 179 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
00 is a rear view, FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 descends by the ascending / descending operation and is in the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 starts from the initial position (concentration position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, and is shown in FIGS. 176 and 177.
After the expanding position shown in FIG. 178, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully opened position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and further, the rotational operation (second operation) is performed at the fully opened position, and then the assembly is performed. It is configured so that it can perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (gathering position).

At the initial position (gathering position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 of (see FIG. 157) is the central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
It is located at the inner end of 4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the five petals 802 are most concentrated toward the central decorative member 868 in the center. In the position, it is in a gathered state that constitutes the flower of the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (concentration position) as described above, the central motor 804 is the first.
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the gear 804G, so that the rotating plate 83
0 is rotationally driven in the rear-view clockwise direction as indicated by the arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a pivot opening 831 in a state of low frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 can easily be fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, as described above, via the third gear 810G. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8 is initially used.
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front as shown by the arrow A11 on the front surface thereof.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in the direction of being pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174 (d).
Since it is regulated by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is linearly guided and moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 moves to the central slit 8 as the rotating plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start the expanding operation of radially expanding outward from the gathering position. In this expansion operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 that moves to the outside, but on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount (angle) of the rotating plate 830. The 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the petal 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small as compared with the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, assuming that the central slit 814 is tilted clockwise with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced and the moving speed is reduced. The decline is even more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. 177. After that, the shape extends outward while curving in an arc shape toward the front clockwise side from the direction D15, and extends outward in a spiral shape as a whole with the five guide rails 832. ..

The more the guide rail 832 is tilted clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. In addition, the guide rail 832
The more the slide pin 823 curves in an arc toward the front clockwise side of the direction D15.
Both the decrease in load and the decrease in moving speed are more remarkable.

That is, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast by inclining in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, whereas the guide In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining the rail 832 clockwise and further bending it in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is formed in a groove shape by a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of deviation. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 should be increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. It is configured in.

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, problems such as deviation are prevented and the reliability of power transmission is ensured, while the central slit 8 is used.
The structure is such that the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is increased at 14, and the roles are divided.

After this, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 has a central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer movement limit in No. 4, is reached (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 are radially expanded to the fully opened position to be in the fully opened state, and the expansion operation is completed.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially dispersed, so that the position is continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in the front view. The petals 802 are arranged in. As a result, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is integrally visually recognized as a flower of a hibiscus that is one size larger (FIG. FIG. 178 (b)).

When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move further outward, the slide pin 823 is thereafter.
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate any more in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state can be maintained after the expansion operation is completed.

After the expansion operation is completed, the rotational power in the same direction from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member The 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts the rotation in the front-view counterclockwise direction indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830. In this way, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expansion operation and the rotary power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830, the rotation power is immediately applied to the rotating plate 830 so that the expansion operation and the rotation operation are continuous without any delay. Can be migrated.

When the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the fully open state as shown by arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as shown by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After finishing the above rotation operation, the central motor 804 sets the first gear 804G, which is the opposite of the previous one.
When the slit member 810 is rotated clockwise as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, and only the rotating plate 830 is first rotated in FIG. 179 (b). As shown by the arrow A15 in b), the vehicle is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the rear view, whereby the gathering operation in the direction opposite to the expansion operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, in the central slit 814, and at the same time, five sets of petals 802 are moved from the fully open position to the central decorative member 868 in the central portion. It gathers toward it, returns to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the gathering state, and finishes the gathering operation.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. It operates again, and the first gear 804 is further operated by the central motor 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction of the rear view indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802
However, as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates in the front-view clockwise direction in the gathered state.

When the petals 802 rotate in the front-view clockwise direction in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is in the opposite direction (front-view counterclockwise) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). Rotate to. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, the gathering operation to the rotating operation can also be performed.
It can be stopped and paused before the transition, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by passing the detection arc plate 880d through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so that the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is rotating.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by a wall on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage formation in the ninth embodiment has been described. The unit 9140 is notched in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145.
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 the passage forming unit 9140 has the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the lower end portion and the front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion below the S-shaped path SL2. .. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-shaped portion 152 is bent toward the front side in a manner of covering the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-path SL2.
The recessing depth is about the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 abuts on the lower surface of the upper stop convex portion (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) to the back surface side, and is upwardly generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the thread Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area and obtain an illegal profit. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, the possible cheating will be described.

It will be described back to FIG. 148. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
Is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the firing force of the ball. If the firing force is weak, the thread Y8 is cut. The ball was sometimes fired without it.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, passes through the foul ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower plate 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering the case where the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8.
Thread Y9 in a state where 8 is weakly launched and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball P9 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side (launch solenoid 701 side) of the cutting metal member 725, so that the ball P9 is vigorously pushed. Even if it is punched out, the thread Y8 is not cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The pre-launched ball P8 is a foul ball passage 1
After passing through 45, it is discharged to the front side of the player and stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits a fraudulent act can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, thereby opening the ball P9 as a winning opening. It is possible to repeatedly pass through 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and it is possible to obtain an illegal profit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends is used for fraudulent activity as described above, the thin plate blade passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a cheating person pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, so that the thread Y8 is damaged and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed closer to the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. The thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from thread Y8 to thin plate blade portion 915
Most of the load applied towards 3 can be used to damage thread Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is set to about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, so that the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is arranged lower than the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. As a result, the payout ball can easily damage the thread Y8. That is, since a person who commits cheating is afraid of discovering cheating, the ball P
After grasping 8, the ball P8 is placed near the body (for example, in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious.
It is easy to carry out fraudulent acts such as pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a pocket of trousers or the like. In that case, the state in which the thread Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (in contact with the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched at a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

When the prize ball is paid out in this state, the lower plate 5 is formed from the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the lower plate 50 (FIG. 1) while stepping on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the thread Y8. (See) flows down to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening arranged behind the ball pulling lever 52. That is, by arranging the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate Passage 9
The ball discharged from the 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the thread Y8, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

Thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that inclines downward toward the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side. The right-sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to give a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side.

As a result, the thread Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 diminishes.
You can point the ball toward. That is, since the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give the lower plate 50 a velocity component in the right direction (toward the foul ball passage portion 9145 side) to the ball discharged in the front-rear direction, among the balls to be discharged, The proportion of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8 can be increased.

In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side has a ball guide opening 5
The left portion of 3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is the remaining region (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. It occupies an area of about 1/3 of the width dimension), and a riding regulation step portion 9053a is formed at the boundary thereof.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restriction step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul arranged on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction while connecting to the left end portion (left end side) of the lower bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the boarding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 allows the lower plate passage portion 91 on the front door side.
The 42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the lower plate passage portion 9142 on the front door side before passing through the ball guide opening 53 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the thread Y8.

The width of the boarding control step portion 9053a in the vertical direction is set to be equivalent to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, it is possible to restrict the ball that rolls on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the boarding regulation step portion 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the boarding restriction step 9053a allows the ball to pass in the space V9 in the left-right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and regulates in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by a wall is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment has been described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 184 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above right, FIG. 185 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed from diagonally above left, and FIG. 186 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from diagonally above left. The state seen from diagonally below is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145 as compared with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back side in the curved inner portion on the upper side of the S-shaped path SL2.
It includes 145c. Then, the sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side in a manner of covering the lower part of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is about twice (diameter) the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180). Radius. In addition, the notch 10145c is provided with a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d at which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is provided. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back surface side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex portion 1 projecting from the side surface on the back side of the
It is equipped with 4d2. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is omitted in FIG. 186.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is a sphere. The radius of P8 is about Ra. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
Since it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed from an inclined shape extending toward the back surface side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (to the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-back width) of the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is the passage portion 14.
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is replaced with the thin plate blade portion 1.
It becomes easy to insert into the gap on the back surface side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, which is the gap where 0153 and 10154 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. It is a part that constitutes the bifurcated blade part with 10153, and is the first thin plate blade part 10153.
It extends to the left in a manner that slightly rises and slopes from the right end of the front side edge of the. As a result, an acute-angled recess 1015 having an acute-angled deep recess between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154
5 is formed.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portions 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is arranged on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the notch 10145c on the back side. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the back side of the convex tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the thread Y8 is inserted into the acute-angled concave portion 10155, and the thread Y8
Can be easily damaged.

The second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153, so that the thread Y8 is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person who commits fraud. Can easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
It is configured to come into contact with the lower surface of the foul ball passage portion 10145 and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged so as to face the left and right opposite sides at the bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the opposite direction. To. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the opposite directions.

For example, a cheating person tries to avoid the discovery of cheating by letting go of the ball P8 that has come out at hand and causing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the game area. However, according to the present embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the opposite directions at the extending end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stops.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y is retained.
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraudulent activity.

An adhesive member (glue, birdlime, etc.) may be arranged in the deep part of the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheating person is cut, the thread is adhered to the adhesive member arranged in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area. Since it is not discharged from the material and is maintained on the spot, it is possible to accelerate the detection of fraud using the thread Y8.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a weak firing intensity and did not reach the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50, but the plate passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment uses the foul ball. It is equipped with a foul ball reception 2164 to receive. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is made of a resin material so as to be arranged in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and to have an arc shape similar to that of the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game region side. Tip member 206 formed and placed close to the ball launch unit 112a
It is provided with a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship in which a ball has a flowable width gap V11 between 2a and its tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c that communicates with the foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
The 062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above the width.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 is arranged in the above-described embodiment, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 The formation is omitted. That is, the balls discharged from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate passage portion 161 on the main body side. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the permissible amount, the full tank switch (not shown) that is arranged so as to project inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the payout device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the payout device is turned on. The payout of balls from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c is also a payout device 133 (
The balls discharged from (see FIG. 87) are also supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, as described above, balls are adhered to both ends of the thread Y8, and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to pass the thread Y8.
When thinking about cheating to get inside the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c
By hitting the payout ball against the thread Y8, the action of damaging the thread Y8 can be generated regardless of how the balls of the upper plate 17 are accumulated. This makes it easier to cut the thread Y8 at an early stage.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball prevention member 68 arranged in the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the return ball prevention member 68, the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a posture arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to project cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b and to form a screwing groove for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and a base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
A long screw B11 is formed in a through hole previously drilled in the base member 68b1 as a mounting hole in a state where the b1 is in contact, and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 by matching the position with the through hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in that state, so that the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side that comes into contact with the guide member 2062b match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 189) is recessed to the extent that the guide member 20 is provided.
It is formed as an inclined surface having a gradient similar to that of the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that inclines downward as it approaches the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the game area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increasing portion 206
The straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, the diameter of the sphere). It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side).

With this configuration, when launching a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing portion 20
Since 62d is retracted from the path of the sphere, it is possible to prevent the sphere from colliding with the lower tip portion of the gradient increasing portion 2062d. On the other hand, when a ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball that rolls on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball launching unit 112a side.

The front side surface 2062d1 of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the closing plate 2062b4 and the side surface 2062d1.
A notch 206 that is less than the diameter of the sphere and has a width that allows the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back surface to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The place where the notch 2062b1 is formed is a place where the path of the ball to be driven into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is on the front side of the side surface 2062d1.
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side of the front view is exposed at the front-rear position where the notch 2062b1 is formed, so that the same method as described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment is performed. The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of a fraudulent act performed through the thread Y8 in which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the notch 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep part of the notch 2062b1 when receiving a load of pulling both ends (FIG. 190 (FIG. 190).
a) See). In that state, since the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing with the long screw B11 occurs, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

In the present embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being placed at the position where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically lower part of the center of the ball), so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the launched ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Further, a person who commits a fraudulent act performed through a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end (ball P8 is fixed) on the side of the thread Y8 protruding toward the player. Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side of the ball P9 toward the front side (see FIG. 182), the thread Y8 moves toward the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 near the player side. Therefore, by arranging the notch 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the notch 2062c as compared with the case where the notch 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

In the hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion that projects downward is arranged. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed in with a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates under the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility that the button type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the posture of the gate member 68a, and when the posture of the gate member 68a changes, O
It is arranged so that N-OFF can be switched.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partially front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190 (a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
A state in which the weight portion 68a2 side is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of 2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 190 (b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball and the gate member 68a
The state in which the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the foul ball passage 2062c is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c is shown. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference, and it is shown that the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is shown. It is shown that it is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball prevention member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the sphere flows away by its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed due to the opening / closing portion 68a1 tilting as shown in FIG. 190 (b), the sphere immediately flows away. Since it returns to the state shown in 190 (a), the foul ball passage 20 is next.
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) can be restored by the timing when the ball is guided to 62c (at the shortest, after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance to an object that does not flow away such as a sphere, for example, an object that moves while filling the passage such as an endoscope. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraudulent activity.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example,). Bend a nail (not shown) to be planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or emit a laser from the tip. Cheating (such as cutting a nail) is possible.

FIG. 191 is a partially front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191 the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that illegally invades is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When advancing the tip of a device such as an endoscope in the direction opposite to the flow direction of the ball in the foul ball passage 2062c, in the present embodiment, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is dismissed and advanced. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is excluded by the tip portion of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the weight portion 68a2 is connected to the tip portion of the endoscope. The insertion portion (long soft portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a pushed-up state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to exclude the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, when the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent fraud as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1
By controlling so as to sound an alarm when 1 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Further, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 immediately becomes O.
Since it is set to N (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

The member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging the above, if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side arranged on the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced at an early stage. As a result, compared to the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraudulent activity before replacement and the trouble of forgetting the storage location and searching for it can be saved. It can play the effect. Further, it is not necessary to include the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by the fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be arranged).

Further, whether or not the return ball prevention member 68 is effective in preventing fraudulent activity when the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent and replaced depends on the degree of damage of the return ball prevention member 68. , The cheating person does not know whether the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it is replaced, the deterrent power of fraudulent activity can still be maintained by not knowing the degree of damage.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only in the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even in the expanding position. Consists of aspects. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the play fitting device 2880 according to the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
As shown in the above, the back cover 2886 of the free fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
The 887 and the regulating portion 2888 projecting from the extending tip of the flange portion 2887 to the back surface side are provided. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
There is only a difference in the back cover 2886 in comparison with the 80, and the other parts are the same as the free fitting device 880.

The regulating portion 2888 projects to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the regulating portion 2888 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, the case where the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 are arranged in a single unit will be described, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the actions of the flange portion 2887 and the regulation portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operation device 2800, and FIG. 19
4 (a) and FIG. 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the operation example of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in chronological order, and FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b).
) Shows the state of the simultaneous points.

Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed.
S is cross-sectionald. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 that change the posture by the action of the regulation unit 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are screwed portions on the side facing each other, centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It is provided with an inclined surface 2803T that inclines in a manner away from the 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed at an angle. The action of the regulating unit 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the regulating portion 2888 is arranged outside the diameter of the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802 along the moving direction (the petal 802 is slid. The rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the regulating portion 2888 and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 come into contact with each other, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is further loaded by the regulation unit 2888 and the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 receives the load. To change the posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a) (a posture in which the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 are oriented in the longitudinal direction in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction). From, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the central slit 814
And it is possible to change the posture to an inclined posture that is inclined with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. Petal 8
At 02, a posture change occurs as much as possible.

As the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 change their postures in this way, the regulation unit 28
While the load from 88 is parried, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 has only the narrow slide ribs 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has a slide rib 803a with the outer inner wall and an inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall with respect to the slits 815 on both sides.
Since the 3Ts are brought into contact with each other (pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance becomes remarkable. Since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the lateral direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. ..

Therefore, in the tilted posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 movement resistance to movement in the longitudinal direction increases, so that the slide member 28
Slide pin 823 without waiting for 20 to reach the end of slits 814 and 815
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and tilted posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a size between the slide member 2820 and the moving resistance).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b)
Start rotating in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 separates from the regulating portion 2888, the load applied to the petal 802 by the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 195, FIG. 193 (
The state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) (clockwise in the front view). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
Since it exceeds the braking force (see FIG. 156), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the position during expansion.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. In addition, in FIG. 196 (a), FIG. 196 (b) and FIG. 197, the appearance of the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position is illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b),
The regulating portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the postures of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to the normal postures.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830, and thus the petals. The rotational movement of the 802 is settled, and the petal 802 slides toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petal 802 can be rotated at the position during expansion and then returned to the gathering position automatically.

The case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is in contact with the regulating portion 2888 has been described, but if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If), the contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that it is possible to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position in this embodiment as well.

Further, as for the arrangement of the regulating portion 2888, the petals 802 may be arranged at a position where they do not abut with the petals 802 at the gathering position or the fully open position, or even if they come into contact with the petals 802 which rotate at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it is possible to pass through the regulating portion 2888, and by setting the position so that the load can be parried, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device by arranging the regulation unit 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in the front view. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulation unit 2888, the petals 802
When it expands, it can be used as a mark as to whether it passes through a position close to or far from the star-shaped pattern, and the difference in perspective causes the petals 802 to expand to the maximum and rotate. It is possible to make a difference between performing and rotating operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of perspective between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the mold can function as a directing part. As a result, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

The regulation unit 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the back cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the regulation unit 2888 from the aspect of design, the degree of freedom in designing the regulation unit 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 coming into contact with the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect effect (for example, an effect suggesting the magnitude of the jackpot expectation). In this case, the meaning to be conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (with a flutter) while making a slight change in posture in contact with the regulating portion 2888. ..

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 comes into contact with the regulation portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the abutting position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change their posture changes. Therefore, even if the regulation portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be changed by a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 has been described in the expanding position, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment has been described. The slit member 3810 of the 3800 is configured to be switchable between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIGS. 198 and 199, an operation example of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is shown in time series. Also,
In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of the guide rail 832 of 0 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as in the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate with each other in excess of the resistance to be generated, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 is the guide rail 832. With the displacement, the displacement is in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). Then, in the present embodiment, additional recessed portions 3814a, 3815a, 3815 on the side receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 differs from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is located on the wall portion on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Of the central recessed portion 3814a recessed in a manner of widening the width of the wall and the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the slits 815 on both sides arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814, the clockwise side of the front view. The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is recessed in the wall portion of the wall portion in a manner of widening the width of the side slits 815 in the lateral direction, and the radial directions of the both side slits 815 arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814. Slits 81 on both sides in the wall part on the clockwise side of the front view among the wall parts extending along
Mainly includes a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b which is recessed in a manner of widening the width in the lateral direction of 5.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).
It is arranged to face the slide rib 803a of 3.

The central recessed portion 3814a is the slide member 2820 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the above (FIG. 19).
8 (a) lower side) is continuously formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is a flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).
From the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03, the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (
It is continuously formed in FIG. 198 (a) lower side).

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length longer than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise in the front view will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the rotating plate 830
When is started to rotate clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the rightmost slide rib 803a enters the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a) (FIG. 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

Further, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are in contact with the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (slide member 2820, flat plate member 2803 and slit member). It rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with the portion that first contacts 3810 as a fulcrum (FIGS. 199 (a) and 199 (b).
)reference).

Since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b have a deeper recessing depth than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and flat plate member 28
The contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a and the screwing portion 280 during the rotation of 03.
Contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are clocked with a recessed depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut on the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 during the above-mentioned rotation. The peripheral side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is less than the resistance given to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805. .. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal to each other, a front view is obtained. When the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the slits 815 on both sides on the clockwise side comes into contact with the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a
Moves to the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front with respect to the concave base end of the concave portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
(See (a)). Therefore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center side in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 rotates around the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. It is possible to switch between the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the flat plate member 2803 can be made to perform an operation that was not feasible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b). )), The flat plate member 280 until the changed posture is restored.
The rotation operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to 3 and the flat plate member 2803 is interposed (FIGS. 195 and 196).
(A) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 (FIG. 198). a)), By rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)).
.. That is, the rotational operation (rotational operation of rotating around the slit member 3810) of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. FIG. 198 (a)), the rotating plate 830 in an arbitrary state (phase or orientation)
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are gathered from the positions of the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 that match the arbitrary state (phase or posture) by rotating the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 clockwise. You can start moving towards the position.
As a result, the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (FIG. 1).
93 (a)) is rotating (see FIG. 195) during expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then the petals 802 are arranged in various arrangements when the petals 802 are gathered toward the gathering position (see FIG. 197). Therefore, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment has the lower frame member 8320.
8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the above. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 200 and FIG. 202A show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202B shows the tilting device 310. The state in the process of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in this embodiment is a lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and other configurations have been almost explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and the other configurations will be described only in a few supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially egg shape at the left and right center positions. On the left and right sides of the first through hole 8326a and the vibrating device 5400, the top surface of the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined in a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b, which are bored along the line and connect the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326b which are bored at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in the front view. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c have the purpose of facilitating the passage of the above-mentioned liquid such as drinking water downward and the purpose of facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. It is a through hole having and. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is obstructed to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or is meaningless to the interested player, and the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
It may be fitted into the gaps V13 and V14 between 0 and 0.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, There is a high possibility that foreign matter will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the ring member BR1 (in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end side end)
It is configured to rotate around the axis (see FIG. 14B), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, so that the longer the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more. The configuration is such that the position is easily displaced (deformed) from side to side near the front end. In addition, this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding up design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (Transformation) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides
However, even when the gap V13 is designed so that a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, a 1-yen coin) is not inserted, the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right (for example, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 formed on the other side (for example, to the right) is the tilting device 310 during normal use.
A gap V1 having a size obtained by adding up the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the
It becomes 3 and can be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). If not, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right.

Further, the gap V14 in the front-rear direction between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 also utilizes the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310 to utilize the tilting device 3
Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by giving a load toward the back side to the 10 and shifting (deforming) the position, a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to be constricted inward to the left and right toward the center of the top and bottom, it is easy to fit the player's fingers. While it is possible to create a good operability, the part where the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from the top of the constriction of the case body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, which makes it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. Further, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the translucency of the protective lens member 311i deteriorates, which may hinder the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed by the operation device 8300.
When it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign matter has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it as soon as possible. However, in a state where the lower frame member 320 does not have a through hole, the operation device 300 is used to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter. It had to be disassembled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shapes and arrangements of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (b) is FIG. 20.
3 (a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 in the direction of arrow CCIIIb, FIG.
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operating device 8300, and FIG. 203 (d) is a view of FIG. 203 (a).
) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIId-CCIIId line.
FIG. 203 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 on the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of FIG. 203 (a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibrating device 5400, and is bored with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibrating device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58). To. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the center positions on the left and right of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is an extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (FIG. 12).
See) placed below the top surface. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extension portion 311h (left and right in the vertical view in the second state). Tilt device 3 due to being curved toward
In the first state of 10, the tilt D81 that tilts downward toward the center of the left and right, and the tilt device 310.
The coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the inclination D82 (see FIG. 201) that inclines downward toward the front side due to the inclination of the coin.

As a result, the size required as the size of the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while facilitating the removal of coin-shaped foreign matter, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. .. For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily secured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly widened to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the tilting device 310 in the first state.
The portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is made to be larger than the size of the object assumed as a coin-shaped foreign matter. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a lateral width and a vertical width of about 30 [m.
m] is formed.

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f.
This is a portion that allows the light emitted from (see FIG. 25) to be transmitted. In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
Except for 3a, the plate portion of the lens member 313 which is connected to the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 is mirror-finished (the mirror-finished member is fixed) in the present embodiment. The light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

Due to this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-shaped. It becomes weaker than when there is no foreign matter (coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light or the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame is not noticed. Member 832
It is possible to reduce the possibility that it will remain at 0. In addition, this effect is the first through hole 832.
The same applies not only to the case of visual recognition through the second through hole 8326b and the case of visual recognition through the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 and is removed from the bottom plate portion 32.
It is configured as a through hole that can be discharged in the direction along the surface of 1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left-right width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set so that the largest coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin) can be discharged. The width in the normal direction of is about 2 [mm].

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, it is easy even after a coin-shaped foreign matter has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. It is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, a liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through hole 8326b can be used to discharge forward.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole that can be removed in an upright state (posture).

That is, the length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction needs to be formed in a size capable of ejecting coin-shaped foreign matter in a directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the long direction is about 30 [mm] in the directional view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321 and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

When removing coin-shaped foreign matter, remove the covering cover 370 and operate device 830.
By simply exposing 0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can perform through holes 8326a to 8326c.
Can be accessed. The covering cover 370 is the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the hanging portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recess 15a is formed by screws inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 which is opened to the right outward in the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
.. Including each of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit / receive signals to / from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, it can be easily operated by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement for the normal operating device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to quickly replace the operating device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught with the normal operating device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to normal operation, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted immediately.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 204. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where the board surface support device 600 is not subjected to the load from the front frame 14 when it is in the fixed state has been described, the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment is arranged so as to be in contact with the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged so as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via the front-rear displacement member 2652. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the 14th embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. Note that FIG. 204 (
In a), the state in which the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 is shown (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 which is arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (plate portion arranged on the back side) which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 of the main body plate portion 611 can be vertically displaced. The vertical displacement member 2651
The front-rear displacement member 2652, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower end of the
The support portion 2654, which is a portion that displaceably sandwiches the 52 from above and below at two locations in the front-rear direction and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, abuts the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653, and moves toward the front side of the front-rear displacement member 2652. Brigging member 2655 such as coil spring to add urging force toward
To be equipped.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of being in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of being separated from the torsion spring NBb. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), the torsion spring NBb is retracted, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), the torsion spring NBb is abutted. The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a position where the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 has a slight gap between the vertical displacement member NBb and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)) and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward. It is configured to be displaceable at the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that inclines downward toward the tip side is formed at the rear tip portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is a front-rear displacement member 26 from a vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-rear displacement member 2652 is arranged in the front position.
It is an inclined surface that is continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the 52 is arranged at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is a vertical displacement member 2651 at a position in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
Is set to the lower position, and the inclination angle and the forming range are set so that the vertical displacement member 2651 is set to the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.

According to the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at an upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is large by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, the load applied to the game board 13 by the post-rotation claw member 640 from the back surface side can be increased, and it becomes easy to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the rotation front claw member 620. This makes it possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the back surface of the front frame 14 (the back surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and pushes it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, so that the torsion spring NBb is a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring adopted in the eighth embodiment. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. Since it is possible to reduce the force that becomes, the degree of freedom of choice of the worker and
Workability can be improved.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 205. In the eighth embodiment,
Harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent fraud in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with a heated piano wire and penetrates into the interior as it is.
The case where it is detected that the piano wire is burnt by the heated piano wire and the fraud is detected at an early stage has been described. However, in the fraud detection device 2280 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, it is configured to detect the heat and prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 according to the fifteenth embodiment, and is FIG. 205.
(B) and FIG. 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. In addition, FIG. 205 (
In b), a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape is shown in FIG. 20.
In 5 (c), the state of returning to the tensile shape (memorized shape) by applying heat is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is the main body box portion 2.
It is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position before and after 281.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with the back side and the lower surface side open, and the reverse cup portion 2
A main body box portion 2281 that is stacked above the main body box portion 2281 and a back cover member 2282 that is attached from the back side so as to cover the rear side opening of the main body box portion 2281 are provided.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2482.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner portion to form an inverted cup portion 217.
An extension 2283 that abuts on the left surface of the wall 2178a, a narrowed portion 2284 that extends from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284. It is housed in a protruding portion 2285 that is projected upward from the main body and a recess that is recessed from the back side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281, one end of which projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end of the main body box. The first conductive part 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the part 2281 and the main body box part 228
It is housed in a recess recessed from the back side in the right wall portion of 1, one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and the first conduction. A second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that allows contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 that generates an urging force that presses the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
It is provided with a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284, is supported by the protruding portion 2285, and is arranged below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one end of separate wiring is connected to a portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is the main control device. It is connected to 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 205 (b)). c) Refer to), the continuity is cut off,
It is controlled to output an error signal with the disconnection of continuity as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, and so on. It is controlled so that it becomes impossible to play the game.

The details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup portion 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 of the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extension portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire remains as it is on the long cover 173. It can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and further advances is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed from a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, maintains the shape after deformation in a low temperature state, and has a property of returning to a shape memorized in advance by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. .. In this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80 °) of about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion are pushed up. The continuity with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity at an early stage.

The extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into the guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back lid member 228 in the vertical direction and in the front-rear direction, and is inserted into the front side. Overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state and then returns to the low temperature state, the operator deforms the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing down the extension portion 2288a and reduces the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205 (b)). ) Can be returned again. That is, even after the fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 206. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted on both sides has been described. The right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave shape recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 which schematically represents the part 2543b, and FIG. 206 (c) is a schematic downward concave part 2543c which is recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, which schematically represents a downward concave portion 2543d recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the optical member 2540, in which FIG. 206 (e) schematically represents an upward concave portion 2543e recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. In FIG. 206A, the support plate portion 510 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed from a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically side by side according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

Concave portions are formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, the region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side and the region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side with reference to the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of the concave portion 2543 can be changed between c, the region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), the region CCVIb is formed with an upward concave portion 2543b which is recessed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (c), the region CCVIc is formed with a downward concave portion 2543c which is recessed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), the region CCVId is formed with a downward concave portion 2543d which is recessed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), the region CCVIe is formed with an upward concave portion 2543e which is recessed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e is hot-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. The convex portion used for is formed.

Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a
The light incident on the is difficult to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
The 543e refracts the light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region of the inner lens member 530 facing the curved bottom have the same shape as that of the eighth embodiment (inclination angle 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and the diameter of the bottom circle). It is formed from a 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, the inner lens member 5 starts from this portion.
The light emitted to the 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down, and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light proceeds in the direction of collecting light toward the inner lens member 530 and in the direction of spreading light toward the outer lens member 550 according to the above-described configuration. Can be made to. That is, since the light guide member 2540 can be formed in the shape of a flat plate while having a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides thereof, the right panel unit 250
It is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect while suppressing the left-right width of 0.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs down is set as the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be eliminated.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the push-in end is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "the button that cannot be pushed" can be performed. it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of the operation (the end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and it is possible to make the player notice that the tilting device 310 is in the "non-pushable button" state only after the pushing operation. it can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, since the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotary claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the ascending end can be sequentially switched) depending on the driving mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a driving force to the tilting device 310.
The case where the operation timing of the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of the operation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 and the direction of operation. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end (
(While in the descending operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the push-in end and starts moving upward. , The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, while pushing back when the tilting device 310 is repeatedly hit, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodating member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the accommodation member 543 in the tilting device 310
0 may be fixed and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated inside the 0. Tilt device 31
When fixing the accommodating member 5430 to 0, for example, the convex leg portion 5424 is attached to the bottom plate portion 5321.
The shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so that the convex leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end. May be changed so as to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the accommodating member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the accommodating member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when operating the tilting device 310. Therefore, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, the flexible member 5420 The amount of deformation of the weight member 5412 can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 is in contact with the accommodating member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player is allowed to operate the tilting device 310, a display such as "press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press the button. Push it in at high speed and feel vibration." By displaying such as "Great chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player.
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) by the designated pressing method, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

Regarding the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 and the magnitude relationship may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for transmitting the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and it is possible to prevent a failure that occurs when the tilting device 310 is pushed by force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to come into contact with the accommodating member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that the weight member 5412 may not be in contact with the accommodating member 5430, provided that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement. In this case, the tilting device 31
While 0 can be transmitted to the player in a state where 0 is not operated, the production can be lively.
A change in the production mode for the player in a way that makes it difficult for the player to notice the surroundings by stopping the vibration when pushing in (
Since it is possible to recognize the difference in the degree of expectation), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change in the production mode, excluding the surrounding players. Can be done.

As a variation of the effect, there are cases where the weight member 5412 and the accommodating member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the weight member 5
It is desired to generate both a case where the 412 and the accommodating member 5430 are arranged so as to be continuously in contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by the difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is deformed by tilting the shaft, so that the disc cam 53
Although the case where the frictional force is generated by the contact between the 44 and the release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored partially projects in a direction close to the disc cam 5344, and is configured to come into contact with the disc cam 5344 when the shaft is tilted and deformed. You may. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 come into contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 that connects the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be in contact with the front frame 14 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower board surface support device 600 may be configured to be in contact with the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board surface support device 600 arranged in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600, the game board 13 is attached.
Although the case where the vertical position of the above does not change has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end portion thereof is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
It may be configured so that it is arranged below the upper surface of the back side extension plate 621c of 0. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board surface support device 600 from there, the game board 13 can be mounted on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the work of fixing the game board 13 can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or it may be a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Immediately behind 3, it is preferable that a long path is formed in the front-rear direction because the ball can be discharged smoothly. Further, by adopting a path that bends back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, so that the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145 do not interfere with each other. It can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Further, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straight extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a path that bends up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts with the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are the back side wall portion 461H.
The speaker connection wire 453 may be separated by about the diameter in the thickness direction of the speaker. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the resistance of the sandwiching causes a load in the direction of pulling out the speaker assembly 450 to the speaker connection wire 453. Speaker connection line 4 even when it is hung
It is possible to prevent the 53 from coming off the speaker 451.

Further, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H within the range of the protrusion length corresponding to the recessed depth of the wiring passage recess 464, while the auxiliary protrusion portion 461H is further projected. In the range of length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connecting wire 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the back side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the back side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, when the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chamber and the intermediate main body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to the same level as the base end side main body 461B and the tip end side main body 461T, the base end side main body 461B and the intermediate main body 461
A large speaker chamber may be formed jointly by M and the tip side main body portion 461T.

Further, although it has been described that the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the tip end side main body portion 461T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the same volume may be used. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, and may be the center in the left-right direction, or may be a position between the left-right end and the center in the left-right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 4 constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are formed.
Of the 67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T, the opening of the opening formed by the front side concave portion 471 and the rear side concave portion 491. The case where they do not overlap visually (direction intersecting with the direction) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portions 467d and rib portions 467c) may be configured to overlap each other in the left-right direction view. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze shape, so that, for example, the front recessed portion 47
By inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire through the opening formed by 1 and the posterior recessed portion 491, making it difficult to perform fraudulent acts that cause the tip to invade the game area, and prolonging the time required for the fraudulent acts. It is possible to suppress cheating. Here, as the suppression of fraudulent activity, the suppression of fraudulent activity itself and the profit of fraudulent activity (successful fraudulent activity)
For example, suppression of

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
It may be configured to mesh with the fourth gear 880G of the G and the loose fitting device 880. in this case,
Since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal operating device 800, but also during the expanding operation and the gathering operation. it can. As a result, the radial sliding operation of the petal 802 and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed at the same time, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The free fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or it may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides and moves by the operation of the drive side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 and the tip end portion of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800. You may. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated from each other above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game). The game board 13 is arranged to face the back member 155 of the operation unit as the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side).
Since the portion of is also displaced to the front side, the rear member 155 of the operation unit and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
Whether or not 00 is in the fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation unit back member 155 arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board surface arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board surface support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600 (
It may be configured to be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of the synthetic resin collides with the metal board surface support device 600, so that the multifunctional cover member 171
The multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) because the risk of damage can be reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 in which the light radiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and the other surface is arranged on the front side so as to be switchable (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate around a parallel axis), the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 can be switched. In addition, the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the production by switching the correspondence with the moving accessory that overhangs inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LED 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 is made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged on one side on the front side and the other side. Consider switching between cases where it is placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion (the portion near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side emits light. When the surface faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged to face each other over a wide area of the opening 565 (in a wider range as compared with the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the moving accessory can be switched.

In this case, for example, the effect of the effect can be improved by operating the moving accessory in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory side, the surface on the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the portion corresponding to the opening 524 at the uppermost portion, while the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving accessory side. At the timing of facing the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) and change in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, switching for changing the light emitting portion according to the operation of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need for switching the LED 512a for controlling light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (the brightness is increased, the amount of light is increased, and the light is clearly emitted), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is collected. It is diffused (the brightness becomes low, the amount of light becomes small, and the light emission becomes faint). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory)
It is possible to change the light emitting mode of.

Further, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is directed toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal). By changing the posture in which the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510), the moving accessory and the liquid crystal have a beam shape (
It is possible to emit light in a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while irradiating the light (in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to emit light at a position distant from the moving accessory or the liquid crystal while emitting light only in the details of the moving accessory or the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the foul ball passage portion 9145, 10145
The case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken part is fragile enough to drop, and the detection sensor is arranged at the position where the broken part passes when it falls. Is also good. In this case, due to the fact that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the ball launch is controlled to be forcibly stopped, thereby aiming for early detection of fraudulent activity and due to fraudulent activity. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss received by the game machine hall) obtained by the cheating person.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve the frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve the frictional force, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to be made of resin. The operating resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is in an inclined posture with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the slits 815 on both sides arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T may be formed.
A recessed portion may be formed so that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, the operating resistance can be improved by the inclined surface 2803T getting into the recessed portion.

In the 16th embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of the light is set to the direction of collecting the light or the direction of spreading the light. As explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 is CCVIb in each region.
Since all of the ~ CCVIe are inclined upward, it is possible to facilitate the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a walking person in order to select the aircraft to be played. As a result, the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCV which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530.
The downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and the upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010, and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in the direction of inclining upward, so that the aircraft to be played is selected. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of a person walking in, the light that travels toward the player and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, the ball stored in the upper plate 17 can be illuminated with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010, it is possible to improve the interest of the player playing the game.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example
Once a jackpot is hit, it is called a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) occur. It may be carried out as. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. In addition to pachinko machines, there are also pachinko machines, sparrow balls, slot machines, etc.
It may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the display is caused by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
After a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is specific. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game", and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol change is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever.
For example, due to the operation of the stop button or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. A special game is generated, and a large amount of balls are paid out to the player in the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. It should be noted that the first control example is for explaining the control example by changing a part of the configuration for each of the above-described embodiments, and the same configuration as each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. Is omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and a rail 76. , 77, general entry port 63, second entry port 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, distribution device 700, etc., and the peripheral edge thereof is the inner frame 4 ( It is attached to the back side of (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that the player cannot see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, as will be described in detail later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. The ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r (see FIG. 208).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 207.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip end portion of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 207) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 207) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 207) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while the ball is the second ball entry port 640 or the right second ball entry port. When a prize is won in 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probabilistic jackpot (big hit A, C), a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot (big hit B), or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when any of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R time saving 100 times jackpot (big hit A), 16R probability variable odd symbol jackpot (big hit B1), 16R probability variation even symbol jackpot (big hit B2), and 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) are prepared. ing. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, "16R time reduction 100 times jackpot" (big hit A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered symbols. After the round jackpot game, the jackpot shifts to a low-probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), the time is shortened. "16R probability variation odd jackpot" (big hit B1) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same odd symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "16R probability variation even number symbol jackpot" (big hit B2) is notified that the third symbol is a jackpot by finally stopping and displaying the same even numbered symbol, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variation jackpot" (big hit C) means that the third symbol is finally displayed as a combination of specific symbols (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed). In the case of jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to a special gaming state. It is the state of. Further, the "electric support state" in the "high probability state" means a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second entry port. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the electric power support (during the electric power support game state) and the time reduction during the probability change, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It is changed and a longer time is set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win a prize in the second entry port 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed during the electric support or the time saving during the probability change, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened at each time than during normal operation. In addition, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (starting prize) of any one of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, and the right second ball entry port 640r, and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays the fluctuation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the above, and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variablely displaying the second symbol is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, the center frame 86 projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “◯” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (see FIG. 207)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display to be made. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the electric support and the time saving during the probability change, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many chances that the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second entry port 640 during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second method may be performed during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit by increasing the probability of hitting. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the ball entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a part of the balls that flow down the game board 13 can pass through the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. To. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a distribution device 700 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins (wins) a ball through the opening 710a with respect to the distribution device 700, the ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Be done. When the ball wins (wins) the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. As a result, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when the ball wins the right second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on as in the case of the right second entrance 640r. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) due to the turning on of the second entrance switch, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can win is arranged below the front view of the sorting device 700. When a ball wins a prize in the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the on of the second entrance switch. A big hit lottery is made by the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b. This second entry port 640 does not allow the game ball to enter (it is difficult) by restricting the entry of the game ball in a state where the left and right electric accessories 640a, which are normally formed in a blade shape, are upright. ), And when it hits a normal symbol, which will be described later, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees outward as an open operation in a certain operation pattern, forming an inverted figure eight. The game ball is guided to the 2 entry port 640 so that the game ball can easily enter the 2nd entry port 640.

In addition, 5 balls are paid out as prize balls in each of the 1st entrance 64 and the right 2nd entrance 640r, and 2 balls are awarded in the 2nd entrance 640. It is also one of the winning openings paid out as a ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry port 640, and the right number 2 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the entry port 640r is configured to be different, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the right second entry port 640r may be configured as the same number.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second entry port 640.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the electric support and the time reduction during the probability change, and the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is shorter than during the normal period. The symbol "○" is easily displayed on the display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal time.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball basically moves into the opening 710a. A big hit lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r.

On the other hand, during the electric support or the time reduction during the probability change, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67 on either the left or right side, and the second entry is made. Since it is easy to win a prize in the ball opening 640, the ball that has entered the opening 710a is distributed to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r, and in addition, the second entry ball. The jackpot lottery associated with entering the mouth 640 will also be easier to execute. Therefore, since there are more chances of big hit lottery than during normal times, it is advantageous for the player as compared with normal times.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can be used with respect to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the electric support during the probability change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). , You can change the way the ball is fired. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower side of the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning any of the first entry port 64, the second entry opening 640, and the right second entry opening 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (varies). After the lapse of time), the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The occurrence of a jackpot is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side of the front view of the sorting device 700. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the entry ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a touch sensor 290, a setting switch 291 and an RTC 292, a firing sensor 293, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. There is.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 238). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in FIG. 208, the distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13. In the through hole formed in the game board 13, a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the opening 710a flows down and a flow path portion through which the game ball entering the second entry port 640 flows down are housed. The base member of the distribution device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and is formed of the above-mentioned opening 710a located in the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a located below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. A through hole (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and formed through in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole (not shown) located below the through-hole and formed through in the front-rear direction. Formed mainly in preparation.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body having an open front side. Further, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the front view, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from a substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both ends of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward both left and right sides, a distribution member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761 of each other, and a distribution member 762. It is mainly provided with a throwing port formed above the.

The distribution member 762 is formed in a ring shape, and is inserted into the inside of the ring shape with three protrusions 762a projecting outward at a distance of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof. It is formed with a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around the axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted into the inside of the ring of the distribution member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is rotatably arranged around the shaft portion 762b.

The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball passing through the opening 710a is thrown, and is in the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the central portion is located. The ball is thrown to the opposite side in the left-right direction. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the protrusion 762a in the central portion. The protrusions 762a projecting from both ends regulate the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the protrusion 762a in the center is located due to the weight applied when the sphere passes (distribution member 762). The rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the protrusion 762a in the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface, the guided sphere collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface to regulate the displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as “third throwing path KR3”) in which balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 described above are rolled and thrown, and the distribution member 760 It is formed with a downward slope from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the spheres distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

The lower end of the inclined surface 761 is formed so as to be inclined in a direction closer to the intermediate member so that the side surface on the back surface side increases in thickness forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that has been rolled on the inclined surface 761 and thrown to the end thereof is placed in front of the distribution member 760 and is placed in front of the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Can be thrown to. More specifically, a ball that is distributed to the left side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first entry port 64. On the other hand, a ball that is distributed to the right side in the front view by the distribution member 762 and rolls on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second entry port 640r.

The interposition member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front view, and has the above-mentioned variable winning device 65 in the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view, the first ball entry port 64 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. It is formed mainly including a right second entry port 640r penetrating in the front-rear direction and these first entry ports 64.

The first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r are each formed on the front side of the left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, a path for passing a ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above to the through hole of the winning member 730 through the first entry port 64 and a right second entry port 640r. It is possible to form a path for throwing a ball into the through hole of the winning member 730.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering through the opening 710a is thrown into the sorting member 760, and is thrown into the third throwing path KR3 in either the left-right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When a ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the ball is inside the first entry port 64 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first entry port 64 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entry port 64.

On the other hand, when the ball thrown through the third throwing path KR3 in the left direction is thrown to the end of the third throwing path KR3, the right second entry port 640r of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing path KR4 inside the. Here, the game ball that has entered the second entry port 640 is detected by the detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second entry port 640r.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the opening 710a is alternately distributed to the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the game ball is evenly distributed to the first entry port 64. It is possible to uniformly generate a reserved ball by inserting a game ball into the right second entry port 640r. As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes an upper limit, and overflow that is not stored as a reserved ball can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not change at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to change at the same time. With this configuration, a lottery for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination result can be displayed, so that the games can be played more time-efficiently.

The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B1", one of the main symbols of the odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" will be stopped and displayed in a row. Variable display is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit A" or "big hit B2", variable display is performed in which any of the main symbols of even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned. Further, in the case of a jackpot C, the chance eyes composed of the combination of "341" are displayed. In addition, this combination of chances is configured so that it is not selected when the lottery result is out of order. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is configured to be displayed by a combination of a specific third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol (for example, a golden fish symbol) different from the normal third symbol from 0 to 9 is displayed. ) May be displayed in one or a plurality of combinations, or characters such as "chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the upper two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The substantially center of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the jackpot symbols are aligned on the effective line L1 (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which the hold symbol on which the change is executed is moved and displayed when the hold ball held in the main display area Dm is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). is there. The reserved symbol that has been moved to the execution display area is displayed with a symbol larger than the reserved symbol so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbol change is in progress. It should be noted that, when the fluctuation is executed, the color of the symbol is changed or the pattern of the symbol is changed to suggest the lottery result of the fluctuating special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entry port 64, the right second entry opening 640r, and the second entry opening 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and the preview effect image. In the small area Ds2, a character display area C in which a notice effect image of the character is displayed when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number is set.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are visibly displayed, so that a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays the executing pedestal symbol m0 indicating that the holding ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is an area to be moved and displayed. When the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. Of the reserved symbols (round symbols) displayed in the small area Ds2, the round symbol displayed on the leftmost side indicating that the most reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area is displayed. A round symbol having a diameter larger than that of the reserved symbol is displayed in Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the reserved symbols displayed side by side to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved symbol was displayed. Will be done. When the reserved symbol moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as a symbol being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol whose fluctuation is started, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and the symbol of the running symbol are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed and the selected fluctuation pattern from the running symbol displayed in the small area Ds1. Can improve the interest of. The pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, the pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the effect of changing the special symbol within the period of change. For example, the timing at which the third symbol switches from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation and the reach display mode (display mode in which the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at the timing or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the small area Ds2, a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that the reserved symbol indicating that the variation order is the first reserved symbol is displayed is It is displayed on the far left. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, the second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 indicating that the reserved order is third, and the reserved order. The fourth reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the fourth, the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is the fifth, and the sixth reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is the sixth. m6, the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the holding order is the 7th, and the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the holding order is the 8th are in a state where the reserved symbols are not displayed. Is also displayed.

When the number of reserved symbols is not displayed in excess of a predetermined number, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. The reserved number suggestion symbol P is formed in a variable lid shape in which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. Similarly, the character "6" indicating that the holding order is the sixth is displayed on the upper part of the 6th reserved symbol pedestal m6, and the holding order is 7 on the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7. A variable lid shape in which the character "7" indicating that it is the eighth is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the holding order is the eighth is displayed on the upper part of the pedestal m8 for the eighth reserved symbol. It is composed of the symbols of.

As shown in FIG. 209 (b), when the number of reserved symbols is 0, the reserved number suggestion symbol P spans the area from the 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the maximum number of reserved symbols is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, a maximum of 4 is set for the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 is set for the second special symbol. Further, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the maximum number is set by combining the reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, a character display pedestal C1 indicating that the area is for displaying the advance notice character is displayed. With this configuration, even when the notice character is not displayed, the player can confirm the area where the character is displayed in advance, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variablely displayed in the main area Dm (when the special symbol is variablely displayed), the first ball entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second entry port 640r and the second entry port 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol entered is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order. The pending symbol is displayed in. FIG. 210 (a) shows the display of the reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of holds is 4, the variable lid symbol on which the fifth hold of the number of holds suggestion symbol P is displayed is hidden and variably displayed. .. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol is displayed near the variable lid symbol, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid symbol as the reserved symbol and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. it can. Further, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), when the number of reserved balls is 4, not only the variable lid symbol in the display area of the 5th reserved balls is hidden, but also the character display area C of the girl It is configured so that the character symbol is displayed.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by a balloon, up to the maximum number of reserved balls for the player. The remaining number of can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 7, the character "1 more" is displayed in the comment display, and when 1 more reserved ball is stored, the maximum number of reserved balls is stored. It is suggested that the eight reserved balls are in a memorized state. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit, the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entry 640, right. By entering the ball into any of the second entry ports 640r (the entry port corresponding to the special symbol that is not the upper limit of the hold), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not stored on hold.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the poor game ball is alternately placed by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700 at the first entry port 64 (the first ball entry port 64 (the first). It is divided into 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the 2nd special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be alternately and evenly stored. As a result, even when the total number of reserved balls (the first special symbol and the second special symbol combined) is 7, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about overflow. The game can be continued as if the ball were inserted.

Further, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is reached, the character "MAX" indicating that the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit is displayed, and the player even though the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit. Can suppress the problem that the reserved ball overflows due to the continuous firing of the game ball.

In FIG. 211 (a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the winning / failing determination result in which the reserved ball is determined by the look-ahead process (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the start winning process (Z105) of FIG. Information with the selected variation pattern type is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning command, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that there are various types of jackpot or missed super reach, the player The display mode of the holding ball is changed (for example, the white holding symbol is changed to red) and displayed as an effect to give the expectation to the jackpot, and the fifth variable lid symbol of the holding number suggestion symbol P is also not. Display as it is without displaying. Further, an effect is executed in which a girl is displayed in the character display area C and the character "as is" is displayed to suggest that the number of reserved characters is not increased any more. Here, when the fifth reserved ball is stored, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the character "OVER" is displayed in a balloon from the girl in the character display area C, so that the ball does not overflow. Anyway, you will be notified as if it had overflowed. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the fourth reserved ball will be displayed in a variable manner, and even though the reserved ball with a high expectation for the jackpot is memorized, the holding ball ( It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily firing and consuming the game ball).

As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the number of 0 reserved balls is stored up to 4 in a short period (for example, 5 seconds), at the timing when the 4th reserved ball is stored, Variable lid of the number of pending symbols P The 5th and 6th symbols of the symbol P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, the word "early" is displayed, and the suspended period is set. Since it is short, the notification suggesting that the reserved number suggestion symbol P is displayed in a specially variable manner is executed. Here, normally, when there are four reserved balls, the fifth variable lid symbol of the reserved number suggestion symbol P is hidden, but within 5 seconds, 0 reserved balls are hidden. By increasing the number to 4, it is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols are displayed as hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect to be executed depending on the increase period of the number of reserved balls or the interval at which the reserved balls are stored, and the player can determine that a predetermined number or more of the reserved balls are generated in a short period of time. Can be easily recognized. Further, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is configured to be different from the usual one, but the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is not changed and the display mode of the reserved symbol (for example, for example) is not changed. The color, pattern, and shape of the reserved symbol may be changed).

Next, a variable display example of the variable lid symbol P in the time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. 212 (b). In the time-saving game state (the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is high), unlike the normal game state (the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is low), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 212 (b) As shown in, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable lid symbols P are hidden. Then, a girl's character is displayed, and a character that notifies the player to memorize the sixth reserved ball, such as "put up to 6", is displayed by a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the probability of hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is set to a high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessory (electric support) 640a can be easily set to the open state. The game ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. Therefore, the overflow of the reserved ball is likely to occur during the time-saving game. Therefore, unlike the normal game, many variable lid symbols P are hidden during the time-saving game, which is the upper limit of the reserved ball. By encouraging the player to play so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of balls, it is possible to play the game so as to prevent the reserved balls from being stored up to the upper limit value and becoming prone to overflow. it can. In the time-saving game state, when the reserved ball becomes the 5th, the 7th (m7) variable lid symbol P is hidden, and when the reserved ball becomes the 7th, the 8th (m8) variable lid symbol P is hidden. P is hidden.

In this control example, the seventh variable lid symbol P is hidden when the number of reserved balls reaches the fifth during the time-saving game, but the number is not limited to this, and up to six reserved balls are seven. The eye and the eighth variable lid symbol P may be configured to be maintained in the displayed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in an attempt to generate six or more reserved balls.

When the 4th reserved ball is memorized, the 6th and 7th variable lid symbols are hidden depending on the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the number of reserved balls to the 6th. It may be configured so that the characters "insert up to 6" suggesting are displayed. In this way, by notifying the player in advance whether it is a jackpot game type (probability change hit or normal hit) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player is motivated to accumulate reserved balls. Can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (b), it is configured to be variable depending on the look-ahead result (information indicated by the winning command) of the reserved ball in which the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is stored. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 214 (a), a girl character that is normally displayed when the number of reserved balls is four is displayed, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (b), four characters are displayed. An example is shown in which a special girl character different from the normal time is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the reserved ball of the eye is memorized. There is. Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery to determine the type of girl different from the normal time, and when the look-ahead result is a big hit or a missed super reach, the winning probability is set high. .. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for a jackpot according to the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (b), a display mode when the number of reserved pieces reaches the maximum value and then an over prize is won will be described. FIG. 214 (a) shows “MAX” indicating that when the number of reserved characters is stored up to the upper limit value, the character J1 of the girl displayed in the character display area C has the upper limit value of the number of reserved characters by a balloon comment. Characters are displayed. After that, when a game ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. Is displayed, and the characters "Over" is displayed to indicate that it has overflowed. In this way, in the case of an overflow, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the overflow by notifying the player that the overflow has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in this control example, the character type is variably displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow, but when the purpose is to increase the profit on the game store side, the displayed character is displayed by generating overflow. Depending on the type of the game and the content of the comment, the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner, the pre-reading result of the stored reserved ball (win / fail judgment result, etc.), and the current game state (normal game state or probability change game state). ) May be configured to notify the type. With this configuration, by playing the game while generating the overflow, the player can enjoy various effects, and the overflow that is disadvantageous to the player can be generated while enjoying the overflow.

With reference to FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (b), a display mode when the hold effect during reach is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when the variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) that is the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the lottery is performed. When it is determined that the special hold effect is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 215, the display mode of the hold effect during reach is set when the reach display mode is reached. When the hold effect during reach is executed, the 5th and 6th variable lid symbols P are hidden regardless of the number of balls on hold, the girl character J1 is displayed, and "save up to 6" is displayed by a balloon comment. A character suggesting the player to accumulate 6 reserved balls during the reach fluctuation is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b), when up to 6 reserved balls are actually stored during the reach display, the reach symbol of the even symbol "6" becomes the odd symbol "7" which is a symbol type advantageous to the player. It is variable and displayed. Further, the character "well done" is displayed from the girl character J1 in a balloon, and the color of the sixth reserved symbol is changed (for example, from blue to red) and displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the launch of the game ball and playing the game even during the reach, and it is possible to increase the profit on the side of the game store.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls reaches a specified number (6), the reach symbol is changed. However, the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even number symbol is used. In some cases, instead of changing the reach pattern to an odd number pattern, a school of fish is displayed in the main display area Dm to swim from right to left, and the expectation of a big hit is determined by the number and color of the fish. It is configured to notify and display a notice such as "Congratulations" to suggest a result of a pass / fail judgment.

The display mode in the lucky hold effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (a) to 216 (b). When a specific fluctuation (the fluctuation that won the advance notice lottery to execute the lucky hold effect) is executed When the previous big hit, the number of reserved balls when the reserved balls corresponding to the fluctuation are stored is stored. , The mark symbol n6 as shown in FIG. 216 (a) is displayed on the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the number of reserved balls, and corresponds to the mark symbol n6 "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 216 (b), when up to 6 hold balls are stored during the lucky hold effect, the characters "well done" are displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area Dm A character (notice display mode) indicating that a probability change jackpot is given in the changing special symbol "probability change confirmation" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game. In this control example, this effect is configured to be executed when there is a big hit, but it is not limited to this, and even if it is off, the big hit if it is a big hit depends on the judgment value of the acquired big hit type. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and a jackpot may be expected.

In the lucky hold effect, when the hold balls stored in the variable lid symbol P (5 to 8 hold) are hit, the number of hold balls is stored, and when the next jackpot fluctuation is executed, the lucky hold effect is executed. It is configured to be displayed as a hold number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of how many holds were stored when the previous jackpot occurred, and the lucky hold can be kept as many as possible. It is possible to make the game play so that the effect can be easily executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the reserved symbol has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (number of reserved symbols at the time of winning: FIG. The number indicated by i shown in 216) is added and displayed. When the reserved symbol is digested (the change of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol is started), the number of reserved symbols at the time of winning is moved (variable) by sliding to the reserved symbol display area where the order of change is one younger. Even if it is displayed as, it is displayed with the same number. With this configuration, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of holdings at the time of winning in the fluctuation.

In the case of a big hit, the number of holdings at the time of winning the big hit game executed in the production during the big hit game (opening production, round production, ending production, etc.) is displayed by numbers, symbols, etc. and notified. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 (a) to 217 (b), a hit game in which the electric accessory 640a is open for a longer period than the normal hit, which is one of the hit types of the normal symbol. ), The display mode of the hold effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when a long-time hit of a normal symbol is won and a long-time hit game is started, a comment "Opening" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display notifies the player that the long-time hit game is being executed, and the first entry port 64 or the right second entry without firing the game ball during the long-time hit game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball misses the opportunity to enter the ball mouth 640r. In addition, when a game ball enters the first entry port 64 or the right second entry opening 640r during this long-time hit game, the reserved symbol corresponding to the entry is black, which is different from the normal one. It is displayed as a pending symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the reserved balls stored during the game for a long time and the reserved balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 217 (b), when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol stored during the long-time game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronization with the start of the scroll display. , The design of the treasure box is displayed in the main display area Dm, the characters "Great chance when the treasure box opens !!" are displayed, and the treasure box opens while the third design is changing. It is suggested to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol of is highly expected to be a big hit.

With this configuration, when a normal symbol is hit for a long time, the effect of the reserved ball is changed, and the special effect is executed even during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. By executing the hit for a long time, the production of the game can be greatly changed, and a fresh game can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 fluctuates by indicating whether or not the lottery of ordinary symbols performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the fluctuation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the second symbol is displayed. Will be done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball at the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st ball entry port 64 and the right 2nd ball entry port 640r. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A distribution device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the distribution device 700, game balls that have entered the opening 710a are alternately distributed by the distribution member 762. A first ball entry port 64 and a right second ball entry port 640r are provided. When a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640r, the first entry opening switch and the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 are turned on. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn by the main control device 110 due to the turning on of the first entry switch and the second entry switch, and the display according to the lottery result is the first. 1 It is indicated by LED 37a of the symbol display device 37. Further, the first entry port 64 and the right second entry opening 640r are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls when the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640 are entered is the same, but the number of prize balls is not limited to the same. Good. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64, three prize balls are awarded to the right second entrance 640r, and four prize balls are awarded to the right second entrance 640r. The number of balls may be set to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first entry port 64.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds) for the type of jackpot game to be executed (for example, in the case of jackpot A). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are temporarily formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 219, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, in order to select the special hit random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol. Special hit type counter C2 to be used, stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbol (reach hit type, non-reach deviation (disengagement length A, deviation short A), reach deviation type), variable pattern selection The variable type counter CS1 used for the above and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the ordinary hit random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 255). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and a special symbol holding common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special hit random number counter C1, a special hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variable type counter are set according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the right second ball entry port 640r.

Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 957), reaches the maximum value (for example, 957 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 957), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

Further, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the special hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1. However, when it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special) in which the probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol is higher than that of the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. What is the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability of special symbol (see FIG. 221 (a)) and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability of special symbol (see FIG. 221 (a))? , Is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , The maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99) is reached and then returns to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol is out of alignment. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the special hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. .. In the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as "big hit A", "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C", and "big hit A" and "big hit A" are set by the special hit type counter C2. One of "big hit B1", "big hit B2", and "big hit C" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 957. In this special hit random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number values "0 to 2" are the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability. It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 958, and the total number of random values to be the jackpot is 3, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "3/958".

On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are 27 random numbers that serve as jackpots for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. .. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers is 27 while the total number of random numbers is 27, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "27/958".

In this embodiment, a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type includes the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first, which are referred to in response to the lottery of the first special symbol. 2 Special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, which is referred to in response to the lottery of special symbols, is set respectively.

The special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 222 (b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 75" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "76 to 79" were "big hit B2" and "80 to 99". As the jackpot type of the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the fluctuation is a jackpot. The determination value for collating (determining) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored corresponding to the jackpot type.

FIG. 222 (c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, when the random number value in the acquired special hit type counter is “0 to 39”, the jackpot type is “big hit A”. The jackpot types when the values were "40 to 87" were "big hit B1", and the jackpot types when the values were "88 to 91" were "big hit B2" and "92 to 99". As the jackpot type of the case, "big hit C" is set respectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of hit types (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. Has been done. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type selected when the judgment result is a jackpot is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player is given the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You can be interested in which of the lottery is being executed. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given is the same (60%) for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the probability variation ratio differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the game machine. It is possible to suppress a problem that the probability variation ratio is not constant as a whole. Further, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special symbol is set low, the probability that the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected is set higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is configured to be advantageous to the player. There is.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The stop type selection counter C3 and the variable type counter CS1 described above determine a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and details of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 255) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) that stores the random value that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol variation from the values (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the variation pattern selection table 202b1 for normal use, which is used in the gaming state (normal gaming state) when the probability of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is low. , The time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used for the gaming state (high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high is set, respectively. Although the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in more detail later, in the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, the number of reserved balls, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the content of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and the variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 224. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1, various fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter are set for each of the fluctuation patterns. A value with CS1 is assigned. If the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot type determined (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is wrong, a fluctuation pattern is set for each of the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "51 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation occurs. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 0" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). In the case of any of "60", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "61 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100" and fluctuates. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 reserved balls (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). If, the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101 to 198". The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 4, and the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 239”, the variation type counter CS1 When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach deviation A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for 5 to 8 reserved balls, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation A (variation No. 11) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210-239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When the reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and the value is super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern with a small number of reserved balls (when the number is 1 to 4) and a long fluctuation time is easily selected. By inserting a game ball into the 1st entry port 64 or the right 2nd entry opening 640r, a reserved ball is likely to occur, and a period during which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped occurs (lottery game is not performed). It is configured so that the trouble that the player gets tired of the game due to the occurrence of the period) can be suppressed. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is large, the selection rate of normal reach and super reach is set low, and when there are many reserved balls, the normal reach and super reach are changed, so that the player can be judged as to whether or not the game is successful. Can be expected to be a hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are set for each of the variation patterns. The value of is assigned. If the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponds to the jackpot type determined (the jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d according to the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2). Is set. Further, when the hit / fail determination result is incorrect, a fluctuation pattern is set for the number of reserved balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the hit / fail determination result is a hit, and the jackpot type is "big hit A", the number of reserved balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of reserved balls). When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation) is obtained with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. No1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "91 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100" and fluctuates. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit B1" or "big hit B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 0" for the number of reserved balls 1 to 8 (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). If it is any of "100", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected with respect to the value "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "101 to 250", the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "0 to 100", and the fluctuation is made. Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of "160 to 198". Be selected.

When the jackpot type is "big hit C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 reserved balls (that is, regardless of the number of reserved balls). If, the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101 to 198". The jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected.

As described above, when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reserved pieces. Therefore, by executing the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, it is possible to make the player expect that the hit / fail determination result is a big hit.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" with respect to the number of reserved balls of 1 to 2, and the variable type counter. When the deviation length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of CS1 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of “210 to 229”, the variation type counter CS1 When the value out of normal reach A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value of "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set. When the super reach outlier A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " Super reach out-of-B (variation No. 10) is selected for "0 to 198".

Further, when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 199" for 3 to 8 reserved balls, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". When the normal reach deviation A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "200 to 229", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is super relative to "0 to 198". When the reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" and the value is super reach. Off B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the fluctuation time (variation period) in the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation B is configured to be 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the fluctuation time that can be selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1. There is. As a result, when the hit / fail judgment result is wrong and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the missed short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbol can be changed a lot in a short time. , The period until it is determined to be a big hit (the period between big hits) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be measured.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239), the counter returns to 0. Further, when the normal hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set. If it matches the value of the random number to be the hit set by the normal hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and the probability of hitting the normal symbol from the low probability. It is divided into two types, one for high probability time (the period during which the normal symbol is in the time saving state), and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. Further, the hit type of the normal symbol is set to normal hit and long-time hit, and the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, in the normal game state (low probability game state) for the normal hit of the normal symbol, and in the big hit game state, the operation in which the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state with an open time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit to be done. Further, during the time saving and the probability variation period, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time hit is a hit in which the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a in the open state with an open time of 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, which is executed in the probabilistic period during the short time in the normal hit, and the opening operation in the long-time hit are set to be the same, but the opening operation is not limited to this, and the long-time hit is different. It may be an opening operation of. Specifically, for example, the operation of being in the open state may be performed once for 3 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r at the time of a long hit, and the fluctuation in the second special symbol during the normal game. The display can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game effect by the variable display of the second special symbol in which the fresh notice display and the like are displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), when the value of the acquired random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 6 at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is hit normally. Is determined to be. Further, if it is any of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a long-time hit of a normal symbol. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is a normal hit. In addition, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the long-time hit of the normal symbol is not set, but when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the long-time hit. The hit is virtually the same as the long hit.

By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of the game ball by the player and increase the profit on the side of the game store. On the other hand, in the time saving medium and the probability variation period where the probability is high, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of "1 / 1.2", and the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance The chance of entering the 640r can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the game ball of the player and set the game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game aiming at the game with a high probability, and can play the game for a longer time.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed. Then, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal hit. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is released only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but it is released. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times". Further, if the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entrance 640r is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" as a long-time hit.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Run for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is released "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the right second entrance 640r Since the opening period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the right second entrance 640r is opened only "2 seconds x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 255).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 218, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221) and the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221 (b)) described above. In addition to the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222 (a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Further, although omitted in this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, various data and programs necessary for the game are stored in the ROM 202.

FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. In the winning command table 202e, in the look-ahead process (Z320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a determination result such as a variation pattern in which the stored reserved ball is selected at the start of variation is determined, and the determination is made. It is a table for determining the winning command corresponding to the result. As shown in FIG. 225, when the lottery result in the look-ahead is a big hit, a winning command corresponding to the determined big hit type and the selected variable pattern type is determined. As a result, not only the fluctuation pattern type and the winning / failing determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. If the lottery result is incorrect, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e as the variation pattern types are all out of the deviation length A, the deviation short A, and the deviation short B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, opening number counter 203g, long-time opening flag 203i, time saving medium counter 203j, and variable execution It has a flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a jackpot medium flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Judgment such as lottery of special symbols is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 which is shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only in the reserved area (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. A random number counter C4 is normally stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, and the acquired data is the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ) Is vacant, and the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the winnings stored in the other hold areas are stored. The shift process is performed to pack the data of Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). .. The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning a prize in the right second entry port 640r, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 receives a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held at 110. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

When the sphere passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (Fig.). 252 Z503: No).

The opening number counter 203g is a counter for counting the opening times of the electric accessory 64c. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long-time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the product is hit for a long time. This long-time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: FIG. 250), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the long-time hit game is executed, the next variation of the normal symbol is started. If) is set to off.

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to zero, and each time a special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Will be done. That is, when a special symbol becomes a big hit, a new value is set according to the big hit type regardless of the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether to execute the variation of the first special symbol or the variation of the second special symbol. In this control example, the variation is started according to the order in which the ball is entered into the first entry port 64 and the right second entry port 640r (the order in which the ball is reserved and stored). Here, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and the fluctuation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process (Z204: FIG. 245) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed. Based on the order data of the hold storage stored in the change order storage area 203p described later, it is determined whether the change stored next is the hold data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The probability variation flag 203m is set when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot A in the process of Z1113 in the jackpot control process (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110 (Z1104: FIG. 256). Z1111: No) is set to on. Further, in the processing of Z220 in the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to off when the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit is stopped.

The jackpot flag 203n is a flag indicating that the gaming state is in the jackpot game. The jackpot middle flag 203n is set to on when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the Z1114 process of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the jackpot game is set to off when the end timing is reached.

The variable order storage area 203p is an area in which when a game ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the right second ball entry port 640r and is stored as a hold ball, the hold order is stored. In this control example, the variation of the special symbol is configured to be executed in the order in which the special symbol is reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not executed with priority. Further, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the ball to the first ball entry port 64 and the right second ball entry port 640r, the fluctuations are started in the order in which they are held and stored. As a result, even when the special symbol fluctuates, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed alternately, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is released. It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, and the like necessary for other control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details will be omitted.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 290 that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content of the above, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 226 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, a hold change selection table 222b, a hold effect mode selection table 222c, a hold lid range selection table 222d, and a hold lid command selection. Table 222e, Hold lid color change selection table 222f, Lucky hold command table 222g, Background mode selection table 222h, Hold character selection table 222i, Hold character change table 222j, Blowout selection table 222k, Reaching production lottery table 222m, Reach start time The calculation table 222n and the lucky hold lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command and the fluctuation pattern type, and a counter value for selection (not shown) is acquired to determine one fluctuation pattern.

The hold change selection table 222b is necessary for the effect of deciding whether or not to display the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a variable manner based on the received winning command, and to execute the effect according to the change content. It is a selection table for acquiring the pending change value.

FIG. 227 (a) schematically shows the contents of the pending change selection table 222b. In the hold change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the hold symbol of the sub-display area Ds is changed with respect to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 211 (a)) and a pending change value are set. The details of the acquired hold change value will be described in the hold effect mode selection table 222c described later.

Specifically, when the winning command type is out of order and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved symbol is not changed from the normal reserved symbol. Is determined and the pending change value gets 0. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved symbol is variable from the white circle symbol (normal display mode of the reserved symbol) to the blue circle symbol (change A). It is decided that the pending change value is 1.

When the winning command type is out of the normal reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "51 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. In the case of any of "101 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is changed to the green circle symbol and displayed, and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is out of super reach, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 30", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "31 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a normal reach jackpot, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 20", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "21 to 90", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "91 to 198", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2.

When the winning command type is a super reach jackpot, and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 10", no change is determined, and the pending change value acquires 0. If it is any of "11 to 100", the change A is determined and the pending change value is 1. If it is any of "101 to 189", the change B is determined and the pending change value is 2. In the case of any of "190 to 198", it is determined that the white circle symbol is variably displayed as the red circle symbol, and the pending change value is acquired by 3.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed according to the content, so it is reserved and stored not only from the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner but also from the displayed reserved symbol. It is possible to predict the winning / failing judgment result corresponding to the pending symbol. Further, since it is possible to notify the player in advance that the reach display mode will be obtained when the display is variably displayed by the change B, the hold memory should be stored even in the state before the special symbol changes. For example, the player can be expected to start the fluctuation, and even if the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is executed during that time, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting the hold change value for each reach type, it is possible to develop the reach effect via different execution effects even if the hold change is the same, and the player can be surprised with the effect. It is possible to attract.

The hold effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the hold change displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 227 (b) schematically shows the contents of the hold effect mode selection table 222c. In the hold effect mode selection table 222c, the hold effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired in the hold change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the hold change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. In the normal mode, when all the reserved symbols being displayed have not been changed (state) and the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the distance between the reserved symbols and the variable lid symbol P display range is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 210 (b)).

When the hold change value is any of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the hold effect mode. The notice A mode is when any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the held symbol being displayed (state), and when the number of held balls is 4 or more, it is held. This is a hold effect mode in which the symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range (see FIG. 211 (a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 211A is not a display mode showing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of the hold effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the notice A mode, the content of the comment displayed in the state of FIG. 211 (a) is different. In the notice A mode, when a hold ball is generated after the hold symbol whose color is variable and the hold symbol is displayed, one variable lid symbol P is also hidden (for example, the state of FIG. 211 (a)). By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from, the variable lid symbol P with the letter 5 is hidden), and a comment indicating the degree of expectation for a jackpot for the reserved symbol with a variable color. The display is executed by a balloon. In this way, in the notice A mode, after the color of the reserved symbol is changed, in order to make the game play so as to generate the reserved ball, every time the reserved ball is generated, a jackpot for the changed reserved ball is made. It is configured to notify the degree of expectation of.

When the hold change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the hold effect mode. The notice B mode is a case where there is a change in the reserved symbol being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, one of the changes (change A) is made in the reserved symbol being displayed as in the notice A mode. , Change B, Change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the reserved symbol and the variable lid symbol P are displayed without a gap in the display range. (See FIG. 211 (a)), or the mode in which the reserved symbol is displayed on the display range of the variable lid symbol P (see FIG. 211 (b)).

With this configuration, not only the color of the reserved symbol can be changed, but also the display range of the variable lid symbol P can be changed in various ways by increasing or decreasing the number of reserved balls, and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the change contents. It is possible to expand the enjoyment of playing and attract players. Also, unlike the notice A mode, it is a hold effect that allows the player to play the game so that the hold ball is not generated anymore, and the player is interrupted the game (launching operation of the game ball) and the color is variable. Expectations can be raised by concentrating on the start of fluctuations (dynamic display) of special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

The holding lid range selection table 222d has a plurality of data tables for acquiring the holding lid range value required for setting the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. It is set.

Here, the special production performed in the normal mode will be described. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a hold effect during reach, and a lucky hold effect are provided.

The short-term winning effect is an effect that is executed when the time required from the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to the time when the number of reserved balls is memorized and becomes 4 is less than 5 seconds. In the mode, the distance between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol is set to be one holding ball (the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. 212 (a) The number of the holding lid symbol P is variably displayed so that the distance between the holding lid symbol P and the holding symbol P is two, and the girl character J0 indicating that it is a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production in which the comment "early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls is 0 to 1 or more. In this case, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 when the number of reserved balls becomes 4 before the short-term winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time elapses 5 seconds (see Z2425 in FIG. 267). ) To start execution (see FIG. 212 (a)), and when the short-term winning timer 223q elapses 5 seconds, set 0 in the special effect status storage area (see Z2606 in FIG. 270) and end the execution. Is.

The on-reach hold effect is an effect of setting a notice display mode that prompts the player to play a game so as to accumulate up to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 215 (a)) during the reach fluctuation. .. When the variation type is reach, the reach start time is calculated by drawing a lottery based on the reach effect lottery table 222m, which will be described later, and when the execution is possible. The value of the hold effect start timer 223r set by the table 222n based on the variation type becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and another special effect is executed at the timing when the reach effect starts. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the execution is started by setting the special effect status storage area to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) (see FIG. 215 (a)). It is a production that ends at the end of the fluctuation.

The lucky hold effect is to store the number of holds when the hold ball (hold symbol) is memorized (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) is obtained, the hold ball that became the big hit is stored. A predetermined mark symbol (see FIG. 216 (a)) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time of entering the ball entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to the mark symbol. This is an effect of displaying a notice display mode that encourages the player to play the game. When the reserved symbols are stored up to the mark symbol, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), by pressing the frame button 22, the current gaming state (probability changing gaming state (special gaming state) or low probability gaming state) is reached. An effect of notifying the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky hold effect, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of reserved balls when a big hit is obtained in the winning / failing judgment result of the start winning in the past. When the lucky hold storage value 223p, which is stored when is 5 or more, is stored, and whether or not the execution is possible is drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p described later, and the execution becomes possible. , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261) to start the execution (see FIG. 216 (a)), and the effect ends when the next fluctuation starts.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no hold change, the hold effect related to the hold symbol can be determined by the time interval of the start prize, the number of hold balls during the reach fluctuation, and the result of the winning / failing judgment based on the past start prize. Depending on the contents of the memory, various effects can be provided and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 228 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the holding lid range selection table 222d. The holding lid range selection table 222d includes a normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning holding lid range selection table 222d4, and a reach effect. A holding lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when the holding effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls. Further, in the case of the normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low probability game state (big hit probability is low probability and non-time reduction). The hold lid range value is acquired when the hold lid range value is acquired in (game state)) (see Z2354 in FIG. 263) and when the lucky hold effect is in progress (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3) (FIG. 263). (See Z2346) in some cases.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode. FIG. 228 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2. In the notice A mode holding lid range selection table 222d2, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2351 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 4 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", the reserved lid range value of 3 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode.

FIG. 228 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3, the hold lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls and the value (range) of the hold notice counter (see Z2349 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the holding lid range value of 4 is acquired when the value of the holding notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the hold notice counter is "1 to 4", the hold lid range value is 4 and the value of the hold notice counter is "5". In the case of, when the hold lid range value is 3 and the hold notice counter value is "6", the hold lid range value is 2 and the hold notice counter value is "7". When the hold lid range value is 1 and the hold notice counter value is "8", the hold lid range value is 0.

The short-term winning lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229 (a)) is a table used to acquire the holding lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 229 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4, the hold lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls (see Z2342 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the reserved lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the reserved lid range value of 1 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

The holding lid range selection table 222d5 during reach effect is a table used to acquire the hold lid range value in the case of hold effect during reach effect. FIG. 229 (b) schematically shows the contents of the holding lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect. In the hold lid range selection table 222d5 during the reach effect, the hold lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of hold balls (see Z2344 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 8", the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired.

In the time saving hold lid range selection table 222d6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time saving state (the value of the time saving medium counter is other than 0). ) Is a table used to obtain the holding lid range value.

FIG. 229 (c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6. In the time saving holding lid range selection table 222d6, the holding lid range value is acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of holding balls (see Z2353 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 6", the holding lid range value of 2 is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", 0 is acquired as the reserved lid range value.

With this configuration, the display range of the variable lid symbol P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the winning / failing judgment at the start winning and the hold effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a directing effect that enhances participation.

The holding lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 from the holding lid range value acquired in the holding lid range selection table 222d. A table used to select commands for.

FIG. 230A schematically shows the contents of the holding lid command selection table 222e. The holding lid command selection table 222e sets a holding lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the holding lid range value (range) acquired by the holding lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the holding lid range value is "0", BF00 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is the shortest display (see FIG. 214 (a)). When the holding lid range value is "1", BF01 is determined for the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 1 (only the area of holding 8). When the holding lid range value is "2", BF02 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 2 (the area from holding 7 to 8 (see FIG. 212 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "3", BF03 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 3 (the area from holding 6 to 8 (see FIG. 213 (a))). When the holding lid range value is "4", BF04 is determined as the holding lid command, and the display range of the variable lid symbol P is 4 (the area from holding 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211 (a))).

The hold lid command is set in the hold lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the winning command reception process (Z2209) at the start winning, and is executed in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid symbol P can be changed by setting a display holding lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) based on the holding lid range value every time the number of holding balls changes.

The holding lid color change selection table 222f is instructed when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the holding number shown in FIG. 211 (a) is executed (in the example shown in FIG. 211 (a), This is a data table for determining the holding lid symbol P corresponding to the area in which the holding symbol is displayed when the holding balls are generated in excess of (4). The holding lid symbol P determined by the holding lid color change selection table 222f is usually (normally, it is a black frame and the inside is transparent white, and a number indicating the number of holdings corresponding to the holding display area is displayed inside. It is displayed in a variable manner with a specific color (internal color is transparent green) different from the displayed display mode. In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, the sub-display of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the hold notice counter 223 g for recognizing the display position of the hold symbol whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of hold balls. This is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the holding lid symbol P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 230B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the holding lid color change selection table 222f. In the hold lid color change selection table 222f, when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode, the color change range is specified for the value (range) of the hold notice counter 223 g and the value (range) of the number of hold balls. A hold lid command is set to change the display range of the variable lid symbol P from the normal white display mode to green (see (b) in FIG. 211) according to the change range (see Z2348 in FIG. 263). To do.

Specifically, when the value of the hold notice counter 223g is any of "0-4", the hold lid command is issued when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0-4". Not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 5. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF11 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF12 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF13 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 5 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of hold balls is "5", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", BF21 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF22 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 6 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is "6", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 7. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF31 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the region where the number of reserved balls is 7 to 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined for the hold lid command, and the color change range is specified in the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the hold notice counter 223g is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is "8", the hold lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, it is possible to further increase the attention of the player by changing the display mode in a region different from the reserved symbol, which is changed by the determination of the winning / failing determination result (pre-reading determination) in the previous winning. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is increased depending on whether or not the launch is stopped, so that the mode of the reserved symbol and the later fluctuation notice effect can be widely enjoyed.

The lucky hold command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for changing the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of target reserved balls.

FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold command table 222g. In the lucky hold command table 222g, the area of the number of reserved balls to be held is stored by the lucky hold storage value 223p when the lucky hold effect is being produced, and the display hold lid command is set based on the value (FIG. 261). See Z2306).

Specifically, when the lucky hold storage value 223p is 5, the hold lid command FB50 is determined, and the area 5 of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 6, the hold lid command FB51 is determined, and the area 6 of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle (see FIG. 216 (a)). When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 7, the hold lid command FB52 is determined, and the area 7 of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky hold storage value 223p is 8, the hold lid command FB53 is determined, and the area 8 of the variable lid symbol P is changed so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by notifying the number of reserved balls for which the winning / failing judgment result is a big hit in the previous start winning, the interest of the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of reserved balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. On the other hand, it is possible to work to encourage winning, and it is possible to realize a production that improves operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232 (a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. In the background mode selection table 222h, the background mode is selected with respect to the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, the background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, the background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, the background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, the background D (city background) is determined. ..

The hold character selection table 222i sets the content (type) of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting (deciding).

FIG. 232 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The hold character selection table 222i has a hold character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. The contents of (see Z2363 in FIG. 264) are set. As for the reserved characters, J0 is a girl with short hair (see FIG. 210 (b)), J1 is a girl with hair tied (see FIG. 213 (a)), and J2 is a girl with long hair (see FIG. 213 (b)). ), J3 is prepared with an image that can be easily identified by the player, such as a blonde girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 210 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 213 (a)) is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213 (b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51-99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 150". If either is the case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the hold effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 50", J0 is determined as the hold character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51-99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, by determining the holding characters with high expectations according to the difference between the holding production mode and the background that have changed from the start prize, the display mode of the holding production with high expectations can be obtained without impairing the atmosphere of the background production. It will be possible. In addition, the player can recognize the notice with high expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbol and the change of the reserved character.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of jackpots, the number of times the super reach is executed, and the symbol or character to which the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 are given during the game production are acquired. Historical information such as the number of points obtained in the above may be stored, and the selected character may be changed in consideration of the historical information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the selected character can be changed, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

Further, an RTC (real-time clock) may be provided so that the character selected can be changed according to the date and time information or the like. With this configuration, the selected character can be changed with the passage of time after the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, and it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

The hold character change table 222j displays the contents of the hold character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 as the background, the hold effect mode, the current hold character, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting based on.

FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The hold character selection table 222i shows the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode stored in the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, the current hold character in the display mode, and the value of the effect counter 223h. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit and the over prize is obtained (Z2366: Yes), and the display character command is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 264). .. Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. It is a mode that does not (variable).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is ". If it is any of "0 to 180", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214 (b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 80". J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "91-199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

When the background mode is any of "background B", "background C", and "background D", when the hold effect mode is "normal mode", when the current hold character is "J0" When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the hold effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", when the current hold character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is either "0 to 50". J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means to confirm the winning / failing result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and it is possible to raise the interest in the game. it can. In addition, as the reserved character to be changed, a character with a higher expectation after the change is set than before the change, and when the reserved production mode is other than the normal mode, the rate of changing the reserved character is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the hold effect mode, the player can have a means to know the result of the hit / fail judgment through a means of intentionally generating an over prize, and it is possible to provide a playability that enhances the operation. It becomes.

In the balloon selection table 222k, a plurality of data tables for setting the balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 211 (a)) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are set.

FIG. 234 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the balloon selection table 222k. The balloon selection table 222k includes a normal balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, a reach production balloon selection table 222k5, and a lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. A balloon selection table 222k7 for shortening the working hours is provided. Further, the balloon content to be set is the content of the comment display issued by the reserved character in the character display area C.

The normal balloon selection table 222k1 is set when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the game state is the normal state. , A table used to acquire the contents of balloons.

FIG. 234 (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2393 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is not acquired (see FIG. 210 (b)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In that case, YES is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", two more balloon contents are acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 214 (a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211 (a)).

FIG. 234 (c) schematically shows the contents of the notice A balloon selection table 222k2. In the notice A balloon selection table 222k2, the balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the winning / failing determination result of the winning information command.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3", the balloon content is not acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the hit / fail judgment result is In the case of a hit, the content of the balloon is throbbing, and in the case of a miss, the content of the balloon is throbbing. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", if the hit / fail determination result is a hit, the balloon content is expected to be acquired, and if it is not, the expected balloon is acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 70%? Is acquired, and if it is off, the content of the balloon is expected to be 60%? Is obtained. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is expected to be 80%? Is acquired, and if it is off, the balloon content is expected to be 70%? Is obtained. If the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the content of the balloon is extremely hot! Is acquired, and if it is off, something happens to the contents of the balloon! Is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h to display the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as a production to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the hold effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211 (b)).

FIG. 234 (d) schematically shows the contents of the notice B balloon selection table 222k3. In the notice B balloon selection table 222k3, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved effect counter (see Z2388 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is acquired as it is (see FIG. 211 (a)), and the value of the number of reserved balls is "5". In the case of, if the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 4", the balloon content is OVER (see FIG. 211 (b)), and the value of the hold effect counter is "5". In that case, STOP is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the value of the hold effect counter is any of "0 to 5", the balloon content is OVER. When the value of the hold effect counter is "6", the balloon content is STOP, and when the value of the number of hold balls is "7", the value of the hold effect counter is "0 to 6". In any of the above cases, OVER is acquired for the balloon content, and when the value of the hold effect counter is "7", STOP is determined for the balloon content and the value of the number of reserved balls is "8". The MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

With this configuration, it is possible to recognize the winning prize when a change in the reserved symbol with high expectation occurs by the content of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls can be increased by continuing launching more than the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the judgment as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the occurrence of unnecessary launches, and enable the game to be played efficiently. Further, even when a change in the reserved symbol with a high degree of expectation occurs, the setting of the balloon content may be changed so that the launch can be continued.

The short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire the balloon contents at the time of short-term winning (see FIG. 212 (a)).

FIG. 235 (a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, the balloon contents are acquired with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls (see Z2382 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! (See Fig. 212 (a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", the content of the balloon is super fast! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! !! Is acquired and the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the balloon content is fast! !! !! Is obtained.

With this configuration, the interval between starting prizes is short, and the degree to which the number of reserved balls has increased can be recognized by the player by the balloon of the reserved character, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the reach effect (see FIG. 215 (a)).

FIG. 235 (b) schematically shows the contents of the balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect. The balloon selection table 222k5 during the reach effect acquires the balloon contents (Z2384 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the hold effect counter and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the hold effect counter is "0", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0-4", the contents of the balloons are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 215 (a)) is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is OK, and "7 to 8" are acquired. In any case, OVER is acquired for the content of the balloon, and when the value of the hold effect counter 223h is "other than 0", the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0-4". , Save up to 6 balloon contents! Is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is well done (see FIG. 215 (b)), and "7" is acquired. In any case of "~ 8", OVER is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the reserved character during the reach production, it is possible to prompt the launch when the number of reserved balls is small, and in the reach production during the pending production, the balloon is generated. You can change it and play the game without getting bored.

The lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon when the lucky hold effect is being produced (see FIG. 216 (a)).

FIG. 236 (a) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6, when the winning / failing judgment result of winning in the past becomes a big hit, the value corresponding to the hold ball value is set as the number of lucky hold balls (see Z2444 of Z268). The content of the balloon is acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value of, the value (range) of the number of reserved balls, and the value (range) of the reserved change value.

Specifically, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "5", when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0-4", the hold change value is "0-3". In any case, the target of the balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is acquired as OK. When the hold change value is any one of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the number of reserved balls is acquired. When the value of is any of "6 to 8", and when the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the balloon content.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "6", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 5", when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The balloon content aims at 6 (see FIG. 216 (a)), and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "6", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is OK. If it is acquired and the pending change value is any of "1 to 2", the GOOD is determined for the balloon content, and if the pending change value is "3", the balloon content is well done but acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "7 to 8", and when the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "7", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 6", when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The aim of the balloon content is 7 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", when the hold change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the hold change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired for the balloon content, and when the hold change value is "3", the balloon content is well acquired but the value of the number of reserved balls is "8". In the case of "", if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the balloon content.

When the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is "8", when the value of the number of hold balls is any of "0 to 7", when the hold change value is any of "0 to 3" , The aim of the balloon content is 8 and when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", when the pending change value is "0", the balloon content is OK and the pending change value is " In any case of "1 to 2", GOOD is acquired as the balloon content, and when the pending change value is "3", the balloon content is acquired although it is well done.

In this way, by changing the content of the balloon according to the difference in the number of lucky reserved balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to be won. If the lottery result is a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 holds, the display mode of the lucky hold can be updated without getting bored. The game can be continued.

In the time-saving balloon selection table 222k6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the hold effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time-saving state (the value of the time-saving medium counter is other than 0). It is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon.

FIG. 236 (b) schematically shows a balloon selection table 222k7 for shortening the working hours. In the time saving balloon selection table 222k7, the balloon contents are acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is entered up to 6 (see FIG. 212 (b)), and the number of reserved balls is "6 to 7". In any of the cases, the content of the balloon is OK.

With this configuration, the optimum number of reserved balls can be notified in a short time, and the player can grasp the transition status of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If the situation of the optimum number of reserved balls can be maintained, it is possible to avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the waiting state becomes inefficient in time, and the over-winning that starts and wins beyond the upper limit of the number of reserved balls occurs. It can be used as a criterion for efficiently playing a game.

The reach-in-reach effect lottery table 222 m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the on-reach hold display effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 237 (a) schematically shows the contents of the effect lottery table 222m during reach. In the reach-in-reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not the reach-in-reach effect is executed is determined based on the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (Refer to Z2324 in FIG. 262) Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 3" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 99", the reach is in progress. The hold effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", the hold effect during reach can be displayed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "4 to 5" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the pending effect during reach is not displayed and "141-199". In the case of ", it is possible to display the hold effect during reach. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "6 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the hold effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the hold effect during reach when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to accumulate the hold is executed when the hold is small.

The reach start time calculation table 222n is a reach in a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) of the reach display mode (display mode in which the symbols in the left and right symbol rows are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the same third symbol). This is a data table for determining the start time (start period) for starting the hold effect during reach in the time (period) that is the display mode. In the reach start time calculation table 222n, the hold effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the reach hold effect (see FIG. 215 (a)) acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed and the variation type.

FIG. 237 (b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The reach start time calculation table 222n is set by the hold effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the reach hold effect acquired by the reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed (FIG. 262). See Z2326).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms. When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 10000 ms, and when the variation type is super reach jackpot C, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and the variation type is super. When the reach jackpot D is set, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 12000 ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, the hold effect start timer is determined to be 20000 ms, and the variation type is out of normal reach A. In that case, 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer, and 10000 ms is determined for the hold effect start timer when the variation type is out of normal reach B. When the variation type is out of normal reach C, the hold effect is set. The start timer is determined to be 10000 ms.

In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)) can be executed is acquired based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 237 (c) schematically shows the contents of the lucky hold lottery table 222p. In the lucky hold lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed is acquired with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h (see Z2304 in FIG. 261).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 2" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 99", the lucky hold effect is executed. Is not performed, and if it is any of "100 to 199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. When the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "3 to 4", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the lucky hold effect is not executed and " In the case of any of "190-199", the lucky hold effect can be executed. If the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "5 to 8" and the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the lucky hold effect is not executed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of performing the lucky hold effect when the number of reserved balls is small, the effect of urging the player to accumulate the hold is executed when the hold is small.

Further, as shown in FIG. 226 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , Winning information storage area 223f, Hold notice counter 223g, Effect counter 223h, Background mode storage area 223i, SW effective time counter 223k, Hold effect mode storage area 223m, Special effect status storage area 223n, Lucky hold storage value 223p, Short-term prize At least a timer 223q, a hold effect start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is a variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first reserved ball number counter in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waits) for the fluctuation effect of the special symbol up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and the number of reserved balls when receiving a prize information command or when receiving a variation pattern command is Update according to the timing of increase / decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a. , When a winning information command is received, a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the second special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol, It is updated according to the timing when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases, such as when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and causes the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Therefore, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 detects the start winning and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and subtracts the number of reserved balls. When this is done, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. , A display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b after storage. ..

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the values of the ball number counter 223b are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is the main. The value is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2221 of FIG. 260), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set in the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (Z2102) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The prize information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas corresponding to the first special symbol (first area to the fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the second special symbol (first area to the first). It has 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when a start winning prize for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 is detected in the main control device 110, the special hit random number counter C1 acquired according to the start winning prize, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1, various information (win / fail, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn. It is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information Is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information corresponds to four areas (first area ~) corresponding to the type of the entry port (first entry opening 64 or second entry opening 640) in which the entry is detected. Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In this first control example, the main control device 110 is based on various information (win / fail, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed. Although the configuration in which the winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is included in the various information predicted in response to the start winning. Is included in the setting means for setting the winning information command, various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and the received winning information command. A configuration may be provided in which a determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is appropriately stored.

Further, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the timing when the starting prize is won, it is periodically performed. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol changes start (or At the time of (stop), a configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, as a look-ahead effect, setting of an effect mode such as changing the display color of the reserved symbol is executed. In this way, by executing various effects (look-ahead effects) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223f, the player can be asked about each reserved ball even before the variable display is started. You can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit. It is also possible to perform a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The hold notice counter 223g changes the number of holds (the display position of the hold symbol whose hold color has changed due to the digestion of the hold ball) when the hold color of the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Even if it changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color is variable. The hold notice counter 223g has a value of 0 in the hold notice counter 223g in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the winning command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In a certain case (Z2403: YES), when the hold change value acquired from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No), there is a change in the hold symbol (see FIG. 211 (a)). ), The reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the value of the number of reserved balls at the time of starting winning is 4, the hold notice counter 223g is set to 4. The set hold notice counter 223g was decremented by 1 each time the special symbol fluctuated in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area (Z2226).

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, 1 is added in the range of 0 to 198 and the update is repeated. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected by using the effect counter 223h include a hold change selection table 222b, a hold character selection table 222i (hold character), a hold character change table 222j (hold character), and reach. There is an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not the hold effect during reach can be executed) and a lucky hold lottery table 222p (whether or not the lucky hold effect can be executed), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Further, when making these selections, the update range is set to a prime number (199) in order to prevent the update cycles of the effect counter 223h and other counters and timer values from being synchronized, and some of the selection results are selected. I try not to be biased toward the selection result.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for storing numerical values necessary for determining the background mode. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), it is determined whether the demo screen is displayed in the standby state (Z2801), and when it is determined to be in the standby state (Z2801: Yes). When it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802) and when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2802: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i is set by adding 1 (Z2804). Then, when the display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804) and the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. As the background image, different background images that can be recognized by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountain, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting the effective time (valid period) during which the operation is possible in an effect accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 performed during a change of a special symbol or the like. The SW effective time counter 223k has a fluctuation pattern accompanied by pressing the frame button 22 when the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). When it is set (Z2803: Yes), the SW effective time is set (Z2804) based on the set fluctuation pattern. When the set SW effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and when the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW If the value of the effective time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), if the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), and the display advance notice display command Is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The hold effect mode storage area 223 m contains information for discriminating a plurality of hold notice modes prepared according to the hold change when executing the notice effect regarding the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is remembered.

In the hold effect mode storage area 223 m, the hold notice counter 223 g is 0 in the prize command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) executed when the prize command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is set (Z2404) according to the value (range) of the hold change value acquired for the change type of the winning command of the received special symbol. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3". If so, the notice B mode is set.

The content of the hold effect mode storage area 223 m is the value of the hold notice counter 223 g, which is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol changes start in the change pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. When becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the hold effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting the hold change value to 0 and clearing the hold effect mode storage area 223 m (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the hold effect mode is the normal mode. As described above, the special effects include a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), a hold effect during reach (see FIG. 215 (a)), and a lucky hold effect (see FIG. 216 (a)). Yes, the special effect is executed according to the change in the special effect status storage area 223n. The special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

In the short-term winning effect, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 when the game state is the normal state (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and the short-term winning timer that counts the time (5 seconds) that has occurred since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0. When the value of is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the short-term winning effect starts execution. On the other hand, during the short-term prize production, when the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term prize timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) in the short-term prize management process (Z2111). , The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

In the reach hold effect, the change type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol. In the case of (Z2321: Yes), when the hold effect mode is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes) and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222 m When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect start timer 223r is set (Z2326) based on the variation type, and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). When the hold effect start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the reach effect hold effect management process (Z2112) after a lapse of time, a warning display command for performing the reach hold effect is set (Z2706). By doing so, the pending effect during reach starts execution. While the hold effect during reach is being executed, the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of the end of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2707: Yes), and the hold effect during reach ends.

The lucky hold effect is in the normal mode (Z2301: Yes) when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227), and the lucky hold storage value. Is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and when the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p is accepted (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307), and the lucky hold effect starts execution. During the execution of the lucky hold effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation when the effect is started, The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky hold effect ends.

The lucky hold storage value 223p is the winning time corresponding to the holding ball determined to be the jackpot when the winning / failing judgment result of the winning information command output at the start winning timing is determined to be a jackpot (pre-reading determination). It is a storage area in which the value of the number of reserved balls of is stored. The lucky hold storage value 223p is a case where the lottery result of the winning is a big hit in the lucky holding storage process (Z2408) executed in the winning command receiving process (Z2209) executed at the start winning (Z2442: Yes). ), If the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set to the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the lucky hold effect, the display hold lid command is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 261) based on the lucky hold storage value 223p, and the lucky hold effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216 (a)).

The short-term winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 to 1 or more to 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as the timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), it is short-term until it becomes 0. The winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). As described above, when the hold effect mode is set to the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)), the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0. In this way, by performing the short-term winning effect with the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, the shorter (earlier) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes, and the player It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

The short-term winning effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after winning 4 pieces. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within 5 seconds.

The hold effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing at which the hold effect during reach (see FIG. 215 (a)), which is an effect related to the hold symbol, is executed during the reach fluctuation of the special symbol.

The hold effect start timer 223r is in the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the variation type of the special symbol is the reach variation. In a certain case (Z2321: Yes), the hold effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the effect during reach lottery table 222 m. When the availability of the execution effect acquired from the above is possible (Z2325: Yes), the timer value is set (Z2326) by the reach start time calculation table 222n.

When the timer value is set in the hold effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 until the reach hold effect is started to be executed in the reach hold effect management process (Z2112) ( If the hold effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No) in Z2701: Yes), 1 is subtracted. Further, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes), no other special effect is performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes). ), The notice display command for performing the reach hold effect is set (Z2706), so that the reach hold effect starts to be executed.

The sensor effective time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is effective. The sensor effective time counter 223s gives a notice when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). When the effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the advance notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0, it is subtracted (Z2824), during which the touch sensor detection becomes effective. Further, when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. It is reset (Z2809) to (Z2828: Yes).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times that the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223t has a touch sensor 290 when the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107). When it is on (Z2825: Yes), 1 addition (Z2826) is performed, and when the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, and the like in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 259) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 238.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by 1. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be enabled in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the NAND flash memory 234a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 239). It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped. It will be displayed for a certain period later.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, if the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64, the fluctuating image at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be instructed. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 238, the description continues. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 209) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variation effect after the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, or the second ball entry port 640. However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in the symbol area 235e in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table and display data in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

Further, since the first entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters the second entry. The easier it is to enter the ball mouth 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special pattern without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the willingness to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table.

When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time production) depending on this back type, the player of the background The back image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 240) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 241. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 241). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data meaning is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 241).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 241, in the example of FIG. 241). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 sets it on in the main process (see FIG. 274) (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see Z4705 in FIG. 285 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 276B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. See Z3309 in 276 (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command is determined so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The process (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 242) described later that describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (Z3303 in FIG. 283). (See), the pointer update process (see Z4305 in FIG. 284 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 242) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 242. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 242, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 276 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see Z4902 of FIG. 287).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 243 to 256. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (Z101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated to RAM203. Store in the corresponding buffer area of.

Further, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (299 in the present embodiment, respectively). , 99, 239), clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (Z104), and then a special symbol variation process is executed (Z104). The start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first ball opening 64 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 244 to 256.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process (Z106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through-gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (Z108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (Z109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (Z104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 244. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (Z104). This special symbol variation processing (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (Z201). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the jackpot is on. The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (Z203) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variation display in the special symbol N1) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is acquired (Z203). .. After acquiring the value of each counter, the fluctuation execution determination process is executed (Z204). The details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining a special symbol in the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next fluctuation order determined by the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol). If so, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z206), and the reserved ball command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z206). Z207). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the processing of Z208, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device executes a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting the variation display (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 246. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), processing such as selection of a fluctuation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is executed.

When it is determined in the processing of Z205 that the next variation sequence determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z205: No), the special figure 2 (second special). It is determined whether or not the variation is executed in the symbol) (Z210). If it is not the variable execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: No), that is, the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as that for the holding ball of the special symbol 1 described above is performed for the holding ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation. Set a number command (Z212). In the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) described later, which is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 by the hold ball number command set here and executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the processing of Z213, the data stored in the holding areas 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol 2 variation start process for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z214). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 247.

In the processing of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (Z215: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z215, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. 247. When this special symbol change start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area commonly provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery of special symbols will be held. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, and if it is a big hit of the first special symbol, it depends on the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A, a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C. If it is a jackpot of the second special symbol, it will be a jackpot A according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot B1, a jackpot B2, or a jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. When the jackpot C is reached, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z218). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (Z218: Yes), the jackpot start is set (Z219), the probability variation flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to on (Z221), the stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (short-time game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z218, if the lottery result this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203j. If is 1 or more (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (Z223), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the processing of Z223 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in which execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to off (“0” as a value) to initialize (Z241), and the data of the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. (Z242). Next, the data in the variable order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z246), and in the special figure 2. If it is the variable execution of (Z246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to the variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the processing of Z246 that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in FIG. 2 (Z246: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209), first, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not the probability variation flag 203m is on. The probability variation flag 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to off based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the pachinko machine is in the probable change state (Z252: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the Z253 process. In the processing of Z253, based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221 (a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained. Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the big hits of the special symbols in the probabilistic game state (special game state), and the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and these random numbers. If it matches the random number value that is the hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state of the special symbol (Z252: No), the processing of Z254 is executed. In the processing of Z254, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the big hits of the special symbols in the normal game state (low probability game state), and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random numbers that hit these. If the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the processing of Z255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z253 or Z254 is the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a are displayed. (Z255), and if it is determined that it is a big hit of a special symbol (Z255: Yes), the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251. Based on the above, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the jackpots (big hits) of four types of special symbols are compared. Among A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd number symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot), and it is in the range of "80 to 99". If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is C (see FIG. 222 (b)).

In this Z256 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of Z257, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are defined. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (Z258). In the processing of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or the processing of Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the Z275 process or the Z259 process is set (Z261). When the processing of Z261 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (Z104).

Next, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is a process of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win / fail judgment) for "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed in.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214), as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), the special symbol 2 is stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, which is first acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (Z272). If it is determined that the gaming state is in the probability variation period (Z272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a special symbol. Since it is in a probabilistic state, the process shifts to Z273 processing. In the processing of Z273, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 958 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 27 random numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. In this case, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic state (Z272: No), the processing of Z274 is executed. In the processing of Z274, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of Z271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 978 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a one by one. Three random numbers "0 to 2" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and when the value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the random number values to be these hits match, the special symbol It is determined that it is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the processing of Z275, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of Z273 or Z274 is a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (Z275: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols (big hit). Among A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, 100 times of time reduction), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87". , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variation odd number symbol jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variation even symbol jackpot), and it is in the range of "92 to 99". If there is, it is determined that the jackpot is C (see FIG. 222 (c)).

In this Z276 process, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250". Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In the fluctuation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the fluctuation time of the third symbol for notifying the hit / fail determination result, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (fluctuation pattern) of the variation display mode actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the fluctuation time and the result of the hit / fail determination. The main control device 110 is configured so that even if the display mode is the off-reach, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch between the reach display mode and the non-reach display mode within the same fluctuation time. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and the production can be diversified.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are defined. ing. As the fluctuation pattern shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (Z278). In the processing of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is confirmed, and the normal reach and super are based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or the processing of Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 248. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for pre-reading the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process (Z105: see FIG. 248) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first entry port 64 (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entry port 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending numbers N1 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: No), the over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (Z301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (Z305). Then, a hold ball number command of the first special symbol indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated by the timer interrupt processing Z103 described above. Is stored in the first free holding area (holding area 1 to holding area 4) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the processing of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold area 2 is set, if the value is 2, the hold area 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the hold area 4 is set as the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set at the lowest position of the variable order storage area 203p (Z308), and the look-ahead process (Z320) is executed. The look-ahead process (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG. 249.

Next, with respect to Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes of Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball entry 64 won the right second entry port 640r or the second entry port 640. Since the same process is executed only by changing the process to the above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640, the values of the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 are also stored as reserved balls. It is acquired and stored in the empty hold area of the corresponding special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the special hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter similar to the first special symbol are also applied to the second special symbol based on the entry into the right second entry port 640r or the second entry port 640. By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The hit probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the processing of Z308 or the processing of Z316, the look-ahead processing (Z320) is executed. The details of the look-ahead process (Z320) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 249 as described above, but to the first entry port 64 or the right second entry port 640r and the second entry port 640. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, the process of determining in advance the result of each lottery executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the storage area for storing the value of each counter is not required until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, the counter related to the hit / miss judgment can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the hit / miss judgment can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored can be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 249, a look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the start winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (Z320).

In the look-ahead processing (Z320), first, the hit / fail determination at the start of fluctuation is determined based on the acquired value of the special hit random number counter C1 (Z351). In this pass / fail determination, the same processing as the processing of Z255 in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) is executed. .. It should be noted that this hit / fail judgment is the hit / fail judgment (discrimination) at the start of fluctuation (Z255 processing in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246), Z275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247). It corresponds to the pre-judgment (pre-judgment) that is executed before the process). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (Z352). When it is determined that the determination result is a hit (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (discrimination) from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. (Z353). Next, the winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z352 that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect (Z352: No), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1. Acquire the type (Z355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, the winning information command is set from the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this process is terminated.

In this way, the result of the hit / fail determination in advance before the start of fluctuation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the reserved ball is established, so that the voice lamp control device 113 can be used. The hit / fail judgment result and the hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, based on the winning command, the voice lamp control device 113 changes the color of the reserved symbol to a color that notifies the winning / failing result of the reserved ball in advance. It is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the hit / fail determination result in the holding ball). Further, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (Z106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 250. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (Z106). This normal symbol variation process (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (Z401). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (Z401: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is larger than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (Z405:). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (Z408).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (Z409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. However, the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed, and the change period (variation time or fluctuation time) of the normal symbol is based on the hit / fail judgment result. (Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, a process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a (movement pattern of the game per normal figure) corresponding to the hit type is performed. Execute.

In the processing of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of Z437 or the processing of Z438 in FIG. 251 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z410, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the processing of Z411, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of Z427 or Z431 of FIG. 251 the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed as the second symbol. The device 83 is set to be stopped (lit). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of Z435 of FIG. 251 the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). When the stop display is set by the processing of Z411, the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update processing (see Z1007) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process, the Z431 process, or the Z435 process of FIG. 251. In this control example, the "○" symbol is lit and displayed even when it is a long-time hit or a normal hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a symbol corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is lit and displayed (for example). , "◎" for long-term hits, "○" for normal hits).

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result of the normal symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process a hit of the normal symbol? (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (Z412: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of Z430 or the process of Z434 of FIG. 251 are completed. In addition, since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (Z408: see FIG. 251) described later, in Z413, the hit type of the normal symbol It is configured so that the opening / closing control corresponding to is set. On the other hand, in the processing of Z412, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the processing of Z413 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start processing (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start processing (Z408). This normal symbol change start process (Z408) sets the setting at the start of change of the normal symbol executed in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). It is a process to be executed.

It is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (Z421). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (Z421: Yes), the process proceeds to Z424. In the processing of Z421, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether or not it is in the probability change or the time reduction (Z422). If there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

If the probability change or the time reduction is in progress (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol. Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 221 (c)).

In the processing of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221 (c)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239". , It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 221 (c)).

In the present embodiment, the lottery of ordinary symbols is less likely to be won during the jackpot of special symbols. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entering opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the second entry opening 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second entry opening 640 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the second entry opening 65a is provided. Many balls enter the ball entry port 640. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640 is maximized (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of Z423 or Z424 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (Z425: Yes). , It is determined whether the type of hit of the normal symbol is a long-time hit (Z426). The hit type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal hit type counter acquired when passing through a through gate 67 (not shown) with a preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the ordinary hit type counter is in the range of 0 to 198 and is repeatedly updated at the timing synchronized with the other special hit type counter C2, and the acquired value of the ordinary hit type counter is Any of "0 to 3" is determined to be a long-time hit, and any of "4 to 198" is determined to be a normal hit.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is determined to be a long-time hit (Z426: Yes), the display mode for the long-time hit is set (Z427). In this Z427 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time release flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the process shifts to the Z430 process.

When it is determined in the processing of Z426 that the type of hit of the normal symbol is normal hit (Z426: No), the display mode at the time of normal hit is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change or the time is shortened (Z432). Then, if it is a probability change or a time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of a special symbol (Z433). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of Z433, unless the special symbol is a big hit (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the processing of Z430, 2 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

In the processing of Z432, if there is neither a probability change nor a time saving (Z432: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z434. In the processing of Z432, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. While setting it to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the processing of Z434, 1 is set in the opening number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the opening time counter 203h.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z425, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (Z435). In this Z435 process, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to Z436 processing.

In the processing of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability change is in progress (Z436), and if the probability change is in progress (Z436: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437). , End this process. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not in the process of probabilistic change (Z436: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are set to the same operation as in the case of hitting a normal symbol in the probabilistic state and the short time state, but the operation is not limited to this, and different opening times and the number of times of opening It may be configured to be set.

Next, the through-gate passage process (Z107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (Z107). This through gate passage process (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed, a random number per normal hit. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through-gate 67 (Z501). Here, the passage of the sphere at the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved sphere number counter 203f (the number of holdings M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z503). : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) is added by 1 (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated by the timer interrupt process Z103 described above is the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area (Z505), and this process ends. In the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (Z801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (Z902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process shifts to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if it is not stored (Z905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to Z913 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (Z907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to Z913. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 are correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (Z913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the Z911 process.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (Z904: No). Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long-time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, the power outage occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (Z909). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (Z910), and the process proceeds to Z911. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of Z911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (Z1001). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and if there is prize detection information, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 244) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 248) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 249) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). The details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 256.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, the change is caused by the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z277 process or the Z279 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 247). When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the Z257 process or the Z259 process of the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z277 process of the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 247) or When the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the processing of Z279 ends, the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 246) is terminated. The stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of Z258, the processing of Z258, the processing of Z276 of the special symbol 2 variation start processing (see FIG. 247), or the processing of Z278. Stop display (lighting display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of Z410 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 250), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the Z427 process or the Z431 process of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process is shifted to Z1001, and each process after Z1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed from the start of the main process this time (Z1009: No), the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special hit random number counter C1). (Initial value of, initial value of random number counter C4 per ordinary) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of Z1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 253 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after Z1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (Z1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (Z1014), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The Z1008 process is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the Z1010 and Z1011 processes performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (Z901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of Z1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control process (Z1004) is executed in the main process (FIG. 255), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (big hit) is executed. Opening port) This is a process for releasing or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The Z219 process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot is started (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set (Z1101: Yes). Z1115), this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. Is sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z1102). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. In the processing of Z1102, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z1102: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1102, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (Z1105). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1103, if it is not the timing to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are formed. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of Z1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls is paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the processing of Z1108, when it is the start timing of the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), the ending command is set (Z1109), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing at which a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z1110, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the processing of Z1111, it is determined whether the jackpot type this time is the jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203j is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to off (Z1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not jackpot A (Z1111: No), the probability variation flag 203m is set to on (Z1113), then the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to off (Z1114). End the process.

<Control processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 257 to 273, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of the Z2118 is due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") (see FIG. 258). ) Is started in the middle of execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of Z2118. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of Z2118 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of the Z2118 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process shifts to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to Z2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to the Z2208 process.

If the power off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure, and during the execution of the power off process of Z1318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to Z2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of Z2118 is executed, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the Z2118 is started in a state where the execution of the power cutoff process is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (Z2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (Z2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (Z2011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of Z2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the processing of Z2008 via the processing of Z2004 to Z2006 is started. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), Z2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to Z2010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (Z2010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (Z2011), the process shifts to the main process. After that, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (Z2012). Note that this state command indicates whether the normal symbol is hit for a long time based on the long-time open flag 203i in the Z908 process of the start-up process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. It is a command. If it is determined in the Z2012 process that a status command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time release flag 203i is set based on the received status command, and this process ends (Z2013). .. Here, the long-time release flag 203i is turned on when the received state command indicates that it is hit for a long time, and the long-time open flag 203i is set when it is indicated that the received state command is not hit for a long time. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control device 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol has been hit for a long time, so that the voice lamp control device 113 also determines the state. Can be done.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of Z2009 is that when the processing of Z2008 is reached via the processing of Z2004 to Z2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of Z2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of the Z2101 this time was executed (Z2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (Z2101: No), the process proceeds to Z2113 without processing Z2102 to Z2112. In the processing of Z2101, it is determined whether or not 1msec has passed because Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of Z2113, the variation display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the processing of Z2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of Z2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the Z2105 process without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. The details of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 272.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (Z2110), and the process shifts to the processing of Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of the Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of Z2110 is completed, the short-term prize management process is executed (Z2111). The details of this short-term winning management process (Z2111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270. ) Is executed.

After executing the short-term prize management process (Z2111), the process of the reach pending effect management process (Z2112) is executed. The details of the on-reach hold effect management process (Z2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 271, but a predetermined number of hold balls are held during the period when the variation mode of the third symbol (special symbol) is the reach display mode. A process of setting a specific effect (notice effect) that notifies the player that the game is to be accumulated is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 is completed, the command determination processing is executed (Z2113). The details of this command determination process (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. 259. After the command determination process (Z2113) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 269.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off process is executed (Z2118). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the Z2115 process (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to the process of Z2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control device 110 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When the variation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), the variation pattern reception process is executed (Z2202), and this process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 260.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2201, when the fluctuation pattern command is not received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command is received (Z2203). When a stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. ..

In the process of Z2203, when the stop type command is not received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command is received (Z2206). When the hold ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the hold ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process ends. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, when the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process is terminated. The details of the winning command receiving process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, the winning / failing judgment result of the reserved special symbol, the variation type, etc. The pre-determination for determining is executed, and the setting process for executing each hold effect determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (Z2208: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (Z2661), and this processing is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 260, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), will be described. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), a detailed variation pattern (effect mode) of a special symbol, a notice display mode, a hold notice display mode, and the like are set based on the received fluctuation pattern command.

In the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, a display notice display command is set in the fluctuation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the hold notice counter 223 g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display notice display command is a command for instructing to display various notice effects determined based on the fluctuation pattern (for example, a comment notice suggesting a success / failure determination result, a mini character notice, etc.).

When the processing of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the hold change value is set to 0 and the hold effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the processing of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), even when the effect of changing the color of the reserved ball based on the look-ahead determination result is performed, the value of the reserved ball is determined by the value of the reserved ball. The display position is changed according to the digestion, and the color of the hold ball is changed. After the change of the special symbol corresponding to the hold ball is started, it is hidden because the change is stopped, and the hold change value. Can also be set to 0, which is the initial value. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the player can be correctly notified of the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started.

Here, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) executed in the variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), a process of determining the number of reserved balls at the time of winning a prize in the past and setting a mark symbol (holding effect) to be displayed in a display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls Execute.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302). If it is not in the normal mode (Z2302: No), this process ends. In the processing of Z2302, when it is determined that the mode is in the normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. Here, when the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 0, it means that the number of hold balls at the time of winning the special symbol determined to be a big hit is not stored.

When it is determined that the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p is 1 or more (Z2303), whether or not the effect can be produced is determined based on the lucky hold lottery table 222p (see FIG. 237 (c)) provided in ROM 222. Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky hold lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and determining whether to execute the lucky hold effect based on the determination value of the effect counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of reserved balls. Is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether the lucky hold effect (execution effect) is feasible (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), the display hold lid command is set from the lucky hold command table 222g (FIG. 231) based on the value of the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2301, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect has been executed due to the previous fluctuation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this process is performed. To finish. If it is determined in the processing of Z2309 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2308: No), this processing is terminated as it is. In this way, the lucky hold effect is set at the start of the fluctuation, and ends when the special effect status is set to the initial value at the start of the next fluctuation. In this control example, the lucky hold effect is an effect that is executed during the period in which the special symbol is changed once, but is not limited to this, and is configured to be executed in the period in which the change is executed a plurality of times. You may. The number of changes in the special symbol to be executed at the start of the lucky hold effect may be determined and ended when the change of the number of times is executed, or a lottery to decide whether to end the each variable lucky hold effect. May be set to end when the end lottery is won, or when all the reserved balls are exhausted or the demo display is displayed.

Return to FIG. 260 to continue the description. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the on hold effect setting process during reach (Z2228) is executed. In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when the change of the special symbol which is the reach display mode is executed, the game is performed so as to accumulate the hold balls in the reach display mode. Executes the process for executing the effect (one of the special hold effects).

Here, the on-reach hold effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the pending effect setting process (Z2228) during reach.

In the reach hold effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 262), first, it is determined whether the reach is fluctuating (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not changing (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is fluctuating (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not normal (Z2322: No), this process is terminated as it is. When the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which a special hold effect is not executed. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process ends. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, another special hold effect is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent the hold effects from being duplicated. .. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2233: Yes), it is executed by the effect lottery table 222 m during reach (see FIG. 237 (a)) based on the number of reserved balls and the value of the effect counter 223h. Acquire the propriety of the production (Z2324). Here, in the reach-in-reach effect lottery table 222 m, a determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of reserved balls, and whether or not the reach-in-hold effect is executed is determined based on the determination value.

It is determined by the processing of Z2324 whether the pending effect during reach (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). If it is determined that the execution effect is not feasible (Z2325: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), the hold effect is obtained from the reach start time calculation table 222n (FIG. 237 (b)) based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol. The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and this process is terminated.

In this way, according to the reach effect hold effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the reach display mode is determined, and no other special hold effect is executed. If so, a lottery for executing the reach hold effect is executed, and the timing for starting the execution of the reach hold effect is set by winning the lottery, so that the special symbol in the reach display mode changes. When it is started, the hold effect during reach is set to be executed more frequently as the current number of hold balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the launch of the game ball during reach, and the game store side Profit can be increased. In addition, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, the process returns to FIG. 260 to continue the description. After executing the hold effect setting process (Z2228) during reach, the hold lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this holding lid setting process (Z2229), a process necessary for displaying the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds is executed.

Here, the holding lid setting process (Z2229) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 263. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this holding lid setting process (Z2229).

In the holding lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning effect), which is one of the special pending effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), it is held at the time of short-term winning in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228 (a)) provided in ROM 222. The holding lid range value is acquired based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)) (Z2342). The display holding lid command is set based on the value of the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2342 (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212 (a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid symbol P corresponding to the current reserved ball is set. By selecting and setting the value (display mode) from the short-term winning hold lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229 (a)), the display mode of the variable lid symbol P different from the normal time (normally held) It is possible to set a display mode in which a rule for displaying a symbol and a rule for displaying one reserved symbol at intervals is displayed by a rule for displaying two reserved symbols.

As a result, when the period required for storing 1 to 4 reserved balls is within a predetermined period, the variable lid symbol P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time, so that the variable lid symbol P is displayed. From the display mode of P, it can be recognized that the period required for the reserved ball to be stored is a short period. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so that the reserved ball is memorized earlier, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. In addition, the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2341 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. When the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is determined to be 2 (Z2343: Yes), the hold lid range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 228) in the hold lid range selection table 222d5 (see FIG. 228) during the reach effect. The holding lid range value is acquired based on (see FIG. 229 (b)) (Z2344). Based on the holding lid range value acquired in the processing of Z2344, the holding lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this processing is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold lid command indicating the hold lid range value acquired in the reach effect hold lid range selection table 222d5, it indicates that it is the timing to execute the reach hold cover effect. By receiving the notice display command for performing the middle hold notice effect, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the display hold lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the hold effect during reach is determined, the mode in which the display of the variable lid symbol P is changed is set, and the display mode is set according to the execution timing of the hold effect during reach. Since the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed with, it can be determined that the variable lid symbol P has executed a special hold effect different from the normal time.

On the other hand, in the treatment of Z2343, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the lucky hold effect, which is one of the special hold effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 in the processing of Z2345 (Z2345: Yes), the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228) in the holding lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228). Based on (see 228 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2344). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In this way, when the execution of the lucky hold effect (see FIGS. 216 (a) to 216) is set, the display mode (displayed) of the variable lid symbol P similar to the execution of the hold effect in the normal state is displayed. A display mode in which one reserved symbol is displayed from the last reserved symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3, (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (b), it is suggested to the player not to let the reserved ball enter any more in the state where the number of reserved balls is 4 or more and the color of the reserved symbol is changed. Determine if the hold effect is being executed. In the case of the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), a display showing the color change of the variable lid symbol P based on the hold lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 230 (b)) provided in the ROM 222. Set the hold lid command for (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the reserved symbol is displayed in a variable color, and the notice B for notifying the player that the game is to be performed so as to regulate the further increase of the reserved balls. When the game of the mode (the number of reserved balls is 4 or more) is being performed and more reserved balls are stored, the variable lid symbol P and the displayed reserved symbol overlap at the position where the variable lid symbol is overlapped. A setting is executed in which the display color of P is changed to a color different from the normal color (for example, green or the like) and displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the player is notified to play the game so as not to memorize the reserved ball.

After executing the processing of Z2348, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2349) based on the notice B mode holding lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)), and the processing of Z2355 described above is executed. End the process. According to the notice B mode hold lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228 (d)), if there is a hold effect in the normal mode as in the case where there are four hold balls as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the hold ball 5 The variable lid symbol P corresponding to the first position is hidden, but can be configured to be displayed according to a special rule such that it is displayed. As a result, in the notice B mode in which the hold effect for instructing not to increase the number of hold balls is performed, the player feels as if the four hold balls are the upper limit values by using the variable lid symbol P. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the holding ball is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid symbol P.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2347, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the notice A mode (Z2350). That is, there are four or more reserved balls, the color of the reserved symbol is variably set or set, and the variable lid symbol P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved symbol. It is determined whether or not the hold effect to be displayed without an interval is being executed.

When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the hold lid range value is acquired based on the notice A mode hold lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228 (c)) (see FIG. 228 (c)). Z2351). After that, the above-mentioned process of Z2355 is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not the time is shortened (Z2352). Here, the determination as to whether or not the time is being shortened is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In addition to the fluctuation type (reach loss, hit) data, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 includes whether the current game state is the time-saving game state (electric support game state) or the probability change game state (high). It is also output with data indicating whether it is in a gaming state with stochastic electric support) or in a normal gaming state (gaming state without low probabilistic electric support).

When it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (the time reduction game state or the probability variation game state is set) (Z2352: Yes), it is based on the time reduction holding lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229 (c)). Then, the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2353). After that, the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated. In the short time (when there is electric power support), unlike the normal game state, in the state where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 6, the variable lid symbol P is the 7th and 8th reserved balls. Is displayed only at the position where is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved symbol is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to be hidden. As a result, the variable lid symbol P is configured to display less than in the normal game state during the time saving with the electric support in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and in a state where a large number of reserved balls are frequently generated. , The load of display control of the variable lid symbol P is suppressed from increasing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2352 that the time is not shortened (Z2352: No), that is, when it is determined that the holding effect of the normal mode is in progress, the normal holding lid range selection table 222d1 (FIG. Based on (see 228 (b)), the holding lid range value is acquired (Z2354), the above-mentioned processing of Z2355 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Return to FIG. 260 to continue the description. After executing the hold lid setting process (Z2229), the hold character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process of determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the sub display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the pending character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variable pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the hold character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the hold effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one reserved ball is digested by newly starting the fluctuation, the first ball entry port 64, which is the starting port, is used. , The number of reserved balls was 3 by entering either the right second entrance 640r or the second entrance 640 (special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball counter). From the state (the total of the values with 223b is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the total of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing to a state.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), the contents of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set reserved effect mode And the effect counter 223h, the reserved character is selected from the reserved character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232 (b)), the display character command is set (Z2363), and this process is terminated. In this way, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined and set by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved effect mode. .. As a result, the characters displayed can be different depending on the background type and the hold effect mode, and the hold effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, the type of the character to be determined may be varied depending on the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, it is pre-judged as a hit while it is on hold or a special symbol that is changing depending on the character type. The player can recognize that the reserved ball being held is stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set when it is displayed in super reach depending on the character type, that character is displayed, and super reach, which is a fluctuation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, is executed. You can expect it early.

Further, also in this control example, the notice A mode and the notice B mode are set when the fluctuation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high expectation of a big hit by the look-ahead judgment or the advance hit / fail judgment result big hit. Since it is easy, by displaying the J2 character and the J3 character, it is possible to expect the player to execute the super reach type and to expect the hit / fail determination result to be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has not changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved characters is set (Z2365), and this process ends. In this way, since the character is set to be hidden when the number of reserved balls becomes less than 4, the player can be notified of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the processing of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not an over-winning state has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not the over-winning has occurred is executed by determining whether or not the over-winning information command output from the main controller 110 when the start winning is exceeded in excess of the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is received. To. If it is determined that an over-winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), it is changed by the hold character change table 222j based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the hold effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. Select the reserved character, set the display character command (Z2267), and end this process. If it is determined that the over-winning has not occurred in Z2366 (Z2366: No), this process is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when the over-winning occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the reserved character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the change of the character is configured to be determined based on the currently set character, for example, whether or not the reserved ball is determined in advance. When the character of J3, which is easy to be set when the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or the expectation of the big hit is high in the fluctuation pattern type, is selected while the notice A mode or the notice B mode is decided. Is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. Further, when the character of J2 is selected, and in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, when the character of J0 or J1 which is difficult to select is selected, the character of J2 or J3 is selected. It is configured to be easy. That is, it is configured so that it is possible to step up to J3, which is set to a high degree of expectation that a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the hold effect by generating an over prize. It is configured to be able to. The change of this character corresponds to a privilege advantageous to the player.

Return to FIG. 260 to continue the description. After executing the hold character setting process (Z2230), the balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed to end this process. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), a process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C is executed.

Next, the balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 265. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), it is first determined whether 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), the balloon is selected at the time of short-term winning in the balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 234 (a)) provided in the ROM 222. The balloon contents are acquired based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235 (a)) (Z2382). A display balloon command is set (Z2394) based on the balloon content acquired after executing the processing of Z2382, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2381 when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 235 (b)) during the reach effect (Z2384), and the above-mentioned Z2394 Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2383, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). .. That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky hold effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the balloon content is acquired based on the lucky hold balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236 (a)) (Z2386), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Is executed to end this process.

In the processing of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether the notice B mode is set (Z2387). When it is determined that the notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice B balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234 (d)) (Z2388), and the above-mentioned Z2394 is obtained. Process is executed, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of Z2387 that the notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the notice A mode is set (Z2389). When it is determined that the notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), the contents of the balloon are acquired based on the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234 (c)) (Z2390), and the above-mentioned Z2394. Process is executed, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the process of Z2389 that the notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving medium (time saving gaming state or probability variation gaming state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time saving medium is set (Z2391), the balloon contents are acquired based on the time saving balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236 (b)) (Z2392), and the above-mentioned processing of Z2394 is performed. Execute and end this process.

In the processing of Z2391, when it is determined that the time reduction is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon contents are acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234 (b)) (Z2393). The above-mentioned Z2394 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, since the comment content corresponding to each hold effect mode is controlled to be selected, the comment content corresponding to the hold effect mode can be displayed to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, a winning command receiving process (Z2209), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the winning command receiving process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, the pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 227 (a)) provided in the ROM 222 based on the variation type of the received command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2402). ..

Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether the notice A mode or the notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is changed is set. If the value of the hold notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), the hold effect mode is selected from the hold effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227 (b)) based on the hold change value. Is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the processing of Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the hold notice counter 223 g is filled with the current hold ball value (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b). (Total value of) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, the short-term winning determination processing is executed (Z2407). The details of the short-term prize determination process (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267, but if it is the timing to execute the short-term prize hold effect, it is determined (the condition for execution is satisfied). (If so) The process of setting the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is executed. Next, the lucky hold process is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. 268, but if it is the execution timing, it is determined whether it is the timing (whether the condition is satisfied) to execute the lucky hold effect. Set the execution of the lucky hold effect. Next, the above-mentioned hold lid setting process (Z2409), hold character setting process (Z2410), and balloon setting process (Z2411) are executed to end this process. Since the holding lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 263, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the content already described with reference to FIG. 265, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 267. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning determination process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state (Z2421). When it is determined that the game is in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (during the time-saving) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is four (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not four (Z2423: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the period required for the four reserved balls to be established is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 indicating that the execution of the short-term prize holding effect is set is set.

Next, the lucky hold storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 268. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this lucky hold storage process (Z2408). This lucky hold storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the lucky hold storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the prize is acquired from the contents of the prize information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the processing of Z2441, it is determined whether the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442). If it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not a big hit (2442: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that the number is four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky hold storage value 223p (Z2444), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current value of the number of reserved balls is 4 or less (Z2443: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, the variation display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (Z2114). This variation display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2501). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so that the Z2505 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the display variation pattern command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process shifts to Z2505 processing.

In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z2505). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2505: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is set. Obtained from RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the process of Z2509, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). .. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 stops and displays the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, a short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term prize management process (Z2111), a process of measuring the period until four reserved balls required for determining whether or not to execute the short-term prize hold effect is executed is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize holding effect has already been set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1, (Z2604: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2604, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the processing of Z2605, it is determined that the number of reserved balls is more than 4. In the case (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this way, when the short-term prize holding effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4. Not limited to that, the special effect status should be set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term prize hold effect is completed (the timing when the hold balls enter up to 4 balls in less than 5 seconds and the remaining period elapses). It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the reach-holding hold effect management process (Z2112), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the pending effect start processing (Z2112) during reach. In this reach-hold hold effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the reach hold effect and setting the display mode of the reach hold effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2, (Z2701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702). ). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is subtracted by 1 (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether the value of the hold effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after the calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), a notice display command indicating that the hold effect during reach is executed is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

When the value of the hold effect start timer 223r is determined to be 0 in the processing of Z2702 (Z2702: Yes), the timing at which the fluctuation time (variation period) of the special symbol being changed ends (the fluctuation period has elapsed). It is determined whether it is (Z2707). When it is determined that it is the variation end timing (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this processing is terminated. As described above, in the hold effect during reach, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which is the reach variation mode, elapses, and the hold effect is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is determined, and the execution of the advance notice effect or the like is set based on the pressing operation.

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether or not a value larger than 0 is set in the SW effective time counter 223k as the SW (switch) effective time (valid period) (Z2801). ). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), and when it is determined that the SW effective time counter 223k is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2801: No). Yes), it is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the SW effective time counter 223k (Z2802). After that, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) (Z2805). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command to the variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed to end this process. This sensor input process (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 273.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is larger than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect). (Z2809). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2811). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed to end this process.

Here, the sensor input process (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a sensor input process (Z2813), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether the sensor effective time counter 223s is set to a value larger than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is in an effective period. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set in the notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2821, when it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223s is a value larger than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is subtracted and updated by the elapsed time (Z2824). ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player operates the touch sensor 290 with his or her hand close to it (Z2825). When it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is added by 1 and updated (Z2826), and a notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is provided. Set the display command (Z2827). It is determined whether the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set in the selected touch notice effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 272. In the processing of Z2801, when it is not in standby (Z2801: No), or in the processing of Z2802, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (Z2802: No), the SW effective time counter 223k It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (Z2805). When the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW effective time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is being executed (during the advance notice effect) (Z2808). If it is determined that the advance notice is being produced (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor valid time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and a notice for display indicating the advance notice determined by lottery is displayed. Set the command (Z2810). Next, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed to end this process. Since the details of the sensor input process (Z2813) have already been described with reference to FIG. 273, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Z2808 that the advance notice is not being produced (Z2808: No), the process of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the processing of Z2807 (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 273 is skipped. Is executed to end this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2805, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2811). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), the SW effective time is set in the SW effective time counter 223k (Z2812) based on the set fluctuation pattern, and the sensor input process (Z2813) is performed. Execute and end this process. If the fluctuation pattern is not set in the processing of Z2811 (Z2811: No), the processing of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Here, there are some fluctuation patterns in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and some in which the effect using the frame button 22 is not set. If not, "0" is set in the SW effective time counter 223k. Will be done.

<Control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 274. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (Z3001) will be described with reference to FIG. 275. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a boot process (Z3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of Z3102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of Z3102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in Z3101. And, after repeating a plurality of times including the process of Z3102, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed without performing the processes of Z3101 and Z3102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 274. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (Z3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)). The determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 276 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on, which is not shown, is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect is performed. Can be done. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, the interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of Z3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (a). FIG. 276 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276 (b). FIG. 276B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. 239, but a normal effect. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (Z3302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 277.

In the display setting process (Z3303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (Z3304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (Z3303) or the simple display setting process (Z3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous warning command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286.

Next, the drawing process is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), which are determined by the task process (Z3304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 242 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 287.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed. It is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 239) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed to process the Z3304. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (Z3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command, there is no unprocessed new command. (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (Z3403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern is determined. The command process is executed (Z3405), and the process returns to the Z3401 process.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (Z3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (a). FIG. 278 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (Z3405: FIG. 278 (a)), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. Read from area 233b and set in display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (Z3506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by Z3502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of Z3504, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. In the processing of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (Z3406). If there is a variable type command for display (Z3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (Z3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 278 (b). FIG. 278 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (Z3407: FIG. 278 (b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B1, big hit B2, big hit C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the variation effect to be performed is finally set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the process returns to the process of Z3401 in FIG. 277.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of Z3602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description will be continued. In the processing of Z3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). When it is determined that the display notice display command has been received (Z3408: Yes), the notice effect display process is executed (Z3409). The details of the advance notice effect display processing (Z3409) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (a), but the degree of expectation for the jackpot to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable display of the special symbol. The setting of the notice display mode for notifying the player of the notification of a big hit or the like is executed.

Here, the notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (a) is a flowchart showing this notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the notice effect display process (FIG. 279 (a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received display notice display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). The transfer data table corresponding to the set advance notice display data table for displaying at the display timing based on the display timing of the notice display indicated by the received display notice display command is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is counted as a time counter. It is set to 233h (Z3704) and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this way, the notice display is set based on the display notice display command output from the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the instructed timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even if the same variation pattern is used, it can be shown to the player as if the display modes are different.

In the present embodiment, the content of the notice display and the display timing are selected by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table that has already been set may be set to be overwritten by setting the advance notice display. Good.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display notice display command in the processing of Z3408 (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display switching command among the unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), the mode switching process is executed (Z3411). The mode switching process (Z3411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 279 (b), but a process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 279 (b) (Z3411). FIG. 279 (b) is a flowchart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether the special symbol is changing (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbol is changing (Z3802: Yes), the display data table buffer of the background mode corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is actively set (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbol is changing, the display mode is switched to the change pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbol is stopped, the background of the display mode in the standby state is set to be displayed with the set background.

The process of changing the background or the like corresponding to the background mode may be configured as follows.

Set the back image change flag to turn on to notify the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. Set the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type to off, end this back image change command processing, and return to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the set back image change flag is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the set back image discrimination flag is used at that time. The back image type to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored is specified. RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. When it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command may be turned on, or later. The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. When it is determined that there is no display switching command in the processing of Z3410 (Z3410: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a display hold lid command (Z3412: Yes), the hold lid command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the hold lid command process (Z3413) will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this hold lid command process (Z3413).

In the holding lid command processing (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the holding lid of the display effect corresponding to the received display holding lid command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to the other display data table for the holding lid is set to on (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z3904). ), The pointer 233f is initialized to 0, and the process returns to (Z3905) command determination processing.

When the hold lid command is received, the display mode of the change pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold cover command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set according to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table for setting, but the display data table may be newly set.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no display hold lid command in the processing of Z3412 (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold character command (Z3412). When it is determined that there is a display pending character command (Z3412: Yes), the pending character command processing is executed (Z3413).

Here, the reserved character command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280 (b). FIG. 280 (b) is a flowchart showing this reserved character command processing (Z3415).

In the hold character command process (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the hold character of the display effect corresponding to the received display hold character command is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag is turned on. Set the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for other reserved characters to off (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4001, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4004). ), The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4005), and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a hold character command is received, the display mode of the change pattern to be set corresponding to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the hold character command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. And set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set according to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table for setting, but the display data table may be newly set.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 277. In the process of Z3414, when it is determined that there is no display hold character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a display balloon command (Z3416: Yes), the balloon command process is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In the balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 281), first, the display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. And set (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently actively set). To. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for blowout set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the balloon is set to off (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for blowout set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (Z4104). , The pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, the display mode of the fluctuation pattern set according to the addition time is specified based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set fluctuation pattern, and the background mode. , Set the display data table. With this configuration, even if it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time may be set according to the set background mode, and the display mode may be set. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is added to the set display data table for setting, but the display data table may be newly set.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. In the processing of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414), and there is an error command. If (Z3414: Yes), error command processing is executed (Z3415), and the process returns to Z3415 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (Z4202), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the Z4201 process, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the Z4202 process is determined and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the Z4202 process sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 277. If it is determined that there is no error command in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), then the processing corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the processing of Z3401.

In the Z3401 process that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes). ), The processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of Z3401 to Z3416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the Z3416 process that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 239 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are executed. For a command, a process of discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of Z3501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 to 284, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4301: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of Z4302 to Z4304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the Z4305 process. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (Z4303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (Z4304).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (a). FIG. 284 (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (Z4401).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the Z4401 process, the error occurrence flag is set to off (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 283. After the warning image setting process (Z4304) or in the process of Z4303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4305.

In Z4305, the pointer update process is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 284 (b). FIG. 284 (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of Z4501, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (Z4503), and if it is a demo display data table (Z4503: Yes), the display data Set the time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d to the time counting counter 233h (Z4504), set the pointer 233f to 1 to initialize (Z4505), and end this process. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (Z4503: No). Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of Z4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (Z4502: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 284. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed by the Z4306 processing together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (Z4309: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to produce the definite display effect. It is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the Z4315, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the confirmation display flag is on instead of off (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (Z4316). If the demo display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (Z4317) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of Z4316, if the demo display flag is on (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (Z3309), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table, which specifies that the image (FIG. 239) to be stopped and displayed, is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, details of the transfer setting process (Z3305) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (Z4602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of Z4601, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 286.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (Z4602), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285 (b). FIG. 285 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (Z4701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (Z4701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4702). In this Z4702 process, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. Then, when it is determined by the processing of Z4702 that the transfer processing is not completed (Z4702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4703 process. Further, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the process proceeds to the processing of Z4703.

In the processing of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (Z4703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (Z4703: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the Z4703 process (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276 (b)), the command determination process is not performed in the simple command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. 276 (b)). (See FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284 (b)) are executed, so that normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. Is displayed as a normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 286) (see Z4601: No in FIG. 285 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 contains image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one of the transfer setting processes (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 286. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the display setting process (Z3303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described at the indicated address (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802), and if it is transfer data information (Z4802: Yes), from the transfer data information, the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored. The start address (storage source final address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803), and further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Further, in the processing of Z4802, if the acquired information is not the transferred data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processing of Z4803 and Z4804 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z4805. In the Z4805 process, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (Z4806).

In this Z4806 process, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing of Z4806 that the transfer processing has not been completed (Z4806: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process. Further, as a result of the Z4805 process, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to the Z4807 process.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (Z4807), and if the transfer start flag is on (Z4807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag. Is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process ends.

In the processing of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The discrimination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of Z4809, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of Z4809, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (Z3304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 242 (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the Z4902 process (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 276 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Further, in the above control example, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

Further, in the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the voice lamp control device 113. The command to be to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. After that, the display control device 114 may be configured to send a command to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 confirms only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 is the transfer data that is not the Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer processing can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processing in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 is not used to manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided by directly connecting to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in the above control example, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. be able to.

In the above control example, a case where a NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in that area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may be possible to store a part of the boot program executed in. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

Further, in the above control example, a first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in that area. However, the case is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), etc. are provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and MPU231 is provided. You may store a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can be done. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (bus) to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected is not necessarily limited. It may be provided by directly connecting to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In the above control example, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more. A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (one input / output port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multi-port A type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other external input. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In the above control example, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten and its contents are continuously retained during power-on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to this. Even if the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

Further, when updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved, and the power supply is supplied. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In the above control example, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are input from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 from the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the above is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. You may transfer directly to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transmitted from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred, the power supply is supplied. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command or a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command or the frame button. Although the case of changing the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the game machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the super reach effect mode according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the game machine 10 and change the rear image or the super reach effect mode according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is transferred. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, and what is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored? The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be specified so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected in the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to be main. A vibration error may be detected by the control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284 (a)) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. May be good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. Upon receiving an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

When the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all in one effect are specified by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table is 1 in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time corresponding to the address expressed in units of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for the frame is displayed, and the type of sprite after the change in the sprite. It may specify the color information that specifies the color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing contents specified in the display data table has been described. The transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data required when drawing the image according to the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with the identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing contents and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. It may be configured as.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing contents to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing contents. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is specified has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to specify the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the increase in the data size of the display data table.

In the above control example, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are included in the display data table has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing contents of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. .. Further, even if the additional data table includes not only the additional drawing contents but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing contents. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image required for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the additional transfer data table can be used. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing content and the transferred data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

In the above control example, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be described, for example. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", and "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do so. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In the above control example, a case where a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f has been described. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of an image for one frame at which the drawing process is completed will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. Can be kept accurate without timing the time interval by sending.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In the above control example, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demo command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In the above control example, the case where the demo effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is described, but it is not always The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table should correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time and the transfer data table should be transferred at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is specified has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn, which is defined at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. You may memorize it. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, a case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 specifies the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed in the above from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data is at the top of the display data table. The information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is an image controller so as to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In the above control example, in the back surface C which is the back image of the “island stage”, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning, which the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113, is used as a hold ball number command. Although the case of including is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by another command. You may notify.

In the above control example, a case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed when the fluctuation effect is executed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed fluctuation, , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where one first ball entry port 64, which starts the lottery for the big hit of the special symbol when the ball enters, is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. A plurality of (for example, two) first entry ports may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first entry port, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 indicates which first entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In the above control example, the hold ball number command is mainly used every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases). Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is vertically The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first entry port 64, a right second entry port 640r, and a second entry port 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means), and the game ball is a starting port. By entering one of the balls, a winning lottery (judgment) is executed with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (determination result) is a win (specific determination result), a jackpot game (a privilege game that is advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types of the jackpot game are set, and the benefits given to the player differ depending on the type. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the hit type in which a high-probability gaming state (first special gaming state) is set after the jackpot game, and the time-saving gaming state (first special gaming state) after the jackpot game, the profit of the player is smaller. The second special game state) is set, and the hit type and the like are set.

The hit / fail determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After the variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the player is notified of the judgment result by stopping and displaying in a display mode for showing the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result). .. When a game ball enters the starting port during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entry. Up to 4 reserved balls can be entered into the first entry port 64 (lottery of the first special symbol), and up to four balls can be entered into the right second entry opening 640r and the second entry opening 640 (second special). It is configured so that up to 4 balls can be stored as upper limit values in total for the lottery of symbols).

When the reserved ball is stored, one reserved symbol (identification symbol, identification information) is displayed for each reserved ball. For the reserved ball, the hit / fail judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special symbol before the special symbol indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball is variablely displayed. Pre-determination is executed in which (variation pattern type) is determined in advance. When the pre-discrimination result is a specific discrimination result (for example, a hit or a super reach type is determined), the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed (variable to a specific display mode). When the color of the reserved symbol is changed and displayed, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special hold effects, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, the hold ball is generated further, or the overflow prize is generated so that the starting port is filled with more than the maximum number of hold balls. A comment display (notice display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the degree of expectation of hitting the ball, the type of fluctuation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can be made to win more game balls at the starting port, and the profit of the game store can be increased. In addition, by inserting a game ball into the starting port, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the hit / fail judgment, the type of variation, etc. can be determined based on the content of the comment. It can be granted and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as one of the special hold effects, a hold effect (notice B mode) is set in which the game is executed so as not to generate the hold balls from the state where the color of the hold balls is changed. In this hold effect, the variable lid symbol P is displayed in the display area where the hold symbol is displayed, and the position of the hold symbol displayed when the variable lid symbol P is won after the hold symbol whose color is variable. Is displayed on the screen to notify the player that the game is to be performed so that the reserved ball does not occur. In addition, the comment display also displays content suggesting that the number of reserved balls will not be increased.

Further, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4, and a total of up to 8 reserved symbols are the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). The area where the reserved symbol is displayed is reserved and set in advance. In the area where the reserved symbol is displayed, the pedestal symbol is displayed at the position where the reserved symbol is displayed, and the area where the reserved symbol is displayed is displayed even when the reserved symbol is not displayed. It is configured to be identifiable. In the area where the 5th to 8th reserved symbols are displayed, four variable lid symbols P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved symbols are displayed even in the normal state, and each variable lid symbol is displayed. On the symbol P, a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable lid symbol P in this way, it is determined that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is eight even when the reserved symbol is not displayed based on the numerical information of the variable lid symbol P. can do. Further, when the holding ball is generated and the holding symbol is displayed, the display mode of the variable lid symbol P is also changed. In the hold effect that is the normal mode in the normal mode, the variable lid symbol P changes the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the fifth hold symbol is displayed to be hidden when the number of hold balls is three. Then, similarly, the 6th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 4 holding balls, the 7th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 5 holding balls, and the 8th variable lid symbol P is hidden with 6 holding balls. The variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so as to be hidden, that is, the variable lid symbol P is variably displayed so that two reserved symbols are vacant for three or more reserved balls. To. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbol is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

Further, it is configured to execute a special holding effect in which the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P is changed depending on the period in which the reserved ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variable type displayed in a variable manner. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a special hold effect is being executed by the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P. Further, since the special hold effect is set depending on the hold judgment result of the pre-determination, the variation type, the validity judgment result of the special symbol displayed in the variation, and the variation type being executed. By changing the variable rule of the variable lid symbol P, it is possible to expect a hit or predict the variable type.

In this control example, even if the game ball is fired on the left side or the right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entry port 64, the right second ball entry port 640r, and the second ball entry port 640 (electric combination). The object 640a is in the open state), but it is not limited to this, and the route that makes it easy to enter the second entrance 640, the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance 640r. The arrangement of nails and the like may be set so as to form a flow path that is easy to ball. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery using only the second special symbol, or to play a game so that the game ball does not enter the second entry port 640. Further, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 324. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first special symbol and the first special symbol are configured to be alternately changed, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol has priority. It differs from the first control example in that the fluctuating state and the first special symbol and the first special symbol change in order depending on the gaming state. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are installed inside the distribution device 700, and when a ball enters through the opening 710a, the distribution device 700 causes the first ball entry. The ball is distributed to the opening 64 and the second entry port 640, but in this second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640 are used as they are. It differs in that it is configured to be installed. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The difference is that the changed point and the content of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. In the first control example, the special symbol in which the fluctuation start is executed is configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the second control example, the fluctuation is prioritized from the second special symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to be executed.

FIGS. 289 (a) and 289 (b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. In the second control example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the special symbol variation continues to be executed in the first special symbol, the effect display is continuously produced as shown in FIG. 291 (b). To execute. The continuous effect is a set period for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on the winning prize during the continuous effect.

FIG. 291 (a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous production. As shown in FIG. 291 (a), in the second control example, the executing pedestal symbol m0 is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81, and is small. In the area Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and the reserved symbol are displayed. In addition, characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing the production with a story in the characters G1 to G3, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the continuous production is being executed. Further, even during the continuous production period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be described later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect will be described. FIGS. 291 (c) and 291 (d) are diagrams showing a flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), when the second special symbol change is executed during the execution of the first special symbol change, the first special symbol is used as shown in FIG. 289 (d). The continuous production period of is interrupted, and during the suspension period, a special production with the second special symbol variation is performed. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is restarted.

FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol is changed during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the reserved ball is variably displayed in red. Further, the shell K1, the shell K2, and the shell K3 are displayed in the display area Dm, and are displayed in a display mode having a story. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special effect execution period is in effect. Further, a white reserved symbol is displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5, and the white reserved symbol of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the small area Ds and is being executed. When displayed as, the continuous production period interrupted by the special production period is resumed.

Next, the flow of the effect when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous effect period will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 (c) and 289 (d). In this second control example, even if the variation is being executed with the first special symbol, if the ball enters the second entry port 640, the variation is preferentially executed with the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 289 (c), if there is a variation execution in the special figure 2 while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is as shown in FIG. 289 (d). The continuous effect during the variation execution of is interrupted, and the special effect is executed during the variation execution in the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), when there is a variation execution in the second special symbol and the special effect is started, the number of reserved balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. There is. In addition, characters K1 to K3 like shells are displayed in the corner of the display area Dm to perform a story-like effect. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to understand that the continuous production period has entered the special production period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous effect of the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special effect of the second special symbol, and is resumed as soon as the special effect period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol m2, which is the special effect period, is completed, and the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, depending on the special effect period. The suspended continuous production period is resumed.

The relationship between the continuous effect and the background display will be described with reference to FIG. 290. FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c) are diagrams showing an effect display mode during a special symbol change and a flow of background display at that time. As described above, the background can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous production period. In the second control example, when the background mode in which the continuous effect is executed is changed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous effect period. As shown in FIG. 292, the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the fluctuation of the third symbol is set to the mountain mode as the background mode from the sea mode, which was the period of continuous production. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. .. In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous production period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous production is being executed in the sea mode !!", and the player is in the continuous production period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Further, in the display area Dma, "the background is changed by pressing the button PUSH" is displayed, and the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 293. In this second control example, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-described first control example are partially changed, and the contents of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (FIG. 291 (a)). In the prize information related processing (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes in FIG. 300), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off. When it is (Z5004: No in FIG. 300) (Z5005 in FIG. 300), it is used to determine the execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter of the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of reserved balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time correspond to each other. Whether or not continuous production is executed is specified. Specifically, the larger the current number of reserved balls, the easier it is to execute continuous production, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time is the lottery result indicating a big hit, the lottery result is out of order. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is easier to be executed than in the case of indicating.

With this configuration, it becomes easier to execute a continuous effect with a long execution period (the number of times the special symbol changes to be executed), and when the continuous effect is executed, the player has a feeling of expectation for a big hit. Can be enhanced. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with a high expectation for the big hit, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301), the special symbol 1 reserved ball When the value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301) and it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes in FIG. 301), it is configured to determine whether to execute the continuous effect again. Even in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the continuous effect even for the game ball newly won during the execution of the continuous effect, so that the frequency of executing the continuous effect can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to make the period during which the continuous effect is executed longer than the maximum number of reserved symbols (4) for the special symbol 1, the player is asked which reserved symbol the continuous effect is executed for. It can be difficult to grasp, and it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In this control example, the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, which is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect, is defined in the above-mentioned contents, but other contents may be specified. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for measuring the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the time measuring content of the time measuring means. It may be specified in.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), the continuous effect may be executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. With this configuration, even if the same continuous effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the jackpot changes depending on the timing (time) when the continuous effect is executed, so that the player can play the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent people from getting bored with the time. Further, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guidance notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is advisable to provide a period notification means for notifying. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the continuous production to be executed.

Further, a means for discriminating the operation content to the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the launch status (or the ball entry status) of the game ball are provided, and the discriminating means are provided. It may be specified that the ratio at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in association with the determination result of the above, or the plurality of contents described above may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Further, in this control example, the stop command process (see FIG. 3017) is performed by using the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa that is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the prize information related process (see FIG. 300). However, although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect, when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 300) and the stop command process (see FIG. 301). The selection tables referenced in may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command processing (see FIG. 301) is a big hit of the special symbol when the continuous effect is executed than the selection table referred to in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 300). It is advisable to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the continuous production is continuously executed, the higher the expectation of the jackpot can be raised, and the more interesting the game can be.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (b). FIG. 293 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, with respect to the first control example described above, the effect counter group 223aa, the continuous effect flag 223ab, the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac, the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad, and the continuous effect update area 223ae are provided. The difference is that the effect count counter 223af, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, the setting prohibition release flag 223ah, the time saving counter 223ai, the fluctuation number counter 223j, the operation invalidation flag 223ak, and the state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The effect counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of counter means for effect. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting an effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various advance notice effects, and the like. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. Random number value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can operate at least with an operating clock (for example, 1 MHz) that can update each effect counter to a different random number value and execute a determination. Is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters of the effect counter group 223aa are executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as the effect variation pattern (variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various advance notice effect types. It is used when executing various determinations to be performed, and is updated so that the counter values are not synchronized. The plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process 2 (see FIG. 298) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The update process is executed so that the values are different (every 1 ms).

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the values of the effect counters, since a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected in one main process. Even in the case, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effects are biased. However, for example, a plurality of effects selected in different processes in one main process. If it is desired to synchronize the modes, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

Further, in this control example, a plurality of counters having different counter value update patterns are used. For example, a random value is calculated using the update value of one effect counter, and each effect is calculated using the calculated value. May be configured to select. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the update values of the effect counter, the last digit, the last two digits, and the last one and the lower of the first digit multiplied by the second digit value. It is preferable to calculate so that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to on when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information-related processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300), or the stop command processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 300). In (see FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110: Yes in FIG. 301), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 300), and the effect setting process (see FIG. 303) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303). When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed in Z5204 of 304, it is set to off (see Z5401 in FIG. 305).

That is, does the continuous effect flag 223ab execute the continuous effect based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main control device 110 when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64? Is determined, and the fact that the determination result is to execute the continuous effect is held until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the variation of the next special symbol 1.

In this control example, in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 300), it is determined that the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 300). ), It is configured to execute the continuous effect when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed in the set state, a lottery is performed to decide whether or not to start the continuous effect in the current variation display, and the continuous effect is based on the lottery result. May be configured to determine the variable display that initiates. With this configuration, the timing when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing when the continuous production is started are different (the game ball enters the first entry port 64). After that, the continuous effect can be started with a variable display that does not execute the continuous effect), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous effect.

Further, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. With this configuration, the timing when a new game ball enters the first entry port 64 and the timing when the continuous production starts can be brought close to each other. It can be easily grasped by the player. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous effect, the game ball can be enthusiastically put into the first entry port 64 while the special symbol is changing (during the change display execution), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. ..

When changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to a continuous effect, the display content or elapsed period of the variable display during execution is determined, and the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device). Only when the variable display displayed in 81 is in a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to see), the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect. It is good to configure as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to a sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added and displayed to the effect corresponding to the variable display during execution. In this case, it is advisable to provide a display area dedicated to continuous production. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous production is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to on when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 of FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 of FIG. 304) is executed, and the continuous effect command for display is set. If so (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to on (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 306), and further in the stop command process (see FIG. 301). When it is determined that the continuous effect does not continue (Z5106: No in FIG. 301 or Z5110: No), it is set to off (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to on when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, the phenomenon in which the continuous production is interrupted will be briefly described. In this control example, continuous production is performed based on the winning information regarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed in the normal state (a state that is not a probability change state or a time saving state). It is configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is configured to be preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special diagram 1), and the game is played at the second entrance 640a. It is configured so that the playability (type of special symbol variation to be executed) is different between the probabilistic state and the time saving state where the ball is easy to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, in order to temporarily facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) even when the game state is the normal state, a part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win. The electric accessory 640a, which is attached to the second entry port 640a and regulates the game ball from entering the second entry port 640a, opens for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to perform a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, a game ball enters the second entrance 640a while performing a continuous production using a plurality of winning information related to the first special symbol. In some cases, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the change (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed even though the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. However, there is a problem that the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, if the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the first special symbol (special figure 2) is interrupted. It is configured to resume the continuous effect that was interrupted when the fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbol are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted.

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad indicates that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. When determined (Z5505: Yes in FIG. 306), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, a “standby” display for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third symbol display device 81 (interruption display mode of FIG. 291 (b)). Set a display interruption command to execute (see ma) (Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 304), it is set to off (Z5304 in FIG. 304). ).

With this configuration, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the change (lottery) has priority over the first special symbol (special figure 1). ) Is performed, the continuous production is interrupted when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, and the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2). Since the continuous production that had been interrupted can be resumed at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is completed, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is not related to the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is possible to execute a continuous production in correspondence with.

In addition, when the continuous production is interrupted based on the change of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) during the continuous production execution, it means that the continuous production is interrupted for the player. Because it is configured to notify the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable if the continuous production is suddenly ended, and to play the game while expecting that the continuous production will be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, and the background of the display screen is set to "sea background". This is an area for storing data for internally updating the continuous effect when the background is changed from "" to another background ("mountain background", "river background").

As described above with reference to FIG. 87 (a), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, a state in which the special symbol change is not executed (standby state) or immediately after the start of the special symbol change (standby state). When the player operates the frame button 22 (during high-speed fluctuation), the background of the display screen becomes "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 292), and "river background (see FIG. 292). It is configured to switch in the order of "river mode)".

Then, as the variation effect corresponding to the set background, the variation effect dedicated to each background and the variation effect common to a plurality of backgrounds are executed. With this configuration, the player can change the effect mode of the variation effect for showing the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. It is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the fluctuation effect (for example, continuous notice) dedicated to the sea mode is being executed in the state where the sea mode is set. In addition, a process of rewriting the display data related to the variation effect is executed so that the variation effect corresponding to the background after the variable setting is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Therefore, if the player mistakenly operates the frame button 22 during the execution of the continuous production and the background of the display screen is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data related to the continuous production is deleted. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed, and there is a problem that the effect is deteriorated.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even when the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during the execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect is produced. The execution data of is temporarily stored in the continuous production update area 223ae, and after switching the background of the display screen to a mode other than "sea mode" during the execution of continuous production, the background of the display screen is changed to "sea" again. It is configured so that when the mode is switched to, the remaining continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305), after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". In the case (Z5405: No in FIG. 305), display data regarding the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes in FIG. 308) in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 307), it is stored. Information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, when the continuous effect is completed, the information (display data indicating the effect mode) stored in the area is deleted (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

The effect count counter 223af is a counter for indicating the period during which the continuous effect is executed (the number of fluctuations in the special figure). When it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 300) (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300), the effect count counter 223af has a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the received prize command. The value of is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when it is determined that the value of the counter is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes in FIG. 304), the continuous effect is set. The continuous effect setting process for this is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

The effect count counter 223af is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed (Z5407 in FIG. 305). With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the prize information related processing (see FIG. 300), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. The continuous effect can be executed by using the period from the variation display executed in the set state to the execution of the variation display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect.

In this control example, the continuous effect is executed using the above-mentioned period, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect. For example, the continuous effect may be set. The continuous effect may be started by changing the effect mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON. ) May be executed continuously when the number of fluctuations is two. Further, when the display mode of the new variation display is set (when the variation display setting process 2 is executed) in the state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. The execution discriminating means may be provided, and the continuous effect may be executed when the execution discriminating means determines that the continuous effect is to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous effect is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during the execution of the continuous effect, and is set to be turned on during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 300) that continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: Yes in FIG. 300). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on, the process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect in the prize information related process (see FIG. 300) (the process of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied by starting a new continuous production while the player is paying close attention to the progress of the continuous production. Then, in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect has ended (setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to on) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301), it is set to off. (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

In this control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect, in addition to the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, the timing when the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) is executed, and the continuous effect is performed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON at the timing when the stop command is received at the time of termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301) (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301). It is configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), it is set to ON even when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5111 in FIG. 301).

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the time saving state is set when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. The time reduction counter 223ai is set with a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the set number of time reductions when a state command indicating that the gaming state has shifted to the time reduction state is received from the main control device 110. , Every time the stop command processing (see FIG. 301) executes the time saving medium processing (see FIG. 302) that is executed when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes in FIG. 301). It is subtracted by 1 (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

Then, in the time saving / intermediate processing (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), it fluctuates. 5 is set in the value of the count counter 223aj.

The fluctuation number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the fluctuation number of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, the special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed when the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when the game state is the normal state. ing. This is because the game ball entered the second entrance 640 in the normal state where it was difficult for the game ball to enter the second entrance 640, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuated. It is intended to be given as a privilege. However, when the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state in which the game ball easily enters the second entry port 640 (a state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the hold of the special figure 2 is acquired, and the hold thereof is obtained. The change of the second special symbol corresponding to the hold (special figure 2 hold) may be executed in the normal state after the end of the time reduction. Even in such a case, if the special effect is executed, the special effect becomes frequent after the time reduction ends, and there is a problem that it becomes difficult to give the player a special feeling of the special effect.

In response to the above-mentioned problem, in this control example, the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol that is executed within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction has reached the predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. If it is determined that, the special effect is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which special effects occur frequently after the end of the time reduction.

In this control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time reduction is 5 times, that is, a value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set as a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being the upper limit, the special effect is executed by the holding ball of special figure 2 acquired during the time saving state. Although it is surely prevented from being performed, a condition other than the above-mentioned control example may be set as a condition that the special effect is not executed. For example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be set. A value less than the upper limit (4) (for example, 3) may be set as a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of the time reduction, a special effect will be executed, so the player will enthusiastically provide the reserved balls in Special Figure 2. It can be saved and the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, a condition using the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set as a condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state is completed. A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the above may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means has not passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special effect. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, when the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the game is played without changing the special symbol after the time saving state ends and the normal state is reached. When the above is completed), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game performed by the next player.

In addition, a game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second entry port 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second entry port 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. When it is determined that the ball has been hit, it may be configured to regulate (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as a variation display for the ball entering.

This fluctuation number counter 223aj is special for restricting (prohibiting) the execution of special effects when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving medium processing (see FIG. 302) (Z5152: Yes in FIG. 302). A value indicating the number of fluctuations of the symbol (5 in this control example) is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is decremented by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process for setting the special effect (see FIG. 306), when the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is referred to and it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502: No in FIG. 312). , The effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen, and is set to on during the period for disabling the operation for switching the background of the display screen. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is executed. It is configured so that there is no such thing. With this configuration, the player mistakenly operates the frame button 22 during the period when the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from switching while the special effect is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set to on when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and the first special symbol in the effect setting process (FIG. 304). When the variation effect of (Special FIG. 1) is set (Z5301: Yes in FIG. 304), it is set to off (Z5302 in FIG. 304). Then, while the operation invalidation flag 223ak is set to ON, the process of changing the background of the display screen (processes of Z2803 to Z2852 of FIG. 307) in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (see FIG. 103) is performed. It will be skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information for indicating the current gaming state based on the state command output from the main control device 110. Specifically, in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 299), when it is determined that the status command has been received (Z2256: Yes in FIG. 299), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured so that the information is erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In No. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a state command for indicating the current gaming state is output from the main control device 110, so that when the power is turned off (power failure). Etc.), the gaming state can be appropriately determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Control processing by the main control device in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 297. In this second control example, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 244) is the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 294), and the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 247) are special. The point that the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 295), the start winning process (FIG. 248) is changed to the start winning process 2 (FIG. 296), and the look-ahead process (FIG. 249) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 297). The main difference.

The special symbol variation process 2 (Z154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 294. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is changed to the processing of Z330 to Z340 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit of the special symbol (Z201). The special symbol jackpots include those during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (Z201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). When it is determined that the value is 1 or more (Z331: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z332), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). In the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) described later, which is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 by the hold ball number command set here and executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the processing of Z265, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z331, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z3311: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). When it is determined that the value is 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by calculation is performed. A hold ball count command indicating a value is set (Z338). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the processing of Z339, the data stored in the holding area 1 to the holding area 4 of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process 2 for starting the variation display is executed on the first symbol display device (Z340). The special symbol variation start processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 295. On the other hand, in the processing of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this processing is terminated.

Here, the special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 295. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: FIG. 246) and the special symbol 2 variation start process (214: FIG. 247) in the first control example. It is different to perform the processing of. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 296. In the start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example, the processes of Z308 and Z316 are not executed for the start winning process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example, and the Z320 The difference is that the processes are collectively executed by the Z360 process. Since the processing content is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 297, a look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is a process in the start winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the contents of the look-ahead process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new winning information (Z361: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), the special winning random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol holding ball storage area. Each value of the counter CS1 is acquired (Z362). Next, among the determination results defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the hit determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1 is acquired (Z363). Next, among the determination results defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Next, the winning information including the hit judgment result information showing the acquired hit judgment result, the hit type information showing the hit type judgment result, the stop type information showing the stop type judgment result, and the fluctuation type information for showing the fluctuation type judgment result. Set the command (Z367) and end this process.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 to 308. In the second control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, is performed with respect to the first control example. The main point is that the command determination process (Z2113) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z2152) and the variation display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the process 2 (Z2151). It's a difference.

The command determination process 2 (Z2152) in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In the command determination process 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and the present process is terminated. To do. Since the processes of Z2203 to Z2207 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z2206 (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information-related process (Z2255) is executed to end this process. Details of the winning information-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 300.

When it is determined in the processing of Z2253 that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). When it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the state information indicating the game state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2256, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop. Command processing (Z2259) is executed. The details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. 301. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2258, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2661), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 300, a winning information-related process (Z2255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (Z2255).

The prize information-related process (Z2255) first stores the received prize information command information in the corresponding prize information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not 2 or more (Z5003: No), this process ends.

In the processing of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004). When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is on (Z5004: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read out (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (Z5007). When the continuous effect is not executed (Z5007: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the continuous effect is executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to on (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the read counter value is set. It is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to on (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 301, a stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command processing (Z2259), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z5101: Yes), the time saving middle processing (Z5115) is executed, and this processing is terminated. Details of the time-saving and medium-time processing (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. 302. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5101, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is on (Z5102). When the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is on (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set to off (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223a. Is read out (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not 2 or more (Z5105: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z5105 that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a being 2 or more is obtained. Read from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is jackpot winning information (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no big hit prize (Z5107: No), the continuous production flag 223ac is set to off (Z5116), and this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot winning information is available (Z5107: Yes), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read out (Z5108), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5109). After executing the process of Z5109, it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the above-mentioned Z5116 process is executed, and the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to on (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the jackpot prize is set as the value of the effect count counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this process is performed. finish.

With reference to FIG. 302, a time saving medium processing (Z5115), which is one processing in the stop command processing (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time saving and medium processing (Z5115).

In the time saving medium processing (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). When it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the fluctuation count counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 223ai is larger than 0 in the processing of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the processing of Z5153 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 303, the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example is different in that the processes of Z5204 to Z5208 are added to the variation display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired by the processing of Z5202 (Z5203). Next, the effect setting process (Z5204) is executed. The details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 304.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is larger than 1 (Z5207: Yes), the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is subtracted by 1 (Z5208). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 in the processing of Z5207 (Z5207: No), the processing of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 304, an effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation this time is the fluctuation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If the fluctuation is in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalidation flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to off (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5304). On the other hand, in the processing of Z5303, when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to off (Z5303: Yes), the processing of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the process of Z5304, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223af is larger than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined that it is larger than 0 (Z5305: Yes), the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG. 305.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5305, when the value of the effect count counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), the variation pattern of the mode without continuous effect is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to off (Z5308: No), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z5301 when it is determined that the change this time is not the change in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), the special effect setting process (Z5311) is executed. Details of the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

With reference to FIG. 305, a continuous effect setting process (Z5306), which is one process in the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to off (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect count counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the final mode of continuous effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect count counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the background mode is currently set to the sea mode (Z5405). When it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a continuous display command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). Next, the value of the effect count counter 223af is subtracted by 1 (Z5407). ), Set the continuous production flag 223ac to ON (Z5408), and end this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is waiting is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the above-described processes of Z5407 to Z5408 are executed, and this process is completed.

With reference to FIG. 306, a special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time saving (Z5501). When it is determined that the time is not shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). When it is set to on (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5506). When it is set to off (Z5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to on (Z5507), and the display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z5501, when it is determined that the time is being shortened (Z5501: Yes), or in the processing of Z5502, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No). The effect mode of the normal effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the above-mentioned process of Z5509 is executed, and this process is completed. Further, in the processing of Z5505, when it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is off (Z5505: No), or in the process of Z5506, it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set on (Z5506: Yes), the above-mentioned processes of Z5507 to Z5508 are skipped, the process of Z5509 is executed, and the main process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 307, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (Z2151). The second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Since other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The processing of Z2851 determines whether the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803 to Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 308, the effect return process (Z2852), which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. Will be described. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect return process (Z2852).

In the effect return process (Z2852), first, it is determined whether the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this process ends. When it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this process ends.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 307. The effect return process (Z2852) is executed, then the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed and this process is terminated.

<Third control example>
Next, the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 312. In the above-described third control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted and the variation of the special figure 2 is interrupted. The configuration was used to resume the continuous production that had been interrupted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol after the end of. As a result, the continuous production can be executed in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the continuous production can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the end of the variation in Special Figure 2). Since it is not possible to make the player excited, it has been required to further enhance the effect of the production. On the other hand, in the third control example, the interruption is based on the game content (the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2) when the continuous production is interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous production. It is configured to determine whether or not to restart the continuous effect inside, and to restart the continuous effect based on the determination result. With this configuration, when the continuous production is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous production will be resumed while enjoying the special production executed as the variable production of the special figure 2. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the third control example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is the target of the continuous effect is a big hit, the continuous effect is easily restarted. As a result, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the continuous production to be resumed. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 (the number of times the special effect is executed) executed while the continuous effect is interrupted, the easier it is to restart the continuous effect. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous production to the resumption is short, the continuous production can be easily restarted, and it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player does not have a useless expectation for the big hit. In order to do so, it is configured so that the continuous production is difficult to resume.

<About the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification. The third control example is different in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is added in addition to the RAM 223 of the second control example described above. The other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and when the special effect setting process 2 (FIG. 312) sets the effect mode of the special effect, the value of the counter is set. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 310) (Z5602 in FIG. 311). In the process of Z5602, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602: Yes in FIG. 311), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (FIG. 311). Z5603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602: No in FIG. 311), that is, the second special symbol fluctuation is executed three times or more while the continuous production is interrupted. If this is the case, it is determined whether or not there is a winning information indicating a jackpot in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if it is determined that there is no winning information (Z5605: Yes in FIG. 311). , The value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed.

That is, in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311), when the interrupted continuous effect is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the continuous effect interruption is a predetermined number (3 times) or more. , Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of Special Figure 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to restart the continuous production, and if the production result of the continuous production is out of order, the continuous production is restarted. However, since it only disappoints the player, the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous effect is not restarted. As a result, if a long period of time has passed since the continuous production was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is the target of the continuous production is out of order, the player is given an unnecessary expectation for the big hit. It is possible to suppress the fact that the lottery is lost, and when the continuous production is resumed, it is possible to have expectations for the big hit, and the production effect can be enhanced.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 310 to 312. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303), is partially changed with respect to the second control example. Mainly different. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 310, the effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variation display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described. The effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example does not execute the process of Z5310 with respect to the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example, and the special effect process (Z5311). ) Is changed and the continuous effect return process (Z5351) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous effect return processing (Z5351), first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is read out (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 fluctuation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). If it is determined that it is larger than 3, (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the prize information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the prize information storage area 223f is read out. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the read prize information (Z5605). If it is determined that there is no winning prize (Z5605: No), the value of the effect count counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), and then the above-mentioned Z5603 process is executed to end this process. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5605, if it is determined that there is a winning prize (Z5605: Yes), the processing of Z5603 is executed and the main processing is terminated.

The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 312. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: FIG. 312) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then the special effect 2 fluctuation counter 223ba. The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 to 324. The fourth control example is different from each of the above-mentioned control examples in that the player has an adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

First, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example is different from the first control example described above in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume are provided. They are different and the other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The RTC 292 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and is composed of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. The RTC292 has an input / output port, a device control unit, and a register. Further, an RTC power supply is connected to the RTC292. This RTC power supply is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292, which is different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. As the RTC power supply 353, for example, a button type battery is used, and is configured to be able to supply electric power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input / output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC292. The input / output ports are connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be able to communicate with each other. The device control unit controls registers to perform various controls such as timing the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. The register is provided with at least a timekeeping register and a time information storage area.

The timekeeping register is a register for measuring the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the timekeeping information measured in this timekeeping register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time effect.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by the RTC 292) is used for the ON time storage area of the RAM 223. ) Is stored or the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area is stored. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the time information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the ON time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the timekeeping register (timekeeping information corresponding to the current time measured by RTC292) is stored in the turn-on time storage area. ..

As a result, the clerk in the hall turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall or the like, so that the elapsed time from the power on that each pachinko machine 10 grasps. Can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time effect can be matched. On the other hand, when the power of some pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the business hours of the hall (for example, when canceling an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the turn-on time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from which the power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10 from shifting the execution timing of the time effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 314 and X, a display screen related to volume adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 314 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 314 (b) is a schematic view in which the game is not performed. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and in X (a), a special symbol change is executed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram which showed the customer waiting screen in the state which is not, and X (b) is the schematic diagram which schematically showed the display screen which is undergoing the first special symbol change after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. is there.

As shown in FIG. 314 (a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the return processing of the control devices such as the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 ends on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The comment "Please wait for a while" notifying the period until is displayed as the returning display mode S1, and the volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. The volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that indicates the current volume numerically on the right side of the gauge. In FIG. 314, the set value is ". "1" is displayed, and a shaded area corresponding to the set value "1" is displayed on the gauge. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314 (b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. To. The volume switching display S3 has a "switching" display for indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume reduction display mode S3a indicating that the volume is lowered when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a right volume button 23b when the volume button 23b is pressed. It is formed from the volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. While the volume switching display S3 is displayed, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when a fraudulent act (for example, an act of illegally operating the control content of the main control device 110 to aim for a big hit) is performed on the pachinko machine 10, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily turned on. Some turn it off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent activities, some measures have been taken so that a loud noise is emitted when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

However, in recent years, many pachinko machines 10 temporarily emit a loud sound as a method for enhancing the effect of production, and in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are operating, a loud volume emitted when the power is turned on. There was a problem that the clerk of the amusement park missed the question. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the volume setting range that can be variably set by the player from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change. Is also configured to output a small sound. With this configuration, in a game machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game, it is possible to create a state that is uncomfortable compared to the surrounding game machines by emitting a sound that is smaller than necessary. It can be easily found by the clerk of the amusement park.

Further, in this control example, since the player is configured so that the volume cannot be adjusted from the time when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the end of the first special symbol change, it is illegal. It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from operating the volume button 23 after turning on the power to adjust the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10.

Specifically, as shown in X (a), the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. 314 (b) described above is displayed on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, so that the volume switching display S3 is not displayed. It is configured. In this way, although the volume is internally output lower than the volume setting value "1", it is illegal by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen. It is possible to prevent the player who performs the action from being detected by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-fraud measures.

Similarly, as shown in X (b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed while the special symbol is fluctuating in the first rotation after the power is turned on (a state in which a volume smaller than the set value "1" is output). , The volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume button 23 cannot be operated to change the volume setting value.

<About the electrical configuration in the 4th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318. The same elements as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 316. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. The control examples described above are different in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) are provided, and are the same except for the above.

Next, the contents of ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 317 (a). FIG. 317 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example is significantly different from the ROM of each of the above-mentioned control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. The other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table in which the set value of the volume that can be set by operating the volume button 23 is defined. Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in addition to the set values (set values "1" to "4") that can be set by operating the volume button 23, the volume table 222ca satisfies a predetermined condition after the power is turned on. The set value (set value "A") to be set when is specified is specified, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) of the first rotation is completed after the power is turned on. When the set value "A" is set, a sound having a loudness of 15 dB (decibel) is output. Further, when the volume button 23 is operated and the set value "1" is set, a sound having a loudness of 30 dB (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 db (decibel) is output. When the sound is output and the setting value "3" is set, a sound with a loudness of 85db (decibel) is output, and when the setting value "4" is set, a loudness of 95db (decibel) is output. Sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on, but the initial value of the volume is set in accordance with various conditions. For example, a flag that is set to be turned on only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and if the flag is set to on, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. It may be configured so that the time is determined when the power is turned on, and a different set value is set as an initial value based on the determination result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 317 (b). In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cc, and a volume change standby flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. It differs in that. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The set volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the currently set set volume, and is set in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of the start-up process 4 (see FIG. 319). The installation value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 320). Further, the set value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

The volume operation invalid flag 223cc is a flag for indicating the period for invalidating the volume change (change of the set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23, and the volume change (set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23. Is set to on during the period when (change) is invalid. When it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) that the time counting time of the RTC is during business hours (for example, from 10 am to 10 pm), the volume operation invalid flag 223 cc is determined (Z6002 in FIG. 320: Yes), it is set to on (Z6005 in FIG. 320) and referenced in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined by the processing of Z6107 that it is set to ON (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314 (a)) is not displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314 (b)). ) Is set for displaying only (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, it is set to off in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 324) executed in the stop command processing 4 (FIG. 323) (Z5122 in FIG. 324). That is, when the special symbol variation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on, it is set to off.

The volume change standby flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to on when the volume can be adjusted. It is a thing. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to first press the volume button 23 to display the volume switching display S3 on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (left volume button 23a or right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is accidentally pressed during the game.

If the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation while the RAM clear switch 122 is operated (pressed) when the power is turned on, the maximum operation setting is made. It may be configured to output a sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared at a volume or a volume higher than the maximum volume set for operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clear and aiming at a hit random value.

Further, in this control example, the game sound is output at a volume lower than the minimum volume set for operation until one fluctuation at the time of power-on is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the power is turned on, When a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at a volume lower than the minimum volume set for operation, a voice such as BGM or a sound effect (voice for production) is output, and the volume is set in the third symbol display device 81. The display indicating the above may be displayed, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23. With this configuration, when the game starts when the game store opens after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (volume setting on the previous day), resulting in a loud volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by the output of. Furthermore, by setting the volume to be lower than the minimum volume, it is possible to make the player aware that the volume is low while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. You can notice that it is configured. It should be noted that, regardless of when the power is turned on, by switching to the demo screen, the volume may be switched to a volume lower than the minimum and the volume setting screen may be displayed. Further, after the game is started (the change of the special symbol starts), during the period in which the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume lower than the minimum volume is continued, the change of the special symbol The display color (volume symbol and volume button (volume up by right operation, volume down by left operation)) on the volume setting screen can be changed depending on the winning lottery result and the lottery result (pre-reading result) that is stored on hold. It may be configured to notify the expected degree of winning. With this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the game at a quiet volume and raise the volume at the timing when the expectation is high until the fluctuation or the hold memory with high expectation is made.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, the control process in which the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to Z324. In this fourth control example, the initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added to the startup process, the volume setting process (Z2171), and the sound editing / output process (Z2109) are added to the main process. The main difference is that the processing is added and the volume-related processing (Z5120) is added to the stop command processing which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

With reference to FIG. 319, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 319) in the fourth control example differs from the start-up process (FIG. 275) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 320, the initial volume setting (Z2051), which is one of the start-up processes (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read out (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether the present is during business hours (Z6002). When it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222 and stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON. (Z6005), this process is terminated.

The main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 321. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 4. The main process (FIG. 321) in the fourth control example differs from the main process (FIG. 258) in the second control example in that a volume setting process (Z2171) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one of the main processes 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 322. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether the volume button has been operated (Z6101). When it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this process ends. When the volume button is operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). When it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying the volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, a voice setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z6102, when it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to off (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for indicating the volume gauge and the adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z6107, when the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for indicating the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this processing is terminated.

The stop command process 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 323. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 4 (Z2259). The stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command process (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that a volume-related process (Z5120) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

A volume-related process (Z5120), which is one process in the stop command process 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described with reference to FIG. 324. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation invalid flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to on (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cc is set to off (Z5122), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5121, when it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag is off (Z5121: No), the processing of Z5122 is not executed and the main processing is terminated.

<About the 5th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 345. In the fifth control example, the control process related to the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Only the differences will be described with respect to the first control example, and the description of the same configuration will be omitted.

In the fifth control example, mainly when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, error processing during the initial operation and initial operation of the tilting device 310, and control processing and error in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game. The processing will be described.

With reference to FIGS. 325 (a) to 325 (b), a display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In FIG. 325 (a), in the initial operation at the time of turning on the power (tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110), the tilt operation timer 223db described later by the tilt device 310 is 0 ( An abnormality notification display mode (error) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when it is not detected at the origin position even when the initial operation period elapses when the initial operation is completed and the origin position is reached). It is a figure which showed display).

As shown in FIG. 325 (a), the origin sensor of the operating device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position even after the operation period in which the initial operation of the tilting device 310 ends has elapsed. The text "Button return error A, please call a staff member" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the employees of the hall that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. .. In this control example, if the tilting device 310 is not moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends during the initial operation, an error display as shown in FIG. 325 (a) is displayed. There is. Further, although the details will be described later, a normal game in which the player may not be able to perform the normal operation predetermined by the production or the like by hindering the operation of the tilting device 310 by pressing the operation of the tilting device 310 by hand or the like. Even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not immediately displayed, and the tilting device 310 is operated four times under predetermined specific conditions (for example, every three fluctuations of the special symbol). When an error is detected continuously until the condition (such as when an abnormality is detected by the operation of the tilting device 310) is satisfied, an error is notified so that the progress of the game is not a mechanical abnormality. Regardless, it is configured to suppress problems that hinder it.

The error display at the time of initial operation is a mechanical (including a control abnormality) abnormality by displaying an identifiable display as "button return error A" as shown in FIG. 325 (a). It is configured so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 325 (b), after operating the tilting device 310 in the production of the game during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the origin sensor does not detect the movement (movement) to the origin position even during the period when the movement to the origin position is completed, an error is not immediately displayed and an internal abnormality occurs. Is set to the status indicating the detected state, and then the operation of moving to the origin position is performed every 3 fluctuations of the special symbol, and if it is possible to move to the origin position four times in succession, the third symbol display device The text "Button return error B Please call the staff" is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81, and an error display is executed to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred in the tilting device 310. Will be done.

Here, by displaying a character called "button return error B" that is different from the initial operation, it is configured so that it can be easily identified as an abnormality during a normal game. As described above, in this control example, the error display is displayed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that hinders the operation of the tilting operation 310 during the normal game. It is configured to suppress frequently executed problems. Further, when an error display is executed during a normal game and it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the tilting device 310, the player is performing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error operation of the tilting device 310 at an early stage by confirming the game method by the hall employees and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the touch sensor effect will be described. FIG. 326 shows a period (origin) during which the operation effect of the tilting device 310 is executed and the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position when the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is executed as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (third symbol). It is a timing chart in the example in which the origin sensor does not detect even if the return is completed).

When the fluctuation display of the normal reach deviation A (fluctuation time (variation period) 30000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later is obtained. If it is collated with any of the above and matches the value of the acquired effect counter 223h, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333 (a)) described later is determined. In the tilting operation scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 333 (a)), after the tilting device 310 has risen to the highest position (see FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 33 as a fanning motion. After the operation of repeating the ascending position (see FIG. 32) at intervals of 0.5 seconds is executed, the operation of descending to the position shown in FIG. 22 which is the origin position is executed (set).

When the normal reach loss A is executed, the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol of the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol 18 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (T1). It will be temporarily stopped (stopped). In the reach display mode, a symbol imitating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, it will be described later that the tilting operation 320 is pressed and the frame button 22 is pressed for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. When the detection sensor 324 detects the detection, the operation validity period (T5) for determining that the detection is valid is set.

As shown in FIGS. 326 and 333 (a), the drive motor 342 is 210 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 22) 18 seconds (18000 ms) after the fluctuation of the normal reach deviation A is started (T1). By step rotation, the disk cam 344 is rotated 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position in FIG. 22) and moved to the cam removal position shown in FIG. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333 (a))). ). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates 20 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 30), so that the disk cam 344 rotates 20 degrees counterclockwise and is in the unlocked position. It is moved to (see FIG. 32) (see operation pointer 3 (FIG. 333) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaging position to the locking disengaging position, as already described in the first embodiment, the release member 346 moves downward (counterclockwise) as shown in FIG. 31. By being rotated, the rotary claw member 347 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the locking (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is subjected to the torsion spring 315. Raised by the force of. In this case, the voice coil motor 352 is also driven to provide an assist in the front-rear direction to the tilting device 320, so that the ascending force is increased and the ascending speed is improved. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and a period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited for (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 drives in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by 50 steps, so that the disk cam 344 rotates 50 degrees counterclockwise and moves downward by 50 degrees from the highest position (see FIG. 32). It is moved to the rotated fanning down position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333 (a))). Then, 0.5 seconds later, the drive motor 342 is driven again in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 33) by 50 steps, so that the disk cam 344 is rotated 50 degrees in the clockwise direction, and the tilting device 320 is again tilted. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 333 (a))).

Then, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven from the highest rising position to the lowering position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333 (a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position from the lowering position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the ascending position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333 (a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for 1 second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333 (a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and the driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 334 (a)) described later. When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the tilting device 320 is driven in the direction of descending to the origin position. Is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed so as not to be lowered by the player at the highest position. In such a case, as already described in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b is idled so that the drive motor 342 is being driven. Also, the disk cam 344 is configured so as not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334 (a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an abnormality of the tilting device 310, which is an internal (abnormal state that is not a state of notifying the outside) described later.

In this way, even if the tilting device 320 is held by the player and the player may not be able to return to the origin position from the highest position, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be moved by the configuration of the movable clutch 343c. The drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b can be prevented from being damaged by idling. Further, by configuring so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that there is an abnormality in the home return operation, it is configured so that it can be internally identified as an abnormal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, the origin sensor is detected even after the origin detection operation period (for example, 1900 ms) has elapsed. The control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" without turning on will be described. In FIG. 327, when the tilting operation status is set to “4”, a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure) are executed. It is a timing chart when it is done.

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the drive motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every 3 fluctuations of the special symbol as shown in FIG. 327. Will be done. In this case, the origin sensor must be turned on by the retry operation four times in a row (retry operation for every three fluctuations is four times) while maintaining "4" as the tilt operation status value until the origin sensor is detected. , The error display shown in FIG. 325 (b) is executed.

As a result, the effect of raising the tilting device 310 is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player plays a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation to perform the origin position. Even if an error occurs that does not move to, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol change is executed a specified number of times (3 times) without immediately notifying the abnormality as in the case of the initial operation. If it is determined that the product cannot be continuously moved to the origin position, an error message is displayed so that the error message is frequently displayed due to mischief by the player, etc., and the work by the employee of the game store is performed. It is possible to suppress problems that make you busy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing of the change will be described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing the operation of the tilting device 310 to be executed when the effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. The fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advance notice effect that the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective is selected, the validity period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 290. When the operation is executed and the touch sensor 290 determines that the on is detected, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to execute the origin detection operation. FIG. 328 shows a case where the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on and the tilting operation status is set to “0”. On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has elapsed, the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status is maintained at "4". .. As a result, the retry operation is continuously executed every three fluctuations, and control for eliminating the abnormality of the tilting device 310 can be executed.

The player usually operates the firing handle with his right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with his left hand. When the player is playing the game while holding the tilting device 310 so that the tilting device 310 does not return to the origin position, it is possible that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand. Therefore, the timing at which the touch sensor 290 is turned on. By operating the tilting device 310 to detect the origin, the origin detecting operation is executed in a state where the holding of the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is configured to be executed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, but only when the touch sensor 290 is turned on while the touch sensor of the firing handle is turned on. The origin detection operation may be configured to execute the origin detection operation so that the origin detection operation is performed in a state where the player is more reliably held. Further, the touch sensor 290 is not limited to the frame button 290, and the third symbol display device 81 may be used to perform a warning effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). , A mobile phone or the like may be used to perform an effect of reading a three-dimensional code or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Of course, it may be a production that notifies the user to use both hands by voice.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example, respectively. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the tilting device 310 has the same configuration as that described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and when the tilting device 310 is in the lower limit position, the driving motor 342 is driven so as to be released from being locked so as to prevent the tilting device 310 from ascending at the lower limit position. When the lock is released, the vibration force in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 of the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the drive motor 342, becomes an aid and rises to the highest position by the urging force of the spring. ..

On the other hand, in the state where the tilting member 310 is located at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward and moved to the origin position by rotating in the opposite direction to the case where the drive motor 342 is raised. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotating claw member 347 (see FIG. 22), and the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13, and is composed of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R, and the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 22 is in the lower limit position. In the state regulated by, the left side detection sensor 324L detects the left side detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right side detection sensor 324R does not detect the right side detection piece 311gR (OFF state). Therefore, it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is further pressed by the player at the lower limit position, the right side detection sensor 324R detects the right side detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left side detection sensor 324L and the left side detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , The tilting device 310 can be determined to have been operated by the player at the lower limit position.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position but also when it is regulated at the lower limit position. It can be used for various productions. For example, if the effect of raising and pressing the tilting device 310 is set with a high probability of being executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol whose hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the tilting device 310 can determine the degree of expectation of the hit / fail judgment result. Can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and by driving the voice coil motor 352, it repeats vibration from the back side direction to the front side side of the tilting device 310, causing the tilting device 310 to vibrate. , The purpose is to perform an effect in which the player can feel the vibration when the tilting device 310 is touched. Further, when the tilting device 310 rises, it rises due to the urging force of the spring against gravity, but the rising force weakens due to the weight of the tilting device 310, but by driving the voice coil motor 352 when it rises. , A rising force is applied by the vibration from the voice coil motor 352, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the rising force is weakened by its own weight.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330. In the fifth control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. Is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 330 (a). FIG. 330A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the operation effect selection table 222da, the tilting operation scenario table db, the origin detection operation A table 222dcc, the origin detection operation B table 222dd, and the tilting initial operation table 222de are added. are doing.

The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation content) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. In the operation effect selection table 222da, a determination value of the effect counter 223h that determines whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability is set according to the variation type of the special symbol. The type of tilting motion scenario is set for the judgment value for executing the operation effect. In the tilting operation scenario, the operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilt device 310, and the tilt device 310 as the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses. Operation valid start time (operation valid), which is a timer value for determining the tilt operation timer 223db for setting the operation time (operation period) of the tilt device 310 and the start time (start period) for determining the operation of the tilt device 310. The start period) and the operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid, are set. That is, depending on the operation data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilt device 310 can be executed, and if it is executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilt device 310 and the tilt device 310 are played. The setting of the validity period (T5) for effectively determining the operation when the person presses the button is executed.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach out of A", the determination of whether to acquire the value of the effect counter 223h and execute the operation effect is operated. When it is executed from the effect selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is set. The tilting operation scenario A table 222bd1 described later is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is set. ) Is set to 23300 ms, and the operation valid end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach out of A", the operation effect is determined by acquiring the value of the effect counter 223h and executing the operation effect. When it is executed from the selection table 222da and it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed (when the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 149"), the tilt device will be described later as an operation scenario. The operation scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilting operation timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is 41500 ms. Is set, and 45900 ms is set for the operation valid end time (T4). In this way, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is effective are set in advance according to the variation type of the special symbol, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting operation scenario table 222db sets the origin detection operation tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the tilting operation scenario type and the tilting operation scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da. The data table for this is set.

FIG. 332B is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting operation scenario table 222db. The tilting operation scenario table 222db is provided with a tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, a tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection operation A table 222db3, and an origin detection operation B table 222db4.

The tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario A are defined, and can be selected when the fluctuation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit by normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. Operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1. After the change of the special symbol is started, the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered.

In the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1, the operation pointer corresponds to the operation pointer in order from "1", and the operation content corresponding to the operation pointer is read out during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). ), The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "10" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (18000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (210 steps in the backward rotation direction during 2100 ms) The cam removal operation (movable to) is executed, the release member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retractable portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344, and the second overhanging portion 344c3 is the upper portion of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30). (That is, the operation of moving the second overhanging portion 344c3 to the upper part of the release member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotary claw member 347)) to reach the cam removal position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped for 3000 ms) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer set to "3" (moving 20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second overhanging portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward). The disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocked position by rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the lock with the tilting device 320, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the operation data whose operation pointer is "4" (stopped for 500 ms) is executed, waits for ascending, and the operation data whose operation pointer is "5" (50 steps can be moved forward in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms). ) Is executed to reach the position shown in FIG. 33, the motion data with the motion pointer set to “6” (movable in the backward rotation direction in 50 steps during 500 ms) is executed, and the fanning motion to be the position shown in FIG. 32 is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "7" (moving 50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) is executed and the position is again in FIG. 33, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (50 steps during 500 ms) is executed. (Movable in the backflip direction) is executed, and the position is returned to the position shown in FIG. Is stopped) is executed, the stop is performed at the position shown in FIG. 32, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved to the highest position after the tilt device 320 is moved from the origin position to the highest position. After executing the fanning operation, the operation of returning to the origin position is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 is pressed and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts ascending, the detection is considered to be effective. After being determined, a specific advance notice effect (for example, an effect of notifying the expected degree of hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also display sound effects according to the advance notice effect. And the lamp lighting mode are lit. When the tilting device 320 is pressed and operated by the player after the tilting device 320 starts ascending and before 3.5 seconds of the operation valid period (T5) elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. The origin is detected when the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position by moving to the origin position by the pressing operation before the return operation by the operation A table 222db3 is executed. The operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed, and the disk cam 344 is moved to the initial position (origin position).

When the transmission gear 343b is held by the player at an elevated position or the like and the transmission gear 343b idles, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is ON and the initial position is determined, and the position of the disk cam 344 is determined. Is executed to return to the origin position.

The tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is a table in which the operation contents in the tilting operation scenario B are defined, and when the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach A, the operation data when the tilting device 310 is movable is stored. As described above, the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery of the operation effect selection table 222da at the start of the change of the special symbol. FIG. 333 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2. The operation of the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2 is started when the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the change of the special symbol is started.

In the tilting operation scenario B table 222db2, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointers are read out in order from the operation pointer "1" during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). , The defined operation is performed until the operation pointer becomes "11" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time is triggered (38000 ms) after the special symbol change is started, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (50 steps in the forward rotation direction during 500 ms) (Movable to) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000 ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (for 200 ms) is executed. 20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction), operation data with an operation pointer of "4" (movable in the backward rotation direction with 20 steps for 200 ms) is executed, and operation data with an operation pointer of "5" (movable in the backward rotation direction). During 200 ms, 20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction), operation data with an operation pointer of "6" (20 steps can be moved in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the operation pointer is "7". Operation data (20 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and operation data with an operation pointer of "8" (20 steps can be moved in the backward rotation direction during 200 ms) is executed, and this operation is executed. The operation data with the operation pointer "9" (moving 120 steps in the forward rotation direction for 1200 ms) is executed with the three repeated operations of the pointers "3" to "8" as the fanning operation, and the position shown in FIG. 38. The operation data (stopped for 2000 ms) is executed with the operation pointer set to "10", the operation data is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

With this configuration, the tilting device 310 performs a fanning motion during the reach effect, prompting the player to operate the tilting device 310, and changing the fanning motion according to the variation type while the operation effect is being executed. In addition, by stopping the ascending height (length) at different places, interest in operation is created, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In this control example, the types of tilting motion scenarios are set according to the types of fluctuation patterns, but the tilting motion scenarios A and B are not limited to this, and the hit / fail judgment results are hit and miss, respectively. May be configured so that the selection rate is changed and set according to the result of the hit / fail judgment by dividing and setting the judgment value of the effect counter 223h. With this configuration, for example, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the tilting motion scenario in which the probability of being selected is set higher than that in the case of a miss is executed, so that the player can get the hit / fail judgment result. Can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, the tilting motion scenario type is set so that the tilting motion is performed so as to move to the origin position without raising to the highest rising position after the fanning motion is performed at the start of the motion. May be good. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set so that it can be easily selected when the winning / failing judgment result is a hit, and when the winning / failing judgment result is not correct, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is created. By setting it so that it is easy to select, it is possible to raise expectations for a big hit by performing a fanning operation.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilt device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of the tilt operation scenario A. Operation data for this is stored.

FIG. 334 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation A table 222db3, when the operation of the tilt operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilt device 310 during the valid period of the operation, and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). Or, when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No), 1900 ms is set as the value of the tilt operation timer 223db and 3 is set in the tilt operation status 223da based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3. By performing (Z2959), in the effect backtracking operation process (FIG. 344, Z2911), the operation content of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin detection is performed. The home return operation is performed until there is (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilt device 310 in the original position (origin) when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 after the tilt device 310 performs the operation of the tilt operation scenario B. Operation data for this is stored.

FIG. 334 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation is performed in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved in the forward rotation direction during 1900 ms) is executed, the operation pointer becomes "2", and the operation ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222db4, when the operation of the tilt operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilt device 310 during the valid period of the operation, and the tilt operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). , Or when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959), so that the effect backtracking operation processing (FIGS. 344 and Z2911) The operation content of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 is read (Z2974) until the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0, and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), The origin return operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeatedly performing origin detection when the origin is not detected even though the origin detection operation is performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. There is.

FIG. 334 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry operation table 222dc, the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", as in the operation of the tilt operation scenario table described above. It is performed until the origin is detected (Z2899: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc ends when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No) in the above-mentioned origin detection operation, and 4 is set to the tilt operation status 223da (Z2975). In the retry operation process (Z2913) executed by setting the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3 (Z2976) and setting the detection check counter 223dd to 4 (Z2977), the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes) of the special symbol is set. When the detection check counter 223dc is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983), and when the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), retries are made based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the operation time (900 ms) is set to the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2896), and the value after subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set. Set to 3 (Z2988). Then, when the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2899: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. It is performed until 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 becomes the origin position (Z2899: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is set once every three times the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed, and if the origin detection is not performed, the above operation is performed up to four times.

The tilt initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilt device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 334 (d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilt initial operation table 222dd. In the tilting initial operation table 222dd, the operation pointer becomes "2" in order from the operation data in which the operation pointer is "1", and the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes), as in the operation of the tilting operation scenario table described above. Or until there is origin detection (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms) is based on the tilt initial operation table 222dd. ) Is set to the tilt operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilt operation status is set to 1 (Z2062) to start the operation.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 331. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third control example. In the second control example, the tilt operation status 223 da, the tilt operation timer 223 db, the detection fluctuation counter 223 dc, the detection check counter 223 dd, the tilt operation flag 223 de, and the pressing notice are valid for the first control example described above. It differs from the timer 223df in that it is added.

The tilting operation status 223da stores information for determining the operating state of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to the initial operation state.

The tilting operation status 223da is determined by the tilting device control process (Z2891), which is executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161), according to the value of the tilting operation status 223da. .. Specifically, when the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting operation is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the initial operation after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect processing (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting operation is the state during the operation effect during the special symbol change. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation processing (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting operation is in the return operation after the scenario operation.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation for detecting the origin. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", and the execution in this process is terminated, but the above-mentioned initial operation and return operation are performed. It is an error state when the origin cannot be detected when the origin is detected, but when the error state occurs, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the special symbol change is started (Z2921: Yes), the tilt operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting motion is in the state of the operation effect during the variable motion of the special symbol.

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342), 0 is set when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2933: Yes) and the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2933: Yes). Then, the tilting operation becomes a standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the operation effect processing (Z2909: FIG. 343), when the tilt operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilt operation flag is off (Z2957: No), the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2957: No). In Z2961: Yes), 0 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2962), and the tilting operation is in the standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 344), when the origin is detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: Yes), 0 is set in the tilt operation status 223da (Z2972), and the tilt operation is in a standby state, and this process. To finish.

When the origin of the detection sensor 324 is not detected (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da, and the tilting operation is executing the retry operation. It becomes.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345), when the origin of the detection sensor 324 is detected (Z2899: Yes) after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: No), 0 is set to the tilt operation status 223da (Z2972). ), The tilting operation is in the standby state, and when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2899: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (5). Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting operation timer 223db is a timer for counting the operation of the tilting device 310. The tilting operation timer 223db is repeatedly updated by adding 1 each time the initial operation time is set (Z2061) and the main process (FIG. 336) is executed when the power is turned on.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting operation status is "0", the operating time is set (Z2923) according to the tilting operation scenario table. When the value of the tilting operation status is "2", the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin when the tilting operation flag is on (Z2957: Yes). The time of the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. When the value of the tilting operation status is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc during the retry operation execution.

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 executes the retry operation performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection fluctuation counter 223dc tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation.

During the retry operation, if the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (Z2981: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. Do. First, the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983), and when the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the fluctuation is a retry operation, and the tilt operation timer is determined based on the contents of the retry operation table. If the result of subtracting 1 from the detection check counter 223dd (Z2986) after the setting (Z2985) is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (maximum 4 times). , The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retries performed when the origin is not detected in the return operation of the tilting device 310 after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd tilts when there is no origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in the retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

When the tilting operation scenario A or the tilting operation scenario B is being executed, the tilting operation flag 223de is moved to the origin position by being pressed by the player during the operation valid period, and the rotating claw member. It is a flag indicating that it has been locked by 347. The tilt operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilt device 320 is pressed during the operation valid period by the process of Z2956 of the operation effect during operation process (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it will be set to on. On the other hand, after the tilt operation flag 223de is determined to be on by the processing of Z2957, the tilt operation status is set to 3, and the tilt operation status is set to off after the home return operation is executed (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 is pressed as a switch for effect when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). This is a timer for determining the valid period for effectively determining the detection of the switch 324. This pressing notice valid timer 223df is based on the start timing of the valid period when the notice effect of using the tilting device 320 as a switch for the effect is determined as the advance effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Data corresponding to the specified validity period is stored. When the data corresponding to the valid period is set in the press warning valid timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 337), the cam removal operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 will be executed due to the operation sound of the cam removal being executed, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the press warning valid timer 223df is decremented by 1 by the press Z2873 (see FIG. 337) and updated.

<Control processing by the main control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 335 to 345. In the fifth control example, a part of the start-up process (FIG. 335) and the main process (FIG. 336) are added to the first control example, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 272) was changed to frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338), and retry processing during touch input (Z2860). : Fig. 339), tilting device control processing (Z2891: Fig. 340), operation effect setting processing (Fig. 341), tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: Fig. 342), operation effect processing (Z2909: Fig. 343), effect backtracking operation The difference is that the process (Z2911: FIG. 344) and the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345) are added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 335, the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example is different in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added to the start-up process (FIG. 257) in the first control example. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the start-up process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example, after the Z2012 process or the Z2013 process is executed, the tilt initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 334 (d)) provided in the ROM 222 is displayed. Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and the main process (FIG. 336) described later is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by the tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, the initial operation can be executed when the power is turned on, and the game can be started in a state of being moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the fact that the disc cam 344 is operated by the initial operation and the left side detection sensor 353L is turned on, so that the drive motor 342 Control can be performed stably.

The main process (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 336. In the main process (FIG. 336) in the fifth control example, the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect process 3 (Z2161) with respect to the main process (FIG. 258) in the first control example. ) Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 337, regarding the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is currently changing (setting the pressing notice) of the special symbol for which the execution of the pressing notice is determined. (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the pressing notice is decided. If it is determined that the pressing notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether the pressing advance notice is being executed, and whether the pressing advance notice valid timer 223df is a value larger than 0. When it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in progress (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player, and it is determined whether or not the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). When it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display pressing notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. In the processing of Z2881, when the pressing notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the processing of Z2884, when it is determined that the button is not pressed by the player (Z2884: No). , Other processing is skipped, and the process proceeds to Z2890 processing.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2882, when it is determined that the pressing notice is not in the valid period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pressing notice valid period, which is the start timing for executing the pressing notice (Z2882: No). Z2886). The start timing of the pressing notice is determined by a start timer (not shown) is set at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value "0").

When it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period (Z2886: Yes), the valid period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the press notification valid timer 223df is set, and the cam removal operation is 2100 ms. The backflip operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam removal operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 is not pushed up, so that the player can expect the ascending effect to be executed.

If it is not the start timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2886: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether the value of the press advance notice valid period timer 223df is 0. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the pressing notice valid period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the pressing warning valid timer 223df is reset and the backflip operation of 1500 ms is set as the origin return operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2888, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the valid period (Z2888: No), the processing of Z2888 is skipped and the processing of the sensor input processing 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process is completed. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340.

The sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 338. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example, the processes of Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed for the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example, and the process is retried during touch input. The difference is that processing (Z2860) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The retry process during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 339. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry process (Z2860) during touch input.

In the retry process during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is larger than 0 (Z2862). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), the detection sensor determines whether the origin is detected (Z2863). If the detection sensor determines that the origin is not detected (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the backward rotation direction by one step (Z2864), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection sensor determines that the origin is detected (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this process is terminated.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. 340. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2901: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 in the processing of Z2901 (Z2901: No), the processing of Z2902 is skipped and the processing of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4", the origin return retry operation is executed, so that the player can perform the origin return operation. To make it easier to return the tilting device 320 to the origin by performing a retry operation to return to the origin at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand operates the firing handle and the other hand operates the touch sensor 290). Can be done.

Here, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one of the tilting device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). When it is determined that the operation time effect start time has not been reached (Z2921: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilt operation scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 340. If it is determined in the processing of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and this process is terminated.

The tilt initial operation process (Z2907), which is one of the tilt device control processes (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the contents of the tilt initial operation process (Z2907).

In the tilt initial operation process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the tilt initial operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2931 when it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the case of an abnormality at the time of returning to the origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, it is possible to detect a defect of the tilting device 320 at an early stage by displaying an error (abnormal processing) immediately unlike during the game. it can.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 340. In the processing of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the operation effect in-process (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 343, an operation effect during operation process (Z2909), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation effect in-process (Z2909).

In the operation effect processing (Z2909), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this process ends as it is. When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the operation content corresponding to the tilt operation scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is in the valid period (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that there is no press detection (Z2955), this process ends. When it is determined that the press is detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2951 when it is determined that the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 (Z2957: Yes). Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2957, when it is determined that the tilt operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the above-described processes of Z2958 to Z2960 are executed, and this process is terminated. When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 340. In the processing of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilt device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971). When the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2971, when it is determined that the detection sensor is not the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read out (Z2974), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set in the tilting operation status 223da (Z2975). Next, 3 is set in the detection fluctuation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 (Z2976), 4 is set in the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 340. In the processing of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), the retry operation process (Z2913) is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2912, if it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4, (Z2912), this process is terminated as it is.

A retry operation process (Z2913), which is a process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry operation process (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). When it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2982: Yes), the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is subtracted by 1 (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2984). When it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is larger than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilt operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2896). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is larger than 0 (Z2987). When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc to 3, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2981, when it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2899). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2899: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is larger than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read out (Z2991), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in Z2990, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is larger than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2899, when the detection sensor is determined to be the origin position (Z2899: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this processing is terminated.

In the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or presses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately performs the unlocking operation. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and the tilting device 320 is not lifted. As such a countermeasure, the unlocking operation is performed by setting the number of movable steps to 10 (forward rotation; required time 100 ms) as the operation data of the operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 333 (a)), which is the unlocking operation. Is configured to be maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31, and is configured not to perform a fanning operation, so that the tilting device 320 can be configured to rise at the timing when the hand is released.

Further, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pressed by the detection switch 324, or the tilting device 320 is placed on the upper surface of the tilting device 320. Place a touch sensor to determine if the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if pressed), wait without unlocking and wait until it is off. Then, it may be configured to execute the unlocking operation at the timing when it is turned off. In addition, when the tilting device 320 is pressed or it is determined that the player is touching, the tilting device 320 is released from the tilting device 320 (the obstruction of the ascending operation by the player is released) by a display notification, voice, or the like. It may be configured to notify the user.

<6th control example>
Next, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370. In the first control example, when the jackpot A in which the probability of winning / failing is set to a low probability (electric support is given up to 100 times) is executed after the jackpot game, it is displayed as an even-numbered doublet. Although it has been notified that the jackpot is A, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored in the reserved balls, the jackpot that is executed first is executed. The stop symbol of A, the effect during the jackpot, etc. are made to appear as if it is the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, and the effect is as if the high probability game state (probability variation game state) is set even after the jackpot game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. Further, in the sixth control example, even when the third symbol of the even number symbol indicating the jackpot A is displayed, it is actually a jackpot type in which the probability variation game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 is set during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion effects for notifying the above are set, the type of the promotion effect is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed thereafter depends on the execution content of the promotion effect (for example, whether or not there is promotion). It differs from the first control example in that the type of effect is switched and set. The same points as in the first control example will be omitted in detail.

With reference to FIG. 346, an example of a stop display mode of the special symbol of the hit / fail determination result which is the jackpot A in this control example will be described. In FIG. 346 (a), the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved symbol h1 stored as the first reserved ball is the jackpot A, and the reserved symbol h2 of the reserved ball displayed in the third is This is an example showing the case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. In this case, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is changed, it is normally displayed as an even-numbered doublet, but when the fluctuation starts, the odd-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed. It is displayed by switching to. That is, the same stop symbol as when the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot B1 is executed is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346 (b), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time, such as "Super jackpot !! Please expect the next one !!", and the probabilistic game state is set as if it were. Notification as if it is a big hit is executed. As a result, in reality, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored even when the jackpot A is executed, so that the effect as if the jackpot B1 is executed is executed even when the jackpot A is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the rate at which the jackpot B1 is executed is higher than the design value, and improve the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 347 (a), an effect mode in which the special symbol variation in the time-saving game state (game state with low probability electric support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. 346 is executed will be described. FIG. 347 (a) shows the third state in which the time saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball to be the jackpot A is stored (holding symbol h2). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the symbol display apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 347 (a), the characters "during super time" displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when the game is in the probabilistic game state even though the game is in the time-saving game state. Is displayed, and the characters "Big hit expectation is UP" are displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the hit / fail determination probability is not actually set high and the expectation is high is displayed. As a result, it is configured to suppress a defect that significantly impairs the trust of the player by giving the player a false notification different from the actual one. In this way, the notification that substantially approximates the probabilistic gaming state can also be referred to as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 347 (b) is an example showing a stop display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 reserved in FIG. 347 (a). The reserved symbol h2 is a hit / fail judgment result of the jackpot A, and since the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot (any of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) is not stored in the reserved ball, the normal time Similarly to the above, the stop display is made in the even-numbered symbols, and the notification indicating that the jackpot is A is executed.

FIG. 348 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game of jackpot A in the example shown in FIG. 347 (b) is executed is set. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode. As a display mode indicating the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the time saving until the character "chance (100 times)" is displayed and the fluctuation of the special symbol is changed 100 times and stopped. It is notified that the game is being set. In addition, the number (number of times) is subtracted by 1 each time the change of the special symbol is completed and displayed.

FIG. 348 (b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot game in the jackpot B1 or jackpot B2 is executed. The characters "during super time (during probability change)" are displayed as a display mode suggesting that the probability change game state is set, and the player is notified that the game state is the probability change game state.

In this embodiment, only a part of the display mode is different between the case where the time saving game state is set in the state where the reserved ball which is the big hit is stored and the case where the probability variation game state is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same characters (for example, only during super time) may be displayed. In addition, in the case where the game state is notified by the background color without displaying the characters, the time-saving game state is set in the probabilistic game state and the state in which the reserved ball that becomes the big hit is stored. , It may be configured to display in an approximate color (for example, a red background color (probability changing game state), a pink background color (a time-saving game state in a state where a holding ball to be a big hit is stored)). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving game state is a probabilistic game state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 349 to 350, the promotion effect executed during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 349 (a) is an example of a display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big hit !! Start !!" are displayed until the specific winning opening 65a is opened, and the player is notified that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 349 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the over-winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-prize promotion production is a condition for ending one round by winning 10 balls in the specific winning opening 65a in one round, but based on the fact that 10 game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a. Based on the fact that the game ball further wins the specific winning opening 65a during the period until the opening / closing door 65b is changed to the closed state, the promotion effect of notifying the information regarding the jackpot type is executed.

In the over-prize promotion production, the characters "Put the ball in the attacker and get the key !!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the game ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a (corresponding to the attacker). There is a display suggesting that the symbol is displayed (given to the player). Furthermore, by displaying the characters "Treasure chest chance when 11 keys are accumulated !!", the promotion effect (over prize promotion effect) indicated by "Treasure box chance !!" is executed when 11 keys are accumulated. Is notified to the player. Since one key is displayed for each winning in the specific winning opening 65a, one over-winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, when an over-winning occurs, "Treasure chest chance !!" will be executed. Here, in "Treasure chest chance !!", when the treasure chest is vacant and the treasure is displayed inside, the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned jackpot holding ball is stored. It is notified that it is a jackpot A (promoted) in the state of being. If the treasure is not displayed in the treasure box, the type of jackpot game being executed is not notified. If the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored and the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot A, the effect of notifying the promotion is not executed. However, based on the fact that the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored during the jackpot game, the display mode (the effect that the treasure is displayed in the treasure box) that notifies the promotion is displayed. You may.

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the promotion effect during the round, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350 (a) shows that when the promotion effect is selected during the round, when the specific round (fifth round in this control example) is reached, the “promotion chance !!” button is pressed and a school of fish appears during the round game. By displaying the comment "!!", the promotion effect during the round is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (notified) that the information regarding the jackpot game type is notified. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 350 (b), the jackpot in a state where the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-mentioned jackpot holding ball is stored. If it is A, the display mode in which the school of fish swims from the right direction to the left direction of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that the high probability game state of "probability change GET !!" is set after the big hit game. Will be done. In addition, in the case of the jackpot A in the state where the above-mentioned reserved ball to be the jackpot is stored, the character "probability change GET !!" is displayed as a notification as if the player is set in the probability change game state. Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects, will be described. FIG. 350 (a) is executed after the end of the jackpot game (the 16th round of jackpot rounds is completed (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have passed))). This is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of a big hit game.

On the other hand, FIG. 351 (b) is an example of a display mode in the ending promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, the jackpot game ends (the 16th round of jackpots ends (the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a in the 16th round (10-ball winning or 30 seconds have passed))). Later, during the period when the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY !! Super chance time !!" are displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed from the left to the right. A special display mode in which a school of fish (a school of fish) swims (a production mode different from the normal time) is displayed, and a time-saving game state is stored in a probabilistic game state after a big hit game or a reserved ball that becomes a big hit described above. A display mode suggesting that is set is displayed.

<About the electrical configuration in the 6th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 352 to 353.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (a). The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that the promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352 (b). FIG. 352 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of the promotion lottery table 222df. The promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to notify that the player has been promoted as an over-winning promotion effect based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired based on the occurrence of over-winning to the specific winning opening 65a during the round. It is a lottery table for. Specifically, when the type of jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2, or when the pseudo-probability change flag 223 dm indicating that the player is suggested to execute jackpot A as if jackpot B2 was executed is on. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", the promotion effect indicating that the user has been promoted (in this control example, the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) is executed.

Next, the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, the hit changing flag 223 dh, the stop symbol replacement flag 223 dh, the big prize counter 223 di, the promoted flag 223 dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223 dc, and the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm are set with respect to the first control example. It differs in that it has been added. A detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first control example will be omitted.

The hit fluctuation flag 223 dg is a flag for determining that the change of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is executed in a state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored. If the hit changing flag 223dg is on, and the variable display of the special symbol can be replaced at the timing when the reserved ball that becomes a big hit by the winning command is newly stored, the odd-numbered symbols are doublet. The process of switching to a symbol is executed. As a result, even if the special symbol is changed to the jackpot A, the player can be made to think that it is the jackpot B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins the replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is already stored when starting the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop symbol to an odd numbered doublet symbol. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is on, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, it is switched to an odd number of doublets and set.

The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big hit game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that the promoted effect (the effect of displaying the treasure from the treasure box) has been executed in the over-winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress a problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promoted effect is executed.

The promotion effect type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which when the jackpot game is executed, the type of the promotion effect to be executed during the jackpot game is determined, and the determined type data of the promotion effect is stored.

The pseudo-probability change flag 223 dm stops the stop symbol of the special symbol with an odd number of doublets in a state where the reserved ball to be the jackpot is already stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A is started. It is a flag indicating that the lottery has been lost in the replacement lottery that is controlled to be displayed. A promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or an effect (see FIG. 347 (a)) is executed as if a probability variation game state is set for the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game.

<Control processing by the main control device in the sixth control example>
With reference to FIG. 354, the control process by the main control device in the sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the jackpot control process (Z1004: FIG. 256) is changed to the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 354. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z1110, if it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not there is a ball in the big winning opening (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of Z1120 that there is no ball entering (Z1120: No), this processing is terminated as it is. By this ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a during the round, and can also determine the over winning.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 366. In the sixth control example, the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259) is the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356), and the variation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260) is the variation pattern reception for the first control example. Process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 266), winning command receiving processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358), variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) : Fig. 365), the point that the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107: Fig. 272) was changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 4 (Z2107: Fig. 366), and the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: Fig. 357). Stop symbol change processing (Z2460: Fig. 359), jackpot related command reception processing (Z2280: Fig. 359), opening processing (Z2282: Fig. 360), big prize winning ball processing (Z2284: Fig. 362), round processing (Z2286: Fig. 363), the difference is that the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example adds the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 to the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example, and changes the processes of Z2240 and Z2270. Is different.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2661), and this process is terminated.

A variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), which is one of the command determination processes 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example is different in that the processes of Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added to the variation pattern reception process in the first control example. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2226, it is determined whether there is a change in the gaming state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be attached to the variation pattern command and issued from the main control device 110. As the game state, a low-probability electric support-less game state (normal game state), a probabilistic game state (with electric support), and a short-time game state (low-probability electric support game state) are set. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, the display state command is set (Z2431), and the processing of Z2227 is executed. .. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the processing of Z2431 described above is not executed, and the processing proceeds to Z2227 as it is.

With reference to FIG. 357, the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), which is one process in the variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that the jackpot A does not fluctuate (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the jackpot A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). When it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and the replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the processing of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454). When it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery has been won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2452, when it is determined that there is no other hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the hit changing flag 223 deg is set to ON (Z2457), and this processing is terminated. ..

In this way, if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is stored at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A, a lottery (discrimination) for replacing the stop symbol is executed, and if it is replaced, the lottery (determination) is executed. If it is determined), the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that the symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the player loses the lottery in the replacement lottery, the game is stopped and displayed with an even number of doublets to start the jackpot game, and the promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, or is the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game? Special notification is given.

The winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 358. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example differs from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that a stop symbol changing process (Z2460) is added. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 359, a stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be described. To do. FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether or not the hit-changing flag 223 deg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223 deg is not on (that is, off) (Z2461: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit-changing flag 223 deg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a big hit (Z2642: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a big hit (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the processing of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that the period is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2464, if it is determined that the period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the processing of Z2465 is not executed and the main processing is terminated as it is.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the jackpot A starts to fluctuate, even if the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is not stored, the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot is newly added during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). If the special symbol is stored in the high-speed fluctuation period, the stop symbol is replaced (replacement to odd-numbered doublet). In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without any discomfort.

Even when the high-speed fluctuation period has expired, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

With reference to FIG. 360, a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. ) Will be explained. FIG. 360 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), it is first determined whether or not the opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), the opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process is terminated. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG. 360.

Here, with reference to FIG. 361, the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 6) is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. 361) will be described. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, the opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, a display opening command corresponding to the opening effect set in the Z2293 process is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to the Z2295 process.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). When it is determined that there is a big hit (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set during the big hit (Z2297), the display state command is set (Z2300), and this process is terminated. When it is determined that Z2295 is off in the processing of Z2295 (Z2295: No), the processing of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of Z2297. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no big hit in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to off (Z2298), and the game state is set to the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm. It is set during the jackpot game in the off state (Z2299), the above-mentioned Z2300 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

Return to FIG. 360 and continue the description. In the processing of Z2281, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the entry command has been received (Z2283). If it is determined that the ball entry command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the large winning ball entry process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 362, a big prize winning ball processing (Z2280: FIG. 360), which is one of the big hit related command receiving processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. Z2284) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize winning ball processing (Z2284).

In the big prize winning process (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, the value of the big prize counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 is added by 1 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the promotion production type is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over-winning (Z2312: No), a large winning-win command for display indicating the value of the large-winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the large winning counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the grand prize counter 223di is less than 10 (Z2314: No), a display grand prize command indicating the value of the grand prize counter 223di corresponding to the over-prize effect is set (Z2315). This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the big prize counter 223di is larger than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the promotion lottery table 222df based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm or the big hit type. A more promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect has been won (Z2317). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), a display large prize command indicating the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect has been won is set (Z2318), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large prize command for display indicating a deviation between the value of the large prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this process is performed. finish.

Return to FIG. 360 and continue the description. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that the ball entry command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), the round process (Z2286) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 363, the round process (Z2286), which is one process in the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round process (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion production type is over winning (Z2331). If it is determined that the promotion effect type is not an over prize (Z2331: No), it is determined whether the promotion effect type is the ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion production type is not the ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a display round command corresponding to the jackpot type or the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set (Z2334), and the SW effective time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. A value corresponding to (Z2335) is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or when it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332). : Yes), or if it is determined that the number of rounds is not 12R in the processing of Z2333 (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this processing is terminated. ..

Return to FIG. 360 and continue the description. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (Z2287). When the ending command is received (Z2288: Yes), the ending process (Z2288) is executed to end this process. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. 364. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), the processing corresponding to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 364, the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), which is one of the jackpot-related command reception processes (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not the ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to off (Z2372: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot type is jackpot B2 (Z2373). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), a display ending command indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the processing of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether or not the pseudo probability variation flag 223 dm is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability change flag 223 dm is set to off (Z2374: No), the display ending command corresponding to the current jackpot type is set (Z2376). If it is determined in the Z2372 process that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the Z2376 process described above is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2374, when it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the processing of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or the processing of Z2376, the game state is set at the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the display state command is set (Z2378), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined whether or not the content promoted by the over-winning promotion effect is notified during the jackpot game, and if it is not executed, the ending promotion effect or the promotion effect during the round is executed. The process of switching to is executed.

As a result, even if the over-winning promotion effect is determined, the promotion effect can be executed by switching to a different promotion effect even when the frequency of entering the specific winning opening 65a is low.

The variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 365. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variation display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed for the variation display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example, and the processes of Z251 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), and the display stop type command is set (Z2513). This process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), the stop type in which the odd jackpot symbol is set as the stop symbol is set (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to off (Z2515), the above-described Z2513 process is executed, and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 366, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processes of Z2808 to Z2810 for the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831, Z2840 are added in that they are different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z2807, when it is determined that the frame button is pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). If it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, another SW process is executed (Z2840) to end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z2830 process that the effect is not being set (Z2830: No), the above-mentioned Z2803 to 2804 processes are executed, the sensor input process (Z2813), and other SW processes (Z2840). Is executed to end this process.

<Control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 to 370. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that the processes of Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430). If it is determined that there is a display symbol replacement command (Z3430: Yes), the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (a). FIG. 368 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd-numbered jackpot symbol is replaced with the stop type table (Z3441). Next, the stop symbol is set by comparing the stop type table with the stop symbol counter (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to on (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 367. In the processing of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display state command (Z3432). If it is determined that there is a display status command (Z3432: Yes), the game status setting process (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 368 (b). FIG. 368 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the gaming state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process is terminated.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 367. If it is determined that there is no display status command in the processing of Z3432 (Z3432: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). If it is determined that there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434: Yes), the jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, the jackpot-related display process (Z3435) will be described with reference to FIG. 369. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not the display opening command has been received (Z3461). When it is determined that the display opening command has been received (Z3461: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463). If it is determined that the display grand prize command has been received (Z3463: Yes), the grand prize process (Z3464) is executed, and this process is terminated. The details of the grand prize processing (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG. 369.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3463, if it is determined that the display grand prize command has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). When it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (Z3465: Yes), the display data table of the round display corresponding to the number of rounds of the command is set, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3465, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table of the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3467, if it is determined that the display promotion round command has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether the display ending command has been received (Z3469). When it is determined that the display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z3471), and this process is terminated.

The big prize processing (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described with reference to FIG. 370. FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large prize processing (Z3464).

In the big prize processing (Z3464), first, in the processing of Z3463 of the big hit related display processing (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether or not the received big prize command for display has won the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), the number of winnings indicated by the received command and the display data table corresponding to the winning effect are set (Z3481), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). If it is determined that the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), the number of winnings indicated by the command and the display data table of the over-winning corresponding to the out-of-production effect are set (Z3483), and this process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over-winning effect (Z3484). If it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: Yes), the over-winning display data table corresponding to the number of winnings indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over-winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the number of winning commands indicated by the number of received commands is greater than 10. Z3486: No). If it is determined that the number of winnings is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over-winning effect is set (Z3487), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3486, when it is determined that the number of winnings indicated by the number of received commands is less than 10 (Z3486), this processing is terminated as it is.

<7th control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 371 to 379. In the first control example, the winning opening that triggers the lottery (variation) based on the first special symbol and the lottery based on the second special symbol whose lottery result is more likely to be more favorable to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning slot that triggers (variation) and the sorting device 700 that alternately wins balls, the electric accessory 640a is used when the second special symbol is won as a result of the winning / failing judgment of the normal symbol. It was opened for a long period of time (2 seconds) so that the ball could easily win a prize in the second winning opening 640. Then, when a normal symbol is won for a long time, the player is made to win a ball in the second winning opening 640 by displaying the effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It was configured to enthusiastically play the game (see FIG. 207).

Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be controlled so that the ball is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, and in the normal state. When the change of the second special symbol is started, a special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is executed to provide a special feeling to the player. Further, in the second control example, the special effect is not executed for a predetermined period (5 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends even when the normal state is set as the game state. Was configured in. As a result, it is executed when a predetermined number (up to 4) of reserved balls of the second special symbol is secured (with the reserved second special symbol held during the time saving state) and the time saving state is completed. It is configured so that the above-mentioned special effect is not executed in the second special symbol variation. As a result, the special feeling of the special effect can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the 7th control example, when the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is won for a long time, the game is played by using the fluctuation time (dynamic display period) of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result. It differs from the first control example in that it is configured to execute an effect (long-time open effect) that suggests that the person has won a lottery for a long time by drawing a normal symbol.

Further, as a result of the lottery of ordinary symbols, it is different from the first control example in that the effect mode of the long-time open effect is different depending on the timing of winning for a long time. The details of the same points as those of the above-mentioned control examples will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 371. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down into the left region (left region) of the variable display device unit 80 with respect to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or the surface of the game board 13) as a guide display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position where the ball is to be launched when the game (left-handed game) is performed. When the member to be used is a highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80 is performed, "turtle" is used as a guide display mode ZR2 as a guideline for the position where the ball is launched. A character imitating the above is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is a highly transparent acrylic resin). Is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball is aimed at to execute the right-handed game or the left-handed game. Further, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the player can be directed to the game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) for guiding (right-handed game or left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually grasp.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region (electric accessory) in which the second winning opening 640 can be won when a left-handed game is performed with respect to the first control example described above. When the 640a is in the open operation, the regulation nail ZK1 is planted so that the ratio of the ball flowing down the second winning opening 640) is low. On the other hand, when the right-handed game is performed, the nails are planted so that the ratio of the balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low. With this configuration, aiming at the sorting device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed (lottery), and the second winning opening 640, the first It is possible to provide the player with a right-handed game (second game) in which only the special symbol is changed (lottery).

As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is difficult to open, so that the player is inevitable. When the left-handed game is performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so that the player inevitably plays the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even when the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is further performed. Even so, since it is not possible to acquire the hold of the special symbol (the right to draw (change) the special symbol), it is possible to perform a left-handed game and also perform a game of acquiring the hold ball of the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (a), in the seventh control example, an effect mode displayed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol when the normal symbol is won for a long time will be described. FIG. 372 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol fluctuation that was won per long time. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372 (a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "Open soon" as an effect (long open effect) suggesting that the normal symbol has been won for a long time. Characters are displayed, and the opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and the guidance display mode Za1 imitating the "turtle" indicating the game direction instructing the player are displayed. As a result, since the electric accessory 640a is opened to the player, it is possible to easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be performed.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is configured to be displayed in the reduced display area Za3. However, instead of this configuration, for example, currently being executed. Based on the discriminating means for discriminating whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and the discriminating result of the discriminating means, the long opening effect and the third symbol A priority display discriminating means for discriminating which of the variable effects is prioritized for display, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on the discriminating result of the priority display discriminating means. It may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to give priority to the effect display for showing the game result that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

In the above example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (priority effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-priority effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to that, for example, a plurality of areas of the reduced display area may be prepared in different areas, and the non-priority effect is determined according to the game result indicated by the effect determined to be the non-priority effect. The size of the area for displaying the effect may be changed. Further, the effect display on the side determined to be the non-priority effect may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the above-mentioned example, the display area of each effect (variable effect, long open effect) is changed based on the lottery result of the changing special symbol and the lottery result of the changing ordinary symbol. In addition to that, for example, a holding ball number determining means for determining whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the determination result of the holding ball number determining means. The display area of the long open effect may be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372 (b), an effect mode during a long-time hit game (during long opening) of a normal symbol will be described. FIG. 372 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode (effect during long opening) of the third symbol display device 81 during a long time hit. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372 (b), the character "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently in progress is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening target imitates the electric accessory 640a during the opening operation. Aspect Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 372 (a), the guidance display mode Za1 imitating the “turtle” indicating the game direction instructed to the player is displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is restricted will be described. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long period of time when the long opening effect is regulated. The same elements as those in the first control example described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above is executed with reference to FIG. 372 (a), and the normal state (the second). 2 In a state where it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning opening 640 (when the ball is won for a long time of a normal symbol), a state advantageous to the player (first) It is configured to reliably notify the player of the fluctuation (lottery) of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery that is more favorable to the player than the special symbol.

In this configuration, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4), the normal symbol Even if you win for a long time, the above-mentioned long opening effect will be executed. In this way, in the state where the reserved ball of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time and a plurality of balls are won in the second entrance 640, a new reserved ball is acquired. There was a problem that it was not possible to provide the player with a special feeling of long open production.

Therefore, in the 7th control example, the predetermined period after the end of the time saving state (the period until the special symbol is changed 5 times) is described above even if the normal symbol is won for a long time. It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect under the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the long open effect has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the state where the long opening effect is regulated, the long opening effect shown in FIG. 372 (a) is not executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is generated in the central portion of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. Then, as the game direction instructed to the player, the guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed. In this way, even if a normal symbol is won for a long time in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, the timing is a predetermined period (the special symbol changes 5 times after the time saving state ends). If it is within the period until it is executed), by preventing the long opening effect from being executed, it is possible to surely suppress the provision of a meaningless long opening effect to the player. it can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the fluctuation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the change of the special symbol 5 times is set, but in addition to that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be the period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. In addition, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured as.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation during execution is a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the above contains the winning information for winning the big hit, the long opening effect may be regulated.

<About the electrical configuration in the 7th control example>
Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 374. The seventh control example differs from the second control example in that the long open effect flag 223e1 is added. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the 7th control example are the same, various control processes related to the ejection of the pachinko machine 10 in the 7th control example are described in the first control example described above. Is the same as. On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the voice lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as those of the second control example except for the above points. Therefore, for various control processes related to ball ejection, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and for various control processes related to the production, the same parts as those in the second control example are the same. The description thereof will be omitted with reference to.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj is described above in the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol is displayed. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when it is set (when a special symbol is changed). In the seventh control example, the long open effect is not executed until the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj becomes 0.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long release effect flag 223e1 is when a long-time per-open command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received and when it is determined that the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904: No in FIG. 377). , Is set to on (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to off when a long-time hit end command for a normal symbol is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<Control processing by the main control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the main control device in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to the normal symbol variation processing 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). Since the other processes are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 375. The ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example differs from the ordinary symbol variation processing (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. .. Since the other processing is the same as that of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 375, when the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as in the first control example are executed, and it is determined that the normal symbol is not changing in the Z402 process. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). As described above in the first control example, the long-time open flag 203i is set when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (Z408: FIG. 251) that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: Yes). , A flag set to on (Z428).

When it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is set to on in the processing of Z451 (Z451: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set to off (Z403), and the long-time open end command is set. (Z452), the process proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, in the processing of Z451, when it is determined that the long-time open flag 203i is not on (off) (Z451: No), the processing of Z403 and Z452 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to Z404 processing. Then, the same processes of Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated.

That is, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to be on from the timing when the fluctuation of the winning normal symbol is started to the end of the long-time hit.

In the processing of Z402, when it is determined that the current symbol is currently changing (Z402: Yes), the processing of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then the long-time hit. Set the middle command (Z453) and end this process. The long-time hit command set in Z453 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main control device 110. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the long-time hit command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current time is long-time hit (long open), and transmits the display command to the display control device 114. To do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the long opening is in progress on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (b)).

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the 7th control example>
The control process by the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377. In the seventh control example, the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) is changed to the command determination process 4 (Z2181: FIG. 376) and the long open effect process (Z2272) is different from the second control example. It differs in that it is added. Since the other processes are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 4 (Z2181) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 4 (Z2181). The command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that the processes of Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above are executed. When it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether the related command has been received for a long time (Z2271), and it is determined that the command has been received. (Z2208: Yes) executes a long opening effect process described later (Z2272), and ends this process. In this long opening effect processing (Z2272), a process for setting the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol is won for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, when it is determined that the related command is not received for a long time (Z2271: No), it is referred to as Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above. The same processes of Z2273 to Z2277 are executed, and this process is terminated. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command (winning in the lottery of the normal symbol for a long time). When a command) is received, it is configured so that an effect for notifying the player to that effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

Next, the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272) will be described with reference to FIG. 377. FIG. 377 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long opening effect processing (Z2272). This long open effect process (Z2272) executes a process for setting the effect mode of the long open effect when a normal symbol is won for a long time, and is in the current gaming state (normal state, time saving state). Alternatively, the effect mode is set according to the operating state (during fluctuation, during the winning game) of the normal symbol (within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving state).

When the long release effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the long-time hit-related command received this time is the long-time hit open command (Z2901). This long-time hit release command is a command set when the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main control device 110 is won for a long-time hit of the normal symbol. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that the command is open per long time (Z2901: Yes), then the current gaming state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted game state is in the time reduction (the time reduction state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that the time reduction is in progress (Z2903: Yes), the target for executing the long open effect. Since it is not a period, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2903, when it is determined that the time is not shortened (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation count counter 223aj is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2904). Since the detailed explanation is given in the second control example described above, the explanation will be briefly described. However, the fluctuation number counter 223aj is a predetermined number (5) when the final fluctuation in which the time reduction state is set is stopped and displayed. ) Is set, and the value is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display setting process is executed. The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the fluctuation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (5 times). Is a counter that is referred to to determine.

In the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2904: No), that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed at least 5 times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that the state is set, the long open effect can be executed while the normal state is set as the game state, so a long display command is set (Z2906). , The long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the display long effect command, the display control device 114 displays a display mode indicating the long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372 (a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is larger than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in a state where the fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed five times after the time saving state ends. If it is determined that there is, since it is a period during which the long open effect cannot be executed while the normal state is set as the game state, a left-handed long effect command for display is set (Z2905), and this End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main process (see FIG. 258) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long open effect is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

In the processing of Z2901, if it is determined that the long-time hit-related command received this time is not the long-time hit open command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether the long-time hit medium command was received (Z2908). .. This long-time hit command is set after setting the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 375) of the main control device 110, and is set during the long-time hit game. This is a command that indicates that there is.

In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command has been received for a long time (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long release effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long release effect flag is set. If it is determined that 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a long display command is set (Z2910), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2909, if it is determined that the long open effect flag 223e1 is not set to on (set to off) (Z2909: No), the processing of Z2910 is skipped and the main processing is terminated. ..

Here, the processing of Z2909 will be described. In the 7th control example, as in the 1st control example described above, the winning lottery is performed at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when the normal symbol fluctuation start processing is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning. It is configured to determine the operation mode (whether or not it is long open), and is configured to set the open command per long time at that timing. Then, after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest) elapses after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set, and then electric. It is configured to start the operation control of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the long-time hit open command and the long-time hit medium command, so that the time-saving state is set and the fluctuation count counter. When the value of 223aj is larger than 0, the long-time hit open command is set, and then there is a possibility that the long-time hit medium command is received at the timing when the value of the fluctuation count counter 223aj is 0.

In the seventh control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in such a state, the processing when the long opening command is received is long. When the release effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, the long release command for display is not set even if the command is received for a long time. With this configuration, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 373) suddenly becomes the effect of the display mode based on the long open command for display (FIG. 372 (b)). It is possible to prevent the player from being discomforted by switching to (see).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 377. In the processing of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during long-time hit has not been received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether or not the long-time hit end command has been received (Z2911), and the long-time hit end command is determined. (Z2911: Yes), the long release effect flag 223e1 is set to off (Z1912), the long release end command for display is set (Z1913), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of Z2208, when it is determined that the winning command of the special symbol has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether the command related to the jackpot has been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No). Z2279). If it is determined that the jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. On the other hand, in the process of Z2279, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received (Z2279: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (Z2661), and this process is terminated.

<Control processing by the display control device in the 7th control example>
Next, the control process by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to the command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination process 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described with reference to FIG. 378. FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example is different from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that the processes of Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no display notice display command (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. When it is determined that there is no display long release related command in the processing of Z3441 (Z3441: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), the long open related process (Z3442) is executed.

In the long opening related processing (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long opening effect corresponding to the received display long opening effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long open effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The timekeeping counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed) is set as the game state, the normal symbol is hit for a long time. If you win, it is configured to perform a long open effect during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a can be opened to the player for a long time, and the game in which the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 can be surely performed.

Further, in the seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol have been acquired in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction. If it is inside, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-mentioned long open effect. As a result, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege (the privilege of easily securing the reserved ball of the second special symbol) given to the player when the long opening effect is executed.

In this control example, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), the period (regulation period) for restricting the long opening effect is set. , The period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the change of the special symbol 5 times is set, but in addition to that, for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol continues for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state. It may be the period until the time required to execute 5 times elapses. In addition, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less) during the above-mentioned regulation period, the above-mentioned regulation period is cleared and the long opening effect is executed. It may be configured as.

Further, in this control example, the long opening effect is regulated within a predetermined period after the end of the time reduction, but the long opening effect may be regulated by other conditions, for example. When the special symbol fluctuation during execution is a big hit, when the continuous effect is set to straddle multiple special symbol fluctuations, or when the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) When it is determined that the reserved ball of the above contains the winning information for winning the big hit, the long opening effect may be regulated.

Specifically, for example, in the Z2903 process of the long open effect process (see FIG. 377), after determining Z2903: No, a process of determining whether the continuous effect in-progress flag 223ac is set to ON is provided to continuously provide the process. When it is determined that the flag 223ac during the effect is set to ON, it is preferable to configure the process so that the present process is terminated as it is so as not to execute the long open effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without breaking the priority with other effects to be executed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is regulated or the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long opening effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is made to perform a right-handed game in order to win a ball, and when the long opening effect is regulated, the sorting device 700. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so that the left-handed game is performed in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the first winning opening 64 and the right second winning opening 640 are aimed at by the left-handed game, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. Can play a game aimed at the second winning opening 640 by a right-handed game.

In this seventh control example, the game board 13 is set so that the ease of flowing the ball to the distribution device 700 and the second winning opening 640 differs depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, by firing a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning opening 640, and a strong left-handed game is performed. Therefore, the game board 13 may be configured so that the ball can easily reach the distribution device 700. As a result, the game result can be greatly different by slightly changing the operation of the launching device, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, although the seventh control example describes the configuration based on the control content of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above, the control of the main control device 110 used in the first control example described above is described. Not limited to the content, it may be used for the control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, a type of gaming machine that executes a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol with priority over the first special symbol. good.

At the end of the game state with electric support (low probability electric support game state (time saving game state) or high probability electric support (probability variation game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls On condition that it is memorized for the second special symbol, the effect of hitting the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed), or the effect of urging the game ball to enter the first entry port 64. It may be configured to switch to and execute. With this configuration, even when the game is switched to the normal game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, the effect of the normal symbol for a long time can be executed, and the player can be given the first effect. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of robbing the chance of winning a special symbol.

Further, in this control example, when the game is switched to the normal gaming state, the normal symbol is not produced for a long time or is different from the normal time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is completed a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). Is configured to switch to a different effect, but not limited to that, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) regardless of the game state, a long time of the normal symbol It may be configured not to produce a hit effect or to switch to an effect different from the normal effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play an advantageous game according to the state of the game. Further, as a condition for not producing the effect of the normal symbol for a long time or switching to the effect different from the normal one, when a specific fluctuation pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (for example). , The fluctuation pattern of the jackpot or the fluctuation pattern of the super reach) may be set. Further, the time information from the RTC may be acquired and set as a condition for switching if the store is about to close at a specific time (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<8th control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 411. In the eighth control example, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (see FIG. 239) and the operation of the frame button 22 are based on the first control example described above. The control of the voice lamp control device 113 that is executed when the background mode is changed, and the effect content that is executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (upper limit of 8). The difference is that a detailed explanation has been added about the control content of the voice lamp control device 113 regarding the frame button 22 and the function of adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first control example described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110 starts up (see FIG. 254), the voice lamp control device 113 starts up (see FIG. 257), and so on. Is executed and each start-up process is being executed (power-on period), as described above with reference to FIG. 239, a display screen dedicated to the third symbol display device 81 (power-on screen) is displayed. , The notification (notification during the power-on period) for indicating that the power is currently being turned on is configured to be executed by using the voice output device 226.

In the first control example configured in this way, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (turned off) during the variable display of the special symbol and then turned on (turned on), the main control device 110 Based on the information stored (backed up) in the RAM 202, the special symbol variation is restarted from the state immediately before the power is turned off, but the output is output from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 226. Since the notification sound is configured to emphasize to the player that it is the power-on period, it is difficult for the player to notice that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and it is executed before the power is turned off. There was a problem that it made me think that the special symbol fluctuation that had been used was erased.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the special symbol change is being executed when the power is turned off, that is, the special symbol change is restarted after the power is turned on. Is configured to output BGM indicating that the special symbol is fluctuating during the power-on period. With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player know that the special symbol change that had been executed before the power was turned off has been restarted. Further, rather than creating the data of the display image (variable image of the third symbol) corresponding to the special symbol variation to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the audio data output from the audio output device 226 is created. Since the amount of data processed is smaller, it is possible to notify that the special symbol is fluctuating immediately after the power is turned on. The details of the audio output control at the time of turning on the power will be described later with reference to FIG. 382.

Further, in the eighth control example, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22 even while the special symbol is changing. In addition, the timing for changing the background mode is changed according to the fluctuation speed of the special symbol at the time when the frame button 22 is operated to change the background mode. Specifically, if the frame button 22 is operated during high-speed fluctuation in which the fluctuation speed of the special symbol is fast, the background mode is immediately changed, and the frame button 22 is pressed during low-speed fluctuation in which the fluctuation speed of the special symbol is slower than the high-speed fluctuation. When operated, the background mode is configured to be changed after the change of the special symbol is completed (after the special symbol stop display or when the next special symbol change starts).

Generally, the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed by the pachinko machine 10 is configured to fluctuate at high speed for a predetermined period (first half period) after the start of fluctuation and then fluctuate at low speed (second half period). Is configured to perform an effect based on the lottery result of a special symbol using a period in which is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed. Therefore, by configuring as in the eighth control example, the background mode is changed while the dedicated effect corresponding to the set background mode (effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol) is being executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation. The detailed control contents for changing the background mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 384.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, eight which is the upper limit number), the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored in the hold is stored. It is configured to execute the production for a specific period using the fluctuation time. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes a specific number.

As described above in the case where the period effect is configured to be executed within a predetermined range (within the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the specific number of winning information stored on hold) as in the eighth control example. As in the first control example, in order to notify the player of the number of reserved balls (upper limit number: 8) of the current special symbol, the first reservation is made in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8 is formed from the symbol pedestal m1 and the reserved symbols are displayed in order from the 1st reserved symbol pedestal m1 according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (see FIG. 210 (a)). If this happens, the reserved symbols corresponding to the newly acquired winning information during the period production will be displayed in the small area Ds2, so it is difficult for the player to grasp which reserved symbols are the target of the period production. Therefore, there was a problem that the player was provided with an incomprehensible effect.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the period effect is not executed, the reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 as in the first control example described above, and the period When the effect is executed, the number of reserved balls targeted for the period effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 as the effect hold symbol. With this configuration, even if new prize information is acquired during the period production, the production reservation symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 do not increase, so that the player is given a reservation symbol to be the target of the period production. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. The detailed contents of the period effect in the eighth control example will be described later with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when the player operates (presses) the frame button 22, the operated (pressed) frame button 22 vibrates and the amount of vibration is changed. It is configured so that By configuring the frame button 22 to vibrate in this way, when the player presses the frame button 22, the vibration can be transmitted to the player who presses the frame button 22, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. Further, since it is configured to execute an effect for suggesting the vibration amount (vibration level) of the vibration executed when the frame button 22 is pressed, the game is performed before the frame button 22 is operated (pressed). It is configured so that the vibration level of the frame button 22 can be suggested to the person. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be operated with the player predicting the vibration level. Further, since the player can predict that the vibration level has changed, the frame button 22 can be enthusiastically operated a plurality of times.

<About the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 380, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 380 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is held at a lower position of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. The difference is that the LED 900 is provided, the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are provided in the variable display device unit 80, and the touch sensor 2900 is provided at a position facing the display screen of the third symbol display device. , Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding LED 900 is used to indicate the number of holding balls of a special symbol, and is composed of eight LEDs. These eight LEDs are configured to light up in order from the left, and a hold ball number command indicating that the number of hold balls of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 increases, or a decrease. Based on the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the indicated number of reserved balls command, the lighting is controlled according to the number of special symbol reserved balls after the increase and decrease.

By providing an area for notifying the number of reserved balls of the special symbol outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this way, the reserved symbol display displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 381). (Refer to (b)) can be reliably notified of the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol even if it is temporarily erased or used for another purpose. Although detailed description will be omitted, the holding LED 900 uses a full-color LED, and is configured to be capable of exhibiting light emission modes of at least three colors, and is a holding ball of FIG. The lighting is controlled so that the holding ball of the special figure 2 can be identified. As a result, even when a plurality of special symbol types are provided, the player can be made to recognize the number of reserved balls corresponding to each symbol type.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed based on the result of pre-determination (look-ahead) executed for the winning information stored on hold, when the color of the hold symbol is changed, an LED is displayed at the corresponding position of the hold LED 900. Is controlled so that it emits light in a color different from the normal time. Further, the display mode (light emitting mode) of the hold LED 900 is configured to be less noticeable than the hold symbol display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In the eighth control example, a display area (lighting area) indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is provided at a position below the third symbol display device 81, which is outside the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting area may be provided anywhere as long as it is visible to the player, and may be provided, for example, in the lower right area of the game board 13. Further, in the eighth control example, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol can be stored up to eight, the holding LED 900 has the same eight LEDs as the upper limit of the holding storage. Is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol may be notified by four LEDs. Further, in the eighth control example, the holding LED 900 is controlled to always display the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, but in addition to this, for example, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. When the displayed reserved symbol is erased or used for another effect, that is, the player cannot easily grasp the number of reserved balls of the special symbol only by the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When becomes, the lighting control for the holding LED 900 may be executed.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are light emitting means composed of four LEDs, and are used as a notification means for notifying the player of the currently set background mode. In this control example, the background mode for executing the variation effect (variation effect of the third symbol) for showing the result of the special drawing lottery is configured to be set from a plurality of modes. Specifically, the "sea mode" in which a display mode imitating the sea (for example, a display mode imitating coral) is displayed as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The player can select one of the "mountain mode" in which a display mode imitating a mountain (for example, a display mode imitating a tree) is displayed as the background of the screen.

The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are configured to be capable of emitting light in a light emitting mode capable of notifying the player of the currently set background mode. As a result, for example, even if the variation effect of the third symbol using the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed and the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is grasped. Even if the current background mode cannot be grasped, the player can easily grasp the current background mode based on the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d.

Although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in the first half stage of the special figure fluctuation (the third symbol is changing at high speed), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a light emitting mode for notifying the current background mode. , In the latter half stage of the special figure change (the period from the end of the high-speed change of the third symbol to the stop display), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are not in the current background mode, but in a suggestion mode suggesting the lottery result. It is configured to emit light. Then, even in the latter half of the special figure variation, when the player executes a specific operation on the operation means (frame button 22), the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d emit light in a notification mode for notifying the current background mode. It is configured to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the light emission of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d in accordance with the information desired by the player (current background mode, special drawing lottery result), which is useful information for the player. Can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. The mode lamps 1910a to 1910d are controlled to emit light based on the processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The touch sensor 2900 is a non-contact type detection means (operating means) having a predetermined detection range, and when it detects that the player's hand has entered the predetermined detection range for a predetermined period, the game is played. It is determined that the operation was performed by a person. Although the player cannot directly visually recognize the detection range of the touch sensor 2900, a frame line indicating the detection range of the touch sensor 2900 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 located on the back side of the touch sensor 2900. By displaying the display, the player can easily operate the touch sensor 2900 (easily allow his / her hand to enter the detection range of the touch sensor 2900).

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the touch sensor 2900 of this control example is configured to be able to determine the movement (direction) of the hand invading the detection range, for example, from right to left. By moving or moving from the bottom to the top, the effect display corresponding to the movement of the hand is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation operation of the player's operation means (touch sensor 2900), so that the player can play the game while being interested in it.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example. The display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth control example is variablely displayed with respect to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example described above in synchronization with the third symbol (special symbol). The scroll direction of the decorative symbol) has been changed from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction (from right to left), and the number of effective lines for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is one (see FIG. 209 (a)). ) To 5 (see FIG. 381 (a)) and the difference in the notification mode of the information related to the game. In addition, some elements are the same as (similar to) the first control example, but have different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 381 (a)). The third symbol (decorative symbol that fluctuates according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the characters corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variation display is performed, and the variation display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with periodicity to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence Z3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the symbols are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed in the oblique direction. If each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols), The jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 381 (a), in this control example, since each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the third symbol display device. Until all of the symbol rows V1 to V3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol string (in this control example, the middle symbol string V2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be changed. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating.

Further, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (the degree to which it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (b). As shown in FIG. 381 (b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the front view. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special diagram 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle mark and a cross mark, and the fourth symbol is shown in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. Is displayed in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 381 (b)) to show the situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (Fig. (Refer to the small display area Dm2 of 381 (b)), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth symbol and a plurality of colors. By using the display mode indicating that the special symbol is changed depending on the display mode in which the numbers and colors are changed, and the display mode indicating the specific symbol or color is stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured to indicate.

Further, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 381 (b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the area Dm on the upper left side and the upper right side is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined by the effect of the variation effect executed in the central part of the main display area Dm. It may be different depending on the mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from limiting the area in which the variable effect is executed and reducing the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure to execute.

Since the display contents displayed in the sub-display area Ds are substantially the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. However, in the first control example, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), the sub-display area Ds Is divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction, but in the eighth control example, the display area of the sub-display area Ds is only the small area Ds1, and the executing area Ds1a is contained in the small area Ds1. And the waiting area Ds1b are formed. Since the display content of the executing area Ds1a is the same as the small area Ds1 of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the display contents of the standby area Ds1b will be described. In this control example, eight pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, and in the normal state, a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed as in the first control example described above. are doing. On the other hand, in the eighth control example, when the reserved symbols are displayed on the pedestal m8, that is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit value (8), the eight reserved symbols stored in hold are stored. Is configured to execute a dedicated effect (period effect) using the above (see FIG. 386). While this period effect is being executed, the waiting area Ds1b is not a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved balls of a special symbol, but a period during which the period effect is executed (a reserved symbol that is the target of the period effect). It is configured so that a reserved symbol for effect indicating only is displayed.

With this configuration, even if a new holding ball is acquired during the period production, the new holding symbol is not displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the player can be informed of how long the period production will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Although not shown in FIG. 381, a display mode showing the following display contents is also displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, it is configured to display a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area, a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a guide for guiding the player to perform a left-handed game. The display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. And, it is displayed during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left-handed" is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is completed. Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Is configured to be displayed.

<About the production contents in the 8th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 382 to 388, characteristic production contents among the various effects executed in the eighth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 382 and 383, the contents of the effect when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 382 is a timing chart showing the flow of the sound effect when the power is turned off (power is cut off) while the special symbol is fluctuating in the fluctuation pattern A and then the power is turned on.

In this control example, when a power failure occurs during a special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) and then the power is turned on, while the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 are being started up. (During the return processing period), a display mode indicating that the power is on is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 383 (a)). Then, when the special symbol change is executed during the return processing period, the voice output device 226 is configured to output the BGM during the special symbol change. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure change is being executed during the return processing period.

To explain in detail, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a storage area (backup area) for temporarily storing various setting information even if the power is cut off, and when the power is cut off, the storage area is cut off. It is configured to execute a power failure process for storing the previous game information (variation pattern for production, BGM information, background mode, remaining fluctuation time, etc.). Since the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has sufficient internal power (capacitor) to store various information in the above-mentioned storage area after the power supply from the outside is cut off. The game information is stored in the storage area only when a power failure occurs. Then, the BGM part (“B” in FIG. 382) that was output when the power failure occurred is stored, and the BGM part (“B”) that was output when the power failure occurred during the recovery processing period after the power was turned on. ) Is configured to output audio.

In the example shown in FIG. 382, the progress of the BGM that was output at the time of the power failure is memorized, and the flow of playing the BGM from the place where the power is cut off is shown, but the flow is not limited to this. It may be configured to play from the start position of the BGM part that was output at the time of disconnection. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the storage process in the storage area when a power failure occurs.

Further, in this control example, the return command indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 is completed (initial setting is completed) is the game information (selected variation pattern) related to the special figure variation executed before the power failure. , Residual fluctuation time, lottery result) are included and output to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, when the start-up process is completed (when a command indicating the completion of the initial setting is output), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed from the initial screen (see FIG. 383 (a)) to the normal screen. It is possible to shift the display mode to (FIG. 383 (b)). As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure change that had been executed before the power failure has resumed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 383 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents immediately after the power is turned on, and FIG. 383 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents after the initial setting is completed. Since the content shown in FIG. 383 (a) is the same as the display content shown in FIG. 239 (b) of the control example described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted, but in the eighth control example, the description thereof will be omitted. If the special figure fluctuation is executed while the screen during the initial setting is displayed, the BGM corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is output from the continuation of the power failure (see FIG. 382).

Then, when the initial setting is completed, as shown in FIG. 382 (b), a fluctuation pattern dedicated to return based on the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation during execution is executed. In this control example, the first determination for determining whether the remaining fluctuation time at the completion of the initial setting is less than 2 seconds, the second determination for determining whether the time is 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds, and 5 seconds or more. It is configured to execute the third determination for determining whether or not.

If it is determined that the time is less than 2 seconds by the first determination, the initial variation time is not set until the remaining variation time elapses (until the execution of the special figure variation is completed) without setting the variation pattern dedicated to the return. The setting screen (see FIG. 383 (a)) is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the short-time variable display, which is difficult for the player to identify, to be executed.

When the remaining fluctuation time is between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, the reach state (the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 stop at the same symbol on the effective line, and only the symbol row Z2 is displayed in a variable manner. The return-only reach effect is executed, in which the variable display is executed from the state). This return-only reach effect is an effect using fluctuation data of a fluctuation pattern in which the ratio of the largest hit is set to be the smallest among the normal reach, that is, the fluctuation pattern in the reach state among the normal fluctuation patterns.

Then, the fluctuation data for the time corresponding to the length of the remaining fluctuation time is reproduced. With this configuration, when the special figure fluctuation that is being executed when the power is turned on is a jackpot, it is possible to notify the jackpot winning with a fluctuation pattern that is normally difficult to encounter, thus providing added value to the player. be able to. Further, among the image data stored in advance, the image data can be effectively utilized by using the image data that is rarely actually used (the image data showing the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit in the normal reach).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 to 385, the details of the operation for changing the background mode during the change of the special figure will be described. FIG. 384 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of background change (background change) according to the background change operation timing during the change of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 384, in the eighth control example, in the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation speed is changed. Specifically, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol is configured to gradually decrease in the order of "high speed, medium speed, low speed". As a result, the player can be made to play the game while predicting the timing at which the third symbol stops. In the eighth control example, as in the first control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result is out of order. Since it is configured, the lottery result (length of fluctuation time) of the special symbol can be predicted based on the transition of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol.

In this control example, the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (background can be changed) by the player operating the frame button 22 during the variable display of the special symbol. The timing of changing the background is different depending on the timing at which the person operates the frame button 22.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 384, when the background change operation (pressing the frame button 22) is performed when the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) is high, the background is changed. The background change is executed immediately after the operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 384 (a), when the current background mode is "sea" and the fluctuation state of the special figure is high-speed fluctuation, if the background change operation is performed, the background is changed immediately after that. Is executed, and the background mode shifts to the "mountain mode" (see FIG. 385 (b)).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (b), when the background change operation is performed when the fluctuation state of the special map is not high-speed fluctuation (medium-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, stop), the fluctuation of the special map is concerned. The background change is not performed until the end of, and the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 385 (a), the "sea mode" indicating the current background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a provided in the information of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the mode is displayed. In the comment display area Dm2a provided to the right of the display area Dm1a, the characters "background change at next variation" are displayed to indicate that the background change operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the background change operation has been performed during the special figure change (that the pachinko machine 10 has officially accepted the background change operation), so that the background change is not executed immediately after the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the background change operation from being repeatedly executed.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the timing of performing the background change is different depending on the fluctuation state of the special figure (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol) for the background change operation during the change of the special figure. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, while suppressing the background change during the execution of the production (for example, reach production) in which the lottery result of this special symbol is likely to be a hit, this time. During the period when it is difficult to execute the effect that suggests the lottery result of the special symbol (high-speed fluctuation period), the background can be changed immediately, so that the player can experience various effects (background). be able to.

In the background change flow described with reference to FIG. 384, the next special figure change is started when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure. An example of executing the background change at the timing is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop display is performed in a stop display mode (combination of three third symbols) for the third symbol to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol. The background change may be executed at the timing (the timing when the effect suggesting the lottery result of the special figure is completed).

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed other than during the special figure change and the high-speed change of the special figure, the background is at least until after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. Although it is configured so that the change is not executed, it may be configured so as to prevent the effect suggesting the result of the special figure lottery from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the background change. It may be configured to delay the execution of the background change until a predetermined timing. Specifically, when the background change operation is executed when the fluctuation state of the special figure is medium speed fluctuation, it is preferable to configure the background change to be executed at the timing when the fluctuation state of the special figure is switched to low speed fluctuation. ..

In addition, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change and other than the high-speed change of the special figure, the timing at which the background change is executed is switched based on the result of the special figure lottery this time. For example, when the special figure fluctuation during the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the predetermined timing during the fluctuation period (for example, the timing of switching to the low speed fluctuation) is higher than the case where the special figure fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation. It is good to configure it so that the background change can be easily executed. Further, even when the background change operation is executed during the high-speed fluctuation of the special figure, the timing for executing the background change may be switched based on the result of the special figure lottery this time.

As a result, by performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with a new effect using a new effect (background), and at the same time, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation. ..

In FIG. 384, the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure) being executed is used as an element for determining the execution timing of the background change when the background change operation is executed, but the variation speed is not limited to this. For example, the effect display process executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special figure change is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, 5 stages), and the effect display process at the time of the background change operation is divided. It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the background change.

Specifically, the effect display executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is sequentially displayed as "variation start period", "reach establishment period", "reach effect period", "development effect period", and "effect result". Separated from the "notification period", for example, the "variation start period" and "reach establishment period" correspond to the fluctuation state "high-speed fluctuation" of the special figure of this eighth control example, and the "reach production period" and "development production period" , "Effect result notification period" may be configured to correspond to the fluctuation states "medium speed fluctuation", "low speed fluctuation", and "stop" in the special figure of the eighth control example.

In this way, even if the timing of the background change executed after the background change operation is changed according to the progress of the effect display instead of the fluctuation speed of the third symbol (special figure), the control example and the present control example are used. A similar effect can be achieved.

Further, in the eighth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change and other than the high-speed change of the special figure, the background change is executed after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, the lottery result of the next special figure change (the next special figure change of the special figure change in which the background change operation is executed) and the next and subsequent special figure changes. Based on the lottery result (preliminary determination (pre-reading) result for the winning information stored on hold), it may be configured to change whether or not the background change is executed and the transition destination (background mode) of the background change. ..

With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to grasp the lottery result of the special figure in advance. Then, by enthusiastically executing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388, the contents of the treasure chest effect (8 hold effect) will be described. In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit of eight, eight reserved effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using eight reserved balls, are executed. are doing. This eight-piece hold effect is a dedicated effect using eight hold symbols, and as an effect hold symbol corresponding to each hold symbol, an effect hold symbol in a display mode imitating a treasure box is placed in the waiting area Ds1b. It is displayed (see FIG. 386 (a)).

Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol to be the target of the eight reserved effects is executed, the first reserved symbol tb0 for the effect is displayed in the executing area Ds1a as shown in FIG. 386 (b). Then, the contents tb10 of the treasure box showing the lottery result of the fluctuation is displayed. The details will be described later, but the content tb10 is configured so that different colors are displayed according to the lottery result of the special drawing.

After that, when new winning information is held and stored during the period when the eight hold effects are being executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIGS. 387 (a) and 387 (b). In the waiting area Ds1b of the above, the new reserved symbol 900z is displayed only by the reserved lamp 900 without displaying the reserved symbol corresponding to the new winning information. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner up to which reserved symbol the period (effect period) during which the eight hold effects are continuously executed is.

Then, when the last special figure change that is the target of the eight pending effects is executed, as shown in FIG. 388, the effect reserved symbol tb7 is displayed in the executing area Ds1a, and the current waiting area Ds1b is displayed. The hold symbols corresponding to the number of hold memories are displayed. That is, when there are no more reserved symbols that are the targets of the eight reserved effects, the reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls currently stored in the hold are displayed. As a result, at the end of the eight-piece hold effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the number of hold balls currently acquired is unknown.

In this control example, the eight hold effects shown with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388 are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, eight hold effects are in progress for the effect. Even during the period when the reserved symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, when the player performs a specific operation on the operating means, the pending symbol is not the pending symbol for production in the waiting area Ds1b, but the current one. It may be configured to display a hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls. In addition, when it is determined that there is winning information that wins a big hit in the pre-determination process executed during the eight-piece hold effect, the eight-piece hold effect is continued until the special figure change corresponding to the prize information is executed. It may be configured as follows.

<About the electrical configuration in the 8th control example>
Next, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example, and FIG. 389 (b) is a schematic view of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of RAM 223 schematically. In the eighth control example, eight holding lottery tables 222fa, a special effect selection table 222fb, and a vibe pattern data 222fc are added to the ROM 222, the next background change flag 223fa is held, and the RAM 223 is held. The difference is that the effect executing flag 223 fb and the hold effect counter 2223 fc are added. The other elements are the same as those in the first control example, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The 8-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a data table used when performing a lottery (determination) as to whether or not to execute the 8-piece hold effect (treasure box effect), and is a hold number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 398). The upper limit is the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b (hereinafter referred to as the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter). 8 ”(Z2473: Yes in FIG. 398), it is referred to to determine whether or not to execute the eight hold effect (Z2475 in FIG. 398). When the execution of the eight-piece hold effect is determined, the above-mentioned eight-piece hold effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388.

Here, the contents of the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa will be described with reference to FIG. 390 (c). FIG. 390 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 390 (c), the eight-piece hold lottery table 222fa is a prize that shows the lottery result (winning) that is advantageous to the player in the hold of the special figure (in the hold used for the eight-piece hold effect). It is configured to determine whether or not the information is included, and to change the execution probability of the eight hold effects based on the determination result.

Specifically, when there is winning information indicating winning in the hold of the special figure (when the judgment result in the hold is "hit"), the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 140". It is stipulated that the eight hold effects are executed in the case and the eight hold effects are not executed in the case of "141 to 198". On the other hand, when the determination result in the hold is "only out of place", when the value of the acquired hold effect counter 223fc is "0 to 90", eight hold effects are executed, and when the value is "91 to 198". It is stipulated not to execute the 8 hold effects.

That is, in this control example, the case where the winning information indicating the lottery result (winning) which is advantageous to the player is included in the hold which is the target of the eight hold effect is more than the case where it is not included. It is configured so that the eight-piece hold effect can be easily executed. As a result, by executing the eight-piece hold effect, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot will be won soon, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol reaches the upper limit of eight, whether or not to execute the eight-held effect, which is a continuous effect (period effect) using the eight-held. Although it is configured to perform the lottery, whether or not to execute the continuous effect (period effect) when the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined number (for example, 7), not when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. May be configured to perform a lottery. In this case, for example, the execution probability of the 8 hold effect may be changed depending on whether the number of hold balls corresponding to one of the special symbol types is 3 or 4 out of the 7 hold.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a big hit (number of prize balls, game state set after the big hit game) is given to the player in the big hit game executed when the big hit is won. The pre-discrimination result of the special symbol type (advantageous special symbol) on the side where the game is easily executed and the other special symbol type (disadvantageous special symbol) are divided and set so that the execution probabilities of the eight hold effects are different. In this case, when there is winning information indicating a jackpot winning in the hold of the advantageous special symbol, it is preferable to configure it so that the hold effect of 8 pieces is easier to be executed than other conditions. As a result, the player's expectation for the eight-piece hold effect can be further increased.

The special effect selection table 222fb is a data table that is referred to when setting the vibration amount of the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is operated according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and is a lottery result (preliminary determination) in the hold. The different vibration amounts are set based on the result).

Here, the contents of the special effect selection table 222fb will be described with reference to FIG. 390 (a). FIG. 390 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special effect selection table 222fb, and FIG. 390 (b) is a vibration amount scenario defined in the special effect selection table 222fb. It is a figure which showed the content of the vibe pattern data 222fc which has (vibe type).

In the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate when the player operates the frame button 22, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 can also be changed in three stages. Has been done. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the pre-discrimination result of the special symbol is advantageous to the player, the frame button 22 is easily vibrated with a larger vibration amount. In addition, the vibration means (SW motor) for vibrating the frame button 22 is controlled by the vibration control means (SW motor control device) so as to drive when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed. It is configured.

Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether or not the frame button 22 vibrates unless the frame button 22 is pressed, and the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player is enthusiastically pressed the frame button 22. be able to. Further, in this control example, as one vibration amount scenario (vibe type), the vibration amount corresponding to a plurality of frame button presses is defined, and the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed increases. The frame button 22 is configured to easily vibrate with a larger amount of vibration. As a result, the player can enthusiastically press the frame button 22 a plurality of times.

In the eighth control example, when the voice lamp control device 113 sets the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (see FIG. 399), the frame button 22 is operated. It is configured to set the presence or absence of an effect (operation effect) and the type of operation effect. Then, when a special effect (a part of the operation effect) that vibrates the frame button 22 is set, a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) is set based on the special effect selection table 222fb when the frame button 22 is pressed. The vibration operation of the frame button 22 according to the set vibe type is executed.

As shown in FIG. 390 (a), the special effect selection table 222fb is a case where a hit is included in the hold of the special figure, and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 79". "Vibrator A" is defined as (vibe type), "vibe B" is defined as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "80 to 139", and the vibration amount scenario is specified in the range of "140 to 175". "Vibrator C" is defined as (vibe type), and "vibe D" is defined as a vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in the range of "176 to 198".

In addition, in the case where the hit is not included in the hold of the special figure (only the off), and the value of the effect counter is in the range of "0 to 49", "vibe B" is set as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). In the range of "50 to 90", "vibe C" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type), and in the range of "91 to 198", "vibe D" is specified as the vibration amount scenario (vibe type). It is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390 (b), the detailed contents of each vibe type (vibration amount scenario) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb will be described. As shown in FIG. 390 (b), in this eighth control example, four types of vibration types (vibes A to D) can be set, and the number of operations of the frame button 22 (number of times of PUSH) is set for each of the vibration types. ) Corresponds to the amount of vibration specified.

Specifically, the vibe type "vibe A" is defined as "none (does not vibrate)" for the first PUSH count, and "strong" is defined for the second to fourth times, and "vibe B" is defined as PUSH. The first number of times is "weak", the second time is "medium", the third and fourth times are "strong", and the "vibe C" is the first PUSH number of "none (do not vibrate)" and the second time. "Weak", "Medium" for the 3rd time, "Strong" for the 4th time, "Weak" for the 1st PUSH frequency, and "Medium" for the 2nd to 4th times are specified for "Vibrator D". ing.

In this way, the amount of vibration when the frame button 22 is operated is made different according to the set vibe type, and the presence / absence of variable amount of vibration is made different according to the number of times of PUSH. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed, it is possible to entertain at what vibration amount the frame button 22 vibrates. Therefore, the player actively participates in the operation production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In this eighth control example, the vibration amount specified for each vibration type is configured to increase (do not decrease) as the number of PUSH increases, but it is not limited to this. , The vibration amount may be reduced. In this case, if the special figure fluctuation during execution is a jackpot fluctuation, or if there is winning information indicating a jackpot winning in the special figure hold, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 tends to be reduced in the middle in the special effect. It is good to configure so that. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a special feeling when the amount of vibration is reduced.

Further, in the eighth control example, the vibration amount is set for a specific number of times of PUSH (4 times) regardless of which type of vibration is set, but the vibration amount is limited to this. The number of PUSHs for which the vibration amount is set may be different depending on the type of vibration.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the eighth control example, the same operation effect as the normal operation effect (the effect of causing the player to operate the frame button 22 a plurality of times according to the process of the variation display (reach variation)) is performed. It is configured to be displayed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the frame button operation can be performed a specified number of times (4 times) simply by operating the frame button 22 in accordance with the variable display effect (operation effect) executed by the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed.

In addition, the eighth control example also has a display effect dedicated to the special effect. In the display effect dedicated to this special effect, the display mode is stepwise (up to 4 stages) during a specific period within the special figure change period (for example, 10 seconds from 2 to 12 seconds after the start of the special figure change). An effect that can be stepped up is executed. This effect is configured in an effect mode that can suggest that the frame button 22 is pressed and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is variable (increased).

By using such a dedicated effect, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 while expecting that the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased. Further, although the vibration amount scenario (vibe type) in which the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is further increased is set, the frame button 22 is vibrated at the maximum vibration amount specified in the set vibration type. It is possible to prevent the special production from ending without causing it to occur.

In this case, the effect mode of the display effect dedicated to the special effect described above is configured to be set based on not only the set vibe type but also the lottery result of the fluctuation, and the vibration amount of the frame button 22 is increased. An effect pattern may be provided in which the display mode is stepped up even though it is not variable.

Here, the definition of the vibration amount of the frame button 22 will be described. In this control example, the vibration amount is defined as "frequency (frequency) indicating the number of vibrations per unit time", which is a definition indicating the strength of vibration. , "Amplitude indicating the vibration width" and "Indicating the time required for one unit of vibration (period)", the magnitude of the vibration amount is defined based on the magnitude of the amplitude. Therefore, since the vibration width felt when the frame button 22 is pressed differs depending on the magnitude of the vibration amount, the player can easily identify the variable state of the vibration amount.

In the special effect described above, the frame button 22 may be configured so that the player can feel different vibrations when the frame button 22 is pressed a plurality of times, and the vibration modes (amplitude, frequency, duration of vibration, vibration, etc.) may be set. Anything can be used as long as the period from the pressing of the frame button 22 to the start of vibration) can be changed, and each may be used in combination. Further, vibration that vibrates the frame button 22 by providing a plurality of vibration means (motors, etc.) capable of applying vibration to one operating means (frame button 22) and performing drive control for the plurality of vibration means. The position of the source may be changed, or the vibration mode felt by the player may be changed by changing the drive start timing of each vibration means. Further, the variable content of the vibration mode may be configured so that the player can select it.

Further, in the eighth control example, the frame button 22 is configured so as not to vibrate unless the player presses the frame button 22 in the state where the special effect is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the frame button 22 is not pressed, the frame button 22 may be vibrated with a vibration amount smaller than the vibration amount of the frame button 22 set by the special effect. By lightly vibrating the frame button 22 in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special effect is currently being produced.

The vibe pattern data 222fc is a data table in which the contents of each of the vibe types (vibes A to D) defined in the special effect selection table 222fb are stored. The content thereof will be omitted because it has been described above in the description of the special effect selection table 222fb.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389 (b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. .. As described above, the RAM 223 of the eighth control example has the following background change flag 223fa, the holding effect executing flag 223fb, the holding effect counter 2223fc, and the SW special effect counter 223fd added to the RAM 223 of the first control example. Is different.

The next background change flag 223fa is a flag for indicating that the background change condition for changing the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is satisfied, and the background change condition is satisfied. If so, it is set to on. In this control example, even when the background change operation is executed to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background differs depending on the timing of executing the background change operation. In such a case, there will be a time lag between the timing when the background change condition is satisfied by performing the background change operation and the timing when the background (background mode) is actually changed (shifted). Therefore, in order to temporarily store that the background change condition is satisfied, the next background change flag 223fa is set to on.

Specifically, in the background change process (see Z2949 in FIG. 403), the change state of the special figure (speed of change display of the third symbol) at the time when the background change operation (operation to the frame button 22) is executed. When it is determined that the speed is not fluctuating (Z2964 in FIG. 403: No), it is set to ON (see Z2965 in FIG. 403). Then, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON in the fluctuation stop processing 8 (see Z2242 in FIG. 397) executed when the stop command indicating the stop of the special figure fluctuation is received (see Z2242 in FIG. 397). Next, Z2266: Yes in FIG. 397 determines the presence or absence of the reserved memory of the special figure (Z2267 in FIG. 397), and if it is determined that there is no hold (Z2267: No in FIG. 397), the special figure variation is stopped. The background change is executed at the timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure is on hold (Z2267: Yes in FIG. 397), the background change is executed at the timing when the next special figure change is started (see Z2258 in FIG. 396).

The hold effect executing flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that eight hold effects (see FIG. 386) are being executed, and is set to be turned on when eight hold effects are executed. .. Then, when the eight hold effects are completed, the effect is set to off (see Z2534 in FIG. 399). Although detailed illustration is omitted, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special symbol) while the holding effect executing flag 223fb is set to ON. Even if the upper limit number (8) is reached (the value obtained by adding the values of the two hold ball counters 223b), the lottery for executing a new eight hold effect is not executed.

Specifically, when it is determined in the hold ball number control process (see Z2243 in FIG. 398) that the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter is 8 (Z2473: Yes in FIG. 398), then the hold effect is produced. It is configured to determine whether the running flag 223fb is set to on, and to execute the processes of Z2474 and Z2475 of FIG. 398 when it is determined that the running flag 223fb is not set to on (off). ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the eight-piece hold effect from continuing for an unnecessarily long time, so that the value of the eight-piece hold effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter reaches the upper limit number (8) again during the eight holding effect, a new eight holding effect is executed. It may be configured to execute a lottery. In this case, as a lottery for whether or not to execute a new eight-piece hold effect, it is preferable to execute a lottery different from the lottery for whether or not to execute the first eight-piece hold effect. Specifically, the new eight-piece hold effect may be configured to be easier to execute when a jackpot is included in the target hold than the first eight-piece hold effect. As a result, when the eight-piece hold effect is executed for more than eight special figure fluctuations, the expectation for the jackpot can be further increased. In addition, even during the eight-piece hold effect, the game can be enthusiastically played in order to accumulate the hold balls up to the maximum number again.

The hold effect counter 223fc is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is used every time the main process (see FIG. 394) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (every 1 millisecond). In), the update process is executed so that the values are different. The value of the hold effect counter 223fc is acquired when drawing a lottery with reference to the eight hold effect lottery table 222fa whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 398). (See Z2474 in FIG. 398).

The SW special effect counter 223fd is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the special effect is set, and the special effect is set in the SW effect process (see Z2841 in FIG. 402). In this case (see Z2944), a value corresponding to the set special effect is set (see Z2945 in FIG. 402). Here, in this control example, no matter what type of special effect is set, the special effect for four frame button operations is set, so that the value of 4 is set in the SW special effect counter 223fd.

Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) during the special effect, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is subtracted by 1 (see Z2948 in FIG. 402), and corresponds to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction. SW motor data is set to execute the effect (see Z2947 in FIG. 402).

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in this 8th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392. In the eighth control example, the contents specified in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 and the contents specified in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 are different from the first control example described above. Other than that, it is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 391 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 391, the work RAM 233 of the eighth control example has eight display setting flags 233fa, eight display effect counters 233fb, a display hold ball number storage area 233fc, and a display effect counter 233fd. It is different from the first control example described above.

The eight-piece display setting flag 233fa is a flag for indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is being executed, and is set to be on when the eight-piece hold effect is executed. While the eight display setting flags 233fa are set to ON, the special symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 383 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the number of reserved balls, the remaining number of reserved symbols (reserved symbols for effect) that are the targets of the eight reserved effects are displayed (see FIG. 388). As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the execution period of the eight hold effects, which is a continuous effect (period effect) executed so as to straddle a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

In the eighth control example, the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight reserved effects and the number of reserved symbols for the effect are configured to be displayed in synchronization, but the eight reserved effects are displayed. It is sufficient to display the number of reserved symbols for production so that the player can be informed of the execution period of the above in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, the production is performed according to the number of times the third symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped during the eight-hold production. The number of reserved symbols for production may be set, or one production reserved symbol may be set for two or more special symbol fluctuations. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the progress of the eight hold effects (currently, the number of hold symbols corresponding to the variable display).

The eight display effect counters 233fb are the number of display hold symbols to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 383 (b)) of the sub-display area Ds of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the eight hold effect. It is a counter for measuring. In this control example, since the number of reserved symbols for effect is changed according to the remaining number of reserved symbols that are the target of the eight hold effect, the sound lamp control device 113 produces eight display. In the eight display setting process (see Z3493 in FIG. 409) executed when the hold command is received, the counter value is set to 8 (see Z5707 in FIG. 409).

Then, in the fluctuation pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 408) executed when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value is subtracted (Z3522 in FIG. 408), and after the subtraction. It is determined whether the value of the counter of is 0 (Z3524 in FIG. 408). When the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb becomes 0, it means that all the reserved symbols that are the targets of the 8 pending effects are used, so the 8 display setting flag 233fa is set to end the display of the 8 pending symbols. It is set to off (see Z3525 in FIG. 408), and in the hold display process (see Z3495 in FIG. 410), the hold symbol is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 388). As a result, when the last special figure change that is the target of the eight hold effect is executed, the hold symbol indicating the number of hold balls of the special figure is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, so that the eight hold effect ends. At that time, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how much the number of reserved balls of the special figure is accumulated.

The display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is a storage area for storing the current special figure reserved ball number on the display control device 114 side, and receives the display reserved ball number command output from the voice lamp control device 113. If so, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the received command is stored.

The display effect counter 233fd is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and has a different value each time the display control device 114 command determination process (see Z3302 in FIG. 407) is executed. The update process is executed so as to be. The value of the display effect counter 233fd is acquired when drawing a lottery with reference to the eight hold lottery table 222fa whether or not to execute the eight hold effect in the hold number control process (see Z3343 in FIG. 398). (See Z2474 in FIG. 398).

Next, the contents of the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 of the eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 391, the NAND flash memory 234a of the eighth control example differs from the NAND flash memory 234a of the first control example described above in that eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3 are added. ing.

The 8-piece effect scenario selection table 234a3 is a data table for selecting the effect result of the 8-piece hold effect, and is based on the remaining number of reserved symbols to be the target of the 8-piece hold effect and the lottery result of the special symbol. This is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the eight hold effects.

Here, the detailed contents of the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 392. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3. As described above with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388, in the eighth control example, the treasure box in which the executing area Ds1a is displayed is open at the time when the special figure fluctuation is started when the eight hold effects are executed. Is configured to display a suggestion mode for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the suggestion mode is configured to be selected with reference to the eight effect scenario selection tables 234a3.

In the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3, the fluctuation result (lottery result of the special figure variation executed this time) is a hit (big hit), and the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4". In that case, that is, when 4 to 7 pending symbols for effect that imitate a treasure box are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, the value of the display effect counter 233fd is in the range of "0 to 50". Is defined, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "51-90", the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "91-150", and "white" is defined in the range of "151-198". It is stipulated.

Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "Rainbow" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" in the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "90 to 149", and the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "150 to 179". Is specified, and "white" is specified in the range of "180 to 198".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation result (the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation executed this time) is out of order and the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "7 to 4", that is, the treasure box is imitated in the waiting area Ds1b. When 4 to 7 pending symbols for effect are displayed, the suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 39" for the value of the display effect counter 233fd, and in the range of "40 to 149". The suggestion mode "blue" is defined, and "white" is defined in the range of "150 to 198". Further, when the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb is "3 to 0", that is, when 0 to 3 display hold symbols imitating a treasure box are displayed in the standby area Ds1b, the display effect counter. The suggestion mode "red" is defined in the range of "0 to 59" for the value of 233fd, the suggestion mode "blue" is defined in the range of "60 to 159", and "white" is defined in the range of "160 to 198". It is stipulated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, as the suggestion mode displayed as the eight hold effect, the hit suggestion mode "rainbow" that can be selected when the lottery result is a hit is provided. When the suggestion mode "Rainbow" is displayed, the lottery result advantageous to the player is notified at the timing when the special figure change is started, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Further, the smaller the value of the display 8 effect counter 233fb, that is, the more the 8 hold effect progresses, the easier it is to display various colors as the suggestion mode of the 8 hold effect. It is possible to enjoy the production without getting bored until the end with respect to the eight-piece hold production, which is a continuous production that is executed over the fluctuation of the special figure.

In this eighth control example, when eight hold effects are executed, the effect hold symbol (treasure box) for indicating the target special figure change is displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, and the effect is set as the target of the effect. When the special figure change is executed, the treasure box displayed in the executing area Ds1a is open, and a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the change is displayed. Not limited to, for example, when displaying a reserved symbol (treasure box) for production in the waiting area Ds1b, the color of the displayed treasure box is set based on the pre-determination result for each reserved symbol. Is also good.

Specifically, it is possible to set multiple treasure chest colors that are easier to select when the winning information corresponding to each reserved symbol contains information indicating a jackpot than when the information indicating a jackpot is not included. Good to configure. With this configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of anticipation to the special figure fluctuation executed during the eight hold effects from the stage before the special figure change is executed.

In addition, an effect (look-ahead effect) that changes the mode (color of the treasure box) of the effect reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b and an effect that changes the display mode of the contents of the treasure box displayed in the running area Ds1a. When (the variable effect) and (the variable effect) are executed in combination, it is preferable to set the variable mode so that the player pays attention to the variable effect executed after the pre-reading effect executed earlier. In this case, when setting the effect mode (color of the treasure box) of the look-ahead effect, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the effect mode is set may also be set in advance. When selecting the variation effect, the variation effect may be selected based on the effect mode of the look-ahead effect set for the reserved symbol corresponding to the variation effect this time. As a result, one reserved symbol (winning information) can be related to the production modes of a plurality of effects (look-ahead effect, the variable effect) executed at different timings, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to execute a continuous production without giving.

<Control processing by the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 to 406. In the eighth control example, with respect to the first control example described above, the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one of the processes in the main process variation effect setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303) of the start-up process. The main difference is that some of the contents of are changed. The other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 393, the start-up process (see FIG. 393) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. This start-up process differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 257) of the first control example described above in that the process (Z2012, Z2013 in FIG. 257) when a state command is received is deleted. .. Further, the difference is that the content of the process executed in the initial setting (Z2001) is changed. Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start-up process (see FIG. 393) is executed, the processes of Z2001 to Z2011 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated. Here, the initial setting (see Z2001) in the eighth control example will be described with respect to the difference from the first control example described above. In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 382, if the special figure change is executed during the period when the initial setting is executed, the BGM of the special figure change is output. It is configured in. That is, in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393), the process of reading the game information at the time of power off is executed, and the game information at the time of power off read by the process is changing in the special figure. If it is determined that there is, a change command for voice is set to output the BGM of the special figure change from the voice output device 226.

Although details will be described later, in the eighth control example, when a power failure occurs in the pachinko machine 10, power is supplied from an internal power source provided inside the voice lamp control device 113, and power is supplied. The game information (whether or not there is a change in the special figure, the lottery result of the change, the BGM for change, the remaining change time, etc.) at the time of interruption is temporarily stored in the display storage area. As a result, it is possible to read the game information stored in the display storage area in the initial setting (Z2001) of the start-up process (see FIG. 393).

Next, with reference to FIG. 394, the content of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 394 is a schematic diagram showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 of the eighth control example.

The main process of the eighth control example is the hold number update process 8 (FIG. 394) instead of the hold number display update process (Z2106 of FIG. 258) with respect to the main process of the first control example (see FIG. 258) described above. Z2171) is replaced with the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 258), and the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172 in FIG. 394) is replaced with the command determination process (Z2113 in FIG. 258). The determination process 8 (Z2174 in FIG. 394) is replaced with the variation display setting process (Z2114 in FIG. 258) and the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175 in FIG. 394) is provided, and the short-term prize management process (Z2174 in FIG. 258). Z2111), the hold effect management process during reach (Z2112 in FIG. 257) is deleted, and the lamp setting process (see Z2173 in FIG. 394) is added. The other processes are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main process 8 (see FIG. 394) is executed, first, the same processes of Z2101 to Z2105 as the main process (see FIG. 258) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of Z2105 is completed, the pending quantity display update processing 8 is next executed (Z2171). The detailed contents of the reserved quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 400. After finishing the processing of Z2171, the processing of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 is executed (Z2172). The detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described later with reference to FIG. 401.

When the processing of Z2172 is completed, the same processing of Z2108 to Z2110 as the main processing (see FIG. 258) of the first control example described above is executed, and then the lamp setting processing is executed (Z2173). This lamp setting process (Z2173) is a process for setting the light emitting mode of the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d provided on the upper side of the variable display device unit 80. The detailed contents of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 406.

Then, when the processing of Z2173 is completed, or when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: No), the command determination processing 8 is executed (Z2174), and then the variation display is performed. The setting process 8 is executed (Z2175). Then, the same processing of Z2115 to Z2119 as in the first control example described above is executed. The detailed contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, and the detailed contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described later with reference to FIG. 399.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174) will be described with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z2174). The command determination process 8 (Z2174) receives the variation pattern command and the hold ball number command output from the main control device 110 with respect to the command determination process (see Z2113 in FIG. 259) of the first control example described above. The point that the content of the process to be executed in the case is different, the point that the process to be executed when the stop command output from the main control device 110 is received (variable stop process 8) is added, and the output from the display control device 114. It is different from the point that the processing to be dealt with when the display rise command is received is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 259), the process (Z2204, Z2205 in FIG. 259) executed when the illustrated stop type command is received is described in the eighth. The same process is executed in the control example, but for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the process is executed according to other commands (Z2661 in FIG. 395).

When the command determination process 8 (Z2174) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (Z2201), and if it is determined that the command determination process 8 (Z2174) has been received (Z2201: Yes), then the variation pattern reception process 8 Is executed (Z2241), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described later with reference to FIG. 396, but when the fluctuation starts with respect to the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 260) of the first control example described above. It differs in that it is configured to execute processing for the background change in.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 395. When it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received in the processing of Z2201 (Z2201: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2203), and when it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2203: Yes). ), The fluctuation stop process 8 is executed (Z2242), and this process is terminated. The fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) performs a process of setting a stop display of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and a process of executing a background change when the special symbol is stopped. The details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

In the processing of Z2203, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2203: No), then it is determined whether the hold ball count command has been received (Z2205), and it is determined that the hold ball count command has been received. If this is the case (Z2205: Yes), the hold number control process is executed (Z2243), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hold number control process (Z2243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 398.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of 2205 (Z2205: No), Z2207, which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2113 in FIG. 259), The process of Z2208 is executed, and then it is determined whether or not the display rise command has been received (Z2244). This display rise command is set when the display control device 114 finishes the initial setting process after the power is turned on, and is set by the command output process (not shown) executed by the display control device 114. Is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

When it is determined that the display rise command has been received in the processing of Z2244, that is, the initial setting processing of the display control device 114 is completed, and the third symbol display device 81 is based on the display command output from the voice lamp control device 113. When it becomes possible to display arbitrary image data on the display screen of (Z2244: Yes), the set audio data is started up and set (Z2245), and this process is terminated.

In this Z2245 process, a process for reading the game information (audio data) stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off and outputting the audio data to the audio output device 226 is executed. As a result, as described above with reference to FIG. 382, the audio output device 226 is aligned with the timing at which the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 is switched from the initial screen to the normal screen. It is possible to output audio based on the audio data stored in the display storage area.

In this control example, as game information stored in the display storage area when the power is turned off, information indicating whether or not the special figure is changing (information during the special figure change) and execution during the special figure change. Information indicating the type of voice (BGM) (BGM type information) can be stored, and when setting voice data in the processing of Z2245, the special figure changing information and the BGM type information are read and used as the read information. Based on this, the rising voice data is set.

In the processing of Z2244, if it is determined that the display rise command has not been received (Z2244: No), the processing corresponding to other commands (including the processing when the stop type command is received) is executed (Z2261). , End this process.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) will be described with reference to FIG. 396. FIG. 396 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241). The variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241) deletes the processes of Z2225 to Z2231 with respect to the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 of FIG. 260) of the first control example described above, and processes the background change at the start of the variation. The difference is that Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern reception process 8 (Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed, the same processing of Z2221 to Z2224 as the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) of the first control example described above is executed, and then the next It is determined whether the background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256). Here, when it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2256: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 to set the background mode storage area 223i (Z2257), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2258), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2259), and this process is terminated.

That is, the background change operation is executed outside the third symbol high-speed change period during the special figure change, and the change pattern reception process 8 (see Z2241 in FIG. 396) is executed with the next background change flag 223fa set to ON. When this is done, the background mode is switched based on the background change operation performed during the previous special figure change. On the other hand, in the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is not set on (set to off) (Z2256: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242) will be described with reference to FIG. 397. FIG. 397 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 8 (Z2242). When the variable stop process 8 (Z2242) is executed, first, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2265).

Next, it is determined whether the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2266), and if it is determined that the next background change flag 223fa is set to ON (Z2266: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure is on hold (Z2266: Yes). Z2267). In this process, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are read out for determination. When it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is no reservation of the special figure (Z2267: No), the next special figure change occurs even though the condition for executing the background change in the next special figure change is satisfied. Since it is not executed, in order to execute the background change when the special figure fluctuation is stopped this time, the background mode is added by 1 and set to the background mode storage area 223i (Z2268), and the set background mode is set. A display switching command to the corresponding fluctuation pattern is set (Z2269), the next background change flag 223fa is set to off (Z2270), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2266 that the next background change flag 223fa is not set to ON (Z2266: No), or when it is determined in the processing of Z2267 that there is a hold of the special figure (Z2267: Yes). ) Does not execute the background change at the timing of executing this process (the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special figure), so that the processes of Z2268 and Z2269 are skipped and the present process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, when the condition for executing the next special figure change is not satisfied while the next background change flag 223fa is on (the special figure is held at the timing when the current special figure change is stopped). (If there is no), the background change is executed at the stop timing of this special figure change, so the background mode after switching should be provided to the player who wants the background change at an early stage. Can be done.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the above-described control example, and for example, the next background change flag 223fa may be kept on until the next special figure variation is executed. In this case, a predetermined valid period (for example, 1 minute) is set as the period until the next special figure change is started, and if the next special figure change is not executed within the predetermined valid period, the next background It is preferable to configure the change flag 223fa to be set to off.

With this configuration, for example, even if the previous player executes the background change operation and ends the game with the next background change flag 223fa set to on, the next player starts the game. It is possible to prevent the background change from being executed immediately afterwards.

Next, the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243) will be described with reference to FIG. 398. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold number control process (Z2243). In this hold number control process (Z2243), a process for managing the number of hold balls on the voice lamp control device 113 based on the information included in the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and a special figure The execution process of the effect (8 hold effects) on which the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number is performed.

In the hold number control process (Z2243), first, the number of hold balls of the special symbol is extracted from the received hold ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol hold number counters (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball counter). (Z2471) is stored in the number counter 223b), and a display hold ball number command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold number counter stored in the process of Z2471 is set (Z2472). Then, whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (the sum of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b) is 8 which is the upper limit value. Determine (Z2473).

When it is determined in the processing of Z2473 that the value of the counter (the number of reserved balls in the special figure) is 8 (Z2473: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2474), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is used. Based on this, the lottery result is acquired from the 8-piece hold lottery table 222fa (Z2475), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a lottery result indicating that the 8-piece hold effect is executed (Z2476).

If it is determined that the result is a lottery indicating that the 8-piece hold effect is to be executed (Z2476: Yes), the corresponding 8-piece hold effect is set (Z2477), and the display 8-piece hold effect command is set (Z2478). ), The hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to on (Z2479), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is set to 8, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2476 that the result is a lottery indicating that the eight-piece hold effect is not executed (Z2476: No), the eight-piece hold effect is not executed, so the processes of Z2477 to Z2480 are skipped. This process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175) will be described with reference to FIG. 399. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 8 (Z2175). The variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is different from the variation display setting process (see Z2114 in FIG. 269) of the first control example described above in that a control process related to a hold effect (8 hold effects) is added. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 8 (Z2175) is executed, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag is set to ON (Z2501), and if it is determined that the variation start flag is not set to ON (Z2501: No), The process of Z2505 is skipped as in the first control example. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (Z2501: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is larger than 0 (Z2531), and when it is larger than 0. If it is determined (Z2531: Yes), the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is subtracted by 1 (Z2532), and it is determined whether the value of the hold effect counter 223fc after the subtraction is 0 (Z2533).

When it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is 0 in the processing of Z2533 (Z2533: Yes), since it is the end timing of eight hold effects, the hold effect execution flag 223fb is set to off (Z2534). ), The process proceeds to the same Z2502 process as in the first control example described above.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2531, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2531: No), it means that 8 pieces are not currently in hold effect, so Z2532 The process of ~ Z2534 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2502.

Further, in the processing of Z2533, when it is determined that the value of the hold effect counter 223fc is not 0 (Z2533: No), the eight hold effects are being executed and the end timing of the eight hold effects is not reached. Therefore, the processing of Z2534 is skipped and the process shifts to Z2502. When the process shifts to the Z2502 process, the same Z2502 to Z2509 process as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see Z2114 in FIG. 269) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171). In the hold quantity display update process 8 (Z2171), a process for controlling the lighting of the hold LED 900 provided on the game board 13 in a lighting mode for indicating the number of hold balls of the special symbol is performed.

When the hold number display update process 8 (Z2171) is executed, first, the number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter (special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b) is executed. The hold LED 900 is set to light up (Z2631), and then the display hold ball count command corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball count counter (special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 223a, special symbol 2 hold ball count counter 223b) is issued. Set (Z2632) and end this process.

In this control example, in the processing of Z2631, the holding LED 900 is lit in the same manner corresponding to the total value of the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. Although it is configured to be set, the holding LED 900 is not limited to this, and for example, the holding LED 900 can be identified between the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. It may be set to light up, or it may be set to light up so that the holding LED 900 is turned on according to only the number of holding balls in one of the special figures according to the current gaming state. You may.

Further, in this control example, the holding LED 900 is configured to always execute the lighting setting indicating the special figure holding ball, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which a specific game condition is satisfied (for example, The period during which the eight hold effects are being executed, the period during which the movable member (accessory) for the effect is movable so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to see, and the display of the third symbol display device 81. The holding LED 900 is configured to be turned on only during the period when it is difficult to visually recognize the number of holding balls of the special figure on the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the variable display is executed using the entire screen. You may.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172). The frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is pressed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process (Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above. The difference is that the content is changed and the processing content executed when the touch sensor 2900 is operated is changed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 8 (Z2172) is executed, the same Z2801 to Z2805 processing as the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above is executed, and Z2805 is executed. If it is determined in the process of (Z2805: No) that the frame button 22 is not pressed, the processing related to various effects executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2842.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the Z2805 process (Z2805: Yes), the SW effect process is executed (Z2841), and then the process proceeds to Z2842. Here, in Z2805, it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed when the switch that comes into contact with the frame button 22 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in this control example, after the frame button 22 is physically pressed and the switch is turned on (after the frame button 22 moves to the pressed position), the frame button 22 returns to the initial position. It is configured to require a recovery period of at least 0.2 seconds, and the frame button 22 is positioned at the position where the switch is turned on for 0.15 seconds of the recovery operation. It is configured.

With this configuration, when the switch is turned on based on the physical movement of the frame button 22, the switch is turned on continuously for at least 0.15 seconds, so that the on state is set. It can be determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed when the detection is continued for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds). Therefore, for example, when an output indicating an ON state for a short period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) is generated due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being erroneously determined to have been pressed.

Next, the content of the SW effect process (Z2841) executed in the process of Z2841 of FIG. 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing (Z2841). In this SW effect processing (Z2841), the control process related to the special effect of vibrating the frame button 22 when the frame button 22 is pressed, and the background change process of changing the background mode by pressing the frame button 22 are described above. The same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example is executed. Note that the same processing as the partial processing in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) of the first control example described above is designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect process (Z2841) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a special effect is set as the SW effect (Z2941). Here, at present, when the display variation pattern command is set in the Z2504 process of the variation display setting process (see Z2175 in FIG. 399), the variation pattern including the special effect is set as the SW effect, and the variation pattern is set. In the Z2804 process of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401), it is determined whether or not the SW effective time corresponding to the special effect is set.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2941 that it is a special effect (Z2941: Yes), the operation to the frame button 22 this time is an operation to the frame button 22 during the special effect, so that the control process for the special effect is performed. (Z2942 to Z2947) is executed. First, the Z2942 determines whether the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (Z2942).

The value of this SW special effect counter 223fd is set when the special effect is executed, and the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 0 at the time of the first frame button operation after the special effect is set. Is. When it is determined in the processing of Z2942 that the value of the counter is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2942: No), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2943), and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is obtained. The special effect is set from the special effect selection table 222fb (Z2944). Then, the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set based on the set special effect (Z2945).

In this control example, regardless of which special effect is selected, the number of operations of the frame button 22 corresponding to the special effect is four, so in the processing of Z2945, 4 is set in the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd. To.

Next, a display special effect command corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2946), SW motor data corresponding to the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set (Z2947), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2942, when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special effect has already been executed (Z2942: Yes), the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is set to 1. Subtraction (Z2948) is performed, and the processes of Z2946 and Z2497 are executed in correspondence with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd after the subtraction to end this process.

Here, the above-mentioned processing of the special effect will be specifically described when the type of the special effect (vibe type C) is selected with reference to FIG. 390 (b). First, the first frame button 22 operation is performed in a state where the special effect is included in the fluctuation pattern this time, and the type of special effect (vibe type C) is selected by the processing of Z2944. Then, 3 is set in the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd in the processing of Z2945, and the vibration amount (none) corresponding to the first frame button operation of the vibrator type C is set in the processing of Z2447 (FIG. 390 (FIG. 390). b) See).

At the same time, in the processing of Z2946, an operation suggestion display mode for prompting the player to operate the next frame button (for example, a button display mode imitating the frame button 22 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the button thereof. The pressing suggestion display mode) for executing the action of pressing the display mode is displayed. Here, the operation suggestion display mode described above is configured to be variably set according to the lottery result corresponding to the current special figure change and the type of the selected special effect. For example, the following frame button During operation, if a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied, a large vibration is applied when a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the operation of the frame button this time is applied. It is configured so that the display mode in which the operation suggestion is emphasized is more easily displayed than when it is not given.

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the player to perform the next frame button operation. In addition, when the result of the special drawing lottery this time is a big hit, it is configured so that the display mode emphasizing the operation suggestion is more easily displayed than when the lottery result is not a big hit (off). When the next frame button operation is applied with a vibration larger than the vibration amount generated during the current frame button operation, and the special figure lottery result is a big hit, the next frame button operation is the most performed. It is configured so that the emphasized display mode can be easily displayed.

As a result, the result of the special drawing lottery can be predicted based on both the operation suggestion mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the vibration amount generated when the frame button 22 is pressed. it can. Furthermore, in order to emphasize the operation suggestion when the amount of vibration generated during the next frame button operation becomes larger than the magnitude of the vibration generated during the current frame button operation, the player forgets to press the frame button 22. It can be suppressed, and the set effect can be fully enjoyed.

Next, when the frame button operation is performed for the second time during the special effect, it is determined that the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is larger than 0 (3) in the processing of Z2942 (Z2942; Yes), and the SW special effect is produced. The value of the counter 223fd is subtracted by 1. Then, the vibration amount (weak) when the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd is 2 is set in the SW motor data. After that, the same process is repeated until the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd becomes 0. Then, when the processing of Z2946 and Z2497 is completed with the value of the SW special effect counter 223fd being 0, the setting of the special effect is cleared.

That is, in this control example, in the state where the special effect is set, the special effect is executed until the frame button operation is performed a predetermined number of times (the value set in the SW special effect counter 223fd). It is configured in. In this control example, since the fluctuation pattern is configured to correspond to the setting and the special effect can be set as the SW effect, the execution period of the special effect is configured to be within one special figure fluctuation period. However, it may be configured to set a special effect regardless of the setting of the fluctuation pattern (regardless of the special figure fluctuation period). For example, the special effect is set at the start of the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute and set a special effect based on the determination result. Further, when the player performs a special operation on the operation means (frame button 22), the special effect may be set.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect regardless of the set fluctuation time of the special figure. In addition, the vibration amount of the frame button 22 in this case may be configured to be variable according to the result of the special drawing lottery during fluctuation, the winning information in the hold, and the set gaming state.

Return to FIG. 402 to continue the description. In the processing of Z2941, if it is determined that the set SW effect is not a special effect (SW effect is not set) (Z2941: No), then, the frame button input monitoring of the first control example described above is performed. -The same processing as Z2806, Z2809, Z2810, and Z2811 of the effect processing (see Z2107 in FIG. 272) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, when it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (0), that is, when it is determined that the current timing is when the SW effect is not set. (Z2806: No) Since the frame button 22 this time is a background change operation for changing the background mode, the background change process is executed (Z2949), and this process is terminated.

Here, the contents of the background change process (Z2949) will be described with reference to FIG. 403. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process (Z2949). This background change process (Z2949) is executed when a background change operation (operation to the frame button 22 for changing the background mode) is performed, and the background change is performed based on the operation timing of the background change operation. The process for changing the timing of executing is executed.

In the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 403), first, it is determined whether the timing when the background change operation is executed is the change period of the special figure (during the change of the special symbol) (Z2963), and the change period of the special figure is used. If it is determined to be present (Z2963: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is in the high-speed fluctuation period (the period in which the fluctuation display speed of the third symbol is high) (Z2964). Here, if it is determined that the period is not a high-speed fluctuation period (medium speed, low speed period, or stop period) (Z2964: No), the background mode cannot be changed immediately, so the next background change flag 223fa is set to on (Z2965), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2963, when it is determined that the present is not the fluctuation period of the special figure (for example, the waiting period for customers) (Z2963: No), or in the processing of Z2964, the present is the high-speed fluctuation period. When it is determined (Z2964: Yes), the background mode can be changed immediately. Therefore, the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z2966), and the set background mode is supported. A display switching command for the fluctuation pattern is set (Z2967), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (Z2172) of FIG. 401 will be described with reference to FIG. 404. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the contents of the sensor input process 8 (Z2842). In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), various control processes are executed when the player operates the touch sensor 2900.

In this sensor input process 8 (Z2842), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 with respect to the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above, and the advance notice effect display is set. The difference is that the mode identification process (Z2968) is executed when there is none, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the first control example described above, the operation to the touch sensor is effectively determined only when the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is larger than 0. However, in this control example, the touch sensor is used. The difference is that the sensor effective time counter 223s is used to measure the effective period corresponding to the effect set based on the fluctuation pattern among the periods during which the operation to the 2900 can be effectively determined. Therefore, even when the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0, the operation on the touch sensor 2900 can be effectively determined. Further, also in the eighth control example, a period counter (not shown) is provided, and a period in which the operation to the touch sensor 2900 is not effectively determined is provided as in the first control example described above, but the description thereof will be omitted.

When the sensor input process 8 (Z2842) is executed, the same processes as the sensor input process (Z2813 in FIG. 273) of the first control example described above are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2822, when it is determined that the notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), the mode identification process is executed (Z2968), and this process is terminated. In this mode identification process (Z2968), a process for displaying the current background mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900.

Next, the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968) will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the mode identification process (Z2968). When the mode identification process (Z2966) is executed, first, it is determined whether the touch sensor 2900 is on (Z2769), and if it is determined that it is on (Z2769: Yes), it corresponds to the current background mode. A mode display command is set (Z2970), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the touch sensor 2900 is not operated in the processing of the Z2769 (Z2769: No), the processing of the Z2970 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

That is, in the eighth control example, the current background mode can be notified to the player only by operating the touch sensor 2900. With this configuration, it is not necessary to always display the current background mode in the limited space of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be used. A wide area can be secured for producing a variable display.

In the eighth control example, when the current background mode is displayed based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900, the background mode is displayed in the mode display area Dm1a (see FIG. 385 (a)). However, not limited to this, the production mode of the variable display effect being executed at the timing of displaying the current background mode based on the operation on the touch sensor 2900 is determined, and the display mode of the effect is determined based on the determination result. The display area in which is not displayed may be determined, and the background mode may be displayed in the display area. As a result, the background mode can be displayed without interfering with the variable display effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173) will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lamp setting process (Z2173). In this lamp setting process (Z2173), control is executed to change the lighting mode of the frame lamp (the lamp that lights the frame button 22) and the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d (see FIG. 380) according to the game situation.

When the lamp setting process (Z2173) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is changing (Z2131), and if it is determined that the special figure is not changing (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is turned on. A frame lighting command for lighting in green is set (Z2135), and then a mode lighting command for lighting the mode lamps 1910a to 1910d is set to notify the currently set background mode (Z2134), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, the lighting contents of the frame lamp will be described. In this control example, a frame lamp (LED) which is a light emitting means is embedded in the frame button 22, and the surface of the frame button 22 can be made to emit light in an arbitrary color by lighting the light emitting means. ing. Then, it is configured to notify the player of various information depending on the lighting color of the frame lamp.

Specifically, green is defined as a lighting mode indicating a state in which the special figure fluctuation is not executed, and blue is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing high-speed fluctuation. The red color is defined as a lighting mode indicating that the special figure (third symbol) is undergoing fluctuations other than high-speed fluctuations. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the current special figure fluctuation state (fluctuation speed of the third symbol) by visually recognizing the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Further, since the surface of the frame button 22 (the surface that the player contacts) to be operated when the background change operation is executed is made to emit light by the frame lamp, the player who intends to execute the background change operation is asked. Since the current special figure change state (fluctuation speed of the third symbol) can be easily grasped, the timing of executing the background change is changed according to the special figure change state when the background change operation is executed. Even if the control is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the timing of executing the background change is different according to the fluctuation speed of the third symbol, and which speed is the fluctuation display of the third symbol executed on the display screen. There was a problem that it was difficult for the player to identify the above problem, but the above-mentioned problem was solved by changing the lighting mode of the frame lamp according to the special figure fluctuation state (the fluctuation speed of the third symbol). Can be done.

In this control example, the frame lamp is configured to directly emit light on the surface of the frame button 22, but the arrangement position of the frame lamp is not limited to this, and it enters the viewpoint of the player who performs the background change operation. Any position is sufficient. For example, a frame lamp may be provided in the vicinity of the frame button 22.

Return to FIG. 406 to continue the explanation. In the processing of Z2131, when it is determined that the special figure is fluctuating (Z2131: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure (third symbol) is changing at high speed (Z2132), and the special figure is changing at high speed. If it is determined to be (Z2132: Yes), the frame lamp is lit in blue (Z2133), the process proceeds to Z2134, and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2132, if it is determined that the special figure is not in high-speed fluctuation (Z2131: No), the frame lamp is set to red (Z2136), and then a lighting command for lighting all the mode lamps is performed. Is set, and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device 114 in the eighth control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 to 411. In the eighth control example, for the first control example described above, the command determination process 8 (see Z3302 in FIG. 407) is replaced with the command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), and the variable pattern command process (see Z2302 in FIG. 407) is performed. The variable pattern command process 8 (see Z3491 in FIG. 408) is replaced with the resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (b)) instead of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (see Z4631 in FIG. 411). (See) is executed, and eight display setting processes (see Z3493 in FIG. 409) and hold display setting process (see Z3495 in FIG. 410) are added. The other control contents are the same, and the same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 407. FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (Z3302). In this command determination process 8 (Z3302), for the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 277), a process executed when eight display hold commands are received and a process for looping this process. The processing to update the value of the display effect counter, the content of the processing to be executed when the display variation pattern command is received, and the content of the processing to be executed when the hold ball count command is received. , Is different in that it is changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed, the same Z3401 to Z3404 processes as the command determination process of the first control example described above (see Z2302 in FIG. 277) are executed, and the display variation pattern is executed in the Z3404 process. If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern command process 8 is executed (Z3491), and then the process proceeds to Z3496. The detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern command processing 8 (Z3491) will be described later with reference to FIG. 408.

In the process of Z3496, a process of updating the value of the display effect counter is executed. In the eighth control example, the value of the display effect counter is updated every time the command determination process 8 (Z3302) is executed once. The command determination process 8 (Z3302) is configured to execute various processes according to the type of the command (display command) received by the display control device 114. Therefore, the timing at which the Z3496 process is executed can always be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the value of the display effect counter will be updated. Then, when the processing of Z3494 is completed, the process shifts to the processing of Z3401, and the command determination processing 8 is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the display variation pattern command has not been received in the Z3404 process (Z3404: No), the same Z3406 to Z3411 processes as the above-mentioned command determination process (see Z2302 in FIG. 277) are executed. , The process proceeds to the above-mentioned Z3496 process. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that the display switching command has not been received (Z3410: No), then it is determined whether or not the eight display hold command has been received (Z3492), and it is determined that the command has been received. If this is the case (Z3492: Yes), the eight display setting process is executed (Z3493), and then the process proceeds to the Z3496 process.

This eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) is a process for creating image data related to the eight-piece hold effect (see FIG. 386), and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 409. In the processing of Z3492, if it is determined that the eight display hold ball command has not been received (Z3492: No), then it is determined whether the hold ball count command has been received (Z3414), and the hold ball count command is issued. If it is determined that the command has been received (Z3414: Yes), the hold display process is executed (Z3495), and the process proceeds to Z3494. This hold display process (Z3495) executes a process for setting a display mode to be displayed in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detailed contents thereof are described in FIG. 410. Will be described later with reference to.

When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received in the processing of Z3414 (Z3414: No), the processing of Z3418 to Z3420 which is the same as the command determination processing of the first control example described above (see Z2302 of FIG. 277). Is executed, and then the process proceeds to Z3496 processing.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491). This variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) differs from the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 278) in that a control process is added when eight hold effects are executed. The elements other than are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation pattern command process 8 (Z3491) is executed, first, the same processes of Z3501 to Z3506 as the above-mentioned variation pattern command process (see Z3405 in FIG. 278) are executed, and then eight display setting flags 233fa are set. Determine if it is set to on (Z3521). Then, when it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the eight hold effects are not being executed (Z3521: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to ON (Z3521: Yes), the value of the eight display counter 233fb is subtracted by 1 (Z3522), and the eight display after subtraction is produced. With reference to the counter, the effect mode (contents of the treasure box) is selected using the eight effect scenario selection table 234a3 (Z3524). Then, it is determined whether the value of the eight display production counter 233fb is 0 (Z3525), and if it is determined to be 0 (Z3525: Yes), the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to off (Z3526). , End this process. Further, in the processing of Z3525, even if the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb is not 0, that is, the eight pending effects continue even after the next special figure change (Z3525: No), this processing is performed as it is. finish.

Next, the contents of the eight-piece display setting process (Z3493) will be described with reference to FIG. 409. FIG. 409 is a flowchart showing the contents of the eight display setting process (Z3493). When the 8-piece display setting process (Z3493) is executed, the 8-piece display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5701), the 8-piece display display data table corresponding to the command is determined, and the set is set in the display data table buffer. (Z5702).

Then, the set data table for displaying the eight effects is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer (Z5703). Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to on (Z5704), the time data is set to the timekeeping counter based on the data table (Z5705), the pointer is initialized (Z5706), and 8 is set to the eight display effect counters. , End this process.

Next, the contents of the hold display process (Z3495) will be described with reference to FIG. 410. FIG. 410 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold display process (Z3495). When the hold display process (Z3495) is executed, first, the number of hold balls is set in the display hold ball number storage area 233fc based on the information included in the hold ball number command received this time (Z5801).

Then, it is determined whether the eight display setting flag 233fa is set to on (Z5802), and if it is determined that it is set to on (Z5802: Yes), eight are currently on hold. Display 8 A pointer corresponding to the value of the effect counter 233fb is set (Z5803), and this process is terminated. That is, while the eight hold effects are being executed, the number of display hold symbols (treasure boxes) corresponding to the value of the display eight effect counter 233fb in the standby area Ds1b of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5802, when it is determined that the eight display setting flag 233fa is not set to ON (Z5802: No), a pointer corresponding to the value of the display reserved ball number storage area 233fc is set (Z5804). , End this process. That is, while the eight hold effects are not being executed, the hold symbols (circles) corresponding to the number of hold balls of the special figure are displayed in the waiting area Ds1b on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) will be described with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the contents of the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631). In the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631), the resident image transfer setting process of the first control example described above is set in that a command (display rising command) for indicating that all the resident target image data has been transferred is set. Is different from. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the resident image transfer setting process 8 (Z4631) is executed, the same Z4701 to Z4705 processes as the above-mentioned resident image transfer setting process (see Z4602 in FIG. 285 (b)) are executed, and when the Z4705 process is completed. , Set the display rise command (Z4721), and end this process. In this way, a command (display) for indicating that the transfer processing of various image data executed after the initial setting processing (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) in the main processing of the display control device 114 (see FIG. 274) has been completed. By configuring the rise command) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the timing at which the display control device 114 can normally operate.

Further, in the eighth control example, the initial setting of the display control device 114 is configured so as to take the longest time among other various devices (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113, voice output device 226). Therefore, by outputting the display rise command from the display control device 114, the instruction to display the normal screen after the power is turned on and the instruction to output various voices (BGM) can be executed in synchronization.

<9th control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 to 419. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is a volume button 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume used in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 314) of the fourth control example described above. The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the control contents are different from the above-described eighth control example, and other configurations are the same. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the eighth control example described above, when the player operates the frame button 22 (background change operation) to change the background mode, the timing of changing the background mode (background change is executed) according to the operation timing. By configuring the timing) to be variable, for example, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the background mode is switched while an effect dedicated to a specific background mode is being executed. Therefore, the player can be made to execute the background change operation with peace of mind, and the background change operation can be positively performed.

However, in the technique of the eighth control example described above, the timing of the background change executed based on the background change operation is only different, and the effect mode to be executed is the same, so that the background change operation is executed. There was a problem that the player got tired of the production (background change production).

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the background notice effect suggesting the background mode after the transition is executed between the time when the background change operation is executed and the time when the background change is actually executed. In addition, the effect mode of the background notice effect is changed according to the timing of executing the background change operation (for example, the timing when the special figure is not changing and the special figure is changing). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with different production modes depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the performance to be executed at an early stage. ..

Further, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the background notice effect is changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the player can enthusiastically execute the background change operation in order to see the background notice effect.

Further, in the ninth control example, similarly to the fourth control example described above, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted during the period when the special figure fluctuation is not executed (during the customer waiting period). There is. Here, the conventional pachinko machine has a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is easily executed (for example, a time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, a high probability state of the normal symbol)) and a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation is difficult to be executed. (For example, a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol)) can be set, and when a time saving state is set, a normal state is set. It was configured so that a shorter fluctuation time could be easily set as the special figure fluctuation time.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if a period in which the special figure change is not executed occurs during the time saving state, a new special figure change is likely to be started immediately, and a period in which the special figure change is not executed in the normal state. When the above occurs, it becomes more difficult to start a new special figure change than during the time saving state.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, the customer waiting display (for example, the name of the game machine) during the period (customer waiting period) in which the special figure change is not executed without considering the set gaming state. If the function (for example, volume control function, light intensity control function) is executed during the customer waiting period, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is unnecessarily switched during the time saving state. There was a problem that the display was difficult to understand for the player. Further, the process for creating each image data displayed on the display screen is complicatedly executed, which causes a problem that the control load of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Furthermore, during the time saving state, it is possible to efficiently execute the special figure fluctuation by continuously firing the ball, so for example, the functions during the waiting period (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function) can be used. Even if it is temporarily enabled, there is a problem that a new special figure change is started by the time the adjustment operation using the function is completed, which causes discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the special figure change is stopped and no new special figure change is executed, the above-mentioned function during the customer waiting period is enabled. Although it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems by configuring, the player needs to stop the game for a predetermined period when the player who is playing in the normal state tries to adjust the volume or the amount of light. In addition to making the game feel annoying, a new problem arises in which the operation of the game is reduced.

In order to solve the various problems described above, in the ninth control example, the period from when the special figure change is not executed according to the set gaming state until the function can be executed during the customer waiting period is different. It is configured to allow. As a result, for example, during a high probability state (time saving state, probability change state) of a normal symbol in which the special figure change is likely to be executed, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the special figure change is not executed, and then the customer waits. It is possible to execute the function during the period, and during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol where it is difficult to execute the special figure change, it is possible to execute the function during the customer waiting period immediately after the special figure change is not executed. it can.

<About the production contents of the 9th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 414, the background notice effect will be described among the effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example. FIG. 414 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the background mode shifts to the sea mode, and FIG. 414 (b) shows a display in a state where the background mode shifts due to the next fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen. Of the elements of the display screen, the same elements as those of the above-described eighth control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed, the advance notice effect suggesting the background mode of the transition destination is executed before the background mode is switched. To specifically explain the display mode of this notice effect, "mode display", which is a display mode in which the background mode of the transition destination is indicated by a comment immediately before the transition of the background mode, and the transition destination immediately before the transition of the background mode. "Silhouette display", which is a display mode in which the background mode is suggested by the silhouette of the character, is configured to be displayable.

Then, when the timing for executing the background change operation is outside the special figure change period (for example, during the customer waiting period), only "mode display" is selected, and when the special figure change period is in progress, "mode display" is selected. And "Silhouette display" are configured to be selected. With this configuration, the effect (background notice effect) to be executed can be different depending on the timing of executing the background change operation, so that the player is made to perform the background change operation at various timings. be able to.

Further, in the ninth control example, when the background change operation is executed during the special figure change period, the selection ratio between the "mode display" and the "silhouette display" is different depending on the lottery result of the special figure change. I'm letting you. In addition, if a display mode in which the background mode suggested in the background notice effect differs from the background mode that is the actual transition destination is selected, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won. (To be higher than the display mode of other background notice effects). Therefore, the player can be made to positively perform the background change operation in order to predict the lottery result of the special figure. In addition, by actively performing the background change operation, it is possible to provide the player with effects corresponding to various background modes, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. ..

On the display screen shown in FIG. 414 (a), the background mode shifts to the sea mode by the background change operation, and the silhouette K100 imitating a fish suggesting the sea mode is displayed as a background notice effect. As described above, in this control example, the display mode displayed in the background notice effect is continuously displayed on the display screen even after the transition to the background mode, so that the player can display the display displayed in the background notice effect. It is configured so that the aspect and the background mode actually shifted can be visually compared.

Next, on the display screen shown in FIG. 414 (b), the comment "background change at the next change" indicating that the background change operation is executed and the background mode shifts at the start of the next special figure change is the comment display area Dm2a. It is displayed in. Then, as a background notice effect, a silhouette K100 that imitates a tree suggesting a mountain mode is displayed. That is, the state shown in FIG. 414 (b) is a state in which the current state is the "mountain mode" and the background mode shifts (shifts to the sea mode) due to the next fluctuation, and the background suggesting the background mode after the shift. The silhouette K100, which suggests a mountain mode, is displayed as a warning effect. If there is a contradiction between the actual background mode transition destination and the suggestion display mode of the background notice effect in this way, it is highly likely that the jackpot has been won due to the change.

<About the electrical configuration in the 9th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413. FIG. 412 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example, and FIG. 412 (b) is a schematic view in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 412 (a), the ROM 222 of the ninth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the eighth control example described above in that the vibration pattern data 222fc is deleted and the background notice selection table 222ga is added. However, the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background notice selection table 222ga is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the background notice effect when the background change operation is executed. Here, the contents of the background notice selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the background notice selection table 222ga.

As shown in FIG. 413, the background notice selection table 222ga shows the hit / fail determination result (the lottery result of the special figure change being executed at the time when the background change operation is executed), the acquired effect counter 223h, and the value after the transition. The background mode and the background notice of different display modes can be selected according to the mode.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is correct and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69", and "silhouette A" is set to "70 to 159". "Silhouette B" is specified in the range of "", "Mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "160 to 169", and "Sea mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198". When is in the "mountain mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 69" for "silhouette B", in the range of "70 to 159" for "silhouette A", and in the range of "160 to 169". "Sea mode display" is specified in, and "mountain mode display" is specified in the range of "170 to 198".

On the other hand, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the background mode after the transition is "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", "silhouette B" is in the range of "120 to 198". When the background mode after the transition is "mountain mode", the value of the production counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 119", and "silhouette A" is set to "120 to". "Mountain mode display" is defined in the range of "198". Further, when the background change operation is executed during the customer waiting period, and the background mode after the transition is the "sea mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 198". When the background mode after the transition of the "sea mode display" is the "mountain mode", the "mountain mode display" is defined in the range where the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 198".

Here, each display mode selected as the display mode of the background notice effect will be described. In this control example, as the display mode of the background notice effect, "silhouette display" that displays the silhouette of the character suggesting the background mode after the transition, "mode display" that displays the character indicating the background mode after the transition, and Is configured to be configurable.

In the "silhouette display", "silhouette A" is a silhouette of a character imitating a tree suggesting a mountain mode shown in FIG. 414 (b), and "silhouette B" is shown in FIG. 414 (a). It is a silhouette of a character that imitates a fish that suggests the sea mode shown. In this control example, the silhouette display is configured to display a display mode formed by a still image, but the display mode dynamically changes as long as the display mode suggests the background mode after the transition to the player. For example, immediately after the suggestion display mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand which background mode is suggested, and the passage of time or the operation means by the player ( The background mode of the transition destination may be gradually changed to a display mode that is easy to grasp based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 2900). With this configuration, the player can be made to pay close attention to the effect in order to quickly determine the effect result of the background notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, "silhouette display" and "mode display" can be displayed as the display mode of the background notice effect, and the background is in the period when the special figure does not change. When the change operation is executed, only "mode display" is selected, and when the background change operation is executed during the period when the special figure is changing, "silhouette display" can be selected. .. As a result, by executing the background change operation while the special figure is changing, a special effect mode (silhouette display) can be displayed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this control example, as a background notice effect, a display mode suggesting a background mode different from the background mode of the transition destination can be set, and the display mode is selected only when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit. It is configured to be done. Therefore, the lottery result advantageous to the player can be notified (suggested) in advance by giving a sense of discomfort between the content of the background notice effect and the actual background mode transition status, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this control example, an example using two background modes (sea mode and mountain mode) is shown, but the type of background mode may be three or more, and the background mode to be changed by the background change operation is set. It may be set randomly. Further, as a result of performing the background change operation, it may be configured to shift to the same background mode as before the shift. With this configuration, the display mode of the background notice effect this time and the background after the transition are based on the background mode before the transition and the suggested content of the background mode after the transition displayed in the background notice effect. It can provide the fun of predicting whether or not the mode matches.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the period from the execution of the background change operation to the transition to the background mode is different depending on the timing of the execution of the background change operation as in the eighth control example described above. It is configured as follows. The background notice effect described above is configured to be displayed based on the execution of the background change operation. Therefore, the display period in which only the background notice effect is displayed can be changed according to the timing when the background change operation is executed.

In the ninth control example, when selecting the display mode of the background notice effect, the display mode is selected based on the lottery result of the special figure change during execution, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, the display mode may be selected based on the result of preliminarily determining the winning information included in the special drawing reservation. In this case, for example, if the background mode can be changed (changed) during the special figure change in which the background change operation is executed, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result of the change, and the background change operation is performed. When the background mode is changed (changed) in the next special figure change of the executed special figure change, the display mode of the background notice effect is selected based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) of the next special figure change. It is good to configure it like this.

Returning to FIG. 412 (b), the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the ninth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the eighth control example described above in that a customer waiting flag 223 ga and a delay counter 223 gb are added, and the other parts are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The customer waiting flag 223ga is a flag for indicating that the current customer waiting period is set, and is set to be turned on when the customer waiting period is reached. The customer waiting flag 223ga is executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol). It is set to on in the setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) (see Z2734 in FIG. 418). In addition, when the game state is a time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) or probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), waiting for customers. In the effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 419), the delay counter is set to ON when the value of the delay counter 223 gb becomes 0 (see Z2761 in FIG. 419). Then, it is set to off when the special figure fluctuation is started.

In the ninth control example, the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is adjustable during the period when the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be on, and the player is informed that the volume is in an adjustable state. The notification display to be notified is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the customer waiting flag 223ga is also a flag for indicating a period in which the volume can be adjusted. Further, although a detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be turned on differs depending on the set gaming state, and the gaming state is the normal state. It is configured so that the customer waiting flag 223ga is less likely to be set to ON in the case of the time saving state or the probability change state than in the case of the time saving state or the probability change state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the notification display for notifying the player that the volume has become adjustable during the probability change state or the time saving state to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. it can. That is, the time saving state and the probabilistic change state are configured so that a shorter special figure fluctuation time can be easily set as compared with the normal state, and a period during which the special figure fluctuation is not temporarily executed may be set. However, since the time saving state and the probability change state are also game states in which a new special figure change is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the period in which the special figure change is not executed is likely to end in a short period of time. In such a state, if the customer waiting flag 223ga is frequently set to ON, the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be complicatedly switched, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. was there.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to be turned on unless a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses during the time saving state or the probability change state in which the special figure change is not executed. Therefore, the above-mentioned problem can be solved. The predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) required to set the customer waiting flag 223ga on during the time saving state or the probability change state is, for example, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (electric) executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. It is preferable to set a period longer than the period until the accessory 640a is opened and the ball enters the second entry port 640). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the customer waiting flag 223ga from being set to ON simply by continuously playing the game during the probability change state and the time saving state.

The delay counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the period from the end of the special figure fluctuation to the setting of the customer waiting flag 223ga on, and the customer waiting flag 223ga is set on during the probability change state and the time saving state. This is to delay the timing of the operation.

The delay counter 223 gb is in a probabilistic game state in the customer waiting setting process (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) executed in the fluctuation stop process 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) executed when the special figure variation is stopped. Alternatively, a predetermined period (5 seconds), which is a delay period, is set when the time is shortened (Z2733 in FIG. 418). Then, each time the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181 in FIG. 419) is executed, the value is subtracted (Z2759 in FIG. 419), and when the counter value becomes 0, the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (FIG. 419). 419 Z2761). As a result, the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be on in the probability change state or the time saving state can be delayed from the timing at which the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to be on in the normal state.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419. In the ninth control example, for the eighth control example described above, the customer waiting effect processing 9 (see Z2181 in FIG. 419) is monitored by inputting the frame button instead of the customer waiting effect processing executed in the main process. The difference is that the frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 is executed instead of the effect process 8 and the command determination process 9 is executed instead of the command determination process 8, and the other processes are the same. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 9 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 415. FIG. 415 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 9. As shown in FIG. 415, the main process 9 has a customer waiting effect process 9 (Z2181), a frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182), and a command determination process 9 (see FIG. 394). It differs in that Z2183) is executed, and is otherwise the same.

Regarding the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 9 (Z2182), the background change process (see FIG. 403) is performed with respect to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 (see Z2172 in FIG. 401) of the eighth control example described above. Only the background change process 9 which is a subroutine of the frame button input monitoring / effect process 9 (Z2182) is different because the background change process 9 (see Z2541 in FIG. 416) is executed instead of the Z2949). It will be described with reference to FIG. 416, and the other control contents (the same control contents as those of the eighth control example) will not be illustrated.

Further, regarding the command determination process 9 (Z2183), the command determination process 8 (see Z2174 of FIG. 395) of the eighth control example described above is replaced with the fluctuation stop process 8 (Z2242) which is a subroutine. Since the difference is only in that 9 (see Z2651 in FIG. 417) is executed, only the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 417, and the other control contents (same as the eighth control example) will be described. The control content) is not shown.

Next, the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541) will be described with reference to FIG. 416. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background change process 9 (Z2541). This background change process 9 (Z2541) corresponds to the background change process (Z2949 in FIG. 403) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that a process for setting the display mode of the background notice effect has been added.

When the background change process 9 (Z2541) is executed, the same processes of Z2963 to Z2967 as those of the background change process (see Z2949 of FIG. 403) are executed, and then the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2978). , The effect mode of the background advance notice effect is selected using the background advance notice selection table 222ga based on the acquired value of the effect counter 223h (Z2979). Then, a display background notice command indicating the effect mode selected in the Z2979 process is set, and this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display switching command set in the Z2967 process and the display background notice command set in the Z2980 process are set in the same process. It is output to the display control device 114 at the same timing, but the display control device 114 first executes the display using the image data based on the display background notice command, and then 0.5 seconds later. It is configured to execute display using image data based on the display switching command at intervals. As a result, the background notice effect can be executed before the background shift.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 417. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651). The fluctuation stop processing 9 (Z2651) is a customer waiting setting processing (Z2652) after finishing the processing of Z2266, Z2264, and Z2270 with respect to the fluctuation stop processing (see Z2242 of FIG. 397) of the eighth control example described above. The difference is that is executed, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (Z2652). In this customer waiting setting process (Z2652), a process for setting a customer waiting period is executed after the special figure fluctuation is stopped.

When the customer waiting setting process (Z2652) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold exists (Z2731). In this Z2731 process, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are both 0.

If it is determined that a special figure hold exists in the process of Z2731 (Z2731: Yes), the next special figure change is immediately executed, so the process for setting the customer waiting period is skipped. Then, this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2731 when it is determined that the special figure hold does not exist (Z2731: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probabilistic state (Z2732). When it is determined that the time is not shortened or the probability is not changed (normal state) (Z2732: No), the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2734), the display customer waiting command is set (Z2735), and the customer waiting command is set. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z2732 that the current state is a time saving state or a probable change state (Z2732: Yes), then a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the delay counter 223gb (Z2733), and this processing is terminated. To do. The value of the delay counter 223 gb set here is subtracted in the main process executed every 1 millisecond.

Next, the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181) will be described with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181). In this customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), when the value of the delay counter 223gb set in the customer waiting setting processing (see Z2652 in FIG. 418) is subtracted and the value of the delay counter 223gb becomes 0. The process of setting the customer waiting flag 223ga to on and the volume adjusting process when the volume button is operated while the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on are executed.

In the customer waiting effect processing 9 (Z2181), first, it is determined whether the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to ON (Z2751), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2751: Yes), the volume button is pressed. Among them, it is determined whether the upper button (right button) for raising the volume is operated (pressed) (Z2752). If it is determined that the upper button has been pressed (Z2752: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is increased by 1 (Z2753), and the display command indicating the volume after setting is set (Z2754). , End this process.

Further, when it is determined in the process of Z2752 that the upper button is not pressed (Z2752: No), it is determined whether the lower button (left button) for lowering the volume is operated (pressed) among the volume buttons (Z2752: No). Z2755). If it is determined that the down button has been pressed (Z2755: Yes), then the volume level is set so that the volume level is lowered by 1 (Z2756), and the display command indicating the set volume is set (Z2757). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2751 when it is determined that the customer waiting flag 223ga is not set to ON (Z2751: No), it is determined whether the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (1 or more) (1 or more). Z2758), if it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (0) (Z2758: No), since the special figure fluctuation is not currently stopped, this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of Z2758 that the value of the delay counter 223gb is larger than 0 (Z2758: Yes), then the value of the delay counter 223gb is subtracted by 1 (Z2759), and the value of the delay counter 223gb after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines if is 0 (Z2760). When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223 gb after subtraction is not 0, that is, the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds have not passed since the previous special figure change stopped. If (Z2760: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the value of the delay counter 223 gb is 0 in the processing of Z2760 (Z2760: Yes), the game state is in the probability change state or the time saving state, and 5 seconds after the previous special figure change is stopped. Is the elapsed timing, so the customer waiting flag 223ga is set to on (Z2761), the display customer waiting command is set (Z2762), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned Z2752 process.

<10th control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 to 427. In the tenth control example, the operation effect (cracking effect) for changing the effect mode based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 is executed for the ninth control example described above, and the third control example. The third symbol (variably displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation of the special symbol (special symbol)) which is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81, and the lottery result of the special symbol is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner according to the stop display mode. The difference is that the effect of shifting (changing) the background mode (background change effect) is executed based on the display mode of the decorative pattern for the purpose, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the production contents of the 10th control example>
Here, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, the contents of the characteristic effects will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example, unlike each of the above-described control examples, a crack cracking effect and a background change effect based on the display mode of the stop symbol are executed.

The cracking effect is to display a variable display mode imitating a plurality of cracks on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and display the variable display mode when the effect period in which the variable display mode can be changed elapses. It is an effect of switching the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol based on the aspect, based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) during the above-mentioned effect period, and the number of operations. It is configured so that the variable display mode can be changed.

With this configuration, the player actively operates the frame button 22, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in this control example, the variable contents of the variable display mode based on the second and subsequent frame button operations are configured to be different based on the first frame button operation timing executed during the effect period of the cracking effect. There is. Specifically, the number of operations on the frame button 22 for varying the number of "cracks" displayed as the variable display mode is configured to be different.

That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the number of "cracks" displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the number of times the frame button is operated, and the number of "cracks" is changed. Based on the number of "cracks" displayed at the end of the variable period, the subsequent effect mode (for example, the variable display effect (reach) executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. It is an effect that switches the development destination (display mode when the reach effect develops into a super reach effect) of the effect), and is the timing of the frame button operation for the predetermined number of times (the first operation timing in this control example). A condition is set in which the number of "cracks" is variable according to the above.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an effect based on both the operation timing to the operation means and the number of operations, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In the tenth control example, the variable pattern of the variable display mode is selected according to the timing of the first frame button operation executed during the cracking effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to select a variable pattern of the variable display mode after that according to the timing of the frame button operation from the second time onward. Further, in this control example, the fully variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode during the effect period is selected according to the timing of one frame button operation (first frame button operation). It may be configured to be partially selected.

Further, in the cracking effect of this control example, when the first frame button operation that is a factor for selecting the variable pattern (variable scenario) of the variable display mode is executed, it is assumed that the frame button operation is executed at what timing. Is also configured to display the same variable display mode (for example, a display mode in which one "crack" is displayed). That is, in the cracking effect of this control example, the first frame button operation informs the player that the cracking effect has been executed in an easy-to-understand manner, and is based on the first frame button operation. It is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the variable scenario of the selected variable display mode.

As a result, it is possible to play the game while paying close attention to how the cracking effect progresses. In addition, in the cracking effect of this control example, the ratio of selecting the variable pattern of the variable display mode is different based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the cracking effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the cracking effect of this control example, the first effect period (5 seconds) and the second effect after the lapse of the first effect period are set as the effective period in which the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22). A period (10 seconds) is set, and by executing an operation (first frame button operation) for selecting a variable pattern in the variable display mode during the first production period, the variable pattern in the variable display mode is executed. Is configured to be selected. Therefore, if the frame button operation is not executed during the first effect period, the crack effect is terminated at that point (clear the setting of the second effect period and switch to an effect other than the crack effect). This is the reason. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22 from being notified of the effect of urging the operation of the frame button 22 for a long time.

In addition, when the frame button operation (first frame button operation) is executed during the first production period, the second and subsequent frame button operations are accepted immediately after that (even during the remaining period of the first production period). It is configured in. As a result, it is possible to give continuity to the plurality of frame button operations executed during the cracking effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

The background change effect is an effect of changing the background mode when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a specific combination. In this control example, when the display control device 114 receives the stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of stop symbols). Is configured to determine.

Therefore, the background change symbol type command for indicating the stop mode determined by the display control device 114 is configured to be received by the voice lamp control device 113, and when the background change symbol type command is received, it is included in the command. It is configured to determine whether or not to change the background mode based on the stopped symbol information. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special figure is out of order, the player can be interested in which stop mode the outlier is displayed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 You can enjoy the production performed on the display screen of.

Further, it is the first to determine in advance whether or not to change the background mode, and to notify the player that the background is to be changed based on the determination result that the determination results in changing the background mode. 3 Unlike the conventional pachinko machine that stops and displays the symbol (the background change notification symbol is stopped and displayed), it is determined whether to execute the background change according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed. That is, the stop mode of the third symbol is configured to trigger the background change lottery. Therefore, for example, it is possible to facilitate control such as changing the ease of changing the background or changing the background change destination based on the stop mode of the third symbol and the set game state. ..

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine the stop mode of the third symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special drawing lottery is missed, the player By operating the operating means, the stop mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be variably selected. With this configuration, the stopping mode can be changed based on the operation result of the player, so that the motivation to participate in the game can be increased. Further, in this case, it is better to make it easier to change the background when the player operates the operating means than when the player does not operate the operating means at all. For example, the background is changed only when the operating means is operated. It is preferable to configure so that the stop mode of the third symbol to be executed is displayed. As a result, the player can be more motivated to participate in the production.

<About the electrical configuration of the 10th control example>
First, the electrical configuration of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 420 and 421. FIG. 420 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example, and FIG. 420 (b) is a schematic view of the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents specified in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 420 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example is used when selecting the effect mode of the cracking effect with respect to the ROM 222 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the cracking effect selection table 222ha is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a schematic view showing the contents specified in the cracking effect selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 421, the cracking effect selection table 222ha shows the lottery result (win / fail judgment result) of the special figure variation in which the cracking effect is executed, and the first frame button operation during the SW valid period of the cracking effect. Depending on the operation (pressing) timing of the operation (pressing) and the acquired value of the SW special effect counter 223ha, different production modes of the cracking effect (the number of times the frame button is operated to increase the number of cracks) are defined.

Specifically, when the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit) and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is The effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the effect B is specified in the range of "40 to 89", and the effect C is specified in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, the specific contents of each effect type defined in the cracking effect selection table 222ha will be described. In the production type A, the number of frame button operations required for the second crack is set to "5", and the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack is set to "10". In the scenario, the number of frame button operations required to crack the second production type B is set to "7", and the number of frame button operations required to crack the third (MAX) is set to "15". In the scenario shown, the production type C requires "10" for the number of frame button operations required for the second crack to occur, and "25" for the number of frame button operations required for the third (MAX) crack. This is the scenario set in.

That is, the number of times the number of cracks is changed by the second and subsequent frame button operations is variable according to the effect mode of the cracking effect set based on the timing of the first frame button operation. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how much the frame button operation is performed to change the crack, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the crack cracking effect selection table 222ha shown in FIG. 421, only the effect type in which the third crack is always displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 the required number of times is shown, but in reality, No matter how many times the frame button 22 is operated, the effect type in which the second crack is not displayed and the effect type in which the third crack is not displayed are also defined. In this way, by defining the production type in which the cracks are difficult to change and the production type in which the cracks are not variable, even if the production type in which the cracks are not variable is set, the frame button operation can be expected until the end. Can be done.

A description will be given by returning to FIG. 421. The hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). In this case, the effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 19" and the effect B is specified in the range of "20 to 79", and the value of the SW special effect counter ha is specified in the range of "80 to 99". , Production C is specified.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds, the value of the SW special effect counter ha is "0 to 29". The effect type A is defined in the range, the effect B is specified in the range of "30 to 89", and the effect D is specified in the range of "90 to 99". Then, when the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect and the value of the SW special effect counter 223ha corresponds to a value other than 0 to 1 second or 3 to 4 seconds (range of 1 second to 3 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds). The effect type A is defined in the range of "0 to 4", the effect B is specified in the range of "5 to 79", and the value of the SW special effect counter ha is specified in the range of "80 to 99". Direction D is specified.

Next, the configuration of the RAM of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 420 (b). As shown in FIG. 420 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example has a SW effect counter 223h, a button pressing counter 223hb, and cracks with respect to the RAM 223 of the ninth control example described above. The difference is that the crack information storage area 223hc is added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The SW effect counter 223ha is a counter used for selecting a crack effect. Every time the main process is executed, 1 is added in the range of 0 to 198 and the update is repeated.

The button pressing counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and a value is added by 1 each time the frame button 22 is operated. In the cracking effect executed in the tenth control example, the effect mode (variable display of the number of cracks) corresponding to the set effect type is executed based on the value of the button pressing counter 223hb.

The crack information storage area 223hc is a storage area for temporarily storing the effect type selected by using the crack effect selection table 222ha.

<Regarding the control content of the audio lamp control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 to 426. The same control contents as those of the above-mentioned control examples are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main process 10 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 10. As shown in FIG. 422, in the main process 10, the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 is changed to the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 with respect to the main process 8 of the eighth control example described above, and a command. The difference is that the determination process 8 is changed to the command determination process 10, and the rest is the same.

Next, the contents of the command determination process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 423. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 10. The command determination process 10 is different from the above-mentioned command determination process 8 in that a control process when a background change symbol command is received is added, and is the same except for the command determination process 8. The details of this background change symbol command will be described later, but this command is a command output from the display control device 114, and is a stop mode of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Information for indicating the combination position of each third symbol at the time of stop) is included.

When the command determination process 10 is executed, the same processes of Z2201 to Z2208 as those of the command determination process 8 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the background change symbol command has been received (Z7201). When it is determined that the background change symbol command has been received in the processing of Z7201 (Z7201: Yes), the background mode is added by 1 and set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z7202), and the variation corresponding to the set background mode is set. A command for switching the display to the pattern is set (Z7203), and this process ends.

That is, in the tenth control example, the process of changing the background mode is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the stop mode of the third symbol set by the display control device 114. In this way, by determining whether or not to switch the background mode according to the stop mode of the third symbol that is actually stopped and displayed, even if the result of the special drawing lottery is wrong, which The player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the stop mode.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 424. FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing 10 is different in that the SW special process executed for the frame button input monitoring / effect process 8 described above is changed to the SW effect process 10, and is the same except for that. is there. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the cracking effect end process (Z2896) executed in the frame button input monitoring / effect process 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 425. FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing the contents of the cracking effect end processing (Z2896). In this cracking effect end process (Z2896), when a specific period elapses in the cracking effect, a process for setting a subsequent effect mode is executed.

When the cracking effect end process (Z2896) is executed, first, the value of the SW effective time counter is acquired, and whether 5 seconds have passed since the start of the cracking effect (whether the elapsed time has reached 5 seconds) is determined. When it is determined (Z7002) and it is determined that it is not 5 seconds (Z7002: No), then it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed (whether the elapsed time has reached 15 seconds) (Z7006). Here, if it is determined that 15 seconds have not elapsed (Z7006: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z7002 that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (Z7002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the button press counter 223hb is larger than 0 (Z7003), and it must be larger than 0. If it is determined (Z7003: No), a display effect command indicating the end of the crack effect is set (Z7004), and the values of the SW effective time counter 223k and the button press counter 223hb are cleared (set to 0). End the process.

If it is determined in the processing of Z7003 that the value of the button pressing counter 223b is larger than 0 (Z7003: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined that 15 seconds have passed in the processing of Z7006 (Z7006: Yes), a display switching command corresponding to the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is set (Z7007), and the value of the button pressing counter 223hb is cleared. (Z7008), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the SW effect processing 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 426. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the contents of the SW effect processing 10. The SW effect processing 10 is different from the SW effect process described above in that a process related to a cracking effect is added. Since the other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the SW effect processing 10 is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101), and if it is determined that the SW effect is not a crack effect (Z7101: No), the above is described. The same control as the SW effect processing of the eighth control example is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of Z7101 that the set SW effect is a crack effect (Z7101: Yes), next, information indicating the effect mode of the crack effect in the crack information storage area 223hc (Z7101: Yes). It is determined whether the data) is stored (Z7102).

In the processing of Z7102, if it is determined that the information (data) indicating the effect mode of the cracking effect is already stored in the cracking information storage area 223hc, the value of the (Z7102: Yes) button pressing counter 223hb is added by 1. (Z7106), the crack effect type set in the crack information storage area 223 hc is read (Z7107), and the effect mode corresponding to the read effect type and the value of the button press counter 223 hb (variable number of cracks effect, Set a display effect command to indicate the fan effect), and end this process.

If it is determined that there is no data in the processing of Z7102 (Z7102: No), then the value of the SW effect counter 223ha is acquired, the crack effect selection table 222ha is read out (Z7104), and the SW when the button is pressed. Based on the value of the effective time counter and the acquired value of the SW effect counter 223ha, the corresponding crack effect type is determined, set in the crack information storage area (Z7105), and the corresponding display effect command is set (Z7108). , End this process.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the 10th control example>
Next, the control process of the display control device 114 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 427. The control content of the display control device 114 of this control example is different from the control content of the eighth control example described above in that the stop type command process 8 is changed to the stop type command process 10, and the rest is the same. Is. The same control contents are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command process 10 (Z3496). In the stop type command process 10 (Z3496), a command (background change symbol command) for outputting information about the stop symbol set in the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

When the stop type command process 10 (Z3496) is executed, first, the same Z3601 and Z3602 processes as the stop type command process 8 described above are executed, and then the stop symbol set in the Z3602 process changes the background. It is determined whether or not it is a stop symbol indicating (Z8001). If it is determined in the process of Z8001 that the symbol is not the stop symbol for executing the background change, the stop symbol determination flag is set to on, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the Z8001 process that the stop symbol indicates a background change, the background change symbol command is set (Z8002), the stop symbol determination flag is set to ON (Z3603), and this process is performed. finish.

<Technical concept to be added to each of the above control examples>
Next, a new technical idea to be added to each of the above-mentioned control examples will be described. In each of the control examples described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained by a liquid crystal effect using the third symbol display device 81 and an accessory effect using a movable accessory for the effect provided in the vicinity of the variable display device unit 80. , Was configured to perform a suggestive effect to suggest to the player.

Specifically, when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command including information indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is used. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal effect and the effect mode of the accessory effect based on the information indicating the lottery result of the special figure included.

The liquid crystal effect set here is output to the display control device 114 as an effect command for display, and the display control device 114 creates various image data to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, regarding the accessory effect, a drive scenario for driving the movable accessory in a predetermined motion is set, and the drive means (drive motor) for moving the movable accessory is set based on the set drive scenario. Drive control is executed.

In this way, based on one piece of information (fluctuation pattern command), data for liquid crystal effect and data for accessory effect are created, and a plurality of effect devices (third) are created based on the created data. When performing an effect on the symbol display device 81, a movable accessory), it is possible to execute a more interesting effect by synchronizing the effects executed by each effect device. Since data related to the production is output to different production devices, there is a problem that it is difficult to synchronize the production contents executed by each production device.

In particular, in the accessory effect of moving a movable accessory configured to be movable between the initial position and the movable position, it is necessary to perform a preparatory operation for moving the movable accessory to the initial position after the accessory effect is completed. Therefore, when executing an effect on a plurality of effect devices based on one piece of information (variation pattern command), consider the position of the movable accessory at the time when the effect corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed. If the production is executed without any effect, there is a problem that the liquid crystal production and the character production are different from each other.

Therefore, in the present technical idea, the position of the movable accessory is determined when setting the suggestion effect based on the variation pattern command, and the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect are executed based on the determination result (composite). It is configured to set the content (effect mode) of the effect). With this configuration, it is possible to execute a composite effect in which the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect do not deviate from each other.

When the contents of the effect (composite effect) for executing the liquid crystal effect and the accessory effect are set differently according to the position of the movable accessory, for example, the movable accessory is located at the initial position. If it is determined that there is, a predetermined compound effect (for example, a compound effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed, and the movable accessory can move to the initial position within 1 second. If it is determined to be (state), a predetermined composite effect (composite effect executed 10 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation) is executed with a delay of 1 second, and the movable accessory is initially within 1 second. When it is determined that the position (state) is movable to the position, various effects may be set so as to execute the suggestion effect of only the liquid crystal effect without moving the movable accessory. As a result, various effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, as the accessory effect for moving the movable accessory, the first accessory effect executed with the predetermined first position as the initial position and the second position different from the first position as the end position, and the above-mentioned first accessory effect. If it is a pachinko machine that can at least execute the 1st position and the 2nd character effect that is executed with the 3rd position different from the 2nd position as the initial position and the 2nd position described above as the end position, the combined effect It may be configured to determine whether to execute the first accessory effect or the second accessory effect based on the position of the movable accessory at the timing of setting the contents of.

Further, in this case, regardless of the fluctuation of the special figure, it is preferable to configure it so that the movable accessory can be brought closer to the first position or the third position based on the operation of the frame button 22. This allows the player to select the position of the movable accessory when the composite effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the composite effect desired by the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In the above-mentioned technical idea, the description is given by giving an example of setting the content of the suggestion effect based on the fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit medium effect (for example, the big hit game) executed during the big hit game It suggests the effect that suggests the game state set after the end of the game, and the lottery result of the special figure change executed after the end of the big hit game (the result of pre-determination of the winning information corresponding to the reserved symbols acquired by the end of the big hit game). It may be applied when setting the content of the effect).

In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, a production (fanning effect) is provided in which the movable accessory can be moved by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22) during a specific period (for example, during a jackpot game). In the case of a pachinko machine that is configured to allow the player to enthusiastically operate the operating means, the position of the movable accessory becomes indefinite when the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed. The above-mentioned problems were likely to occur. However, by using this technical idea, various effects can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, conventionally, as a technical idea for solving the above-mentioned problems that may occur when executing the above-mentioned compound effect, regardless of the position (state) of the movable accessory at the time of setting the compound effect. , There is a technical idea that the period (preparation period) in which the movable accessory can be moved to the initial position of the accessory effect is included in the first half period of the compound effect.

When such a technical idea is used, it is possible to execute a composite effect in which the liquid crystal effect and the movable effect are synchronized, but the effect content of the compound effect executed depending on the movement status of the movable accessory during the preparation period is There was a problem that the player would notice it. In particular, as a composite effect, the first compound effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the first position, and the accessory effect is executed with the movable accessory positioned at the second position. If the pachinko machine has a second composite effect and is configured to have a different selection ratio between the first composite effect and the second composite effect according to the lottery result of the special symbol, it can be moved during the preparation period. Since the player can easily determine whether the accessory moves to the first position or the second position, it becomes easier for the player to determine the lottery result of the special symbol, which is a directing effect ( There was a problem that the effect of the composite effect) was reduced.

In order to solve such a problem, in the present technical idea, at a time before setting the composite effect (before determining whether or not the compound effect is executed). , It is configured to execute the control to execute the preparatory operation for moving the movable accessory to the first position or the second position.

In this way, by configuring the preparatory movement to be set separately from the setting of the composite effect, when the preparatory operation of the movable accessory is executed for the player, the compound effect (character effect) is performed. It can make you think that it will be executed later. In addition, since the preparatory movement is executed regardless of whether or not the compound effect (character effect) is executed, the presence or absence of the compound effect and the lottery result of the special symbol are determined according to the movement status of the movable accessory during the preparation period. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is determined by the player.

In the case of using the technical idea of setting the character effect and the preparatory movement differently in this way, for example, based on the determination result of the advance determination means for pre-determining the winning information stored in the hold. For example, in a part of the case where it is determined that the compound effect is executed in the special figure variation executed after two fluctuations, or the compound effect is not executed in the special figure variation executed in two fluctuation degrees. 2 It is preferable to set the preparatory operation so that the preparatory operation is executed before the special figure change after the fluctuation is executed.

Further, when a determination means for determining whether or not to execute the preparatory operation is provided when a specific operation is executed for the operation means (frame button 22), and the determination means determines to execute the preparatory operation. It may be configured to perform a preparatory operation. In this case, it is preferable that the operation effect can be executed only when the movable accessory is located at the initial position of the operation effect at the timing of setting the operation effect. As a result, the probability that the composite effect is executed can be changed depending on whether or not the player operates the operating means, so that the player can operate the operating means more positively. Further, the operation timing to the operation means in which the above-mentioned determination means is used is set as a suggestion effect suggesting a lottery result of the previous special figure change executed before the special figure change in which the operation effect is executed, for example. When an effect suggesting that the lottery result of the previous special figure variation is out of order is executed as a result of operating the operation means by fusing with the effect of operating, the determination means determines that the preparatory operation is executed. It is good to configure.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player operate the operating means for performing the preparatory operation without discomfort. Further, since it is possible to execute the preparatory operation of the movable accessory while the suggestion effect suggesting the lottery result of the change in the previous special figure is being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the movable accessory It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the object is moving.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect is used. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. A light emitting effect for notifying the user may be used.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a notification effect for surely grasping the content of the player and a suggestion effect for the player to implicitly inform the content are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different depending on the set value.

Further, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easy to be selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command for indicating the jackpot type (command for indicating the lottery result) output from the main control device 110 or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be used. When it is received, the currently set setting value may be determined from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, unlike each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when the configuration in which the above-mentioned set value can be set is used, the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol is changed according to the set set value for each set value. Various parameters may be specified, and if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the lottery of the other special symbol different from the symbol is advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including that it is advantageous to the player.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the shift distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent early getting bored with the game.

Further, the probability change state is set to be a specification that continues until the change display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special symbol changes, and the lottery is performed. By winning the lottery, the configuration may be such that the probability change state is changed to the normal game state. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal game state is different. You may try to do it.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high-probability state of a normal symbol, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, the time-saving when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the variable number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied. Then, it may be configured so that the high-probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low-probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the change of the special symbol, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time saving ending condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition to be established, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods for which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on winning the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on.

In each of the above control examples, the hold ball number command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, so that the main control device 110 and The control load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, in the third symbol, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and during the normal state. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. May be used, and it is possible to determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth to determine that it has been operated by a lever-shaped operating means or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a combination of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (commonly known as a setting) is provided in a plurality of stages and the setting can be changed on the game store side. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a setting of a plurality of stages, a combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a probabilistic state) may be one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the ratio of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of a jackpot can be changed according to the setting as a pachinko machine. You may. That is, the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of determining the type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio at which the jackpot with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. The degree of advantage for each setting may be changed by changing the ratio according to the setting. Further, for example, the rate at which a large number of time reductions (for example, 100 times) is determined after the end of the big hit is changed according to the setting, or a small number of time reductions (for example, 0 times) is given. The ratio at which is determined may be changed according to the setting. Further, the rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift to) an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) after the end of the jackpot is determined can be changed according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) can be changed. The rate at which the jackpot that shifts to (or is easy to shift) to) is determined may be changed according to the setting. In addition, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided in which the ratio determined only in a specific setting is significantly increased (almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be configurable in 6 steps from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set 6. Then, in setting 6, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% in the case of a jackpot, while in other settings, the jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. It may be configured. With this configuration, when the jackpot finishes in 6 rounds, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to pay attention to the number of jackpot rounds to play the game. be able to. Alternatively, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time reductions are given after the jackpot ends may be set to be higher than in other settings. With this configuration, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition to or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or an accessory inside the jackpot) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured to be provided so that the jackpot type can be easily determined by a specific setting (the ratio of determination is high). In addition, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is advantageous to the player, while in the probabilistic state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured to increase the jackpot probability as much as possible. This configuration is a type in which the number of balls held is likely to increase as the number of lottery of special symbols increases, especially in the probabilistic state (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to increase more than the number of game balls fired). It is effective in a game machine. More specifically, for example, by applying it to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit is won, and the probability change state is a small hit with a high probability, the advantage of the high setting is achieved. You can improve your sex. That is, if the probability of winning a big hit in the probabilistic state is low, the number of lottery until the next big hit tends to increase, so that there are many chances to win a prize ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game property in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Point where the player's pushing direction is from the back to the front)
In an operation device having an operation means for the player to push in, the operation device is arranged at a first state in a normal state and a position where the operation means projects from the first state with respect to the player. Two states can be configured, and the operating means is provided with an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side for the player. A game machine A1 characterized in that the direction is directed toward the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the effect is performed in a manner that raises the expectation of the big hit to the player at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , It was necessary to design the strength of the operating means to be high. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that the player moves straight up and down. Then, the momentum of pushing can be released by causing the part that cannot be operated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means.

In addition, from the player's playing posture, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force toward the front, so the force applied by the player to the operating means should be naturally weakened. Can be done.

In the game machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about a shaft rod arranged on the back side of the player, is configured to be tilted up and down around the shaft rod, and has the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, the tilting means arranging the operating means in the second state toward the opposite direction of the player.

According to the game machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and the operating means are arranged in the opposite direction of the player in the second state, so that the game is played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from hitting an operating means.

In addition, by placing a hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method in which the acceleration of pushing is hard to be attached can be provided. , It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new pushing operation method is, for example, to place the outer side surface of the left little finger near the shaft rod and place the hand near the operating means with the palm raised in the vertical direction, and then turn the thumb side toward the operating means. Examples include a method of operating by tilting the palm, and a method of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft rod and the palm is arranged so as to face the operating means. Will be done.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is the vertical direction.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the second state is ensured while ensuring the operability in the first state. It is possible to prevent destruction by pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operating device includes a driving means for generating the driving force for the automatic operation while the operating means is configured to be automatically operable, and the driving force of the driving device is pushed by the player. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it acts in the direction in which it acts and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operating device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is in the direction opposite to the operating direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pushed in, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and a maintenance means for operating by the drive means is provided, and the drive means is provided via an eccentric portion. The operating means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force, and the rotating means can change the phase between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in the maintenance state. In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation causes the operation means to move. A game machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is kept in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. By using the means, the movement width in which the operating device moves can be changed by the urging means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the urging means.

In the game machine A5, the maintenance means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintenance state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotation speed of the rotating means. The gaming machine A6 configured in such a manner that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was caused only by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. As a result, the degree of attention of the operating device can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the second state is provided as a light emitting means which is arranged inside the operation device and irradiates light toward the player, as compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, a light emitting means is provided, and the second state is irradiated by the light emitting means from the player's viewpoint as compared with the first state. Since the irradiation range of the light to be emitted is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operating means without aiming. It is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation by adopting the mode.

In the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means changes as the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. A featured gaming machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the operating means moves away from the display means in close proximity to the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion of the above changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image of the display means difficult to see.

<Characteristic B group> (Points where the repulsive force during normal operation is small while enabling the response to repeated hits)
In an operating device having an operating means capable of allowing a player to operate up to the terminal position, the first state and the second state in which the range of motion of the operation to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
It is provided with a first driving means capable of forming a state and generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and an urging means for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. The game machine B1 is characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operating means from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the player.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the driving motor automatically operates the operating means. However, it is better to lower the elastic constant of the spring to drive the motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous striking operation. There was a problem.

According to the game machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means, but when it is desired to speed up the return of the operating means, the first 2
By pushing back the operating means with the driving means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous striking operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with a continuous striking discriminating means for determining whether or not a continuous striking operation is performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke operating means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is determined by the detection value of the continuous striking discriminating means. A game machine B2 characterized in that it is determined whether or not to drive it.

According to the game machine B2, since it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means, the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the load of pushing his / her hand back by operating the second driving means even when the player is performing an operation or the like.

In the game machine B2, the terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. The movement direction determination means is provided with the position difference detecting means for detecting and the movement direction determination means for determining the movement direction of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the above is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push end to the first state, that is, the player's hand is from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand and applying a high load to the player's hand.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along the direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A mode in which a supporting means is provided, and the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight comes into contact with the support frame in a state where the operating means is arranged at the terminal position to generate a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force given to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the rotation of the drive motor to start or stop, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained while being maintained.

In the game machine B5, the eccentric weight operates close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means based on the operation means being arranged at the terminal position, and comes into contact with the support frame. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Then, the drive motor can be moved in the direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (direction closer to the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration effecting device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the terminal position of the operating means is provided, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, a measuring means for measuring the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, and the measuring means. The threshold determination means is provided with a threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the above is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means for generating a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means. When the measured threshold value is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means increases as compared with the case where the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player emphasizes that the operation can be performed lightly, the operation resistance becomes low and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. On the other hand, if the operation means is firmly supported, the movement of the operation means itself is affected. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility that the operating means is damaged can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the operation of the player increases and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for the weak player. ..

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold value determining means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold value, and if the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsive means is increased. Therefore, the operating resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsive means can improve the operability and prevent the destruction.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determining means is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extension position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

The game machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the game machine C1 or C2 is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1 or C2, the operation means is controlled by increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other. While suppressing the generation of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking of the operating means can be gradually improved, and the discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operating means, and a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operating means is generated by spring elasticity. ..

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the repulsive means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that the driving force is not delayed even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the game machine C4, the repulsion means is compared when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value and when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the movable region of the end portion of the repulsive means and the end portion on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsive means on the opposite side of the side that comes into contact with the operation means is narrowed, so that the operation of the operation means is operated. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsive means can be increased.

<Feature D group> (Prevents damage to the driving means by blocking the transmission of driving force with a clutch)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force is provided, and the release means of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A game machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421).
See Publication No. 8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for the production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means when the operating means is automatically operated, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in the first direction and driving in the second direction opposite to the first direction, and is driving in the first direction. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is in the second direction.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depending on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player when the driving means is driven in an operating direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the production when the operation means is operated to produce the production is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or reverse. Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, it is possible to create two modes of button operation (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but it is necessary that the driving force is interrupted in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means.

As a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch moves in a direction intersecting the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction means, for example, excluding the circumferential direction when the driving means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The game machine D1 or D2 includes an urging means that urges the driving means and the transmitting means into a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. The engaging teeth are provided with engaging teeth that transmit a driving force in a state in which they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth have both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means from the contact surface. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is formed in a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers as the distance increases.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means applies a driving force in a meshed state on the pressed contact surface. On the other hand, since both sides facing the operating direction of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined so as to taper away from the contact surface, the transmitting means can be transmitted from the driving means by engaging the engaging teeth with each other. It can be separated, whereby the transmission of the driving force can be released.

Further, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means separates from the driving means, the urging force is applied to the operating direction of the driving means via the engaging teeth. A load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the driving means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored instead of being separated and completely eliminated. As a result, when the player releases his hand, the button can be started to operate within a short time.

That is, when the button is driven "as an effect", if the player holds the button,
One phase of button operation has passed. Then, if the player releases his hand in the middle and moves from the end of the one phase, the period in which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The feeling that the player has started to move because the load on the player has been released is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of movement because the load on the player has been released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the engaging surface between the transmitting means and the releasing means is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from a sawtooth shape that engages with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmitting means and the releasing means are close to each other, the transmitting means and the releasing means abut on the plane to transmit the releasing means. It is possible to prevent the movement from being stopped along the direction of approaching and separating from the means. Therefore, the operation means can be started at an early stage after the load from the player is released.

In any of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs depending on whether the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction or the driving means is continuously operated in the opposite direction. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission is released without being limited to any of the operation modes. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation mode of the operation means whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operation means for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the lapse of a predetermined period is different.

According to the game machine D6, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the operation mode of the drive means is the same for a predetermined period from the start of the operation. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operating means can be improved.

Here, by entwining the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means is performed by the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over.

Further, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation degree without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be done. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from the vibration sound or the like. Therefore, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and the player cannot confirm the operating direction. Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Feature E group> (The position of the protrusion of the cam is changed based on the rotation of the cam)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the like. A first means that is configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position and suppresses the position of the operating means from changing from the first position. , An urging means that urges the operating means from the first position toward the second position, and an operating means that moves the operating means from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means. In a gaming machine including a terminal means for forming a movable end of the above in a changeable manner, the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and the first means is said to be. The first means is provided with a release load means for giving a load for disengagement of one means from the operation means to the first means, disengagement by the release load means, and movement termination of the operation means in the termination means. Game machine E, characterized in that the change is performed by a single drive means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at the first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the urging force of the urging means is used to extend the operation. , There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging motion can be changed by a terminal means (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhanging operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the arrangement space of the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixation of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. As a result, the number of drive means can be reduced because the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means can be used in combination.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. Therefore, the release is performed by detecting the operation amount of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of arrangements of the detection means such as the position sensor for detecting the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle between the cam and the protrusion is used. , When the cam is placed in a predetermined phase, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are out of sync, and in other phases, the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion are synchronized.
Illustrated.

In the game machine E2, the release load means is subjected to the load given by the first means.
The gaming machine E3 is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the release load means is operably arranged with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate in synchronization, the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means rotates a second rotation. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member and characterized in that the rotation period of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but since the rotation cycles are different, the second rotating means is predetermined. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by abutting with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of terminal positions when the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operating means is maintained at the first position and the operating means is moved toward the second position. ,
The range of production can be expanded. For example, an effect of gradually moving the terminal position away from the first position and an effect of gradually moving the terminal position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Characteristic F group> (Vibration device supported by soft case)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position of the operating means and a second position reached by the operating means when the player operates from the first position. In a gaming machine including a vibrating means having a vibrating portion that is movable between and vibrating and a receiving means that is arranged so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, the operating means is arranged at the first position. When this is done, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, while when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibrating portion can come into contact with the receiving means. A game machine F1 characterized in being in contact with each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means that can be operated by the player and a vibrating means that transmits vibration to the player through the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,).
(See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the conventional game machine described above, when the vibrating means vibrates regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the game machine. Or, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operating means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibrating means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation such as releasing the operating means at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). Depending on the mode), the start of vibration may not be in time before the hand is released, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion comes into contact with the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged in the first position or is operated by the player and arranged in the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion is generated before the player pushes in, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the operation mode of the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the game machine F1, the vibrating means is arranged so as to project over an occupied area occupied when the operating means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operating means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the vibrating means is brought out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the vibrating means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the separated state changes to the contacting state. Therefore, depending on the degree of movement of the operating means. The contact strength between the operating means or receiving means and the vibrating part can be changed.
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operating strength of the player can be performed by vibrating the vibrating means in the same manner without any particular change in the driving mode.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibrating means at the time of vibration can be suppressed.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating portion moves in the direction close to the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the supporting means has a deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operating means.
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is lowered as compared with the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means is deformed can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in the deformation resistance of the support means. it can.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is slight, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. ..

As a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the supporting means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending the rubber legs along the operating direction of the operating means, or a method of supporting the vibrating means surrounding the vibrating means. In the case of being composed of rubber members, a method of manufacturing the rubber members by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a rail that guides the operating means so that the operating means move in the direction along the operating direction. , A method of configuring the coil spring that urges the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means, and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine F3, the portion that the vibrating portion comes into contact with is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means different from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means different from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, so that it is possible to prevent the driving means from being loaded. Thereby, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

In addition, as a receiving means, for example, in the frame part of the game machine, the part near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc., the player does not notice during the game. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a storage part that partially surrounds the operating means, and the like.

<Feature G group> (One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part)
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operating means can be moved. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for generating a driving force to be driven and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, and the transmitting means includes a deformed portion elastically deformed by an overload. Game machine G1 to play.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means are provided. There is a gaming machine provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218).
.. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operating means, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means or
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operating device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmitting means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operating means and the transmitting means and the driving means and the transmitting means are connected. The load given to the connecting portion with and can be relaxed.

In the game machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, and the deformed portion constitutes a connecting portion of the cam member with a rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deformed portion causes the deformed portion to move to the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of the above is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deformed portion serves as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion generating a bearing force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft.
To be equipped. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by combining the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the game machine G2, the cam member includes a convex portion that is projected in parallel with the rotation axis, and the convex portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is applied to the cam member. On the other hand, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotation axis is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to form the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is such that the rotation axis is tilted with respect to the cam member, so that the convex portion is used as the cam member. On the other hand, as compared with the case of sliding movement, the cam member can be easily configured from a single member, and the member can be simplified.

In the game machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is compared with the rotation shaft in the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the deformation resistance is larger in the second rotation direction in which the straight line connecting the convex portion and the straight line perpendicular to both the extension direction of the rotation axis are rotated about the axis. G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformed part different for each direction, the state after the deformed part is elastically deformed in the direction of rotation axis is better. Compared with the state before elastic deformation, the convex tip of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member intends to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means due to the elastic deformation of the deformed portion is alleviated. can do.

In the game machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided that is spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformed portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the cam member and the friction member come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformed portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member changes its posture, and the cam member and the friction member Therefore, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, and thus the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means can be reduced.

The game machine G6 is characterized in that any one of the game machines G3 to G5 includes a detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means. When detecting that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the configuration of the detection means becomes and the more expensive it becomes. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to configure the configuration to detect the occurrence of overload at an early stage at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted and displaced with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without having to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristic H group> (Structure to prevent ball lumps with thread)
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which a foul ball returning to the launching device can pass among the game balls launched into the game area, the foul ball passage allows the flowing game ball to pass through. The gaming machine H1 is provided with a one-way obstructing means for obstructing the progress of a backflowing object.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a fraudulent act performed by arranging a thread trimming blade inside a guide path for guiding the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball to which the thread is connected into the game area. There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-02).
See Publication No. 4179). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread trimming teeth at the time of firing, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. However, when the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the game ball cannot be completely cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool in which game balls are connected to both ends of the thread is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the thread is fired with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side. By driving the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread into the game area while holding one of the game balls, the thread can be removed from the guide path and one through the foul ball passage. Since it is possible to create a state in which the game ball of 1 and the other game ball are connected by a thread, a load is applied to the thread connected to the other game ball from the outside, and the other game ball arranged in the game area. There was a problem that there was a risk of gaining fraudulent profits by manipulating.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage, the one-way obstruction means. However, by obstructing the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent profits.

In the game machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bent portion that bends a flow path of the game ball.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut at an early stage.

In the game machine H2, the bent portion is provided with a load means on the inner angle side of the bend, which does not give a load to the flowing game ball but gives a load to the backflowing object.
..

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, a load can be applied to a backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the load means is arranged in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the load means and the game ball are prevented from colliding with each other, and the load means is damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine H3 or H4 is characterized in that the gaming machine H5 is provided with a regulating means for restricting the movement of the loading means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3 or H4, the regulation means restricts the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that between the thread-like member and the load means. When a load is generated, the load means is deformed to the outside of the foul ball passage, so that it is possible to prevent the load applied to the member on the thread from being weakened.

In any of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving dish, which is a dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided, and the receiving dish is a portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharging portion is arranged above the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H5, the game ball paid out from the payout device passes in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, thereby passing through the foul ball passage. When a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball is performed using the thread guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the thread. be able to.

In any of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is the portion for discharging the game ball to be paid out from the payout device, to the receiving dish, which is the dish on which the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door. , The gaming machine H7, characterized in that it is located below the lower end of the outlet on the discharge side of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of imposing a load on the other game ball was performed by using the thread guided to the game area through the foul ball passage. In some cases, the payout ball can make the thread more susceptible to damage.

<Feature I group> (Structure of board retainer)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and being able to accept the gaming means from that one side are provided, and the receiving means includes the gaming means. A state changing means capable of changing the gaming means from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to a usable state, which is a usable state, is provided, and the state changing means puts the gaming means into the used state. The game machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is close to the game means from one side.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a release state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with fixing means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured so that the state can be changed only after the game board is pushed into the position in use. Therefore, when the game board is pushed halfway, it is pushed again. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform the repetitive work, and the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means that is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the game board is pushed. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes into contact with the game board and applies a pushing force, so that
It has the effect of pushing the game board to the position where it is in use.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to one side as the state changes to an unusable state that makes the game means unusable. ..

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to an unusable state, so that the game means is removed. It has the effect of improving the work efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means is characterized in that the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means when the game means is made unusable. Game machine I3 to play.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1 or I2, since the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the game means, the work efficiency of the removal work of the game means can be improved, and the game can be improved. Since this is performed by disabling the means, the work efficiency can be further improved.

In any of the game machines I1 to I3, the state changing means includes a contact means that receives a load from the game means when the state changes to a usable state.

According to the game machine I4, when the contacting means receives a load from the game means, the state changing means changes its state to a usable state. Therefore, by pressing the game means against the state changing means, it can be used as a series of flows. The state can be changed to.

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported around one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by being brought close to the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. The gaming machine I5, which is arranged on the other side of the above.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used.
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutting means via the gaming means.

In any of the game machines I1 to I5, the closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is unusable so that the state changing means makes the game means unusable. The game machine I6 is provided with a blockage regulating portion that makes it impossible to block the opening on one side of the game means when maintaining the state.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the game means depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the game means. It is possible to determine whether or not to do so. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the gaming means remains unusable.

<Characteristic J group> (Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck)
A gaming means used during a game and a receiving means having an opening on one side facing the gaming means and accepting the gaming means from the one side are provided, and the receiving means is the above-mentioned gaming means. The gaming machine J1 is provided with an arranging means arranged in a path communicating with the outside, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the invasion of an object from the outside at a plurality of places.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud against fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-).
26573 (see Gazette No. 26573). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the fraud prevention unit is only in one place and the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arrangement means is arranged in the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured so that the entry of the piano wire can be suppressed at a plurality of places, thus preventing fraud. The effect of can be improved.

In the game machine J1, the arranging means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the first place and a second means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at the second place.
A game machine J2 characterized in that the entry of members from the outside is suppressed by different methods.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1, the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside differs between the first place and the second place, so that the placement means is simply Compared with the case where the number of members is increased, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

The method of suppressing the invasion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by blocking the route may be used, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the arrangement means includes an intrusion control portion formed from a cup shape that is opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed from the cup shape, so that the invading member can be prevented from further invasion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes a support means for supporting the electric wiring, and the support means is arranged on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion in the path from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, when an illegality occurs in which the entry control part is penetrated by high heat, changes (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat are detected from the outside. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

In any of the game machines J1 to J4, the arranging means receives a member that has entered from the outside.
A gaming machine J5 characterized by being provided with a resolving means for guiding to a resolving area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided to the elimination area far from the game means by the arrangement means, so that the members entering from the outside enter. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

<Characteristic K group> (Structure of 5 decorative plates. Including fraud prevention)
It is arranged between the first means and the second means which are opposed to each other along the first direction and at least one side is connected, and between the first means and the second means along the first direction. In a gaming machine including the first means and the second means, the connecting portion for connecting the first means and the second means is provided, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to the second direction intersecting with the first direction. The game machine K1 characterized by this.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the first means and the second means are arranged so as to face each other and are connected by at least one side, and are arranged between the first means and the second means along the first direction. There is a gaming machine including the third means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, but when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being applied to the three means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction is set to the third means. It is possible to reduce the load applied from. This makes it possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

In the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and the one side of the first means and the second means is attached to the connected means. The gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the second means is displaced with respect to the first means in a third direction close to each other and fitted to each other to be connected.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effect of the game machine K1 or K2, the connected means to be connected to the other side of the first means and the second means is provided, and one side of the first means and the second means is provided. Is connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacement of the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the direction intersecting the third direction The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the game machine K3, the game machine K4 is characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is exposed to the outside and arranged, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even when a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the detection of the fraudulent act can be accelerated.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction. ..

According to the game machine K5, in addition to the effect of the game machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to be the same as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any of the game machines K3 to K5, one of the light irradiating means that irradiates the first means or the second means side and is fixed to the connected means and the first means or the second means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized by comprising a light guide means fixed to the member of the above and capable of introducing the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from each other by the light guide means.

The game machine K6 is characterized in that the game machine K6 is provided with a contact means that abuts on a surface in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effect of the game machine K6, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained by the size of the contact means. Can be done.
This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the opposite direction. Can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means is illegally attempted to disassemble. can do.

<Characteristic L group> (Point L utilizing curved light guide means. Not reached as a point)
The light guide means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of the light passing through the inside, and the projected means which is arranged to face the light guide means and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means includes a concave surface facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex surface facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light emitted from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, since the projected means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are opposed to each other even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant. With the department
The emission intensity of the projected means can be changed.

In the game machine L1, the projected means is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effect of the game machine L1, the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex surface facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is collected in the concave facing portion. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect of the light.

The game machine L2 includes a counter-projection means that is arranged on the opposite side of the light-guiding means and projects light that has passed through the light-guiding means, and the counter-projection means is the guiding means. The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that a portion that is arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light means and a portion that is arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guide means are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmission.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effect of the game machine L2, the portion of the counterprojection means that is arranged to face the concave portion of the light guide means and the portion that is arranged to face the convex portion of the light guide means are light. Since the transmission is formed from substantially the same material, by injecting the same light into the light guide means, the light effect mode that is visually recognized through the projected means and the light effect mode that is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. Can be different from.

<Characteristic M group> (Bass reflex speaker layout structure)
The first means and the second means which are arranged to face each other and are fixed to each other and form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space, and the above. The gaming machine M1 is provided with a bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and an effect is produced by the sound output from the speaker (for example, JP-A-2016-1).
6088). Then, in such a game machine, the vibration wave traveling to the back side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the game machine, and is transmitted to the outside of the game machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left-right width of the game machine, where it is easy to produce a low-pitched sound.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the bending means forms a bending path in the internal space of the first means and the second means. Therefore, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, the gaming machine can be used. The regulation of the left-right width can be canceled and the vibration wave can travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the game machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is ribbed from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other. The gaming machine M2 is provided with a projecting portion projecting from the surface, and the projecting tip of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1, the protrusion tip of the protrusion portion and the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The game machine M1 or M2 is provided with an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed to the internal space and the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means. A game machine M3 characterized by being blocked by.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effect of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passing member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

In the game machine M3, the game machine M4 is characterized in that the opening is arranged on a side closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effect of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any of the game machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means in which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a directing means arranged below the support fastening means and producing an effect associated with the game. The gaming machine M5, characterized in that the effecting means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the support fastening means is weighted without squeezing the space used for the effect. Things can be adopted.

<Characteristic N group> (Movable unit, flower that rotates in the opposite direction. Petals that stop in the middle)
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a follow-up state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction, and a follow-up state. A second switchable state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
In a gaming machine including a displacement means, at least when the second displacement means is in a follow-up state, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A game machine N1 characterized by being provided with.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means expands / contracts, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the game machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed with reference to the third displacement means. Therefore, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

The game machine N1 is provided with a resistance means for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is characterized in that the switching point between the following state and the non-following state can be changed. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effect of the game machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state due to the action of the resistance means. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the game machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when the second displacement means is operated in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2, a driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the drive means for driving the first displacement means, so that the drive means is also used. be able to.

In the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front surface of the game machine N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effect of the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible so that the resistance means can be visually recognized by the player and the function of changing the state of the first displacement means. It can also be used as a production device.

The game machine N4 includes a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. Game machine N5.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effect of the game machine N4, the shaft means that functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that the first displacement means, As the posture of either the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the postures of the other members or means also change accordingly. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively. Can be done.

<Characteristic O group> (Utilization of shell buttons and holes. The point is not reached)
In a gaming machine including a first means and a storage means configured to accommodate the first means, the storage means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is housed. The gaming machine O1 is characterized by comprising one opening and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that includes an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2012-048970). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that when a foreign substance is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operating means, the foreign substance may remain inside and induce a malfunction. ..

On the other hand, since the game machine O1 includes a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means, foreign matter is accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the game machine O1, the accommodating means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. Game machine O2 to play.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the accommodation means is provided with a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is arranged around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effect of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistant portion. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are formed of a shape based on a shape projected in different directions of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the game machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is formed of a shape based on the shape of the solid object in a different direction, it is possible to easily remove the solid object through the second opening.

In any of the game machines O1 to O4, the game machine O5 is characterized in that the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially blocked by the second opening. Can be made to. As a result, the player can be made aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the accommodating means, so that the possibility that the solid object continues to remain can be reduced. ..

<Characteristic P group> (G2 notice control)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In this case, in a game machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, an effect execution means for executing the effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a plurality of times. For the continuous dynamic display of the identification information, it is determined that the determination means for deciding to execute the specific effect by the effect execution means and the determination means for executing the specific effect. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that, based on the establishment of the specific condition, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, by executing a special effect on a plurality of continuous variable effects, a series of effects using a plurality of variable effects can be provided to the player, thereby providing a hobby of the game. A gaming machine capable of improving the above is proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous fluctuation effects, if a notification effect, etc. that should be executed during that period occurs irregularly, the execution is delayed, and the player is given a game. There was a risk that the content would be difficult to understand. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of making the contents of the game easy to understand for the player.

According to the game machine P1, even when it is determined by the determination means that a specific effect is executed for each of a plurality of times of dynamic display of the identification information, the specific effect is based on the establishment of the specific condition. Since the execution of is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied, even if the execution of a specific effect is decided, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control etc. can be performed, so that the player can understand. It is possible to provide an easy game. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is restarted, so that it is possible to notify the player that the specific effect has not ended in the middle, and the player is provided with an easy-to-understand effect. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Based on the operating means that can be operated by the player in the game machine P1, the switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine P2 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the person, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is.

In the game machine P2, the specific condition is satisfied by switching the setting by the switching means when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means. Game machine P3.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the game machines P1 to P3, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine comprises a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above-mentioned storage means, and the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the game machine P4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines P1 to P3, the game ball for which information is acquired by the game ball being inserted into the ball entry means is entered into the ball entry means. It has the effect of improving the interest in.

In the game machine P4, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first ball entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result, and when the determination means determines the second information. Dynamically displays the second identification information for indicating the determination result, and the determination means preferentially determines the second information over the first information stored in the storage means. The specific condition is such that the execution of the specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is executed a plurality of times in succession. The gaming machine P6, which is established when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the game machine P6, in addition to the effect of the game machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second ball is entered. Even if the ball enters the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that it has been started.

In the game machine P7, when the first ball entry means is in the first gaming state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter than the second ball entry means, and the second ball entry means is The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that, in the case of a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, the ball is configured to be easier to enter than the first entry means.

According to the game machine P8, in addition to the effect of the game machine P7, in the first game state, the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entry means, so that the first identification information moves continuously. It has the effect of making it easier to display the target, making it easier to perform a specific effect many times, and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic Q group> (G production)
The determination means for executing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In the case of a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, a specific effect of executing a specific effect on a plurality of consecutive dynamic displays of the identification information is specified. A game machine Q1 characterized by having a production execution means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of games. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed, which does not result in a specific determination result, the identification information can be displayed a plurality of times as a dynamic display of 1, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game. ..

In the game machine Q1, when the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the interruption means for suspending the execution of the specific effect until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition. A game machine Q2 characterized in that it has.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player knows that the specific condition is satisfied. It has the effect of being easy to show. In addition, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect is restored, so that the problem that the specific effect ends in the middle and the content of the effect becomes halfway and confuses the player can be suppressed. effective.

In the game machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by the player, a switching means that can be set by switching the setting when the operating means is operated, and the setting set by the switching means. The gaming machine Q3 is characterized by having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the above.

According to the game machine Q3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operating means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. , It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by the operation of the player, it is possible to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. There is an effect.

In the game machine Q3, the specific condition is satisfied when the setting is switched by the switching means when the specific effect is executed.

According to the game machine Q4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, a specific effect is interrupted and a dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is provided. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, a specific effect is executed in the same manner, which has the effect of suppressing a problem that it becomes difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any of the game machines Q1 to Q4, an entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of the game ball into the entry means, and an acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine Q5, characterized in that it has a storage means for storing the information acquired by the above.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B4, the game ball for which information is acquired by the game ball being inserted into the ball entry means is entered into the ball entry means. It has the effect of improving the interest in.

The game machine Q5 is characterized in that the game machine Q5 has a pre-determination means for executing a determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine Q6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q5, since the pre-determination is executed by the pre-determination means, the effect that the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is.

In the game machine Q5 or Q6, at least the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged in the ball entry means, and the acquisition means is the first entry means. The first information can be acquired when the game ball enters the ball means, and the second information can be acquired when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. When the determination means determines the first information, the target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result, and the determination means determines the second information. In the case, the second identification information for showing the determination result is dynamically displayed, and in the specific condition, the second identification information is moved after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A game machine Q7 characterized in that it is established when the target is displayed.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information executed a plurality of times in succession, the second Even if the ball enters the ball entry means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so that the dynamic display of the second identification information has priority. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

In the game machine Q7, a launching means capable of launching a game ball by varying the firing force based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first firing force can flow down. The first flow path and the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path are configured to be difficult to flow down, and the game ball launched with a second firing force different from the first firing force is configured to be able to flow down. The first ball-entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball-entry means is the second flow path. A game machine Q8 characterized in that a game ball flowing down a second flow path is arranged at a position where a ball can enter.

According to the game machine Q8, in addition to the effect played by the game machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally make it easier to satisfy a specific condition by adjusting the firing force of the game ball.

<Characteristic R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of the time reduction, it does not shift to charge production until 5 fluctuations)
A first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball entry means that is variable to a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the specific condition, the staging means for executing the effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. A production determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the above, a prohibiting means for prohibiting the specific effect from being executed by the effect determining means when a prohibition condition is satisfied, and a prohibition means. The gaming machine R1 characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set that makes it easier to enter the starting port than usual, an effect is executed to notify in advance or during the special period that the special period will be executed. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of reserved balls have been generated immediately after the state in which the ball can easily enter the starting port is finished, the notification is performed, so that the notification that is not advantageous to the player is performed. There was a risk that a problem would occur in which the interest of the game would be reduced. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine R1, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the specific effect indicating that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means is not executed. Therefore, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the game is played. It is possible to perform a production that meets the needs of the person, and it has the effect of suppressing a decline in the interest of the game.

The game machine R1 has a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set to be more variable than a normal state from the second state to the first state. The prohibition condition is set as at least one condition that is satisfied based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A game machine R2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effect of the game machine R1, as a prohibition condition, a first condition based on the end of a special state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means is set as a condition for establishment. Therefore, a large amount of second information is stored, and even if a game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means, a specific effect is executed during a period when the profit to the player is low, and a problem that lowers the interest of the game is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine R2, the prohibition condition is that when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored in the storage means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the game machine R3, in addition to the effect of the game machine R2, a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored when the special state ends, so that the second information is abundant. The prohibition condition is satisfied only in the stored state, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the specific effect is not executed and the profit of the player is impaired even though the number of stored second information is small. ..

In any of the game machines R1 to R3, the discriminating means is longer than the first discriminating result and the specific first discriminating result that causes the second ball entering means to be changed to the first state during the first period. During the second period, it is configured so that it can be discriminated from the specific second discriminant result that is variable to the first state, and the effect determining means is said to be based on the fact that the specific second discriminating result is discriminated. A game machine R4 characterized in that it determines the production.

According to the game machine R4, in any of the game machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify the player that the period is more advantageous by executing the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. is there.

<Feature S group> (Volume control)
In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. As a part of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to set the sound output means capable of outputting the sound and the volume output by the sound output means based on the operation from the outside of the game machine. Volume setting means, a first state in which voice is output from the voice output means based on the volume set by the volume setting means, and the voice at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. An output control means for switching between a second state in which sound is output from the output means, and a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started from a power supply cut state in which the power supply for operating the game machine is cut off. The gaming machine S1 is characterized by having an initial setting means for setting the second state when the second state is set.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects and sounds output as effects can be changed and set by the operation of a player or the setting of a game store (Patent Document: Special). Open 2011-50011). In this type of gaming machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of more suitable volume control. This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suitable volume control.

According to the game machine S1, when the power is turned on, a second state is set in which the power is output at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. It has the effect that it can be recognized by and suitable volume control can be executed.

In the game machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be lower than the setting of the lowest volume set by the volume setting means.

According to the game machine S2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be lower than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means, so that when the power is turned on all at once. It has the effect of reducing the noise of amusement stores. In the game machine S1 or S2, the output control means continuously sets the second state until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed by the effect executing means.

According to the game machine S3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the effect of 1 is completed, so that the power is supplied during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that the effect is performed after the power is turned on by the volume of the effect 1 that is executed later.

In any of the game machines S1 to S3, when the power is turned on to the game machine, the initial state setting means for setting the state of the game machine to the initial state is provided on the condition that a predetermined operation is performed from the outside. The gaming machine S4, characterized in that the voice output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when set to the initial state.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the initial state has been set by the notification sound, and when the game machine is illegally initialized. It also has the effect of being able to detect fraud at an early stage.

<Feature T group> (Variable control of reserved symbol display area)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. For each piece of information, the symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed on the symbol display means are changed according to the number of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine T1 characterized by having a symbol display area variable means.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information when the game ball enters the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed for a gaming machine in which is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of game machine, the display area where the hold ball information is displayed becomes difficult to understand when the hold ball information is not displayed, and the game machine that displays the hold ball information in an easy-to-understand manner is executed. I was asked. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide an easy-to-understand game machine.

According to the game machine T1, the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the number of information stored in the storage means, so that the display mode is stored according to the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of making it easier to recognize the amount of information and providing an easy-to-understand game machine.

In the game machine T1, the symbol display means displays area information indicating that the symbol is a display area even when the symbol is not displayed, and the symbol display area variable means. Is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is variably displayed.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine T1, the area information is variably displayed according to the number of stored information, so that the area information according to the number of displayed symbols is displayed. It has the effect of being easy to understand.

In the game machine T1 or T2, the symbol display means displays identification information that can identify an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine T1 or T2, there is an effect that the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information and the game can be prevented from being played so that the acquisition condition is satisfied beyond the upper limit number. ..

The game machine T4 is characterized in that, in the game machine T3, the identification information is set to be hidden when the symbol which is the upper limit number is displayed.

According to the game machine T4, in addition to the effect of the game machine T3, the identification information is hidden when the upper limit number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is suppressed. , There is an effect that the design can be easily identified.

In any of the game machines T1 to T4, a period determination means for determining a predetermined number of periods for which the acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the symbol is displayed according to the period determined by the period determination means. The gaming machine T5, characterized in that it has a rule changing means for changing a variable display rule.

According to the game machine T5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is satisfied depending on how the display mode is changed, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In any of the game machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area variable means displays the first display mode until the first number of the symbols is displayed, and when the number exceeds the first number, the first display mode is displayed. The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a second display mode different from that of the above.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. Therefore, the acquisition condition is obtained until the first number is exceeded. It has the effect of increasing the motivation to establish the game and improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic U group> (Cancellation of pending quantity display)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. A symbol display means for displaying a corresponding symbol for each information, and a display mode variable means for varying the display mode displayed on the symbol display means based on a period in which a predetermined number of the information is acquired by the acquisition means. A game machine U1 characterized by having.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information when the game ball enters the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed for a gaming machine in which is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine U1, the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is changed depending on the period until a predetermined number of information is acquired, so that the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of information is acquired. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine U1, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area where the symbol is displayed based on the period.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbol is displayed is changed based on the period, so that the period is also checked while confirming that the symbol is displayed. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the game machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode suggesting that the symbol is displayed in the display area of the symbol display means is also displayed during the period when the symbol is not displayed. A game machine U3 characterized in that the display is set.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effect of the game machine U1 or U2, the suggestion mode is displayed even during the period when the symbol is not displayed, so that it is possible to confirm that the information has been acquired at an early stage. There is an effect.

In the game machine U3, the game machine U4 is characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the suggestion mode in accordance with the period.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effect of the game machine U3, the suggestion mode is changed according to the period required for storing a predetermined number of information, so that the frequency of information being stored depending on the suggestion mode. It has the effect of being able to confirm.

In the game machine U3 or U4, the suggestion mode is regularly variably displayed based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode variable means is displayed based on the period. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that it is variably displayed in a special suggestion mode different from the suggestion mode corresponding to the number of the symbols.

According to the game machine U5, in addition to the effect of the game machine U3 or U4, the acquisition frequency of information can be confirmed by a special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode can be changed regularly or irregularly. There is an effect that you can play the game while enjoying the case.

<Feature V group> (Hold navigation)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means is predetermined with the information before being determined by the determination means. A gaming machine V1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on a number or more stored.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information when the game ball enters the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed for a gaming machine in which is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine V1, a specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, so that not only the determination result but also the number of stored information can be interested. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the game machine V1, the pre-determination means for executing the determination of the information stored by the storage means before being determined by the determination means, and the effect executing means are pre-determined by the pre-determination means. The gaming machine V2 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

According to the game machine V2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine V1, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result, so that the identification information is stored before the identification information is dynamically displayed by the specific effect. It is possible to suggest the judgment result of the existing information, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. ..

According to the game machine V3, in addition to the effect of the game machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until a predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the frequency with which information is stored can also be identified by the production.

In any of the game machines V1 to V3, there is a history information storage means for storing the history information of the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. The gaming machine V4, characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on the above.

According to the game machine V4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the history information of the game, so that the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the game machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes a specific number or less. ..

According to the game machine V5, in any of the game machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number becomes less than the specific number, so that the player plays the game so that the stored information does not become less than the specific number. It has the effect of motivating people.

In any of the game machines V1 to V5, for each of the information stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means, a symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol and a symbol display means stored in the storage means. The gaming machine V6 is characterized in that the symbol display means includes a symbol display area variable means for varying the display mode of the area in which the symbol is displayed according to the number of the information.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the symbol is displayed is changed according to the number of stored information, so that the information is stored. It has the effect of making it easy to identify the numbers.

<Characteristic W group> (Lucky number)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the storage means stored in the storage means before being determined by the determination means. For each piece of information, a symbol display means for displaying the corresponding symbol, and when the information is stored in the storage means, the storage means stored in the storage means at the time when the stored information is stored. A specific effect is executed based on the number information storage means in which the number information corresponding to the number in which the information is stored before being determined by the determination means is stored and the number information stored in the number information storage means. The gaming machine W1 characterized by having an effect executing means capable of capable of performing.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., the right to execute the lottery is stored as the reserved ball information when the game ball enters the starting port during the period when the variable effect is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information. Has been proposed for a gaming machine in which is displayed on the display means (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the reserved ball information is displayed is constant and the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine W1, when the information is stored, the number information corresponding to the stored number of the information at the time when the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and the identification based on the number information is stored. Since the production is executed, there is an effect that the interest when the information is stored can be further improved.

The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored in the information determined to be the specific determination result.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine W1, as a specific effect, it is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result, so that the determination is determined as a specific determination result. It is possible to make people interested in the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode indicating an area in which the symbol corresponding to the number information stored in the information determined to be the specific determination result is displayed. A game machine W3 characterized by this.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored for the information previously determined as the specific determination result by the specific effect when the symbol is displayed. , There is an effect that the game can be performed with the expectation that the symbol will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

In any of the game machines W1 to W3, the game machine W4 is characterized in that the symbol is attached with a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information.

According to the game machine W4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines W1 to W3, the symbol is given a suggestion mode corresponding to the number information, so that when the number of information before the determination increases or decreases. Also, there is an effect that the number information at the time of being stored can be recognized by the suggestion mode.

In any of the game machines W1 to W4, the type determining means for determining the type of the privileged game executed by the privileged game executing means, and the number information of the specific effect when the privileged game is executed. It is characterized by having a notification means for notifying suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game, which is executed based on the storage of the information in the number of stored items corresponding to. The game machine W5.

According to the game machine W5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines W1 to W4, suggestion information suggesting the type of privileged game being executed by storing information up to the number of memories corresponding to the specific effect is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the game memorize information even during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In the game machine W5, the game machine W6 is characterized in that the type of the privileged game is difficult to identify from the identification information for showing the specific determination result.

According to the game machine W6, in addition to the effect played by the game machine W5, there is an effect that the value of the suggestion information being notified can be increased by making it difficult to identify the type of the privilege game from the identification information. is there.

<Group X> (Derived from charge production)
A first ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball entry means that is variable to a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter than the first state. , The acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and the second information when the game ball enters the second ball entry means. , A storage means in which the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means are stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means. When the means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means are stopped and displayed. In addition, in a game machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, the second ball entry means is changed from the second state to the second state. The discriminating means for discriminating the establishment of the specific condition, the staging means for executing the effect for showing the discriminating result by the discriminating means, and the staging means when the discriminating means determines the fulfillment of the specific condition. The gaming machine X1 is characterized by having an effect determining means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect executed by the player.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a blade shape that regulates the entry of the ball into the starting port and releases the regulation when the opening condition is satisfied to facilitate the entry of the game ball. Has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). In the above-mentioned pachinko machine or the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member is movable, there is a possibility that the player may get tired of the game. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player gets tired of playing a game at an early stage.

According to the game machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is satisfied by the specific effect, and the game is performed with the expectation that not only the specific determination result but also the specific effect will be executed. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

The game machine X1 is characterized in that the game machine X1 has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the determination of a specific effect by the effect determining means when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine X2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine X1, it is prohibited that the specific effect is determined by the establishment of the avoidance condition, so that it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed unnecessarily. effective.

In the game machine X1 or X2, a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entry means is set from the second state to the first state more easily than the normal state. The avoidance condition is characterized in that the condition based on the setting of the normal state from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means is set as at least one condition. Game machine X3.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effect of the game machine X1 or X2, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state. By making it easy to establish the above, there is an effect that the problem of excessively entering the second ball entry means can be suppressed.

In the game machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. The gaming machine X4, characterized in that it is set as at least one condition.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effect of the game machine X3, there is an effect that the problem that the second information is excessively stored can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines X2 to X4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball by varying the firing force based on the operation of the player, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means with the first launching force. A first flow path configured to allow flow down and a game ball launched with a second firing force different from the first launching force, in which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is configured to be difficult to flow down. A second flow path configured to allow flow down is provided, and the first ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second entry path is provided. The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. The gaming machine X5, characterized in that it notifies the player of suggestive information suggesting that the player should be allowed to do so.

According to the game machine X5, in addition to the effect played on any of the game machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the suggestion information for causing the game ball to flow down to the first flow path is notified, so that the game is played. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that a person enters a game ball into a second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (button pop-out control)
It has an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player, a moving means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the moving means. The moving means is configured to be able to execute a first operation of moving the operation surface of the operating means in the first moving mode and a second operation of moving the operating surface of the operating means in a second moving mode different from the first moving mode. The movement control means executes the first operation when the first condition is satisfied, and executes the second operation when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A game machine Y1 characterized in that it controls the operation of.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early by simply operating the operating means. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine Y1, since the operation surface of the operation means can be moved in different movement modes depending on the operation control means, the player can be watched by the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of using the operating means can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine Y1, the moving means moves the operation surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the game machine Y2, since the movement mode until the operation surface of the operation means is moved to a specific operation position can be changed by the operation control means, the game can be performed even for the process in which the operation surface of the operation means moves. Can be interested in people.

The game machine Y2 is characterized in that the moving means moves the operation surface of the operating means so that the moving period in the second operation is longer than the moving period in the first operation. Game machine Y3.

According to the game machine Y3, since the movement period can be changed according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means.

In the game machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and makes the operation contents of the moving means different according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. The featured game machine Y4.

According to the game machine Y4, the operation content of the moving means can be different by changing the content of the drive control to the drive means. Therefore, the control content of the operation control means can be simplified.

In the game machine Y4, the drive means generates the drive force by a rotation operation, and the operation control means is a first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction as the plurality of drive controls. And the second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction can be executed, and the moving means is said to be the first when the first drive control is executed by the control means. The gaming machine Y5 is characterized in that one operation is executed and the second operation is executed when the second drive control is executed.

According to the game machine Y5, since the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, it is possible to easily change the moving mode in which the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

The game machine Y5 is characterized in that the game machine Y5 includes a speed variable means capable of changing the rotation speed of the drive means.

According to the game machine Y6, since the rotation speed is changed by the speed variable means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and it is possible to produce an effect of the effect using the operation means. Can be enhanced.

In the game machine Y6, the second movement mode is to move the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotation speed of the drive means changed by the speed variable means. Characteristic game machine Y7.

In the game machines Y1 to Y7, a discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discrimination result, and the moving means operates as the suggestion effect. The game machine Y8 is characterized in that the motion control means determines the content of motion control according to the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

According to the game machine Y8, the discrimination result of the discriminating means can be suggested by the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means to be executed, so that the player pays close attention to the moving mode of the operating surface of the operating means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect using the operating means.

<Characteristic Z group> (Prevents button popping out)
The predetermined movement is performed by an operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, a condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means. A moving means capable of moving the operation surface of the operating means from the storage position to the protruding position when the conditions are satisfied, a movement control means for controlling the moving means, and predetermined with respect to the operating means. In a game machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the operation of, the moving means is a first operation for moving the operation surface of the operating means to the protruding position. The second operation of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the protruding position can be executed, and the movement control means is operated by the operation means to perform the predetermined operation by the effect execution means. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the first operation is executed when the effect becomes feasible.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the player's motivation to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. .. In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operating means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operating means can be changed, or the type of background can be changed. A gaming machine configured to be switchable has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the game early by simply operating the operating means. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine Z1, in order to cause the moving means to perform the first operation regardless of whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved, the moving means operates to move the operating surface of the operating means. By grasping whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being detected in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, there is an effect that the player can be expected that the second operation will be executed by performing the first operation.

In the game machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means that generates a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by a rotational operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. The movement control means is composed of a first drive control for rotating the drive means in the first direction as the plurality of movement controls, and a second drive control different from the first direction. The second drive control can be executed, and the moving means executes the first operation when the first drive control is executed by the movement control means, and the second drive control is executed. The gaming machine Z2, characterized in that the second operation is executed when the second operation is performed.

According to the game machine Z2, in addition to the effect of the game machine Z1, the operation surface of the operation means can be configured not to move even if the drive means is driven, and the position of the drive means can be changed according to the state of the operation surface. Has the effect of being able to change without moving.

The game machine Z2 has a regulating state that regulates the movement of the operation surface of the operating means by the moving means and a regulating state that can be changed to a release state that releases the regulation, and the control content of the movement control means. The first operation executed by the moving means accordingly is an operation for changing the regulating means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the protruding position. A game machine Z3 characterized by being an operation.

According to the game machine Z3, in addition to the effect of the game machine Z2, the operation of the moving means is restricted by the regulating means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to change the state of the regulating means according to the control content executed by the motion controlling means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operating surface of the operating means is moved.

In the game machine Z3, the transmission means is a rotating member that can rotate in synchronization with the rotating operation of the driving means, and an acting member that is connected to the operating means and that the rotating operation of the rotating member acts on. The rotating member has a protruding portion that can come into contact with the acting member, and the regulating means rotates the driving means in the first direction to make the protruding portion the acting member. The gaming machine Z4 is characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by being brought into contact with the above.

In the game machine Z4, the regulating means is not variable to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction and the protruding portion is brought into contact with the working member. Game machine Z5.

In the game machine Z5, the position where the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6 to play.

In the game machines Z1 to Z6, a discrimination means for executing the discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the predetermined discriminating result, and the predetermined moving condition according to the discriminating result of the discriminating means. The gaming machine Z7, which is characterized in that

<Characteristic α group> (Over prize at the time of big hit)
The discriminating means capable of performing the determination, the display means for dynamically displaying the discrimination result for indicating the discriminant result by the counter-parting means, and the identification information for indicating the specific discriminant result on the display means are provided. When displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game, a first privilege game in which a first privilege advantageous to the player is given as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the above-mentioned In a game machine having a second privilege game in which a second privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given, and a deciding means capable of determining either of them, the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. Is executed, it is characterized by having a type determining means for determining the notification type for notifying the player of the notification information for notifying the type information of the privileged game being executed from a plurality of types. The game machine α1.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of the game was required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine α1, when the privilege game is executed, the notification type for suggesting the type of the privilege game is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification types are executed in various ways to enjoy the game. Has the effect of improving.

In the game machine α1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the open state, and as the privilege game, from the closed state It has a variable control means for performing an open game that changes the variable ball entry means until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. The game machine α2 is characterized in that it includes at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

According to the game machine α2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine α1, the value for having more than a predetermined number of game balls entered into the variable ball entry means can be increased, and the effect of improving the interest of the game can be improved. is there.

In the game machine α2, the privilege game executes the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, the open game is executed a predetermined number of times based on the execution. A gaming machine α3 characterized by having a notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the game machine α3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine α2, even if the first notification type is determined, it can be switched to another notification type in the middle of the privilege game, so that the number of game balls exceeds a predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

The gaming machine α3 is characterized in that the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the game machine α4, in addition to the effect of the game machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, so that there is an effect that the problem of overlapping notifications can be suppressed. ..

<Characteristic β group> (Directed with normal hit as probable hit)
An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and a determination to execute a determination based on the information stored in the storage means. The means, the dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period, and the identification for showing the specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, the game machine is prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. If the pre-determination execution means for executing the determination and the information determined to be the specific determination result by the pre-determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are stored. , A game machine β1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that draws a lottery when a game ball is won at the starting port and displays a variable effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such a production, various patterns of production such as a production to give the player a sense of expectation and a production to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. (Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, further improvement in the interest of the game was required. This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine with improved interest in the game.

According to the game machine β1, when the privilege game is executed, if it is further determined that the privilege game is executed after that, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. It has the effect of making the player expect and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine β1, the privilege game has a first privilege game in which a normal game state is set after execution, and a probability that the player is determined to have the specific determination result is higher than in the normal game state after execution. The second privilege game in which the special game state is set is at least set, and the specific effect is characterized in that it is configured in a manner suggesting that the special game state is set. Game machine β2 to play.

In the game machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. When the identification information is dynamically displayed, if the information determined to be the specific determination result is stored, the stop display switching means capable of displaying the stop display in the specific stop display mode is provided. A game machine β3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine β, in addition to the effect played by the game machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, the stop is displayed in the specific stop display mode, so that it is as if the second privilege game is executed. It has the effect of making you think.

In the game machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined to be the specific determination result when the identification information on which the first privilege game is executed is dynamically displayed. It is characterized in that it switches to the specific stop display mode based on the storage of the information determined to be the specific determination result during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. The game machine β4.

According to the game machine β4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine β3, since the stop mode is switched even after the dynamic display is started, there is an effect that the chance of being displayed in a more specific stop mode can be increased. is there.

<Characteristic AA group> (BGM is reset when the power is restored)
A power supply means capable of supplying a predetermined power, a notification means capable of executing notification for indicating that the power has been supplied by the power supply means, and after the notification executed by the notification means is completed. In a gaming machine having an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect and a voice output means capable of outputting voice based on voice data for a predetermined period, the voice output means can be notified by the notification means. It is determined that the voice is output from the start position of the voice data during the execution notification period, and the voice is output from a predetermined position of the voice data when the effect is executed by the effect executing means. The featured game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a win. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, when the power is turned off during the predetermined fluctuation time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped, the return screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the subtraction of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016). -005505A). In such a game machine, it was possible to notify the player that the power was turned on in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying the return screen, but the amount of emphasis that the power has been restored is emphasized. There was a problem that it was not possible to clearly notify that the subtraction of the fluctuation time was resumed. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game machine capable of notifying the player of the game situation at the time of power recovery in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the game machine AA1, the sound output during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed can be output even while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the period for notifying that the power is supplied can be related to the subsequent period. In addition, at the timing when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied ends and the predetermined effect is started, the voice based on the voice data for a predetermined period is output from the specific position of the voice data. Since it is configured, it is possible to output audio with contents corresponding to the effect executed after the period when the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that the sound can be output without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When the above-mentioned game machine AA1 is used, it is between a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the special figure fluctuation is executed when the power is turned off and a predetermined period in which the power is turned off. A memorable storage means is further provided, and when the power is supplied, if it is determined that the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, the special feature is provided during the notification period for notifying that the power is supplied. It is preferable to configure the BGM to be output during the fluctuation of the figure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player by voice that the special figure variation is being executed while the notification for indicating that the power is supplied is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player.

Further, it is preferable to configure the period for notifying that the power is supplied to be continuously set until the start-up process is completed for the various control devices of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period for notifying that power has been supplied. If the power is cut off during the special figure fluctuation, or if the special figure change is started during the period for notifying that the power has been supplied, the period for notifying that the power has been supplied ends. , There is a possibility that the special figure fluctuation may straddle the timing when the normal display screen is displayed. In this case, the period from the time when the normal display screen is displayed to the end of the special figure fluctuation during execution is determined, and the variation effect (remaining variation time corresponding effect) is set based on the determination result. It is good to configure. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result of the special figure variation.

When the determination result of the remaining fluctuation time is within a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second), it is preferable to delay the end timing of the effect of notifying that the power is supplied by a predetermined time (1 second). .. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect corresponding to the remaining variation time only for a short period of time, which makes it difficult for the player to identify, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Characteristic AB group> (Background change timing is changed according to the pattern fluctuation speed when the button is operated)
It is dynamically displayed by a discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operating means. It is possible to execute an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an effect mode variable means for varying the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation discriminating means, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. Variable timing setting for setting the timing for changing the effect mode based on the effect execution means and the dynamic display speed of the identification information when it is determined by the operation determination means that the predetermined operation has been performed. A game machine AB1 characterized by having means and means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a win. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, by executing the operation effect, the effect mode can be changed according to the operation result of whether or not the player operates the operation means. Therefore, the operation means can be provided to the player. It was possible to operate enthusiastically, that is, to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, but when the player participated in the game (when the operation means was operated in the operation production). Since there are few production modes to be executed, it has been desired to make it possible to set more various production modes and enhance the production effect.

According to the game machine AB, since the effect mode can be changed according to the fluctuation speed of the identification information at the timing when the player operates the operation means, it is possible to provide various effects. In the game machine AB described above, as an effect mode that can be changed by the effect mode variable means, for example, a display mode of the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be considered. As a result, the timing for variably setting the background mode can be changed according to the dynamic display speed of the identification information. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the background mode from being variably set in a state where the dynamic display speed of the identification information is slow, that is, a state immediately before the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player of the current dynamic display speed of the identification information. As a result, when the operating means is operated to change the effect mode, the player can determine whether or not the effect mode is changed immediately afterwards. Further, when the period from the operation of the operating means by the player to change the effect mode to the change of the effect mode is longer than a predetermined period, the player can change the effect mode after the predetermined period elapses. It is good to configure to display the comment shown in. As a result, when an operation for changing the effect mode is executed, it is possible for the game company to easily grasp whether or not the game machine accepts the operation.

Further, when an interval of a predetermined period or longer is provided between the operation of the operating means and the change of the effect mode, for example, the predetermined period is set to the timing when the next special figure variation is executed. Then it is good. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode while the dynamic display of the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is not executed.

<Characteristic AC group> (Switches development effects according to button operation timing and number of operations)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a timing at which the operation determination means determines that the predetermined operation has been performed. The operation timing discriminating means capable of discriminating, the operation number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the predetermined operation is determined to have been performed by the operation discriminating means, the discriminating result of the operation timing discriminating means, and the operation number of times. Having an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on the measurement result of the measurement means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect according to the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means. The featured game machine AC1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time, the lottery result is a win. Was performing a privileged game that was advantageous to the player. Further, there is also a case in which an operation means that can be operated by a player is provided and various effects are set based on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, the effect mode is set based on the operation content or the number of operations for the operation means. With the game machine configured in this way, it is difficult to set various production modes according to the operation content of the operation means, so that the production effect can be enhanced, but more various productions are possible. There has been a demand for a game machine whose mode can be set.

According to the game machine AC1, since the effect mode can be changed based on both the operation timing for the operation means and the number of operations, a wider variety of effects can be set and the effect can be enhanced. ..

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AC1, the continuous operation effect in which the effect mode changes in response to the operation to the operation means a plurality of times is configured to be executable, and the continuous operation effect is executed during the period. Of these, it is preferable to set the effect mode variable timing of the subsequent continuous operation effect according to the operation timing of the predetermined number of times. Specifically, based on the operation timing for the first operation means during the period in which the continuous operation effect is being executed, the ease of changing the effect mode for the second and subsequent operations for the operation means is changed. It is good to configure in. With this configuration, various production modes can be set without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in this case, regardless of the operation timing to the first operation means, it is preferable to set the same effect mode to be set for the first operation to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the difference in the operation timing to the first operation means.

In addition, the effect mode executed after the continuous operation effect may be changed according to the effect mode of the continuous operation effect displayed in the state where the continuous operation effect is completed. As a result, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the continuous operation production. In addition, the continuous operation effect is configured to be executable based on the special figure variation, and the effect mode to be executed after the continuous operation effect is set based on the effect result of the continuous operation effect and the lottery result of the special figure variation. The effect mode variable condition (operation) of the continuous operation effect is based on the lottery result of the special figure variation and the operation timing of the predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) during the continuous operation effect period. The number of operations of the means, the operation method, etc.) may be set.

<Characteristic AD group> (A state in which the number of held balls displayed on the liquid crystal is synchronized with the actual number of held balls and a state in which the number of held balls is not synchronized are provided).
An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a determination means for executing the determination when the determination condition is satisfied based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the said acquisition means acquired by the acquisition means. To indicate a storage means capable of storing information up to a first predetermined number up to an upper limit, an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect a plurality of times, and a predetermined number until at least the determination condition for the information is satisfied. The mode display means includes a mode display means for causing the display means to display the display mode of the above, and the mode display means indicates the number of the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied. The first aspect for the purpose is displayed on the display means as the display mode, and when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the effect executed by the effect executing means The gaming machine AD1 is characterized in that the display means displays a second mode for indicating the number of times as the display mode.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. The special game was being executed. Further, a plurality of rights to execute the lottery are memorable so that the game can be played efficiently. Then, in a game machine configured to be able to store a plurality of rights (holds) for executing a lottery, there is a game machine that displays a hold symbol for indicating the stored number of holds to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-18274). In such a game machine, since the player can easily grasp the current number of reservations, the content of the game can be determined based on the number of reservations, and efficient games can be performed. In addition, the stored hold has a function of determining the lottery result in advance before the lottery is actually executed, and the number of stored holds becomes a specific number. In some cases, a series of effects (continuous effects) are executed by using the period during which the lottery corresponding to the specific number of holds is executed. In such a continuous effect, the result of pre-determination for a plurality of holds can be executed by using a series of effects, so that the target lottery includes a hit rather than the effect based on the result of one lottery. It is possible to increase the possibility and make the player pay close attention to the production. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a new hold is acquired during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold is added to the hold symbol indicating the hold that is the target of the continuous effect. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which reserved symbol is the target of the continuous production, and there is a problem that the production effect is lowered. In the above-mentioned game machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of notifying a player of a reserved symbol to be produced in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the game machine AD1, the display mode indicating the number of stored items displayed on the display means displays the number of stored items stored in the storage means according to the conditions that are satisfied, and displays the information indicating the number of times of the effect. Since it can be variably set depending on the case of playing, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the gaming machine AD1, it is preferable to provide a second display means capable of constantly displaying the number of stored memories stored in the storage means, which is different from the display means. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the number of memories of the storage means that affect the result of the game. In this case, the second display means may be provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned display means (for example, in the same liquid crystal display device), or may be configured to notify by the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as an LED. Is also good.

Further, the display means may be configured to display the number of memories stored in the storage means by the second display means during the period in which the information indicating the number of times of the effect is displayed. Further, the second display means may be configured to be less noticeable than the display means. With this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode displayed on the display means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the display means displays the information indicating the number of times of the effect, the display means may be configured to display the number of stored storage means corresponding to the number of determinations executed during the effect period. It may be configured to display based on the length of (for example, one display every 30 seconds). In addition, a display indicating the number of times the third symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop) during the effect period may be used.
<Characteristic AE group> (Notice effect that is executed only when the background is changed)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and an effect mode in which the effect mode is changed based on the determination result of the operation determination means. When the variable means, the effect executing means for executing the effect changed by the effect mode variable means, and the variable timing in which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfy a specific condition. A game machine AE1 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is drawn to win or lose the game, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. The special game was being executed. In addition, there was a device that performed a suggestive effect to make the player play the game while expecting the player to win the lottery result. Then, in order to increase the variation of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, there is a case in which the mode in which the suggestion effect is executed is variably configured (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-21399). Further, there is also one in which the mode (background) in which the suggestion effect is executed is changed based on the player operating the operating means. In such a game machine, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by providing a variety of effects to the player by executing a dedicated suggestion effect according to the set mode. However, there is a problem that the player enthusiastically operates the operation means after seeing the special production corresponding to each mode, and the motivation to change the mode is reduced. It is an object of the above-mentioned game machine to provide a game machine capable of causing a player to enthusiastically change a mode.

According to the game machine AE1, since a dedicated effect can be executed when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to experience even if a long-term game is performed during the period in which each mode is set. It is possible to execute an effect that cannot be performed at the mode switching timing. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically operate the operation means for the player who wants to experience various effects.

<Characteristic AF group> (A period for notifying the current mode and a period for not notifying are provided so that the current mode can be grasped by operating a button even during the non-notifying period)
A mode setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of effect modes, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode set by the mode setting means, and a mode setting means. It has an effect mode notification means capable of notifying the effect mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. , The effect mode notifying means determines that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the operation determination means during a predetermined first period or a second period different from the first period. The gaming machine AF1 is characterized in that, when the mode is set, information for indicating the effect mode set by the mode setting means is notified. According to the game machine AF1, a period for notifying the effect mode and a period for not notifying the effect mode are set, and the effect mode can be notified based on the operation to the operating means even during the period when the effect mode is not notified. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means in order to grasp the effect mode. In this case, if a predetermined operation is not performed on the operating means during the second period, it may be configured to notify another information about the game. For example, the dynamic display of the identification information may be performed. It may be configured to notify the speed and the suggestion information suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means. As a result, during the second period, the game information desired by the player can be selected based on the operation of the player on the operating means.

<Characteristic AG group> (Step-up of button vibrator)
An operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, a vibration means that can vibrate the operation means, and a vibration means thereof. The vibration amount can be changed by the vibration amount variable means capable of changing the vibration amount for vibrating the operation means to different vibration amounts, and the vibration amount variable means can be changed based on the discrimination result of the operation discrimination means. It is characterized by having a period setting means for setting a possible variable period, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable period is set by the period setting means. Game machine AG1. According to the game machine AG1, since the suggestion effect suggesting that the vibration amount of the operating means is variable is executed, the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

<Characteristic AH group> (The color of the button informs the speed of symbol fluctuation)
It is dynamically displayed by the discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display execution means. A privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the above-mentioned identification state being stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation being performed on the operation means. It has an operation discriminating means capable of discriminating, an operation effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the discriminating result of the operation discriminating means, and a mode variable means capable of varying the mode of the operating means. The mode-variable means is the mode when the dynamic display speed of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution means is changed from a first speed to a second speed slower than the first speed. AH1 is a game machine characterized in that the speed is variable. According to the game machine AH1, the dynamic display speed of the identification information can be grasped depending on the mode of the operating means.

<Characteristic AI group> (Background changes depending on the combination of stop symbols)
The discrimination means that executes a predetermined discrimination, the dynamic display execution means that causes the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means for a predetermined period, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means are specific discrimination results. In the case of, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result, the identification information is a predetermined display different from the specific display mode. In a gaming machine having a stop display means for displaying a stop in a display mode and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the stop display means. The stop display means can stop and display a plurality of display modes as the predetermined display mode, and the effect mode is changed based on the predetermined display mode stopped and displayed by the stop display means. The gaming machine AI1 is characterized by having a variable means and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means. According to the game machine A11, even if the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined identification information, the display mode can be closely watched. In this case, when the player stops and displays the identification information in a predetermined stop display mode, the stop display mode may be selected. Specifically, it may be configured so that the player can select one stop display mode from a plurality of stop display modes by operating an operable operating means.

<Characteristic AJ group> (Prevention of leading by preparatory drive for accessory movement)
A display means for executing a predetermined effect display, an effect display control means for causing the display means to execute the effect display based on a predetermined effect scenario, a movable means for executing a predetermined effect operation, and the predetermined effect. The movable means has an effect operation control means for causing the movable means to execute the effect operation based on the effect scenario, and the effect scenario setting means capable of setting one effect scenario from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario. The movable means is configured to be movable from at least the first position to a second position different from the first position, and is prepared to move the movable means to the initial position of the effect operation. The preparatory movement control means has a feasible preparatory movement control means, and the preparatory movement control means executes the preparatory movement before the effect display is executed by the effect display control means based on the effect scenario. A game machine AJ1 characterized by this. According to the game machine AJ1, by performing the preparatory movement in advance, it is possible to surely execute the production based on the production scenario. Further, since the preparatory movement control is performed separately from the production operation based on the production scenario, the preparatory movement can be performed regardless of whether the production operation is executed or not. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the effect operation is executed even if the movable means is preparatory and movable.

<Characteristic AK group> (Replace the look-ahead result according to the operating state of the accessory)
An acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of acquisition conditions, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means. In a display means that can be displayed and a game machine in which a privilege is given when the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific display mode, the information acquired by the acquisition means is at least the said with respect to the information. Until the determination is executed, the storage means that can store up to the first predetermined number and the information stored in the storage means until the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information is started. A pre-determination means capable of pre-determining, an effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode of a specific effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, and the effect set by the effect mode setting means. The specific effect executing means capable of executing the specific effect corresponding to the embodiment at a predetermined timing, and the specific effect executing means when a specific condition is satisfied at the timing when the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect. As the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the above, the effect mode replacement means for setting a replacement effect mode different from the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means is provided. Game machine AK1 to play. According to the game machine AK1, since the effect mode set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means can be replaced with the replacement effect mode, the effect according to the situation can be executed and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. In this case, as the effect mode that can be set by the effect mode setting means, the movable mode of the movable means that can move a predetermined range is used, and the effect mode is changed by the effect mode changing means based on the position information of the movable means. It is good to configure it so that it can be replaced. Specifically, when the position information of the movable means acquires the position where it is difficult to execute the movable mode, for example, the position information indicating a position different from the initial position of the movable mode, the movable means is used by the effect mode changing means. It is preferable to configure the effect mode that is not used, for example, the effect mode that uses only the display means as the replacement effect mode. Further, by providing a movable control means for moving the above-mentioned movable means based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, and by using the above-mentioned technical idea for the game machine having enhanced effect, the effect mode can be changed. The effect is more pronounced in the means.

<Characteristic AL group> (During the demo, the setting timing of the operation validity period is different depending on the game state)
The identification means for executing a predetermined determination, the dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means for a predetermined period, and the identification by the dynamic display execution means. A first game state in which a first period is easily set as a dynamic display period in which information is dynamically displayed, and a second game state in which a second period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than the first period, is easily set. , And a standby state for setting a standby state when a predetermined standby condition is satisfied in a state where the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means is not executed. A predetermined state setting means, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and a predetermined result based on the determination result of the operation determination means. It has an operation effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period that can be effectively determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. In the case where the second period is set by the game state setting means, the valid period setting means sets the valid period after the standby state is set, as compared with the case where the first period is set. The gaming machine AL1 is characterized in that the start timing of the valid period is set so that the period until the setting is long. According to the game machine AL1, since the setting timing of the operation validity period for effectively determining the operation to the operation means can be changed according to the set game state, the operation is inadvertently executed. Can be suppressed. Further, when the notification means for notifying the player that the operation valid period has been set is provided, it is possible to prevent the notification from being frequently performed by the notification means. In addition, while the second game state is set, it is preferable to configure the discriminating means so that the discriminant can be easily executed. As a result, the second gaming state can be set to a more advantageous gaming state than the first gaming state. In this case, even if the standby state is set during the second game state, the standby state can be terminated in a short period of time.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine γ1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the above, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
An operation determining means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means,
An effect mode variable means that changes the effect mode based on the determination result of the operation determination means,
An effect executing means for executing an effect according to the effect mode changed by the effect mode variable means,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the variable timing at which the effect mode is changed by the effect mode variable means satisfies a specific condition.

Images